Mechanical Engineering - Course Curriculum

1
INTRODUCTION TO THE FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

Historical Background
The Faculty of Engineering was established by a Royal Decree issued by His Majesty King
Khaled Bin Abdulaziz on 6th Dhul Hijja 1394H (January 9th, 1975). Students started their
studies in the academic year 1395/1396 (1975/1976) in six departments namely, Civil
Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Electrical Engineering, Industrial Engineering,
Nuclear Engineering and Mining Engineering.
Starting from the academic year 1401/1402H (1981/1982G) several changes were
introduced in the structure of the Faculty of Engineering. In that year the Department of
Chemical Engineering was established as a separate Department which was working as a
division of the Department of Mechanical Engineering from 1394H (1975G) until
1401/1402H (1981/1982G). The University Council, in 1402H (1982G), reorganized the
Department of Mechanical Engineering into three separate departments: Production
Engineering and Mechanical Systems Design, Thermal Engineering and Desalination
Technology and Aeronautical Engineering. Also in the same year, Sanitary Engineering
was introduced as one of the main specializations of the Department of Civil Engineering
and Biomedical Engineering was introduced as one of the main specializations of the
Department of Electrical Engineering. In the year 1407H (1987G), The University Council
approved the change in the name of the Department of Electrical Engineering to the
Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering. Finally in 1410H (1990G), the
University Council decided to change the name of the Department of Chemical
Engineering to the Department of Chemical and Materials Engineering.
The Faculty of Engineering at King Abdulaziz University is unique in certain respects. It is
the only faculty in the Kingdom that has departments offering programs in Biomedical
Engineering, Nuclear Engineering and Aeronautical Engineering.
Vision and mission of the Faculty of Engineering
The vision of the Faculty of Engineering at King Abdulaziz University is as follows:
To pioneer and innovate in Engineering sciences and their applications.
The mission of the Faculty of Engineering is as follows:
To prepare distinguished engineers and to pioneer in conducting research and studies
and in transferring knowledge and technology, all for ultimately serving and developing
the society.
Guiding Principles and Core Values
All the activities of the Faculty are guided by the following principles and core values
which are deeply rooted in our Islamic and cultural heritage:
Pioneering (innovation, creativity, distinction)
Quality (continuous improvement and development toward perfection)
Professional ethics
Team work
Belonging and loyalty.
2

Qualities of Engineering Graduates
The Faculty of Engineering is fully aware of its responsibilities towards its graduates as
depicted in the above mentioned mission statement. In order to support the mission of the
faculty as well as the mission of the university the Faculty is preparing engineering
graduates who possess the following career and professional capabilities which are
implicitly included in the educational objectives of different Engineering Programs:
Perform professionally: exhibit integrity, behave ethically, accept responsibility, take
initiative, and provide leadership.
Demonstrate technical competence: think creatively, search broadly and use state of
the art engineering tools to identify and formulate safe innovative approaches.
Work efficiently: act as an effective team member and use formal and informal
communication skills as well as project management techniques to ensure timely and
within-budget completion of work projects.
Keep commitment: remain business focused, quality oriented, and committed to
personal professional development as well as the sustainable development of the
society.
Outcomes of Students Learning Experience
The study programs in the Faculty of Engineering are designed to give the students a
learning experience to progressively build up a set of skills that help them achieve
educational objectives of their study programs. The Faculty of Engineering has adopted the
following eleven ABET outcomes (i.e. a-k criteria) as general learning outcomes which are
explicitly included in the learning outcomes of all engineering programs in addition to any
other outcomes stipulated by the Department for the achievement of its educational
objectives (stated as criteria l, m and n).
Learning outcomes are considered as statements that describe what students are expected to
know and be able to do by the time of graduation and they relate to the skills, knowledge
and behaviors that students acquire in their matriculation through the engineering program.
It is the responsibility of each engineering program to have one or more processes that
identify, collect, and prepare data to evaluate the achievement of these outcomes by the
time of graduation. Each program must also have one or more processes to interpret the
data and evidences accumulated through the assessment practices to determine the extent to
which the eleven outcomes are being achieved, and to take decisions and actions to
improve the program.
Engineering programs in the Faculty of Engineering provide the students with a learning
experience that permits them to build up the following skills and abilities:
(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering
(b) an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data
(c) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within
realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health
and safety, manufacturability and sustainability
(d) an ability to function on multi-disciplinary teams
(e) an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems
(f) an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility
(g) an ability to communicate effectively
(h) the broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a
global, economic, environmental, and societal context
(i) a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning
(j) a knowledge of contemporary issues
3

(k) an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for
engineering practice.
Academic Accreditation of the Faculty of Engineering Programs
The 12 programs of the Faculty of Engineering at King Abdul Aziz University have gone
over years through the international accreditation process of ABET Inc., previously known
as the Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology. ABET, Inc., which is the
recognized accreditor for college and university programs in applied science, computing,
engineering, and technology in the US, is a federation of 30 professional and technical
societies representing these fields. Among the most respected accreditation organizations in
the U.S., ABET has provided leadership and quality assurance in higher education for over
75 years. ABET currently accredits some 3,100 programs at more than 660 colleges and
universities inside the US and worldwide.
ABET Terminology Used By the Faculty of Engineering
The 12 programs of the faculty of Engineering adopt the following ABET terminology:
Program Educational Objectives (PEOs): broad statements that what graduates are
expected to attain within a few years of graduation. The program must have published
program educational objectives that are consistent with the mission of the institution, the
needs of the programs various constituencies, and these criteria. There must be a
documented and effective process, involving program constituencies, for the periodic
review and revision of these program educational objectives.
Student Outcomes (SOs): Student outcomes describe what students are expected to know
and be able to do by the time of graduation. These relate to the skills, knowledge, and
behaviors that students acquire as they progress through the program. Student outcomes are
outcomes (a) through (k) plus any additional outcomes that may be articulated by the
program. The program must have documented student outcomes that prepare graduates to
attain the program educational objectives.
Course Learning Outcomes/Objectives (CLOs): specific observable (measurable) actions
that the students should be able to perform if they mastered the course materials. ABET
requires specifying how these CLOs are related to the student outcomes and the degree to
which the course will contribute to the achievement of the student outcomes.
Assessment: one or more processes that identify, collect, and prepare data to evaluate the
attainment of student outcomes and program educational objectives. Effective assessment
uses relevant direct, indirect, quantitative and qualitative measures as appropriate to the
objective or outcome being measured. Appropriate sampling methods may be used as part
of an assessment process.
Evaluation: one or more processes for interpreting the data and evidence accumulated
through assessment processes. Evaluation determines the extent to which student outcomes
and program educational objectives are being attained. Evaluation results in decisions and
actions regarding program improvement.
4

ABET Outcomes versus NCAAA Domains of Learning
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation and Assessment (NCAAA) has
been established in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia with responsibility for determining
standards and criteria for academic accreditation and assessment, and accrediting post
secondary institutions and the programs they offer. The Commission is committed to a
strategy of encouraging, supporting, and evaluating the quality assurance processes of post
secondary institutions to ensure that quality of learning and management of institutions are
equivalent to highest international standards. These high standards and levels of
achievement must be widely recognized both within the Kingdom, and elsewhere in the
world.

The domains used in the higher education component of the National Qualifications
Framework for Saudi Arabia are
Knowledge, (the ability to recall and present information),
Cognitive Skills (the ability to apply concepts and principles in thinking and
problem solving),
Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility, (the ability to work effectively in groups,
exercise leadership, and take responsibility for their own independent learning, and
the ethical and moral development that is associated with these abilities), and
Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills (including basic
mathematical and communication skills and ability to use communications
technology).
Psychomotor skills are very important in some fields of study and are considered as
an additional domain where relevant to the program concerned.

Engineering programs in the Faculty of Engineering provide the students with a learning
experience that permits them to build up the skills and abilities according to ABET
criterion 3 as stated earlier. Student outcomes (a) through (k) plus any additional outcomes
that may be articulated by the program must foster attainment of program educational
objectives.The faculty administration has been developping an assessment and evaluation
process that periodically documents and demonstrates the degree to which the student
outcomes are attained. As compared to the 5 domains of learning stipulated by the National
Commission for Academic Accreditation and Assessment (NCAAA), we notice the
following:
1. NCAAA Psychomotor domain is not applicable for Engineering programs
2. All ABET outcomes require a level of learning in the engineering subjects that is
higher than knowledge. A minimum level of learning of application (level 3) in the
6 levels of the cognitive domain of Blooms taxonomy is required.
3. Only basic math and science courses are limited to a knowledge level of learning.
4. Knowledge of discipline-related industrial practices is also required and is normally
satisfied through the summer training activity.
As a result of this discussion the 4 NCAAA domains of learning are mapped in the
outcomes of Engineering Programs as follows:
i. Knowledge
Outcome (1): Knowledge of facts, concepts and theories of Math and basic
sciences.
5

Outcome (2): Knowledge of discipline-related industrial practices and procedures.

ii. Cognitive Skills
Outcome (a): an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and
engineering
Outcome (b): an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze
and interpret data
Outcome (c): an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired
needs within realistic constraints such as ..
Outcome (e): an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems
Outcome (h): the broad education necessary to understand the impact of
engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental, and
societal context.
Outcome (j): a knowledge of contemporary issues
Outcomes (l- m): body of working knowledge specified in the program criteria.

iii. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
Outcome (d): an ability to function on multidisciplinary teams
Outcome (f): an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility
Outcome (i): a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long
learning.

iv. Communication, IT, and Numerical Skills
Outcome (g): an ability to communicate effectively
Outcome (k): an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools
necessary for engineering practice
Outcome (a): an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and
engineering.

To sum up the contribution of each course to the satisfaction of program learning outcomes
is expressed using a table in the following format:
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
knowledge Cognitive Skills
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET and
Additional Program
Outcomes
1 2 a b c e h j m n d f i g k a l
Maximum Attainable
Level of Learning*

*
1: Low level (Remembering & Understanding), 2: Medium (Applying & Analyzing), 3: High (Producing & Evaluating)
Departments and Degree Programs of the Faculty of Engineering
The Faculty consists of the following nine Departments as indicated in the table:
CODE
DEPARTMENT
ARABIC ENGLISH
Aeronautical Engineering AE
Chemical & Material Engineering ChE
Civil Engineering CE
Electrical & Computer Engineering EE
Industrial Engineering IE
6

Nuclear Engineering NE
Mining Engineering MinE
Production Engineering & Mechanical Systems Design MENG
Thermal Engineering & Desalination Technology MEP

The Faculty offers the Bachelors Degree in the following 14 programs (in alphabetical
order):
1. Chemical Engineering.
2. Civil Engineering.
3. Electrical Engineering (Biomedical).
4. Electrical Engineering (Computer).
5. Electrical Engineering (Electrical Power and Machines).
6. Electrical Engineering (Electronics and Communications).
7. Industrial Engineering.
8. Mechanical Engineering (Aeronautical).
9. Mechanical Engineering (Production Engineering and Mechanical Systems Design).
10. Mechanical Engineering (Thermal Engineering and Desalination Technology).
11. Mining Engineering.
12. Nuclear Engineering (Nuclear Power).
13. Nuclear Engineering (Radiation Protection).
14. Nuclear Engineering (Medical Physics).

N.B.: The Chemical and Materials Engineering Department offers only one BS program,
namely Chemical Engineering. In that department the Materials track is applicable only for
the MS program. The Electrical Engineering Department, on the other hand, offers four BS
programs while the Nuclear Engineering Department offers 3 programs.
7

STUDENT SERVICES

Awards
The following awards are available to students in the Faculty of Engineering:
Monthly award: An award of 1000 Saudi Riyal per month is given to every
Saudi BS student and also to every non-Saudi BS student who is on a granted
scholarship.
Distinction award: An award of 1000 Saudi Riyal is granted to every student
who secures an average grade of distinction (A or A+) in two consecutive
semesters. This award serves as an incentive for advanced students to
maintain their high level of achievement.
Books and References Allowance: An amount of 3000 Saudi Riyal is given
to every graduate student once during his regular period of study.
Thesis Allowance: An amount of 3000 Saudi Riyals for the M.Sc. student
and 4000 Saudi Riyals for the PhD student are given to the student to cover
some of the costs incurred in preparation of the thesis.

Housing, Nutrition, and Medical Care
Housing
The University has constructed an ample number of student housing units within or at the
outskirts of the University campus. Two types of housing are available:
Married Student Housing: Available to all married students.
Single Student Housing: Available to all students whose families reside outside
Jeddah (including those who are on scholarships). This type of housing is also
available if a students family circumstances necessitate.

Supervision of the students in these housing units, and the general management of the units
is the responsibility of well-trained and qualified personnel. These supervisors are helped
by assistant supervisors who take over the supervision duty as well as the task of handling
emergencies during evening and night periods. New students are to contact the Deanship
of Students Affairs to obtain their free housing.

Nutrition
The University has a central kitchen that prepares meals to be distributed to a certain
number of dining halls within the housing units or inside the University campus. Meals are
offered to all students at highly subsidized prices.

Medical Care
The university provides free medical treatment for all students at the University Clinic
which is conveniently located near the center of University campus, and has clinics
covering all main medical specialties.

Student Activities
The first article of the basic statutes of King Abdulaziz University has set five main goals
amongst which is: To Promote cultural, sporting, social, and scientific activities. This goal
is to be pursued for the well being of Saudi society in general and for the University in
8

particular. The Deanship of Student Affairs in the University collaborates through various
committees with the various Faculties in supervising the extra-curricular activities, which
aim at achieving the following objectives:
To participate in developing the integrity and balanced personality of the university
students.
To support Islamic education and to direct students to commit themselves to the
Islamic code of conduct.
To develop the talents of the students and improve their capabilities and assist them
in acquiring useful knowledge and experience.
To get the students accustomed to participating in social activities, to develop
brotherly relations among them, and to develop a harmonious relationship based on
mutual respect among themselves and their professors.
To provide students with means of comfort, convenience and assurance.
To educate the students about the roles they have to play in their society and to
enforce in them the feelings of belonging to their country.
In recognition of the importance of student activities and their role in the bringing up of the
youthful students, the university rules dictate that the university Rector should act as the
General Chairperson of the Higher Committee for Student Activities, with the Dean of
Student Affairs acting as his Deputy. The Faculty of Engineering takes care of, and
supports, the student activities, through the following committees with specific purpose
assigned to each of them:

1. Committee for Promotion of Islamic Awareness
This Committee strives to help develop students' understanding of Islamic theology and
law, to enforce practical commitment to the Islamic code of conduct, to strengthen the
association with the glorious Quran through memorization, recitation and mastering the
rules for perfect recitation, to strengthen the Islamic brotherly relations, and to prepare
students to face foreign ideologies. The Committee for Promotion of Islamic Awareness
organizes lectures, meetings and trips, which are usually of an educational nature. The
committee also participates in the activities organized by the General Committee for
Promotion of Islamic Awareness and it also takes part in the central programs arranged by
the Deanship of Student Affairs.

2. Committee for Cultural Activities
This Committee aims at the development and improvement of student talents and potentials
in cultural, artistic and literary fields. It also tries to develop creativity and inventiveness
within students, to enable them to acquire general knowledge, and to lead them to interact
wisely with the different cultures of the world.

The committee organizes lectures, cultural, scientific and literary meetings, trips as well as
scientific and cultural visits. It also takes part in the activities of the University Central
Committee of Cultural Activity, and in the central activities of the Deanship of Student
Affairs. These activities are numerous and diverse and include the following:
Hobby Clubs (e.g. Photography, Theatre, Arabic Calligraphy, Drawing)
Literary Clubs (Poetry, Novels, Short Stories and Plays)
Cultural Competitions, Scientific Research Competitions and Technical hobbies.
Cultural and Artistic Exhibitions
Social Club.
9

3. Committee for Social Activities
This Committee tries to help students develop adaptation, strengthen the relationships
between students and professors, realize proper social life for the youth in the light of
Islamic ethics and principles, bring about a spirit of cooperation, friendship and intimacy,
establish avenues for appropriate and useful entertainment and, finally, to train students to
do and give their best with sincerity, self-denial and appreciation of the public interest.

The committee organizes lectures, meetings and social trips and visits. It participates in
social competitions and arranges get-to-know-each-other parties. It also participates in the
activities of its parent committee as well as in the programs of the Deanship of Student
Affairs.

4. Committee for Athletic Activities
This Committee attempts to spread knowledge about various sports, promote physical
fitness, and facilitate student training and participation in sport competitions. The aim is to
develop perseverance, sport spirit and attitudes, spirit of positive competition, leadership,
organization, and collectivism.

The student sporting activities in the Faculty of Engineering and in the University include,
among others, soccer, basketball, volleyball, handball, tennis, table tennis, horsemanship,
swimming, judo, karate.

The committee participates in sport competitions organized by the University. It also
participates in the activities of its parent committee at the University level as well as in the
activities of the Deanship of Student Affairs. The various teams representing the Faculty
of Engineering normally win distinguished positions in these competitions.

5. Scouting Society
The students of the Faculty of Engineering can participate in the activities of the Scouting
Society of the University. The objectives of this Society include training the students to get
prepared for public service at any time, train them to the ethics of truthfulness, honesty,
preferring others to oneself, obedience, and full adherence to the rulings of Islam. Further
objectives include stressing the brotherly feeling and attitudes among the believers,
establishing the good examples to be followed and strengthening the meaning of manhood,
gallantry and both self-reliance and self-denial.

The society organizes trips, camps, and camping expeditions. It participates in all scouting
activities and competitions organized within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and the Arabian
Gulf States.

6. Equestrian Club
King Abdulaziz University distinguishes itself among all Saudi and Arab Universities in
the great interest it takes in horsemanship and in the great care it directs toward recreating
the Arab heritage associated with it. To serve these ends, the University established a
special club for horsemanship in which all students of the university can take part so as to
get ample training on this popular sport.

Participation in all activities of the committees for student activities is open to all students
of the Faculty of Engineering who desire to do so. Every committee for student activity
consists of one staff member acting as its head or facilitator beside six members including
10

the activity supervisor within the Faculty of Engineering plus five student members who
are elected by the general body of students under the supervision of the Deanship of
Students Affairs. The committee selects one of its members to act as its secretary.

Facilities for Sport Activities at the University
King Abdulaziz University provides several facilities where the students can participate in
individual and team sports. These facilities include:
The soccer (football) stadium: includes a soccer field, a running track, a jumping
domain, and a hall for exertion sports.
The physical-training tent: It includes playgrounds for basketball, volleyball, handball,
table tennis and the flying feather beside facilities for judo, taykondo, and physical
fitness.
The swimming pool.
The horsemanship club.
Playgrounds in the housing units for basketball and tennis.

The Ideal and Outstanding students
Every year the Faculty of Engineering honors one of its students as an ideal or exemplary
student. Criteria of selecting this student include his scholastic achievement as evidenced
by his GPA, which should be no less than 3.75/5.00 or VERY GOOD. They also include
the nature of student participation in the extra-curricular activities, and the rating given to
him by his own department as regards his general behavior, conduct, and commitment.
The University elects its own exemplary student from those of the various Faculties.

In addition to honoring an exemplary student, the Faculty of Engineering nominates four
students as outstanding students. These should have superior or distinguished contributions
in four types of activities: Promotion of Islamic awareness, Cultural, Social, and Athletic.

Alumni Association
Engineers graduated from the Faculty of Engineering at KAU are members of the Alumni
Association. This association is the parent body for keeping graduates in touch with each
other and with the University. The benefits of being a member of the Alumni Association
include newsletters, an alumni directory, ongoing alumni career services, library privileges
and access to the alumni home page on the World Wide Web, invitation to special events
and opportunity to participate in educational enrichment and continuing education.

The Faculty of Engineering Alumni Association is an umbrella organization encompassing
the development of graduated Engineers, both professionally and personally. The
Association promotes excellence in all aspects of its activities to promote communication
among graduates and the community, and to develop a powerful professional network. The
Alumni Association encourages alumni loyalty, involvement, and investment in advancing
the Faculty of Engineering.

Students Advisory Committee (SAC)
In accordance with the directives of the KAU Deans Consultation Committee, a Students
Advisory Committee (SAC) is formed from senior Faculty Administrators as well as
representatives of students from all academic levels. The SAC aims at solving the
students educational problems and difficulties through mutual discussions between the
Senior Faculty Administrators, and student representatives. To achieve this purpose, the
11

SAC is scheduled to hold monthly regular meetings.

The Students Advisory Committee has the following objectives:
Promotion and development of the educational programs in the Faculty.
Addressing students problems and difficulties and helping finding solutions.
Elevating learning capacities of students.
Enhancing academic staff/students relationships.

The SAC is formed of the following members:
The Dean of the Faculty of Engineering, Chairman
Vice-Dean of the Faculty of Engineering Member
Vice-Dean for Post-graduate Students and Research Member
Vice-Dean for Development and Total Quality Management Member
22 students selected from various Departmental levels and different specialization
programs in the Faculty, with one student acting as a coordinator to the Committee.

12

ANCILLARY ACADEMIC UNITS

English Language Unit
The ELC, English Language Center was established at King Abdulaziz University in 1975,
when the university invited the British Council to setup a project to teach English to the
students of the Faculties of Engineering and Medicine. Over the year project developed and
matured and in 1984 the ELC became an independent entity linked to the Faculty of Arts
and Humanities, for administrative and Financial purposes. After the ABET substantial
equivalency for evaluation all the B.Sc. degree programs of the Faculty of Engineering in
2003, the ELC part dealing with teaching of English language to the Engineering students
was transferred to administration of the Faculty of Engineering. It is now functioning as
"English Language Unite" in the Faculty with special program for engineering students
importing effective English language skills.

Academic Affairs and Training Unit

The Academic Affairs and Summer Training Unit (AATU) guides and directs Faculty
students in all affairs related to their educational progress, e.g., registration, addition,
cancellation or determining the equivalence of courses in addition to appointing student
advisors, etc. The AATU provides all necessary information concerning registration,
addition or cancellation of courses to the respective academic advisors at the start of each
semester. Furthermore, the AATU supplies student advisors with an updated record of
student grades. In addition, the AATU acts in cooperation with the various Engineering
Departments in all matters concerning academic or related student activities.
The AATU endeavors to utilize modern techniques to expedite its activities fairly
accurately. Computer programs are developed to regulate various processes for student
registration and student counseling. All information concerning every student in the
Faculty is continually updated and student records are well documented. Computer
programs have been designed to facilitate registration processes, setting time-tables and
regulating student specialization at various Engineering Departments. The Administration
has also designed computer programs to regulate and control student training in
cooperation with external agencies in the country. The Academic Affairs Administration
undertakes the following tasks:
Preparation, Follow-up and Updating Student Files
As students enroll in the Faculty, files are established containing student personal data.
Additional information, e.g., student grades, student attendance records or any other
information concerning the student, is added up to the file during his stay at the Faculty.
Student Counseling and Registration
The AATU handles all routine problems facing new students. Students are directed to ways
and means of registering, deleting or adding courses according to their educational
program. This goes on for about two semesters. Thereafter, students are distributed among
Faculty members for purposes of counseling. The various Departments in the Faculty will
then be totally responsible for the counseling of students until their graduation.
The Faculty and academic staff are guided by the following objectives for student
counseling:
Discovering a student's real potential and capabilities and directing him to a suitable
specialization where he can be very efficient.
Helping the student to understand the goals of university education and enabling
13

him to select a program of study that suits his interests and to follow up that
program.
Ensuring, through close supervision of his academic records, that the student is
continuing in the proper direction and is progressing efficiently towards graduation
in his chosen specialization.
Advising students on proper means of registration at the beginning of each semester
and helping them to prepare their time-tables.
Establishing a cordial relationship between the student and his advisor within the
university tradition for purposes of creating a conducive atmosphere for the student
to improve his productivity in education.
On the other hand, the student is also obliged to undertake the following:
The student has to be aware of all academic programs in the University. He has also
to be aware of University Statutes and Regulations.
He has to set his own objectives in a convincing manner that suits his abilities and
tendencies.
He has to be aware of the ways and means of taking up his own decisions regarding
his academic goals.
He has to be responsible and must project a good impression to all.

Registration, Dropping, Addition and Withdrawal
The Academic Advisor helps the student register in certain courses according to his
program of study. The information is processed through the AATU and the student
obtains his computerized time-table. In accordance with the university regulations and
on approval of the Academic Advisor, a student may delete or add certain courses. The
amended time-table will then be finally approved. Thereafter, the student commences
his study for a specific semester.
Major Areas in the Faculty Departments
Before the preregistration period, a student who has completed 40-50 credit hours of
Faculty core program will consider opting for a specific major. A student looks for a
department to join, the Departments recommend acceptance of students in their
specializations according to availability of opportunities within the Department and the
level of competition among students who want to join the Department. Results of
acceptance are announced after approval by the Faculty Dean and Vice-Dean. Newly
Accepted students in academic departments are assigned to different academic
advisors.
Course Equivalence of Transferred Students
The Faculty receives applications from students who wish to transfer from other
Universities or from Faculties within the University or from Departments within the
Faculty. The Academic and the concerned Affairs Department co-ordinate these
activities of student transfer. Courses studied by those students are evaluated and if
course equivalencies are established the corresponding requirements are waived in
favor of the student.
Examination Time-Table for Core Program
Faculty core program courses are generally taught in various sections. In accordance
with University regulations, the mid-semester and final examinations for such courses
must be held in common. Consequently, the Academic Affairs Administration prepares
and organizes the respective core courses examination time-table and undertakes to
avoid any conflict a student may be subjected to during the examination period. A
student should not be required to take more than two examinations per day.
14

Communications and Contacts
The Academic Affairs Administration acts as a coordinator between students and
Faculty Departments. It represents the first entrance to the Faculty where all student
affairs are facilitated and his valuable time is utilized constructively. Furthermore, the
Administration liaises between the Faculty administration, Registration, and all
Engineering Departments in all matters related to student enrollment, preparation of
time-table, course registration, addition or omission of courses, opening new sections,
closure of sections or enlargement of section capacities. The administration also
specifies graduation requirements in cases of ambiguity and finalizes graduation
procedures. The Administration coordinates with the Deanship of Admission and
Records in all matters related to student interests, e.g., granting letters of introduction,
coordinating student non-curricular activities and recommending outstanding students
academically and those of good behavior.
Announcements
The Academic Affairs Administration handles announcements to students in all matters
related to the academic field as it is the sole channel to do so in the Faculty. The student
is consequently advised to follow up all announcements displayed in the Faculty
premises.

Training Unit
The need for narrow specializations stems from the fact that a graduate from the Faculty is
expected to be well equipped with theoretical and practical knowledge. This will avail the
engineering graduate to a liaison between theoretical and practical solutions to production
and construction problems facing the society.
In accordance with the major educational objectives, the Faculty of Engineering has
adopted a mandatory policy regarding student training. Students will undergo a summer
training period as a pre-requisite for obtaining the B.Sc. degree in any specialization. This
period extend over two to three months duration during the summer vacations. The
Training Unit attempts to avail students with suitable opportunities, otherwise it directs
students to opportunities close to their specializations. The Faculty observes that there will
be no conflict between summer training and course work.

The summer training commences when a student has completed 90 credit hours, grasped
basic engineering fundamentals, and aquired a good background in the English Language.
At the end of his training period, a student submits a training report to be evaluated by the
respective academic departments. The Faculty through its Summer Training Department
arranges summer training opportunities with various establishments (governmental and
private) in the country. Steps taken for such arrangement are as follows:
Submitting students names ready to take up the training, their total GPA and
specialization.
Coordinating with various establishments in the country for training opportunities.
Filing up training application forms with all relevant information, e.g.,
specialization, contact address during summer and telephone number in case of an
emergency, etc. Students are also encouraged to seek training opportunities
through personal contacts but these have to be approved by respective departments
in the Faculty.
Training opportunities are then classified, tabulated and distributed to suit the
student's training needs in view of their prospective specialization.

15

The Cooperative Program Stream
The new study plan entitles a student to obtain the BS degree in Engineering either by the
regular stream or by the co-operative program stream.

The requirements of the two streams are exactly the same, with the sole exception that the
cooperative stream allocates eight units of credit to cooperative work.

To follow the cooperative stream, the student secures the approval of his department to
spend a period of engineering work/ apprenticeship/ practical training within an institution
performing engineering work that is closely related to the students specialty. This period
of cooperative work extends over a summer session and one main semester. It takes place
under the supervision of a faculty member so as to ensure that the student is effectively
combining the academic and the practical real-life aspects of his work study.

The cooperative stream allows the student to acquire practical skill and experience within
his specialty. Moreover, it enjoys the following additional merits:
Combining the academic or theoretical interests with the practical or real-life
experience for the student.
Bringing about more interactions between the university and the external
organizations, and strengthening the relations between the engineering departments
within and outside the university.
Improving the students chances for appropriate employment after graduation, since
it is quite likely for him to get a job offer at the place of his cooperative work.

Engineering Consulting and Professional Development Office
The Engineering Consulting and Professional Development Office (ECPDO) mission is to
build the most effective partnership between the industry and the Faculty of Engineering at
King Abdulaziz University. It is meant to develop research and innovation that benefits
society as a whole and foster regional and national industrial and economic development.
ECPDO will help to develop innovative programs that provide students with hands-on, real
world experience in industry, provide industry with excellent opportunities to advance
research, enhance the universitys state-of-the-art technology, and recruit the engineering
talent of the future. ECPDOs primary objectives are intended to be as follows:
Prepare the engineering students to become young professionals.
Prepare a comprehensive training program to improve the communication skills of
the engineering students.
Prepare engineers sensitive to the environment and the society needs.
Focus on engineering ethics using available economic resources and applying
available regulations.
Expose the students to real-life situations and orient their mentality towards the
needs of the industrial society.
Initiate applied research programs suitable for the undergraduate level to ignite the
creativity and competition between the students.
Initiate an award program to encourage outstanding students to share and implement
their ideas.
Initiate the link between KAU and the industry.
Emphasize the need of applied research programs to solve industrial problems.
Focus on community services and solve community problems at the local and
national levels.
Enhance the chances of KAU graduates finding suitable jobs at respectable national
and international ventures.
16

Establish consulting services for private and government sectors where faculty
members and graduate and undergraduate students work together in professional
teams.
Establish a bank of ideas.
Establish a reward system for participants.

In achieving the above objectives, it is believed that the Faculty of Engineering will be able
to transfer the results of University research to the public by bringing scientists and the
business community together in a relationship of mutual advantage.

Faculty Library
The Faculty Library was established in 1976 with 1000 reference books and 9500
textbooks. Since then, the library has expanded continually and now contains more than
24000 reference books and 80000 textbooks. The library also contains encyclopedias,
government reports, scientific manuals and copies of B.Sc. projects and M.Sc. and
Doctoral theses.

A checkout system is available according to the following rules:
Professors can check out a maximum of 10 books for a four-month period.
Other academic staff can borrow up to five books for a one- month period.
Undergraduate and graduate students can check out 3 and 5 books for a one-month
period respectively.

The library is open from 7:30 a.m. till 2:30 p.m. Information about all technical literature is
documented in the University Computer System.

Technical Arabization Program
In 1979, the Faculty established a Technical Arabization Program to enhance the
educational process. The program includes preparing technical and scientific dictionaries to
help students in their education. So far, 50 projects have been completed and others are
under preparation as follows:
24 projects have been published and distributed.
18 projects are at the press.
8 projects are being reviewed.
6 projects are still under preparation.

List of finished translated or authored books in Arabic
1. Introduction to Engineering
2. Material Science Dictionary
3. Soil Engineering Properties
4. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics
5. Introduction to Production Engineering
6. Engineering Graphics
7. Probabilities and Statistics
8. Engineering Systems for Desalination
9. Dictionary of Production Engineering
10. Islamic Architecture
11. Fundamentals of Heat Transfer
12. Reliability Analysis of Nuclear Desalination Plants
13. Fundamentals of Industrial Engineering
14. Strength of Materials
17

15. Computer Applications in Civil Engineering
16. Energy Sources and Conversion
17. Basics of Material Science
18. Fundamentals of Casting
19. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
20. Engineering Economics
21. Mining Engineering
22. Numerical Models for Solar Systems
23. Introduction to Nuclear Physics
24. Calculus
25. Basics of Mining Engineering

Books in the publication process
1. Introduction to Nuclear Engineering
2. Energy in Environmental Design of Dry Provices
3. Basic Electrical Engineering
4. Basic Analysis of Geotechnical Engineering
5. Dictionary of Aeronautical Engineering
6. Rock Explosions
7. Electronics of Power Systems
8. Fundamentals of Engineering Metrology
9. Applied Finite Element Analysis
10. Aerodynamic Propulsion
11. Internal Combustion Engines
12. Dictionary of Engineering Transportation
13. Analysis of Electrical Power Systems
14. Modern Automatic Control
15. Fundamentals of Machine Elements Design
16. Nuclear Power
17. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics
18. Construction Analysis
19. Basics of Modern Chemistry

Books being reviewed
1. Structural Analysis
2. Introduction to Computer
3. Introduction to Electrical Communications
4. Basics of Engineering Instrumentation
5. Dictionary of Civil Engineering
6. Dictionary of Environmental Design

Books Under Preparation
1. Fundamentals of Chemical Engineering
2. Dictionary of Industrial Engineering Terminology
3. Dictionary of Electrical Engineering
4. Operations Research
5. Problem Solving Methods and Algorithms
6. Dictionary of Geotechnical Engineering

The Educational Computer Unit
The Educational Computer Unit at the Faculty of Engineering provides computational
facilities for the purpose of training students and aiding them in their project and
18

homework assignments.

The Unit supports five Personal Computer labs with more than 90 PCs connected together
through a modern network. Central network services are provided by many servers, two
dedicated file servers using Windows 2000 operating environment, one dedicated print
server and one CD-ROM server with a capacity of 14 CDs (it provides on-line access to
archived libraries and reference materials). Three more servers use Linux and Windows
2000 operating systems to provide automatic configuration of networked workstations via
DHCP, and intranet services like Web, FTP, DNS and connection to the Internet. In
addition, the Faculty provides other computing facilities under the direct supervision of
individual departments.

The Faculty of Engineering recognizes the importance of having a backbone network, with
access to the Internet for advancing the educational and research activities of its staff
members and their students. A modern network was built in the Faculty recently, under the
supervision and management of the Educational Computer Unit. There are several
distribution switches, where each one covers a whole floor. Each switch has a speed of 100
Mbps on each port using the Fast Ethernet technology. Each building has a backbone
switch that aids in connecting the building to the other buildings through fiber optics
cables.

The number of rooms and offices, in the Faculty, that have a network connection is 219
rooms including those that are not in use at present. Adding at least 214 more nodes, which
is the total number of networked PCs in the different labs in the Faculty gives a grand total
of 433 user nodes on the network.

The Faculty of Engineering has a permanent connection to the Internet through a fiber optic
line to the University Computer Center, for a speed up to (10Gbps). This will give every
one, on the Faculty network, access to the web, email and other Internet services.

The Unit provides its computational services 24 hours a day, and maintains 32 lines of
remote access available after office hours, so academic staff can use them to connect to
local servers, the intranet, and the Internet at any time.

Academic Accreditation Unit (AAU)
A Coordination Committee was formed before Accreditation Board of Engineering and
Technology evaluation visit in year 2002. It was chaired by the Dean of the Faculty of
Engineering. The Committee held weekly meetings to coordinate and define policies and to
review progress of the preparation for the ABET visit. A sub-committee was formed and
assigned the task of preparing Volume I of the self-study questionnaire for the whole
engineering Faculty. Individual departmental committees and sub-committees worked on
the preparation of Volume II of the study questionnaire for individual programs. For
instructional purposes, other committees were formed for review the progress of the
Faculty and Department activities.

In September 2003, Faculty of Engineering at KAU earned the substantial equivalency for
its 12 Programs from the ABET organization. The Faculty received full accreditation in
September 2009 based on the new ABET criteria EC 2000. This required substantial work
from Faculty members, administrative leaders, and students. So, as a continuous
improvement, all the previous committees either on the Faculty level or Department level
were reformed. In addition, new committees/units are constituted. One of these units is the
Academic Accreditation Unit (AAU) which was constituted to work closely with Faculty
19

ABET Committee. The main duties and responsibilities of AAU are:

Set all necessary activities at the program and Faculty level.
Identify the deadlines of all necessary activities at the program and Faculty level.
Schedule and organize regular seminars and/or workshops for Faculty members,
administration staff, and students.
Design the common assessment forms.
Assist scientific departments in designing the required assessment forms either the
program or course level
Assist scientific departments in preparing program self-study questionnaire and other
materials required by ABET
Coordinate and follow up the implementation of EC 2000 requirements for Academic
departments and administration units in the College.
Construct an archiving system for Volume I and Volume II for all programs and any
other necessary materials.

Industrial Advisory Board
In order to enhance and regularize the University-Industry cooperation, the Faculty of
Engineering has constituted an Industrial Advisory Board in the year 1423H (2003G). The
board consists of leading personalities from public and private organizations besides senior
faculty members. It is certain that the decisions of the Committee will have positive and
lasting influence on the overall role of the Faculty of Engineering towards the service of
local industry in particular and the community in general. The following objectives are
envisaged for the Committee.

Consolidating the relationship between the Faculty of Engineering and the Public and
Private Sector organizations.
Providing to the Public and Private Sectors an opportunity to recommend changes and
contribute to the development of Facultys educational programs to suit market
manpower needs and professional requirements.
Synchronizing development in academic programs and the number of engineering
graduates according to specialization and market needs.
Assessing and fulfilling the needs of the private sector for training seminars for their
employees, through short courses and seminars.
Increasing cooperation with the private sector in all engineering disciplines for
purposes of promoting scientific research within the Faculty, addressing and solving
real-life problems of the local industry and community.
Increasing cooperation with the Private Sector organizations for all engineering
disciplines for participation in summer training programs for the students as well as to
providing an opportunity for the faculty members to professionalize their experience.

Students Consultation Unit
The Faculty of Engineering established the Students Consultation Unit as a result of the
study conducted among some of the students who faced hardships during their course of
study in the faculty. Some of those students could not cope with the situation and had to
drop from the faculty. Through dialogue with some of such students, the necessity to
establish such a unit was eminent. It is evident that students undergo difficult
circumstances and need some advice to help them find solutions for the challenges they
20

face.

Through the experience of some of our faculty members with such cases, it was found that
individual meetings of the student with the faculty member may well contribute positively
paving the way to successful strategies. This may be explained in light of the privacy the
student gets in such an atmosphere, and due to the parental concern the faculty member
displays. This is particularly demonstrated when the faculty member is a senior one such
that he can employ his expertise in dealing with such circumstances. However, it should be
emphasized that this Unit does not interfere nor create a conflict with the role of the
academic advisors, since the role of the Unit is not registration issues nor course study
plans.

With this background, the idea of establishing this unit came about to be a stage available
to each student for consultation during almost any hour of the day. Thus the vision of the
Unit is: Towards a Successful Student Community who can overcome hardships. The
mission of the Unit is: to help the Faculty of Engineering students to excel scientifically by
developing their personal capabilities and by recognizing the appropriate solutions for the
problems their encounter. A group of distinguished senior faculty members were employed
to be in the consulting team of the Unit. These members were deliberately chosen from
various disciplines to represent most departments in the Faculty of Engineering. Each of
those members devote couple of hours in a fixed weekly schedule to be available to
students for consultation. The most distinguished characteristic of this Unit is that the
personal information about the student will be quite respected in the sense that nobody has
the right to access such information other than the advisor. Therefore, the advising sessions
will be held in the advisers office.

It remains to be emphasized that this Unit is not dedicated directly to academic difficulties.
Its role is to address personal and social aspects. Its goals are:
Developing students personal capabilities.
Helping students in overcoming academic, social and personal difficulties.
Strengthening the relationship between the students and the faculty members.

21

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APPLIED TO ALL ENGINEERING PROGRAMS

Undergraduate Programs
The study in the Faculty of Engineering follows a ten-semester system. This system of
studies caters for;
Concentrating on the courses that must be completed in scheduled time and on the
students ability to understand the courses and interact with his colleagues.
Taking into account the aptitude differences among students. More capable
students can complete their studies earlier.
Giving the student self-confidence by selecting courses that suit his interests within
the program constraints.
Variation of assessment methods, such as homework, quizzes, major exams,
midterm, final test, projects, and various types of assignments.
Maintaining a strong relationship between students and instructors by appointing an
academic advisor upon admission to an engineering department.

ADMISSION
General conditions for admitting a student to the Faculty of Engineering for a bachelors
degree are as follows:
The student must have obtained a recent Secondary School Certificate, or its
equivalent, (not earlier than five years). The University has the right to waive off
this condition for an otherwise acceptable applicant.
The student must be of Saudi nationality. Non-Saudis are treated in accordance
with King Abdulaziz University regulations.
The student must have good behavior and conduct.
The student must be of good health.
Only full-time students are enrolled. An employed prospective student should have
a written permission from his employer allowing him to attend classes on a full-
time basis.
The student must pass the Exam of the National Center for Assessment in Higher
Education (QIYAS) as well as the Competencies Exam of King Abdulaziz
University.
The student should not be registered for another academic degree at KAU or any
another university.

Admission to King Abdulaziz University
Admission is based on a combination of the student score in the General Certificate of
Secondary Education (GCSE), known as THANAWIA, and scores in two standard national
exams organized and administered by the National Center for Assessment in Higher
Education (QIYAS). These two Exams are:
1. General Aptitude Test, known as QUDRAT.
2. Scientific Track Admission Test, known as TAHSEEL.
QUDRAT is designed, similar to the American SAT Reasoning Test, to measure critical
thinking skills that the student needs for academic success in college. TAHSEEL, on the
other hand, is a three-hour MCQ exam that covers the basic concepts of Math, Physics,
Chemistry, Biology, and English Language at the secondary school level.

For the time being, the acceptance of the students into KAU Faculty of Engineering is
based on a weighed sore composed of the three above mentioned Exams as follows:
Weighted Score = 0.6*THANAWIA + 0.15*QUDRAT + 0.25*TAHSEEL
Students admitted to the university are considered as "Students of the General Program"
22

and they attend a prep school for two semesters.

Faculty Engineering Admission Requirements
Admission to the Faculty of Engineering is competitive and selective. Only the top 10% of
the Secondary school graduates have a chance of being admitted into the Faculty each year.
The students are admitted to the Faculty of Engineering after completing successfully all
the requirements of the scientific track of the prep year. The Faculty of Engineering
Council fixes each year the maximum number of the students to be admitted. The Faculty
accepts the highest GPA students on condition that:
1. They obtain at least 80% in Math, Physics and English language courses of the prep
year
2. They accumulate a GPA of 3.5 or better.

Admission to Academic Programs
It is the responsibility of Academic Affairs and Training Unit (AATU) to distribute
students among the programs (specialization majors), taking into consideration their
favored selection, their GPA, and the requirements of each engineering program.
Conditions of specialization for a student are:
Completing at least two semesters.
Complete a minimum of 30 hours at the end of the semester during which he
applies for specialization.
Passing the first and second levels of the English language courses ELCE 101 and
ELCE 102.
Not being a transfer student to the Faculty in the semester during which he applies
for specialization.

Students are allowed to change their specialization majors within the Faculty of
Engineering only once during the whole study period provided that they should not have
completed 50% or more of credit hours in the original specialization the semester during
which they apply for changing specialization.

Transfer from Other Universities
A student may transfer from another university or educational institution to the Faculty of
Engineering, KAU, provided that an academic degree granted by that institution is
equivalent to a KAU degree. Also, the following criteria apply:
The student should have a general grade of 70% or a minimum GPA level of 3.0
out of 5.0, and should not have been dismissed, for disciplinary reasons, from the
institution that he has transferred from.
The student must complete 50% of the credit hours of study required for graduation
at KAU.
A transferred student will be exempted from certain courses required for the BS
degree at KAU, if he has already taken their equivalents at his previous institution.
However, a course taken at the original institution will be considered equivalent to a
course offered at KAU provided (a) the student has passed the former course with a
grade of C or better, (b) the credit hours of the former course are no less than those
of the latter course, and (c) the detailed contents of the two courses are ascertained
to be essentially equivalent by the concerned KAU Department. Courses from
which a transferred student is exempted can be listed in his transcript but will not
contribute to his cumulative GPA at KAU.

23

Transfer of students within KAU
A student may transfer from one faculty to another within the University only once,
if a chance is available. He may do this in accordance with the following admission
terms and conditions:
The student must have a GPA average of not less than 3.0 out of 5.0
The student must complete one academic year before transferring to the Faculty
of Engineering. He must also complete a minimum of 12 technical credit hours
with a cumulative average of not less than C +.
The student must pass at least one course in Mathematics with a grade of not
less than C.
The student must pass at least one course in Physics or Chemistry with a grade
of not less than C.
The intake of transferred applicants depends on the available capacity.
The grades of the courses taken by a student in his previous faculty will be accepted
and considered in his new specialization according to the degree requirements.
Courses that are not transferred will remain in the students record, but will not
count in the cumulative average.

STUDY LOAD AND DURATION
Study Load and Courses
(a) The maximum study load is 18 credit hours per regular semester and 9 credit hours in
the summer session.
(b) The minimum allowable load is 12 credit hours per regular semester.
(c) The registered credit hours are decided according to the following:
A student having a cumulative average of 2.75 or more may register for up to 18
credit hours.
A student who has a cumulative average of less than 2.75 may register for up to
16 credit hours.
As an exception, a student who is expected to graduate may register for up to 24
credit hours, if his cumulative average is equal to or more than 3.75.

Add and Drop
A student, on the approval of his academic advisor, may add one course or more up
to the end of the first week of the semester.
A student, on the approval of his academic advisor, may drop one course or more
up to the end of the fourth week of the semester.
A student can withdraw from the whole semester up to the tenth week of each
semester.
In some exceptional cases and upon recommendation of the Academic Advisor and
approval of the Vice Dean of the Faculty of Engineering, a student may withdraw
from one or more courses. Approval for withdrawal may be granted on condition
that the student has a minimum number of 12 registered credit hours after
withdrawal.

Study Postponement and Discontinuation
A student, during his university study, may apply for a postponement of his studies
(for a reason acceptable to the pertinent Faculty Committee) for a period of not
more than two continuous main semesters (or three separated semesters) and only
after finishing one main semester or more with a cumulative average of not less
than (2.0). If his cumulative average is less than 2.0, his request will be submitted
24

to the University Admission and Registration Committee.
If the student ceases his studies for one semester without submitting an application
for a postponement, his registration will be canceled. The following rules will be
taken into consideration;
If the period of the discontinuation is more than two main semesters and is for
reasons unacceptable to the Admission and Registration Committee, the
student's registration will be canceled. However, he may apply to rejoin the
university as a freshman.
The discontinuation period will not be counted as a part of the period fixed for
the completion of an academic degree.
A freshman who withdraws during his first semester may apply to rejoin the
university as a freshman.

Evaluation
The student evaluation procedure should be in conformity with the teaching policies
of the University, and in line with the nature of the course. The instructor of the
course should hold periodic tests. In addition, a mid-term test is usually given in
the 7
th
week of the main semester and the 4
th
week of the summer semester during
the class periods. A final test should also be held during the last week of each
semester in accordance with the schedule issued by the Admission and Registration
Deanship.
Any student who fails to attend the final test without an acceptable excuse is
assigned a grade of "Fail". However, any student who is absent from the test for a
valid reason may submit his case to the Department Council to decide whether or
not he would be given the grade of Incomplete (IC). The student who is given an
IC has to complete the requirements of the course during the following semester;
otherwise his grade is automatically changed into the grade of Fail (F).
An honors degree is granted to the student who attains a cumulative average of
(4.5) or more, at the time of graduation, provided that he has not failed in any
course taken at the University.

Grade Distribution
The full marks for every course are100, which are typically distributed as follows:
20 Midterm.
40 Final Exam that covers the entire course contents.
40 Semester work such as: verbal and written tests, reports or research work or
additional studies, experimental lab, and weekly or monthly homework.

Instructors could alter this distribution given that the grade of the Final
Exam does not exceed 70% of the total course grades.

Numerical and Symbolic Notation for Grades
The Marks obtained by the student in the course can be recorded as follows:

Range of Marks
Symbol Points
From 95 to 100
From 90 to 94
From 85 to 89
From 80 to 84
From 75 to 79
A
+
A
B
+
B
C
+
5
4.75
4.5
4.0
3.5
25

From 70 to 74
From 65 to 69
From 60 to 64
Less than 60
C

D
+
D

F

3.0
2.5
2.0
1.0

The grade of Incomplete (IC): It is permitted to delay the grade of a course due to
non-completion of its requirements with the permission of the instructor and the
approval of the Department Council. But this delay should be for no more than one
main semester. If this delay lasts for more than one semester, grade will
automatically change into a "Fail" (F) grade.
The grade of In Progress (IP): Some courses need more than one semester to
complete their requirements particularly those including senior design project work
or training. For these courses, the student can postpone his grade for no more than
two further semesters. In this case, the student grade is IP (In Progress).
The grade of Failure (F): The student is permitted to repeat a course in which he
earned an F. The new grade does not cancel the old one. The old grade is kept in
the students transcript and is counted in his GPA.

Continuation of Study
The basis for the continuation of study in the university for the student is to
maintain the grade of "Pass," the equivalent to a cumulative average of 2.0.
The student will be dismissed from the university in the following cases:
If he receives a maximum of three consequent warnings due to his lower
cumulative average (less than 2 out of 5). Upon a recommendation, from the
Faculty Council, the University Council can give a fourth opportunity to the
student who can raise his cumulative average by taking the available courses.
If he does not fulfill the graduation requirements within a maximum period of
one and a half of the program period (i.e. 15 semesters), the University Council
can give an exceptional opportunity to the student to fulfill the graduation
requirements with a maximum period of twice the program period (i.e. 20
semester)..

Regular Attendance
The student must attend at least 75% of the total number of classes. If the student is
absent for more than 25% in any course without an acceptable reason he will be
denied attendance in the remaining classes of this course and its final exam and will
be given the grade of Denial (DN). The student can submit a request to the
Academic Affairs of the Faculty to attend the final exam only if he can supply
documented excuses, given that his absence does not exceed 50% of the course.
Sick leave is only accepted on the basis of a medical report issued by the Medical
Center of the University or one endorsed by it.

26

GENERAL OUTLINE of B.Sc. DEGREE

Development Aspects of the Study Plan
Following the introduction of the prep year in King Abdulaziz University, the Faculty of
Engineering was required to readjust its curriculum to comply with this fundamental
modification. The updated curriculum presented in this document is the result of this
readjustment. It consists of 155 credit units similar to the previous curriculum in spite of the
additional 14 credit units introduced in the prep year as follows:
1. Two additional credit units allocated to the two English language courses (6 credit units
instead of 4 in the previous curriculum)
2. Twelve additional credit units allocated to the following four new courses:

CPIT 100 Computer Skills 3
COMM 101 Communication Skills 3
BIO 110 General Biology I 3
STAT 110 General Statistics I 3

In order to qualify for a B.Sc. degree in Engineering, a student must successfully complete
155 credit units with an overall GPA of 2.75 out of 5 or better while satisfying the curricular
requirements of his program of specialization. Regular track students are also required to
complete one summer training of 10 weeks or in industry under the supervision of a faculty
member. This summer training and 6 credit units of the departmental electives are replaced
by the coop work program of 25 weeks for coop track students. The typical study period is
five years (10 semesters).
Study Plan Framework
The program of study for the Bachelor of Science Degree in Engineering is designed to
provide a strong background in Science, Mathematics, Islamic Studies and Humanities
besides the Engineering courses. The main objective of the program is to develop the
professional proficiency of high caliber associated with personal and cultural maturity of the
students and consistent with the Islamic values and the social ethics of the society.
Industrial training for students is an integral part of the graduation requirements, which is
imparted either as a short spell of summer training program with ten weeks duration (2 credit
units) in the regular track or as a single long spell of training under the co-operative work
program of 26 weeks duration (8 credit units) in the coop track (if applicable). The industrial
training is supervised/evaluated jointly by the Faculty members as well as by the personnel
assigned by the industrial organization. The 8 credit units of the coop program replace the 2
credit units of the summer training and 6 credit units out of the departmental electives.
The 155 credit units required for the B.Sc. degree in each Engineering Program in regular or
coop track are distributed as indicated in following tables illustrated in the figure.
27

Study Plan Framework (Regular Track)
REQUIREMENTS
CREDIT
UNITS
1. Preparatory year 27
2. University Requirements 14
Compulsory 37
3. Faculty requirements
Elective -
Compulsory (Maximum) 69
4. Department requirements
Elective (Minimum) 6
5. Summer training 2
TOTAL 155
Study Plan Framework (Cooperative Track if applicable)
REQUIREMENTS
CREDIT
UNITS
1. Preparatory year 27
2. University requirements 14
Compulsory 37
3. Faculty requirements
Elective -
Compulsory (Maximum) 69
4. Department requirements
Elective (Minimum) -
5. Cooperative training for 6 months 8
TOTAL 155
28

University Requirements
The university requirements consist of the prep year science track requirements and the
general university requirement in Arabic language and Islamic studies as indicated in the
following tables:
Preparatory Year Requirements
Course No Course Title
Credit
Hours
Prerequisites
1 CPIT 100 Computer Skills 3 -
2 COMM 101 Communication Skills 3 -
3 ELCS 101
English Language I (for
Science)
0 -
4 ELCS 102
English Language II (for
Science)
2 -
5
ELCS 103 English Language III (for
Science)
2 -
6
ELCS 104 English Language IV (for
Science)
2 -
7 MATH 110 Calculus I 3 -
8 PHYS 110 General Physics I 3 -
9 CHEM 110 General Chemistry I 3 -
10 BIO 110 General Biology (1) 3 -
11 STAT 110 General Statistics (1) 3 -
Total 27

University Requirements
Credit
Hours
Prerequisites
1 ISLS 101 Islamic Culture (1) 2 ---
2 ISLS 201 Islamic Culture (2) 2 ISLS 101
5
ARAB
101
Arabic Language (1) 3 ---
6
ARAB
201
Arabic Language (2) 3 ARAB 101
Total 14

Faculty Requirements
Faculty requirements consist of 14 courses of a total of 37 credit units distributed as shown
in the table.
Faculty of Engineering Compulsory Courses
Credit
Hours
Prerequisites
1 MENG 102 Engineering Graphics 3 -
2 IE 200 Technical Communication Skills 2 ELCS 102
29

3 EE 201
Structured Computer
Programming
2
CPIT 100, MATH
110
4 IE 201
Introduction to Engineering
Design I
3
ELCS 102,
COMM 101
5 IE 202
Design II
2 IE 200, IE 201
6 PHYS 202 General Physics II 4
PHYS 110, MATH
110
7 MATH 202 Calculus II 3 MATH 110
8 MATH 203 Calculus III 3 MATH 110
9 MATH 204 Differential Equations I 3 MATH 202
10 MATH 205 Series and Vector Calculus 3
MATH 202,
MATH 203
11
EE 251 or
EE 250
Basic Electrical Engineering or
Basic Electrical Circuits
4 PHYS 202
12 IE 255 Engineering Economy 3 MATH 110
13 CHEM 281 General Chemistry Laboratory 1 CHEM 110
14 PHYS 281 General Physics Laboratory 1 PHYS 110
Total 37

Departmental Requirements (80 Cr. Hrs.)
Each department has its own special requirements which are given elsewhere in Bulletin.
Students can refer to their respective Department for detailed course requirements.

Guide Lines for First 4 Semesters for All Engineering Programs
In addition to the common first (Prep.) year, the curriculum assumes a common second
year in which the students cover a large part of the Faculty of Engineering requirements.
The students are assumed to apply for specialization during the second semester of this
second year and join their departments starting from the third year (fifth semester). A plan
prescribed by the faculty council for the first 4 semesters of study as guideline is outlined
in the following tables:
1
st
Year (Preparatory Year)
Course
No.
Course Title
Cr.
Hr.
Course
No.
Course Title
Cr.
Hr.
ELCS 101
English Language I (For
Science)
0 ELCS 103
English Language III (For
Science)
2
ELCS 102
English Language II (For
Science)
2 ELCS 104
English Language IV (For
Science)
2
PHYS 110 General Physics I 3 CHEM 110 General Chemistry I 3
MATH
110
C Ca al lc cu ul lu us s I I 3 STAT 110 General Statistics I 3
CPIT 100 Computer Skills 3 BIO 110 General Biology I 3

COMM
101
Communication Skills 3
Total 11 Total 16
30

2
nd
Year
Course
No.
Course Title
Cr.
Hr.
Course
No.
Course Title
Cr.
Hr.
ARAB 101 Arabic Language (1) 3 ISLS 101 Islamic Culture (1) 2
MENG 102 Engineering Graphics 3 IE 201
Design I
3
IE 200
Technical Communication
Skills
2 PHYS 202 General Physics II 4
EE 201
Structured Computer
Programming
2 MATH 203 Calculus III 3
MATH 202 Calculus II 3 IE 255 Engineering Economy 3
PHYS 281 General Physics Lab 1 CHEM 281 General Chemistry Lab 1
Total 14 Total 16

Designations of Departments
Each course is given 3 numerals preceded by the code of the department offering it. The
following tables provide a key to these codes and numerals, used in the bulletin.

Designations of Codes for Engineering Departments and Courses
Department Code
Aeronautical Engineering AE
Chemical and Materials Engineering ChE
Civil Engineering CE
Electrical and Computer Engineering EE
Industrial Engineering IE
Mining Engineering MinE
Production Engineering and Mechanical Systems MENG
Thermal Engineering and Desalination Technology MEP
Nuclear Engineering NE

Designations of Departments from other KAU Faculties*
Department Code
Accounting ACCT
Arabic Language ARAB
Biochemistry BIOC
Chemistry CHEM
Economics ECON
English Language Unite (Faculty of Engineering) ELC
Environmental Science ENS
Islamic Studies ISLS
Mathematics MATH
Medicine MED
Mineral Resources and Rocks EMR
Physics PHYS
31

Psychology PSY
* The course description of courses offered by other faculties for the engineering students are given in the bulletin under a
separate section after the course description of engineering faculty courses.

Course Numerals
Hundreds Numerals: signify the level of course offering in the program.
First level 100
Second level 200
Third level 300
Fourth level 400
Tens Numerals:
Signify a specific specialization inside the Department.

Unit Numerals:
Signify the relative order of the course within a specialization.

32

ACADEMIC PROGRAMS

33

DEPARTMENT OF
AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
34

FACULTY
Chairman:
Al-Juhany, Khalid A.

Professors:
Al-Bahi, Ali M.

Associate Professors:
Habib, Sami S.
Megahed, Ibrahim E.
Olwi, Ibrahim A.

Assistant Professors:
Al-Juhany , Khalid A.
Al-Qadi, Ibrahim
Bajouda, Abdulrahman
Bourchak, Mostefa
Hafez, Salah M.
Harasani, Wail I.
Kada, Belkacem

Lecturers:
Alharbi, Mohammad
Aly, Maher S.

Engineers
Al-Gahmdi, Khalid S.
Al-Zhrani, Seraj O.

Contact information:
Mail address: P.O. Box 80204 Jeddah, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Chairman:
35

INTRODUCTION
The Aeronautical Engineering Department at King Abdulaziz University was established in
1980 as a branch of the Mechanical Engineering Department to satisfy the needs of the
development plans in the Kingdom in the field of Aviation and Space Technology. The
University Council, in 1982 restructured the Department of Mechanical Engineering into
three separate departments: Production Engineering & Mechanical Systems Design,
Thermal Engineering & Desalination Technology, and Aeronautical Engineering.

The goal of the Aeronautical Engineering Department is to prepare Aeronautical Engineers
capable of assuming their responsibilities in this vital field.
VISION AND MISSION STATEMENTS
The Vision of the Department
Leadership in aerospace education and research
The Mission of the Department
To provide an environment that promotes creativity, stimulates innovation, enhances life-
long learning skills, and professionally serves the society within the Islamic ethical and
context.

This mission is the way to achieve the vision giving rise to a set of core values which are:
1. Dedication to student-centered, outcome-based teaching and learning.
2. Valuing innovation and creative thinking in teaching and assessment
3. Professional integrity and ethical behavior
4. Commitment to quality assurance and continuous improvement
5. Openness with all program constituencies and stakeholders.
6. Acceptance that the aforementioned values are part of the Islamic ethical standards
EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES
The educational program of the Aeronautical Engineering Department at King Abdulaziz
University is preparing its graduates to:
1. Engage in productive career in industry, military, academia, or research, enabled by
their technical competence in mechanical and aeronautical engineering,
2. Advance in responsibility and leadership in public, private, or military sectors in
Saudi Arabia and the Gulf Area, and
3. Demonstrate commitment to personal professional development as well as the
sustainable development of the society.
Aspects of Development
The department of the Aeronautical Engineering has most of the necessary resources
needed to implement the new plan, however, some improvements and extra resources are
needed to increase the ability of the department to accommodate more students considering
the increase in demand for Aeronautical engineers for the expanding industries in the
Kingdom. Future plans should consider the followings:-
1. Modernization and upgrading of existing aerodynamics Labs
2. Modernization and upgrading of existing aerospace structures Lab
3. Modernization and upgrading of existing flight dynamics and control Lab
36

4. Establishment of a new composite materials lab
5. Establishment of a new propulsion lab
6. Recruiting high professionals to operate and maintain laboratory equipment.
One engineers holding master degree specialized in experimental
aerodynamics
One engineer holding master degree specialized in structural mechanics
One engineer holding master degree specialized in flight dynamics and
control
7. Recruiting one additional faculty member specialized in aerospace materials
8. Recruiting one additional faculty member specialized in flight dynamics and
control.
ADMISSION AND GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
Students Admissions into the Aeronautical Engineering Program
The actual policy of the Aeronautical Engineering department is to accept, each semester, a
fixed number of students (normally between 10 and 20) of the highest GPA from those
expressing their interest to join the department.
Graduation Requirements
In order to qualify for a BS degree in Mechanical Engineering (Aeronautical), students
must successfully complete 155 semester credit units with an overall GPA of 2. out of 5
or better. The student has to complete 49 required courses and two elective courses with a
grade of D or better including 10 weeks of Industrial Summer Training and a Capstone
B.Sc. design project as detailed in the AE curriculum requirements described here after.
Graduates' Employment Opportunities
Although a considerable percentage of the graduates join aeronautical entities in the
Kingdom, some of the graduates work as mechanical engineers, as researchers, or join
military and academic fields.
37

PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS AND CURRICULUM
Key to Course Numbers and Department Code
Each course is referred to by an alphabetical code and a three digits number as follows:
1. Aeronautical Engineering Department is referred to by the code AE
2. The hundredth digit refers to the school year
3. The tenth digit refers to specialty within the department as indicated in the table.
4. The ones digit refers to course serial within the same specialty
Key of tenth digit in the codes of AE courses
Tens Digit Specialty
0 Foundation Courses
1 Aerodynamics
2
3 Aerospace Structures and Materials
4
5 Systems and Instruments
6 Flight Mechanics and Control
7 Propulsion
8 Aviation
9 Training, Research, and Special Topics
UnitsRequiredfortheB.Sc.Degree
UnitsrequiredfortheB.Sc.degreeintheDepartmentofAeronauticalEngineering.
Conventional Program
Requirements Cr. Hrs
University Requirements (including the prep year) 41
Faculty Requirements 37
Departmental Requirements (Compulsory) 69
Departmental Requirements (Electives) 6
Summer Training 2
Total 155

Cooperative Program
Coop Program 8
Total 155

38

Department Compulsory Courses
Regular students are required to take 71 credits (2 courses) as indicated in the table.
Course No. Course Title
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
MENG 130 Basic Workshop 2 MENG 102
CE 201 Engineering Mechanics (Statics) 3 PHYS 281, IE 200
MENG 204 Mechanical Engineering Drawings 3 MENG 130
MENG 262 Engineering Mechanics (Dynamics) 3 CE 201
MENG 270 Mechanics of Materials 3 CE 201
AE 300 Engineering Thermo Fluids I 3 MATH 203, PHYS 281
EE 300 Analytical Methods in Engineering 3 MATH 203
AE 302 Engineering Thermo Fluids II 2 AE 300, MATH 205
AE 303 Fundamentals of Aerospace Design 3 AE 300, IE 202, IE 255
MENG 310 Machine Elements Design 3 IE 202, MENG 270
AE 311 Incompressible Flow 3 EE 201, EE 300, AE 303
AE 331 Aerospace Structures I 3 MENG 270, AE 303
AE 333 Flight Vehicle Materials 3 MENG 270, AE 303
AE 362 Flight Dynamics 3 AE 311, MENG 262
AE 371 Propulsion I 3 CHEM 281, AE 302, AE 303
AE 390 Summer Training 2 AE 331, AE 362
MENG 410 Mechanical Design 3 MENG 204, MENG 10
AE 412 Compressible Flow 3 MATH 204, AE 302, AE 311
AE 414 Experimental Aerodynamics 2 STAT 110, AE 412
AE 432 Aerospace Structures II 3 AE 331, AE 333
AE 434 Experimental Structural Mechanics 2 STAT 110, AE 432
AE 436 Aircraft Structural Design 3 AE 432, AE 333
AE 463 Aerospace Control Systems 3 AE 362, EE 251
AE 472 Propulsion II 3 AE371, AE 412
AE 499 Senior Project 4 AE 412, AE 432
Total 71

AE 390 the summer training, 400 hours of on-job training distributed over 10 weeks that
is included in the counting of training units.

Coop students are required to take all of the above mentioned 25 courses except AE 390 which
is replaced by the following course:
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
AE 400 Coop Work Program 8 AE 331, AE 362

39

Department Elective Courses
Regular students select 2 courses (6 credit units) out of those in the table. For coop
students no elective courses are required.
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
AE 402 Thermo fluids Systems Design 3 AE 302
AE 413 Viscous Flow 3 AE 311
AE 415 Hypersonic Aerodynamics 3 AE 412
AE 419 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 AE 412
AE 437 Aircraft Structural Integrity 3 AE 432, AE 333
AE 451 Avionic Systems 3 AE 362, EE 251
AE 452 Basic Aircraft Systems 3 AE 362
AE 457 Data Acquisition & Signal Processing 3 AE 362
AE 461 Performance of Aerospace Vehicles 3 AE 311
AE 465 Aircraft Design 3 AE 362
AE 473 Space Vehicle Propulsion 3 AE 472
AE 481 Air Transport Engineering 3 AE 362
AE 482 Aircraft Maintenance systems 3 STAT 110, AE 362
AE 497 Aeronautical Engineering seminar 1 AE 412, AE 432
AE 498 Special Topics in Aeronautical Eng. 3 AE 412, AE 432
E Any Other Engineering Course 2, 3, or 4 -
UN xxx Any Other University Course 2, 3, or 4 -
Each one theoretical hour calculated as one credit unit
Each two or three practical hour calculated as one credit unit
There is no circumstance for training hour (not counted in credit calculations)

40

A TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
3
rd
Year (Regular & Cooperative)
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MATH 205 Series & Vector Calculus 3 MATH 204 Differential Equations I 3
EE 251 Basic Electrical Engineering 4 EE 300 Analytical Methods in Eng. 3
AE 300
Engineering Thermo Fluids
I
3 MENG 204
Mechanical Engineering
Drawings
3
CE 201
Engineering Mechanics
(Statics)
3 AE 303
Fundamentals of
Aerospace Design
3
(Dynamics)
3
IE 202
Design II
2 MENG 270 Mechanics of Materials 3
Total 17 Total 18

4
th
Year (Regular and Cooperative)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ISLS 201 Islamic Culture (2) 2 ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2
AE 311 Incompressible Flow 3 AE 362 Flight Dynamics 4
AE 333 Flight Vehicle Materials 3 AE 371 Propulsion I 3
MENG 310 Machine Elements Design 3 MENG 410 Mechanical Design 3
AE 331 Aerospace Structures I 3 AE 412 Compressible Flow 3
AE 302 Eng. Thermo Fluids II 2 AE 432 Aerospace Structures II 3
Total 16 Total 18

The student must select Regular or Cooperative track immediately after the eights
semester.
4
th
Year Summer Training (Regular)
AE 390 Summer Training 2 Cr. Hr.

4
th
Year Summer Training (Cooperative)
AE 400 Coop Work Program 8 Cr. Hr.

5
th
Year (Regular)
41

9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2 ARAB 201 Arabic Language (2) 3
AE 472 Propulsion II 3 AE 414
Experimental
Aerodynamics
2
AE 434
Experimental Structural
Mechanics
2 AE 436 Aircraft Structural Design 3
AE 463 Aerospace Control Systems 3 . Elective I 3
AE 499 Senior Project 4 . Elective II 3
Total 14 Total 14

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
AE 499 Senior Project 4 ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2
AE 472 Propulsion II 3

AE 434
Mechanics
2

AE 463
Aerospace Control
Systems
3
ARAB 201 Arabic Language (2) 3
AE 414
Experimental
Aerodynamics
2
AE 436 Aircraft Structural Design 3
Total
4
Total 18

42

COURSE DESCRIPTION

AE 300 Engineering Thermo Fluids I (3:3,1)
Introduction. Pressure and fluid statics. Conservation of mass. Momentum equation. Properties
of pure substances and mixtures. First law of thermodynamics. Specific heats and enthalpy.
Energy equation. Second law of thermodynamics and irreversibility. Thermodynamics and Fluid
Mechanics applications.
Prerequisite: MATH 203, PHYS 281

AE 302 Engineering Thermo Fluids II (2:2,1)
Conservation of energy. Modes of heat transfer. Generalized 1-D heat conduction, thermal
resistance, and unsteady heat conduction. Convection, hydrodynamic and thermal boundary
layers. Convective heat transfer coefficient and dimensionless groups. Correlations for
predicting convective heat transfer coefficient. Heat exchangers. Radiation, black body
radiation, Stefan-Boltzmann law, Grey body radiation, Kirchoff's law for black and grey bodies,
and Radiant interchange between surfaces.
Prerequisite: AE 300, MATH 205

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO. Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Fundamentals of
Aerospace
Design
AE 303 2 3 - 3
Pre-requisites
AE 300, IE 202, IE 255
Fundamentals of aerospace engineering are introduced through hands on design project.
Topics are treated when required in the design process including: history and
configurations of aircraft, design philosophy, mission specifications, weight estimation,
aerodynamics, propulsion, performance, stability and control, structures, design
implementation, and cost estimation. By the end of the course the design teams should
build and test their prototypes and communicate the details of their designs both orally and
in writing.

Faculties and departments requiring this course (if any): None
Textbook:
Steven A. Brandt, Randall J. Stiles, and John J. Bertin, Introduction to
Aeronautics: A design Perspective, AIAA Education Series, AIAA Inc.,
2
nd
edition, Virginia, 2003.
Reference:
Shevell, R. S., Fundamentals of Flight, Prentice Hall, Inc, 2
nd
edition,
1988.

43

Course Learning Objectives:
By the completion of this course the students will be able to:
1. Correctly describe the aerospace design problem with clear objectives that are complete, specific, and
concise including identification of customer needs and transforming them into design requirements.
2. Plan an effective design strategy including a plan of attack, decomposition of work into subtasks,
development of a timetable.
3. Develop several potential solutions and compares them to find the best baseline.
4. Develop solutions that include economic, safety, environmental and other realistic constraints.
5. Integrate fundamental knowledge of aerospace topics and principles into aerospace design problems.
6. Define practical measures of effectiveness and use economic and other constraints to correctly optimize
a baseline design.
7. Evaluate the solution by comparing the performance of the final design to customer demands and
existing products if any.
8. Manage teamwork effectively by integrating different skills and abilities of team members.
9. Write high quality design reports using correct language and terminology, correct technical
information, and professionally prepared graphs and tables.
10. Give clear, informative, and technically correct oral presentations using professionally prepared
visual aids.

Topic Covered During Class:

Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
1. History and configurations of aerospace vehicles 1
2. Operating environment and the standard atmosphere 1
3. Aerospace Design Methodology and introduction of term project 1
4. Mission analysis, baseline configuration, and seizing 1
5. Introduction to aerodynamics, airfoils and wing design 2
6. Drag estimation 1
7. Introduction to propulsion and engine selection 1
8. Performance and constraint analysis 1
9. Stability and control 1
10. Parametric studies, sensitivity analysis, and baseline optimization 1
11. Introduction to structures and structural design 1
12. Design implementation, cost estimation, and analysis of the final product 1
13. Design documentations and communications 1

Class Schedule:
Lectures: two one-hour sessions per week
Design lab: one session of 3 hours per week

Course Contribution to professional Component:
Engineering science: None
Engineering design: 100%

44

Course Relationship to Program Outcomes:

NCAAA Domains of Learning knowledge Cognitive Skills
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET and Additional Program
Outcomes
1 2 a b c e h j i d f g k a
Maximum Attainable Level of
Learning*
2 2 2 3 3

*
1: Low level (knowledge & Comprehension), 2: Medium (Application & Analysis), 3: High (Synthesis &
Evaluation)
45

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Incompressible
Flow
AE 311 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites
EE 201, EE 300, AE 303
Two-dimensional inviscid fluid flow. Stream function and velocity potential. Superposition
of elementary flows. Source panel methods. Thin airfoil theory. Vortex panel methods and
finite wings. Vortex lattice method. Incompressible boundary layer. Aerodynamic Design.

Faculties and departments requiring this course (if any)
None
Textbook:
Class Notes
Reference:
Anderson, John D., Fundamentals of Aerodynamics, McGraw-Hill, 4
th

Edition, 2005.
1. Derive the general governing equations from the fundamental principles.
2. State the assumptions for incompressible potential flow and use them to simplify the general equations.
3. Define vorticity and circulation and distinguish between rotational and irrotational flows.
4. Define and compute stream function, streamlines, potential function, and equipotential lines for a flow
and calculate each, if they exist.
5. State and implement the general approach for the solution of incompressible potential flow.
6. Analyze (i.e., calculate velocities, pressures, stream function, potential function, stagnation points,
streamlines, equipotential lines, circulation around bodies, etc.) the elementary flows (uniform,
source/sink, doublet, vortex) as well as any combination of them (lifting/non-lifting flow over a circular
cylinder, Rankin oval, etc.)
7. Implement the source panel method to compute pressure and velocity on non-lifting surfaces.
8. State Kutta-Joukowski Theorem and use it to compute lift.
9. Explain and apply the Kutta Condition for any sharp edge of a wing (i.e., what it means physically and
how it is enforced mathematically.)
10. State Kelvin's theorem and explain how it is implemented to setup the vortex system of an airfoil.
11. Derive the fundamental equation of Thin Airfoil Theory.
12. Use thin airfoil theory to compute aerodynamic characteristics of airfoils (lift and drag at various angles
of attack, pitching moment about various points, a.c. location, c.p. location, etc.).
13. Describe and implement the vortex panel method to compute aerodynamic characteristics for thick
airfoils.
14. Describe qualitatively and quantitatively both laminar and turbulent boundary layers in terms of their
thickness, velocity profiles and shear stress variation along a surface.
15. Use the Boundary Layer Theory to calculate the skin friction drag, estimate the pressure drag of bodies,
and predict location on the surface where boundary layer separation is likely to occur.
16. Describe the aerodynamic characteristics of airfoils and their impact on airfoil design.
17. Use software packages (JavaFoil) to investigate the effects of thickness and camber on the aerodynamic
characteristics (lift slope, aerodynamic center) of airfoils.
18. Use software packages (JavaFoil) to investigate the effects of airfoil geometrical characteristics and the
angle of attack on the boundary layer behavior and how it is related to changes in lift and drag.
19. Describe the flow field around wings of finite span and explain the generation of induced drag.
20. Describe Prandtl's lifting-line theory and state its limitations.
21. Apply the results from Prandtl's lifting-line theory to calculate the aerodynamic characteristics of
airplane wings.
22. Identify wing aerodynamic parameters and recognize their impact on wing design.
46

23. Describe and implement (through the software package TORNADO) the Vortex Lattice Method to
compute aerodynamic characteristics of wings and wing-tail-canard configurations (including high-lift
device and control surfaces).
24. List several examples of regional, national, and/or global contemporary problems related to
aerodynamics (ex. environmental issues, natural resources and energy conservation, etc.) articulate a
problem/position statement for each, and explain what makes these issues particularly relevant to the
present time.
Identify possible solutions to these problems, as well as any limitations of these solutions.

Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
1. Basic laws 1
2. Potential Flow Theory 4
3. Airfoil and Boundary Layer Theories 4
4. Finite Wing Theory 4
5. Global/Social/Contemporary Problems Related to Aerodynamics 1

Course Schedule:
Lectures: three one-hour sessions per week
Tutorials: one 50 minutes session per week

Course Contribution to Professional Component:
Engineering science: 75%
Engineering design: 25 %


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 2 2 2 2 2

*
Evaluation)
47

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Aerospace
Structures I
AE 331
3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites
MENG 270, AE 303
Aircraft structural details. Review of statics and strength of materials. Properties of sections
(centroids, moments of inertia, etc). Equilibrium of force systems (truss, beam and frame
structures and landing dear). Normal force, Shear force and bending moment diagrams.
General loads on aircraft. Torsion stresses and deflections. Bending stresses and
deflections. Bending stresses. Bending shear stresses (solid and open sections). Shear flow
in closed thin-walled sections. MATLAB & GUI development of structural analysis tools.
Lab experiments. Aircraft wing design and build project.


Textbook:
Bruhn, E.F., Analysis and Design of flight vehicle structure, Jacobs
Publishing, 3
rd
edition, 1975
References:
Curtis, H.D., Fundamentals of Aircraft Structural Analysis, McGraw-
Hill, 1996.
Donaldson, B.C., Analysis of Aircraft Structures, Cambridge University
Press, 2
nd e
dition, 2008.

1. Identify the nature and the composition of aircraft structures in order to know the type of
loads acting on the aircraft.
2. Define the equilibrium of the force systems in different structures (truss, beam, and
frame). Analyse the forces in the landing gear
3. Identify and distinguish between unstable and stable and between determinate and
indeterminate structures
4. Find the internal forces in trusses and reactions by applying equilibrium force systems.
5. Sketch the free body diagrams to find the bending moments and shear forces in beams,
frames, wing and aircraft.
6. Calculate the centroid and second moment of area, find the principle axis and use the
parallel axes theorem.
7. Define the type of loads on aircraft and calculate the inertia loads and load factors
8. Calculate the shear stresses due to torsion for circular , open and thin walled closed
sections
9. Calculate the bending stresses due to bending, find normal stress and neutral axis.
10. Calculate the bending shear stresses for closed, open sections and find the shear center.
11. Calculate the shear flow for thin-walled closed sections
12. Formulate the equilibrium equations and find the strain-displacement, stress-strain
relationships.
13. Outline the aircraft material and its behavior under different loading.

48

Course Topics and their Duration

Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Aircraft materials
2. Review of MENG 270
3. Equilibrium forces system , landing gear
4. Properties of section: centroid, second moment of areaetc
5. General load on aircraft
6. Moments and shear in beams, frames, wing and Fuselage
7. Bending stresses: normal stress and neutral axis
8. Torsion: stress and deflections
a. Circular sections
b. Open thin walled sections
c. Closed thin walled sections
9. Bending shear stress
a. Solid sections
b. Open sections
c. Shear center
10. Shear flow in closed thin walled sections
11. Principle of Theory of Elasticity
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1

Course Schedule:

Engineering Science: 75 %
Design : 25 %


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 2

*
Evaluation)
49

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Flight Vehicle
Materials
AE 333 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites
MENG 270, AE 303
Crystal structures. Imperfections in solids. Requirements from aerospace structural
materials. Design philosophy (safe-life and damage-tolerant design). Aerospace
applications of fracture mechanics. Airframe fatigue. Creep. Oxidation. Composite
materials. Computer applications.

Faculties and departments requiring this course (if any): None.

Textbook:
Dieter, G.E., Engineering Design: A Materials and Processing
Approach, McGraw-Hill, 3
rd
edition, 2000.

Reference:
Bruhn, E.F., Analysis and Design of flight vehicle structure, Jacobs
Publishing, 3
rd
edition, 1975.

1. Describe the behavior of engineering materials, particularly alloys of iron, aluminum,
ceramics, plastics, and composites.
2. Describe criteria for material selection (Ashby chart).
3. Analyze the stress strain curves
4. Explain types of fracture modes.
5. Define airframe design philosophy (i.e. safe life & damage tolerant design
philosophies)
6. Classify imperfections and explain their effects on the properties of materials. Define
the different Non Distractive methods.
7. Calculate the expected life of a material with a given creep rate.
8. Calculate fracture toughness.
9. Apply materials selection and processing for aerospace related design project.
10. Communicate effectively in a team environment, negotiate and resolve conflict,
motivate and coach other team members, organize meetings, delegate work tasks,
develop a team vision, set team goals, and manage resources.
11. Write high quality design reports using correct language and terminology, correct
technical information, and professionally prepared graphs and tables.

50


Course Topics Duration
in weeks
1. Introduction to aircraft materials.
2. Class of solid materials alloys, ceramics, plastics, and composite.
3. Material selection criteria (Ashby chart).
4. Stress strain curves
5. Types of fracture modes.
6. Airframe design philosophy (i.e. safe life & damage tolerant
design philosophies)
7. Imperfections and their effect on the properties of materials.
8. Methods of Non Destructive Testing.
9. Creep and Creep rate
10. Fracture toughness.
11. Materials selection and processing for aerospace related design
project.
1
1
1
1

1
1

1
1
2
2

2

Course Schedule:
Course Contribution to professional Component
Engineering Science: 75%
Engineering Design: 25 %
Relationship to Program Outcomes:

Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2

*
Evaluation)
51

CREDITS COURSE
TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Flight Dynamics AE 362 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites
AE 311, MENG 262
Aircraft static longitudinal stability. Neutral point. Longitudinal control. Center of gravity
limits. Hinge moments. Stick free stability. Stick force. Speed stability. Directional static
stability. Directional control. Roll static stability. Roll control. Unsteady equations of
motion. Small disturbance theory. Stability derivatives. Linearized equations of motion.
Dynamic stability. Reduced-order models. Longitudinal and lateral stability modes.
Flying qualities. Introduction to state feedback and pole placement.
Textbook:
Nelson, Robert C., Flight Stability and Automatic Control, 2
nd
edition,
1998, McGraw-Hill Science.
Reference:
None

1. Define the concepts of static and dynamic stability and distinguish between different modes
of stability.
2. Define the concepts of degrees of freedom for a dynamical system, and classify aircraft
motion variables, forces, moments,
3. Classify control surfaces (primary and secondary surfaces) and define their functions.
4. Derive the contributions of different aircraft components to longitudinal stability and derive
the elevator control power.
5. Determine the stick fixed neutral point and describe the effect of changing the center of
gravity location on the aircraft longitudinal static stability.
6. Compute the stick free lift curve slope, longitudinal static stability derivative, neutral point
& static margin.
7. Define the stick force gradient, state the condition for aircraft speed stability, and explain
the use of trim tabs on the elevator.
8. Estimate the contributions of aircraft components for the directional static stability and
derive the rudder control power.
9. State and describe the conditions of roll static stability and trim, discuss the dihedral, the
wing-fuselage interaction effect, and the sweep effects, and derive expressions for the wing
dihedral derivative and the aileron control power.
10. Define axes systems and transformations, Eulers angles of rotation, orientation matrices
and wind reference frame.
11. Derive aircraft kinematical equations of motion and illustrate longitudinal and lateral-
directional modes
12. Employ Taylor series expansion for multivariable functions to Linearize functions about
equilibrium points and steady reference conditions,
13. State assumptions of the small disturbance theory and the longitudinal/lateral motion
decoupling assumptions.
14. Study the dynamic longitudinal and lateral stabilities and derive their response
characteristics.
15. Define the effect of the effect of stability derivatives, the centre of gravity and mass
distribution on the dynamic stability
16. Define the longitudinal, lateral and directional flying quality requirements
17. Define the characteristics of flight control systems and clarify the relations between flying
quality requirements and design
52

18. State and obtain first and second order linear system characteristics, and infer stability and
transient response from the complex plane root representation.
19. Derive state space models for linear multivariable systems, and reproduce the linear system
characteristic equation from its state space model.
20. Study the controllability and observability of flight control system
21. Construct state space models for longitudinal and lateral dynamics and perform modal
analysis on state space models.
22. Construct reduced state space models for Phugoid mode and short period mode
approximations
23. Construct reduced state space models for Dutch roll mode, spiral mode, and roll mode
approximations and estimate the motion characteristics of each mode
24. Apply linear optimal control theory to aircraft control
25. Design and apply different linear regulators

Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
1. Introduction to Aircraft Stability and Control
2. Longitudinal Static Stability
3. Longitudinal Static Control
4. Lateral-Directional Static Stability and Control
5. Equation of Motion and Stability Derivatives
6. Dynamic Stability and Response Characteristics
7. Classical Design techniques and Flying Qualities
8. Introduction to Modern Control Theory
1
2.5
1
2
2.5
1
2
2
Course Schedule:



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 2 2 2 2 2

*
Evaluation)

53

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Propulsion I AE 371 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites
CHEM 281, AE 302, AE 303
Aircraft engine types. Cycle analysis and performance parameters of jet and gas turbine
engines (ramjet, turbojet, turbofan, and turboshaft). Rocket engines; classification and
performance parameters. Ideal chemical rocket. Cycle analysis and performance
parameters of piston engines. Application to the design of a thermodynamic cycle for an
aircraft engine.

Text Book:
Notes supplied by the instructor.
Reference:
Hill, G.H, and Peterson, C.R, Mechanics and
Thermodynamics of Propulsion, Prentice Hall, 2
nd
edition
1991

1. Apply basic laws of fluid mechanics and thermodynamics on separate different
components of aircraft engines (turbine, compressor, and combustors).
2. Apply the compressible flow laws relevant to turbojet and rocket engines (diffusers and
nozzles)
3. Evaluate the effects of losses in different engine components (viscous, shocks,
incomplete combustion)
4. Calculate the GTE performance parameters (specific thrust and thrust specific fuel
consumption Tsfc) as function of the main design parameters( maximum temperature
T04, engine pressure ratio EPR, flight M and ambient conditions)
5. Appreciate the rationale for development of specific engine configurations, e.g.
turbofans and afterburning.
6. Identify common design constraints and practices for GTE.
7. Explain the performance and design characteristics of rocket engines and predict their
effects on the rocket trajectory.
8. Calculate the major design parameters of solid rocket motors thrust chambers, grains
and nozzles.
9. Recognize the use of piston engines in aircraft propulsion.
10. Explain the performance and design characteristics of piston engines.
11. Calculate the major design parameters of piston engines.
Topics Covered During the Course:
Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Introduction,:
a. Basic laws
b. Chemical Reactions
c. Engine Types
2. Thermodynamics of gas flow.
3. Thermodynamics and performance of jet engines.
4. Thermodynamics and performance of rocket engines.
5. Thermodynamics and performance of piston engines.
6. Design project

1
1
0.5
1.5
5.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
54

Class Schedule:



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
1 3 3 1

*
Evaluation)
55

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Summer
Training
AE 390
- - 400 2
Pre-requisites
AE 331, AE 362
10 weeks of supervised hands-on work experience at a recognized firm in a capacity which
ensures that the student applies his engineering knowledge and acquires professional
experience in his field of study at KAU. The student is required to communicate, clearly
and concisely, training details and gained experience both orally and in writing. The
student is evaluated based on his abilities to perform professionally, demonstrate technical
competence, work efficiently, and to remain business focused, quality oriented, and
committed to personal professional development.

Textbook: None
Reference: None

1. Formulate an objective or mission statement that identify the real problem and describe the expected
outcomes of the training activity.
2. Break-down a work environment into its units and work functions, and describe how these units are
assembled into a whole entity.
3. Describe a professional organizational structure, its size and how it is related to its main products and to
market issues.
4. Exhibit integrity, punctuality, and ethical behavior in engineering practice and relationships.
5. Demonstrate enthusiasm and business focusing.
6. Establish successful relationships with team members, advisors, and clients to understand their needs and
to achieve or exceed agreed-upon quality standards.
7. Maintain focus to complete important tasks on time and with high quality, amidst multiple demands
8. Relate practical work to previous knowledge from basic sciences, engineering fundamentals, and
discipline related courses.
9. Collect and review related data such as technical information, regulations, standards, and operational
experiences from credible literature resources
10. Utilize prior knowledge, independent research, published information, and original ideas in addressing
problems and generating solutions
11. Monitor achievement, identify causes of problems, and revise processes to enhance satisfaction
12. Communicate, clearly and concisely, training details and gained experience, both orally and in writing,
using necessary supporting material, to achieve desired understanding and impact.

56

Course Topics:
Duration
in weeks
1. Acquainting the trainee by the company, its work environment, organizational
structure, products, costumers, engineering units, and quality system.
2. Familiarizing the trainee of one production or design unit with deep
understanding of the work environment, regulations, standards, etc...
3. Allocating the trainee to a project team and allowing him to study and collect
necessary data about the project using internal and external data sources.
4. Working as a team member to execute assigned tasks with the following
objectives:
Apply engineering practices related to his specialization.
Enhance team work skills.
Relate practical work to his engineering knowledge.
Use modern engineering tools such as equipment and computer software.
Use project management techniques.
Complete assigned tasks on time with high quality.
Develop personal communication skills.
2

1

1

6

Class Schedule:
Oral Presentation after submitting a written training report; both evaluated by at
least 2 faculty members

Others: 100%


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
1 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3

*
Evaluation)
57

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Cooperative
Work Program
AE 400 400 - - 8
Pre-requisites
AE 331, AE 362
Extensive 26 weeks of supervised hands-on work experience at a recognized firm in a
capacity which ensures that the student applies his engineering knowledge and acquires
professional experience in his field of study at KAU. The student is required to
communicate, clearly and concisely, training details and gained experience both orally and
in writing. The student is evaluated based on his abilities to perform professionally,
demonstrate technical competence, work efficiently, and to remain business focused,
quality oriented, and committed to personal professional development.


Textbook: None

Reference: None

3. Describe a professional organizational structure, its size and how it is related to its main products and to
market issues.
6. Establish successful relationships with team members, advisors, and clients to understand their needs and
to achieve or exceed agreed-upon quality standards.
problems and generating solutions

58

Topics Covered:
Course Topics:
Duration
in weeks
1. Acquainting the trainee by the company, its work environment, organizational
structure, products, costumers, engineering units and quality system.
2
2
3. Allocating the trainee to a project team and allowing him to study and collect
necessary data about the project using internal and external data sources.
2
objectives:

N.B.: If the assigned project is to be completed in less than 20 weeks, the student
should complete his training period working on several successive projects

20
5. Submitting first Progress Report to his academic supervisor
End of
week #6
6. Submitting second Progress Report to his academic supervisor
End of
week #12
7. Submitting third Progress Report to his academic supervisor
End of
week #18

Class Schedule:
Oral Presentation after submitting a written training report; both evaluated by at least 2
faculty members

Others: 100%


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
1 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3

*
Evaluation)

COURSE TITLE ENGLISH ARABIC CREDITS
59

CODE /NO CODE/NO. Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Thermo fluids
Systems Design
AE 402 402 2
3
- 3

Pre-requisites
AE 302
Analysis, design and optimization of thermo-fluid systems, heating and ventilating
equipments, load calculations, system design, piping networks, heat exchanger analysis and
design, computer-aided design projects.

Faculties and departments requiring this course (if any) None
Textbook:
Mcquiston, Parker and Spitler, Heating Ventilating and Air conditioning, John Wiley &
Sons, 6th Ed., NY, 2005

Reference: ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, 2005 Edition

1. Identify the basic properties of fluids and the various types of fluid flow configurations encountered
in practice.
2. Determine the variation of pressure in a fluid at rest.
3. Apply the mass conservation equation in a flow system.
4. Determine the various types of forces and moments acting on a fluid flow field.
5. Identify pure substance, phases, ideal gas, ideal gas relations, and gas mixtures.
6. Identify intensive/extensive properties and explain the Zeroth law of thermodynamics.
7. Apply the first law of thermodynamics on closed systems and on control volumes undergoing steady
state flow processes.
8. Define and calculate internal energy, enthalpy, specific heat at constant pressure and specific heat at
constant volume.
9. Use the energy equation and the modified Bernoulli equation to determine turbine power output and
pumping power requirements.
10. Explain Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statements of the second law of thermodynamics.
11. Define thermal efficiency, coefficient of performance, entropy, and reversible and irreversible
processes.
12. Apply the second law of thermodynamics on closed systems and on control volumes undergoing
steady state flow processes.
13. Analyze ideal cycles; e.g. Carnot, Rankine, Otto, Diesel, Brayton, and vapor compression cycles.
14. Calculate the forces exerted by a fluid at rest on plane and curved submerged surfaces.
15. Calculate major and minor losses associated with pipe flow systems and determine the pumping
power requirements.

Topic Covered During Class: Duration in Weeks

1. Properties of Air/Water Mixtures.1
2. Basic Processes 1
3. Energy Estimation Methods 1
a. Heating Loads.1
b. Cooling Loads .. 1
4. Comfort and Health (Indoor Air Quality) .. 1
5. Energy Conservation Methods. 1
6. System Design.. 1
a. Air System Design.. 1
b. Water System Design . 1
c. Fan/Pump Sizing 1
60

d. Boilers 1
e. Refrigeration/Cooling Systems .. 1
f. Energy Recovery (heat wheels, heat pipes, air to air heat exchangers ) 1

Course Schedule:
Tutorials: 3-hour session per week



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 3 3 2 2 2
*
Evaluation)

61

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Compressible
Flow
AE 412
3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites MATH 204, AE 302, AE 311
Principles from Thermodynamics. Conservation laws governing compressible flow.
Generalized flow in nozzles. Isentropic flow. Normal shock relations. Nozzle flow with
shock waves. Oblique shock waves and expansion waves. Normal and Mach reflection.
Airfoils in supersonic flow. Shock expansion method. Thin airfoil theory. Nonsteady gas
dynamics. Moving shock waves and expansion waves. Shock tube theory. Aerodynamic
facilities. Design of wind tunnels

Textbook:
John D. Anderson Jr., Modern Compressible Flow with
Historical Perspective, 3
rd
edition, McGraw-Hill, 2004.
References:
H. W. Liepmann and A. Roshko, Elements of
Gasdynamics, Dover Publications, 2002.
Saad, M. A., Compressible Fluid Flow, Prentice Hall, 2
nd

edition, 1993.
Anderson, John D., Fundamentals of Aerodynamics,
McGraw-Hill, 4
th
edition, 2005.
1. To establish the knowledge and understand the need of fluid properties and thermodynamic
properties required to describe ideal compressible fluid flow.
2. Demonstrate the difference between compressible and incompressible flow.
3. Demonstrate the ability to apply conservative laws to fluid mechanics problems including
one dimensional equation for conservative laws in differential form.
4. Illustrate the implication of compressibility to the area-velocity relationship and the need for
a convergent divergent nozzle to obtain supersonic flow
5. Apply isentropic relations to isentropic flow in nozzles.
6. Apply the conservation equations to produce the normal shock wave relations and apply to
flows with shock waves
7. Identify the location of a standing shock in a nozzle and select the conditions required to
obtain a shock free nozzle
8. Explain the formation of a moving shock wave and oblique shock wave
9. Derive the equations of a moving shock wave, a reflected shock wave, and a moving
expansion waves
10. Describe the shock tube, identify the conditions of the shock tube to manipulate the strength
of the shock wave
11. Describe the wall deflection to shock angle relationship and the influence of Mach number
change.
12. Describe the flow and the waves pattern over simple 2-dimensional airfoils under variable
Mach number conditions.
13. Describe fully the flow field produced by normal reflection and qualitatively by Mach
reflection.
62

14. Explain the occurrence of shock bowing (bow shock wave) and shock detachment (detached
shock wave) and describe how they are related.
15. Apply the oblique shock relations, small angle approximation and Prandtl-Meyer function to
obtain approximate and exact solutions to flows with waves.
16. Obtain the lift and the drag coefficient of a simple airfoils in supersonic flow using shock
expansion method and approximate methods of Prandtle-Meyer function and thin airfoil
theory.
17. Describe shock-shock intersection shock-expansion interaction.
18. Design a supersonic nozzle
19. Use modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice by solving problems using
CFD (FLUENT) and software packages such as KASIMIR.
20. Study an example of regional, national, and / or global contemporary problems related to
aerodynamics (ex. environmental issues, natural resources and energy conservation, etc.)
articulate a problem / position statement for each, and explain what makes these issues
particularly relevant to the present time. Identify possible solutions to these problems, as
well as any limitations of these solutions.
21. Demonstrate the ability to engage as a team member in a course capstone design

Topics Covered during training

Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Introduction to Compressible Flow
2. Review of Thermodynamics
3. Integral form of the Conservation Equations
4. One-Dimensional Flow (Normal Shock Wave)
5. Oblique Shocks and Isentropic Waves
6. Lift and Drag in Supersonic Flow
7. Flow Through Nozzles
8. Unsteady One-Dimensional Compressible Flow
9. Supersonic Wind Tunnels
1
1
0.5
1
1.5
2.5
2
1.5
3

Class Schedule:


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3

*
Evaluation)

63

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Viscous Flow AE 413 413 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites AE 311
Review of conservation equations. Simple problems of viscous flow, Flow at high
Reynolds number, Laminar boundary layer, Classical and numerical solutions of laminar
boundary layer, Laminar separation, Transition from laminar to turbulent, Turbulent
boundary layer, Viscous aerodynamic drag, Turbulent shear flows, Wakes and jets,
Computer applications.

Textbooks:
Lecture Notes.
Reference:
White, F.M.; Viscous Fluid Flow . 2
nd
edition, 1991, McGraw Hill Inc.

22. Derive governing equation for fluid flow problems.
23. Develop mathematical model for fluid flow problems.
24. Develop exact solution for range of practical engineering problems.
25. Carry out of magnitude analysis to identify major parameters.
26. Calculate boundary layers and shear stress development under the effect pressure gradient.
27. Identify factors affecting boundary layers transitions, means to identify transition and
techniques to enhance or delay transition
28. Use statistical techniques to develop time-averaged Navier _Stokes equation relevant to
turbulent flows
29. Relate Reynolds stresses with mean velocity gradient, mixing length hypothesis etc.
30. Differentiate between free and wall-bounded shear flows
31. Derive mean flow velocity profile and how to use to
32. Develop formulae between skin friction coefficient and local Reynolds s number with
applications to internal and external flows.

Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
1. Basic laws 1
2. Internal flow, exact and numerical solutions.
4
3. Laminar boundary layer
3
4. Boundary layer transition 1
5. Turbulence , fundamentals
6. Structure of Turbulent Boundary layer
7. Applications
1
2
2

64

Course Schedule:
Lecture: three one-hour sessions per week
Tutorials: one hour session per week
Engineering science: 75 %


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

*
Evaluation)
65

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Experimental
Aerodynamics
AE 414
1 3 - 2
Pre-requisites
STAT 110, AE 412
Experiments that accentuate instruments and experimental procedures. Wind tunnel types.
Wind tunnel calibration. External and internal balance measurements. Pressure distribution
measurement in shear layers. Measurement of laminar and turbulent boundary layers on a
flat plate. Hot wire anemometry. Mach number measurement in supersonic flow.


Textbook:
1. Holman, J.P., Experimental Methods for Engineers, 7
th
Edition, McGraw
Hill, 2001.
Reference:
2. Rae, W.H., Jr. and Pope, A., Low-Speed Wind Tunnel Testing, John
Wiley and Sons, 3
rd
edition, 1999.

1. Define the technical terms used in the course
2. Communicate the details of an experimental procedure clearly and completely
3. Identify different types of wind tunnels and recognize their characteristics
4. Design and select main components of wind tunnels such as contractions, diffusers, screens
etc
5. Design an experiment to study or investigate technical fluid dynamic problem, propose a
solution taking into account safety measures
6. Conduct or simulate an experiment to validate/check the feasibility of the proposed solution
7. Develop a mathematical model or computer simulation to correlate or interpret
experimental results that may be real data from a laboratory experiment or simulated data
given to students by their lecturer
8. List and discuss several possible reasons for deviations between predicted and measured
results from an experiment, choose the most likely reason and justify the choice
9. Demonstrate knowledge of contemporary issues in experimental aerodynamics
10. Work effectively in a team

66

Course Topics and their Duration :
Course Topics:
Duration
in weeks
Flow properties and basic principles
Forces, stresses and the continuum hypothesis, Measurable properties, Flow velocity
and velocity fields, Analytical description of flows, The choice of analytical approach,
Similarity, Patterns of fluid motion
Towards a sound experiment
Planning the experiment, Safety, Qualitative assessment, Record keeping, Scientific
ethics
Fluid mechanical apparatus
Producing the desired flow, Changing the flow area, Flow management, Wind tunnels,
Turbulence and shear generation, Model testing
Measurement of flow pressure
What exactly is pressure, Pressure measuring instrumentation, Wall pressure
measurements, In-flow pressure measurements
Flow Visualization techniques
Overview, Marker techniques, Optical techniques
Measurements of local flow velocity
Pressure impact devices, Thermal anemometer, Measurements of wind velocity
Analysis of Experimental Data
Measurements errors, Accuracy and precision, Resolution, sensitivity and Dynamic
range, Accuracy /Systemic errors of measuring systems
Selected Aerodynamic Experiments
Flow visualization using smoke tunnel, Flow around circular cylinder, Flow around
airfoil, High lift airfoils, Smooth and rough-wall turbulent boundary layer, Calibration
of a normal hot-wire anemometer, Design an experiment to study or investigate
technical fluid, dynamic problem, proposed by team of students and approved by their
lecturer
1

1

1

1

1

1

1

7

Class Schedule:
Lectures: 1 hour per week.
Tutorials: 1 hour per week.
Lab: 2 hours per week



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3

*
Evaluation)

67

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO.
Th. Pr. Tr. TC
H
Hypersonic
Aerodynamics
AE 415 3 1 - 3
Hypersonic shock and expansion wave theories. Local surface inclination methods.
Hypersonic inviscid flow fields. Approximate and exact methods. Hypersonic
boundary layer theory. Hypersonic aerodynamic heating. Entry and heating
problems. Hypersonic viscous interactions. High temperature gas dynamic.
Equilibrium and non-equilibrium flows. Viscous high temperature flows.

Textbooks:
J. D. Anderson, Jr., Hypersonic and High Temperature Gas Dynamics, McGraw Hill, 1989.
Reference:
Class Handout
Students who successfully complete the course will demonstrate the following outcomes
by tests, homework, and written reports:
1. An ability to solve problems involving inviscid hypersonic flows
2. An ability to solve problems involving viscous hypersonic flows.
3. An understanding high temperature effects in hypersonic aerodynamics.
4. An understanding of the design issues for hypersonic vehicles.
5. An ability to use computational tools to evaluate hypersonic flows.
6. A knowledge of hypersonic flow facilities.
7. A knowledge of recent developments in hypersonic aerodynamics with application to aerospace
systems.
68


Course Schedule:


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3

*
Evaluation)
Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
Introduction Characterization of hypersonic flow
Hypersonic shock and expansion wave theories
Local surface inclination methods
Hypersonic boundary layer theory
Hypersonic aerodynamic heating
Hypersonic viscous interactions
Equilibrium and nonequilibrium flows
Experimental facilities
1

2

2

2

2

2

2

1
69

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Computational
Fluid Dynamics
AE 419 2 3 - 3
Introduction to CFD, Navier Stokes Equations, Partial Differential Equations (PDE's)
Basics Of numerical methods for solving PDE's, Finite difference Methods for Hyperbolic,
Parabolic, and Elliptic PDE's, Finite Volume Methods, Numerical Grid Generation,
Applied CFD using Fluent commercial Package.


Textbook
Kalus Hoffmann & Steve T. Chiang, Computational Fluid Dynamics for
Engineers Volume I, EES Publications, 2000..
Reference:
None

1. State the basics steps in a CFD analysis.
2. Derive Navier-Stokes equations from the fundamental principles.
3. State the basics steps in a CFD analysis.
4. Classify partial differential equations (PDEs)
5. Formulate Finite Difference approximations for different types of PDEs
6. Analyze the stability of finite difference approximation.
7. Assess the accuracy of finite difference approximation using benchmark problems.
8. Solve fluid dynamics and heat transfer problems in one and two dimensions for simple
domains.
9. Formulate Finite Volume approximations for different types of PDEs.
10. Use the CFD package FLUENT to study and analyze fluid engineering problems.

Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
1. Introduction
2. Navier-Stokes Equations
3. Finite Difference Methods
4. Finite Volume Methods
5. Fluent
1
1
5
1
6

Class Schedule:
Lecture: two one-hour sessions per week
Tutorial/practical: one 3-hour session per week
70



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 1 2 2 2 2

*
Evaluation)
71

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Aerospace
Structures II
AE 432 3 1 3
Pre-requisites AE 331, AE 333
Introduction to the Theory of Elasticity. Structural instability of columns and thin plates.
Analysis methods (Virtual work and energy and matrix methods including FEM) for stress
and deflection calculations in determinant and indeterminate structures. Thin plate theory.
Composite materials analysis and design. FEA using APAQUS. Lab experiments. Light
aircraft design and build project.

Textbook:
Bruhn, E.F., Analysis and Design of flight vehicle structure,
Jacobs Publishing, 3
rd
edition, 1975
References:
Curtis, H.D., Fundamentals of Aircraft Structural Analysis,
McGraw-Hill, 1996.
Donaldson, B.C., Analysis of Aircraft Structures, Cambridge
University Press, 2
nd
edition, 2008.

1. Calculate the deflections of statically determinate structures.
2. Analyze the statically indeterminate structures to find their internal loads
3. Calculate the deflections of statically indeterminate structures.
4. Derive the stiffness equations of spring structures.
5. Derive the stiffness equations of a structural element.
6. Use the stiffness method to calculate the deflections and internal loads of truss structures
7. Apply the matrix method to find the deflections and internal loads of beams
8. Use the matrix method for structural analysis of frames.
9. Apply the stiffness method to find the deflections and internal loads of thin-walled
structures
10. Calculate the primary buckling loads of columns.
11. Find the buckling loads of thin plates in compression , shear , bending and under combined
systems of loading
12. Predict the local buckling load of a thin-walled column and compare it with the primary
buckling load of the column
13. Calculate the crippling strength of thin-walled columns.
14. Design the stiffened panels to avoid buckling and crippling.
15. Design the tension-filled web beams.
16. Use MATLAB & GUI development of structural analysis tools.
17. Design, build and test structural project to satisfy required needs under realistic constraints.

Topics Covered during Class

Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
Deflection of aircraft structures:
1. Deflections of statically determinate structures.
4

72

2. Load analysis of statically indeterminate structures
3. Deflections of statically indeterminate structures.
Matrix Method of structures analysis
4. Stiffness equations of spring structures.
5. General Stiffness equations of a structural element.
6. Matrix analysis of truss structures
7. Matrix analysis of beams
8. Matrix analysis of frames.
9. Matrix analysis of thin-walled structures.
Structural stability
10. Column primary buckling.
11. Thin plates Buckling
12. Local buckling load of a thin-walled column.
13. Crippling strength of thin-walled columns.
14. Stiffened panels in compression.
15. Tension-field web beams.
Structural Experiments

4

4

2
Class Schedule:



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 2 3 2 2 3

*
Evaluation)
73

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Mechanics
AE 434
3 - 2
Pre-requisites
STAT 110, AE 432
Basic methods in the experimental analysis of aerospace structures. Computerized data
acquisition and analysis. Measurement of stresses, strains, and displacements using strain
gauges. Vibration assessment. Experimental structural design of aircraft components.
Computer simulations and commercial Computer-aided engineering tools. Experimental
assessment of structural damage. Experimental assessment of repaired aircraft components.
Manufacturing of aircraft parts using composite materials. Universal test and CNC
machines. Non destructive Evaluation (NDE) techniques; Photo-Stress and LASER
techniques.

Textbook:
Bruhn, E.F., Analysis and Design of flight vehicle structure,
Jacobs Publishing, 3
rd
edition, 1975
References:
Curtis, H.D., Fundamentals of Aircraft Structural Analysis,
McGraw-Hill, 1996.
Donaldson, B.C., Analysis of Aircraft Structures, Cambridge
University Press, 2
nd
edition, 2008.

1. Identify basic methods in the experimental analysis of aerospace structures.
2. Conduct experiments to measures stresses, strains, and displacements using strain gauges
and computerized data acquisition.
3. Identify vibration assessment techniques.
4. Discuss theory, procedures, and applicability of NDT techniques.
5. Design and manufacture a structural part of an aircraft using composite materials.
6. Design an experiment to assess the structural damage of aircraft components taking into
account safety measures
7. Communicate the details of an experimental procedure clearly and completely.
8. Conduct or simulate an experiment to validate/check the feasibility of proposed structural
repair solutions
9. Use numerical methods and computer-aided engineering tools to perform in-depth aircraft
structural design and analysis.
10. Develop a mathematical model or computer simulation to correlate or interpret
experimental results.
11. List and discuss several possible reasons for deviations between predicted and measured
results from an experiment, choose the most likely reason and justify the choice.
12. Perform a multidisciplinary analysis of aircraft components.
13. Demonstrate knowledge of contemporary issues and advanced techniques in experimental
structural dynamics
14. Work effectively in a team.
15. Prepare a complete design report
74

16. Give clear, informative, and technical oral presentation


Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
1. Basic methods in the experimental analysis of aerospace structures. 1
2. Computer-Aided engineering tools for aircraft structural design. 1
3. Measurement of stresses, strains, and displacements using strain
gauges.
1
4. Vibration assessment. 1
5. Experimental structural design of aircraft components. 2
6. Experimental assessment of repaired aircraft components. 1
7. Manufacturing of aircraft parts using composite materials. 1
8. Universal test and CNC machines. 1
9. Non Destructive Evaluation (NDE) techniques 1
10. Experimental structural analysis/ design team project 2

Class Schedule:
Lectures: 1 hour per week.
Tutorials: 1 hour per week.
Lab: 2 hours per week



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 2 2 2 3 2
*
Evaluation)

75

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLIS
H CODE
/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO.
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Aircraft
Structural
Design
AE 436
3 - 3
Pre-requisites
AE 432, AE 333
Structural design of wing, fuselage, tail-plane, fin, and landing gear. Design of ribs,
frames, stiffeners, webs, and skins. Spar design. Diagonal semi tension field beams.
Optimum design. Computer applications.

Textbook
Moaveni, S. Finite Element Analysis, Theory and Application
with ANSYS, 2
nd
Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2003.
Reference:
Nahas, M.N, Stress Analysis in Aircraft Structures, King
Abdulaziz University Press, 2002.

1. Define limit and ultimate loads on an aircraft.
2. Calculate the inertia forces acting on an aircraft during maneuver.
3. Define the aerodynamic forces acting on an aircraft.
4. Identify all forces acting on a plane in flight.
5. Calculate maneuver and gust load factor.
6. Apply the equations of equilibrium in steady or accelerated flight.
7. Prepare the V-N diagram for a conventional airplane with a specified mission.
Design Finite Element Analysis
8. List the basic steps of the Finite Element (FM) method.
9. Analyze 2Dand 3D trusses using the FE method.
10. Analyze 2D and 3D trusses using ANSYS software.
11. Analyze 2D and 3D beams using the FE method
12. Analyze 2D and 3D beams and frames using ANSYS software.
13. Analyze isotropic flat plates using ANSYS software
14. Analyze curved shells structures using ANSYS software
15. Develop a landing gear structure concept
16. Develop a wing structure concept with skin, spars, ribs and stringers
17. Analyze the suggested structure using ANSYS software and calculate margin of safety
distributions in the different components.
Teamwork and Project Management
18. Work and communicate effectively in a team to solve engineering problems.
Engineering Ethics
19. Identify different scenarios related to structural design that require a decision with an
ethical implication.
Communication
20. Prepare a complete design report.
21. Give clear, informative, and technically correct oral presentations.

76


Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
1. Basic steps of the Finite Element (FE) method
2. 2D and 3D trusses using FE method and ANSYS software
3. 2D and 3D beams using FE method and ANSYS software
4. Frames using ANSYS software
5. Landing structure
6. Isotropic flat plates using ANSYS software
7. Curved shells structures using ANSYS software
8. Wing structure (skin, spars, ribs and stringers)
9. Limit and ultimate loads on an aircraft. Inertia and aerodynamic
forces acting on an aircraft.
10. Maneuver and gust load factors. Equations of equilibrium in steady
and accelerated flight
11. V-N diagram for a conventional airplane with a specified mission
12. Design Project
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3

Course Schedule:
Tutorials: one 3.0 hours session per week



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

*
Evaluation)

77

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLIS
H CODE
/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO.
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Aircraft
Structural
Integrity
AE 437 437
3 - 3
Pre-requisites
AE 432, AE 333
Failure criteria, Slow damage, Fatigue (accumulative damage, crack closure, crack
arrest, load spectrum, residual strength, environmentally assisted fatigue), Discrete
damage, Impact damage (birds and debris), Reliability, Non-destructive testing,
Computer applications

Textbook : T. L. Anderson, Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, 3rd Edition. CRC Press,
2004
Reference: H. L. Edwards and R. Wanhill, Fracture Mechanics, Edward Arnold, 1986

1. explain the importance of flaw analysis in structural design and safety assessments.
2. describe the broad range of applicability of fracture mechanics concepts.
3. use the governing equations of plane linear elasticity and plasticity in Cartesian and polar coordinates,
explain the conditions under which they can be used and how to solve plane problems involving them.
4. derive some of the plane governing equations and solve some simple plane problems.
5. derive crack tip stress, strain and displacement fields.
6. use the crack tip results to understand and determine limitations on various fracture criteria.
7. determine stress intensity factors for several important example cases via superposition and other
methods such as the J-integral.
8. derive estimates of size and shape of crack tip plastic zones in Modes I, II and III.
9. analyze numerous specific problems requiring application of fracture criteria and comment on their
validity.
10. explain what can be learned by application of fracture mechanics in several open-ended problems, and
justify conclusions


78

Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
1. Design and analysis of engineering structures: general failure modes
2. Examples of important fracture mechanics applications (buttressed by myriad
articles from the popular press)
3. Theoretical fracture strength of an unflawed crystalline solid.
4. Stresses near an elliptical hole; Orowan (stress-based) fracture criterion
5. Griffith (energy-based) fracture criterion; energy release rate in linear and nonlinear
elastic materials; stability of crack growth in brittle materials
6. Microscopic fracture mechanisms
7. Charpy impact test; ductile-to-brittle transition temperature phenomenon
8. Introduction to the mechanics of solids (concepts needed for crack analysis)
9. Introduction to Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM): crack tip stress, strain
and displacement fields in linear elastic materials (Modes I, II and III); the stress-
intensity factor, K; Irwin's fracture criterion; design philosophy using K_Ic -
specific examples
10. Stress intensity factors for important geometries; methods for finding K
11. Estimates of crack plastic zones in ductile materials; 3D effects
12. Fracture toughness (K_Ic) testing; experimental results; limitations of LEFM
13. The compliance method; experimental determination of compliance
14. Introduction to fracture mechanics of nonlinear materials: the J-integral; the
Hutchinson-Rice-Rosengren (HRR) crack tip fields; the J_Ic fracture criterion; J_Ic
testing; J-controlled crack growth and the crack growth resistance (JR) curve;
application of J to anisotropic and heterogeneous materials.
15. One-dimensional crack-tip nonlinear zone models
16. Fracture of composites and other advanced materials; mixed-mode fracture
17. Application of fracture mechanics concepts in the analysis of fatigue crack growth

1
1

1
1
1

0.5
0.5
1
1

0.5
0.5
0.5
1
1

0.5
1
1

Course Schedule:



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

*
Evaluation)

79

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Avionic Systems AE 451 451 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites AE 362, EE 251

An introduction to modern avionic systems. Topics include: Terrestrial and Satellite
Navigation Aids, Landing Systems, Surveillance Systems, Air-Ground and Onboard
Communications, and Autopilots.

Textbooks:
Helfrick, A., Principles of Avionics, Avionics Communications Inc., 3
rd

ed., 2004..

References:
None


Course Leaning Objectives:
By completion of the course, the students should be able to:

1. Explain the importance and vitality of the different modern avionic systems to
the safety and performance of modern aircrafts.
2. Discuss the underlying concepts and theory of operation of each avionic system
presented in the course without going into the details of electronic circuits and
systems.
3. Discuss the connection between the operation and functionality of the avionic
systems and the students prior knowledge of the different aerodynamic,
structural, and propulsion aspects of the aircraft whenever appropriate.

80


Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
Introduction to Avionics 1
Terrestrial En Route Navigation 2
Terrestrial Landing Aids 1
Satellite Navigation 1
Surveillance Systems 2
Airborne Communication Systems 2
Onboard Communications 1
Air Data 1
Autopilots 2
Complete Avionic Systems 1

Course Schedule:


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 3 3 3

*
Evaluation)

81

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Basic Aircraft
Systems
AE 452 3 1 - 3
Instrument displays and panels. Air data instruments. Attitude indicating instruments.
Heading indicating instruments. Flight director systems. Power-plant related instruments.
Hydraulic and pneumatic systems.

Textbooks:
Goodwin, A.B.; Fluid Power Systems, McMillan Press Ltd., London,
1976.

References:
Al-Bahi, A.M.; Introduction to Aircraft Instruments and Systems, KAU,
Jeddah, 2006 Course Notes (available from AE Dept.)



1. Identify main elements of aircraft hydraulic systems
2. Analyze basic fluid power components
3. Analyze pressure measurement techniques as related to air data systems
4. Describe attitude indicating instruments
5. Analyze attitude indicating systems
6. Analyze heading indicating systems
7. Demonstrate ability to life-long learning skills
8. Access information from a variety of sources and critically assess their quality, validity, and
accuracy.
9. Analyze new content by breaking it down, comparing, contrasting, and interpreting
information.
10. Prepare correctly formatted and technically correct written documents that contain few, if
any, typographical or grammatical errors.
11. Deliver well-organized oral presentations that maintain audience interest and, make
effective use of visual aids during oral presentations.

82


Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Aircraft hydraulic & pneumatic systems; Main hydraulic elements 1
2. Analysis of hydraulic systems: Basic fluid power components 1
3. Analysis of hydraulic systems: Transmission systems 1
4. Analysis of hydraulic systems: Valve controlled systems, Accumulator systems. 1
5. Analysis of hydraulic systems: Accumulator systems, Block diagrams & signal
flow diagrams.
1
6. Air data systems: Instrument systems and errors, Standard atmosphere, Speed
equations, Total pressure measurement
1
7. Air data systems: Static pressure measurement, Static pressure tubes, using air
data tables.
1
8. Attitude indicating instruments: Introduction, Airworthiness requirements,
Instrument panels and layout, the gyroscope and its properties, free gyro, Steady
precession gyro.
1
9. Attitude indicating instruments: References established by gyroscopes, free
gyroscope limitations, apparent drift & transport wander, Real drift, Control of
drift and transport wander.
1
10. Attitude indicating instruments: Displacement gyroscope limitations, Gimbal
lock, Gimbal error, Gyro horizon.
1
11. Attitude indicating instruments: Gyro Horizon, Erection rate, Erection errors. 1
12. Heading indicating instruments: Direct reading magnetic compass, Terrestial
magnetism, Compass construction, Acceleration and turning errors, Gyro
compass, Compass construction.
1
13. Heading indicating instruments: Gyro compass, Erection devices, Gimbal
errors, Remote indicating compass.
1
14. Presentation of term paper 1

Course Schedule:


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 3 3 3

*
Evaluation)

83

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO.
Th. Pr. Tr. TC
H
Data Acquisition
and Signal
Processing
AE 457 457 2 3 - 3
IntroducingandNavigatingLabView,SoftwareDevelopmentMethodandVirtual
Instrument(VI)implementation,DevelopingModularApplications,DesignTechniquesand
Patterns,DataAcquisitionHardwareandSoftware,SignalConditioningandSignal
Processing,DigitalSignalsandDSP,DigitalFiltersdesign.

Textbooks:
Labview User Manual 2009, National Instruments Corporation.
Reference:
Andreas Antoniou, Digital Signal Processing Signal Systems and Filters, McGraw-Hill.
Copyright 2006.
By the completion of the course Data Acquisition and Signal Processing (DAQ_DSP), the students should be
able to:
1. Describe the principles of instrumentation used in data acquisition and real-time control processes
such as sensors and transducers.
2. Plan experiments according to a proper experimental design and choose the appropriate
experimental design for different circumstances.
3. Understand fundamental graphical programming for instrumentation.
4. Write programs based on an industry-standard graphical programming language.
5. Gain experience in experimental design, technical specifications and selecting proper instruments for
a given application.
6. Define terminologies associated with instrumentation systems and data analysis (e.g., range,
sensitivity, dynamic response, calibration, hysteresis, error, accuracy, precision, data uncertainty,
mean and standard deviation, fitting, etc.)
7. Use data acquisition software and hardware to collect and analyze data from a physical system.
8. Gain experience in developing computerized instrumentation systems for industrial processes using
interface electronics, data acquisition card, serial instruments, etc.
9. Develop special skill and knowledge by training, practice and study of the following fundamentals
and techniques:
9.1 Data Acquisition Hardware and Software (DAQ)
9.2 Signal Conditioning
9.3 Signal Processing
9.4 9.4 Digital Signals and DSP

Course Schedule and Topic Covered During Class:

ACOURSETOPICS
CourseTopics
Duration
84

inweeks
1. NavigatingLabview
2. SoftwareDevelopmentMethodandVirtualInstrument(VI)implementation
3. DevelopingModularApplications
4. DesignTechniquesandPatterns
5. DataAcquisitionHardwareandSoftware
6. SignalConditioningandSignalProcessing
7. DigitalSignalsandDSP
8. DigitalFiltersdesign
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
2
BLABORATORYTOPICS
LabTopics
Durationin
weeks
1. Virtuallab:ProcessDesignandSimulation
2. AnalogI/O:DAQ,Conditioning,andProcessing
3. Virtuallab:DeviceDesignandSimulation
4. DigitalI/O:DAQ,Conditioning,andProcessing
5. DigitalFiltersImplementation
3
3
3
3
2

Course Schedule:
Lab: three hours per week


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 3 2 2 3

*
Evaluation)
85

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Performance of
Aerospace Vehicles
AE 461 461 3 1 - 3
Aircraft performance in steady flight. Straight and level flight. Flight limitations. Drag,
power, and performance curves in terms of thrust and power. Gliding flight. Range and
endurance. Climbing flight. Aircraft performance in accelerated flight. Take off and
landing. Turning flight. Introduction to helicopters performance. Thrust and torque theory.
Rotor flow effects and power requirement. Vertical climb Space flight. Rocket
Performance. Trajectories and escape velocity. Circular & elliptic Orbits.

Textbook:
Anderson, John D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill, 6
th
edition,
2007.
Reference:
Houghton, E.L.& Caruthers, N.B., Aerodynamics for Engineering
students, Edward Arnold, Houghton & P.W. Carpenter, 5
th
edition,
2003.
Layton, D.M., Helicopter Performance, Matrix Publisher, Inc, 1984.

1. Derive the equation of motion for an airplane in straight and level flight.
2. Show the flight limitation for airplane and identify the significance of the equivalent air speed
in level flight.
3. Identify the importance of aircraft aspect ratio, zero lift drag coefficient and Oswald
efficiency on aircraft performance.
4. Solve problems predict the effect of compressible drag on aircraft performance.
5. Derive the conditions of the minimum drag flight and the minimum power flight.
6. Compute and draw the performance curves in terms of thrust and in terms of power.
7. Show the effect of wing loading, thrust loading, zero lift drag coefficient and altitude on the
maximum flight speed.
8. Explain the effect of change of aircraft weight, altitudes and aircraft configurations on
performance curves
9. Solve problems related to aircraft performance in straight and level flight.
10. Derive the equation of motion for airplane in gliding flight.
11. Calculate the rate of glide for small and steep angles of glide.
12. Show the conditions of the maximum horizontal covered distance and the maximum duration.
13. Solve problems related to the performance of aircraft in gliding flight
14. Derive the equation of motion for aircraft in climbing flight.
15. Derive the equation to determine the maximum rate of climb for jet aircraft and for propeller
driven aircraft.
16. Illustrate the performance curves for climbing flight and the climbing hodograph.
17. Derive the correction equations for steep climbing.
18. Solve problems related to aircraft climbing performance.
19. Explain the effects of altitude on aircraft straight and level performance power curves.
20. Define and calculate the aircraft absolute, service and cruise ceilings
21. Compute the time to climb to certain altitudes.
22. Derive and demonstrate the parameters affected to the fasted climb.
23. Discuss the accelerated rate of climb using the energy height techniques.
24. Derive equations for the range and endurance for propeller driven aircraft and jet aircraft.
86

25. Show the conditions for maximum range and endurance for different types of aircraft.
26. Solve problems related to range and endurance of aircraft.
27. Derive other method of solution to performance of aircraft having polar drag equation and
solve related problems.
28. Solve performance problems of aircraft known its wing lift distribution and the equation of
drag is non polar equation.
29. Describe the takeoff and landing flight processes and define the related terms for speeds and
distances.
30. Calculate the ground roll distance for take off and the braked ground run for landing and
estimate the time corresponding to each case
31. Show the parameters affected to take off and landing ground distances.
32. Define the balanced field length.
33. Derive the equation of motion for aircraft in level turning and study the related parameters
affecting turn flight.
34. Solve problems related correctly banked level turning flight.
35. Derive equations of the motion for pull-up and push-down flights.
36. Study the load factor-velocity curve and explain its limitations.
37. Apply momentum theory and blade element theory to study the aerodynamic of helicopter.
38. Predict the power required including flow effects in hover and solve related problems.
39. Derive performance equations of the helicopter vertical climb and solve related problems


Course Schedule:



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 2 1 1 2

*
Evaluation)
Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Straight and Level Flight
2. Gliding Flight
3. Climbing Flight
4. Range and Endurance
5. Other Methods of Solution to Performance Problems
6. Take off and landing Flight
7. Turning Flight
8. Helicopter
3
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
87

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Aerospace Control
Systems
AE 463 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites
AE 362, EE 251
Flight control system elements and configuration, mathematical modeling for control
design, transfer functions, state-space representation, block diagram reduction, first-order,
second-order, and higher-order linear system characteristics, open versus closed-loop
control, stability and performance of linear feedback control systems, Routh-Hurwitz
stability criterion, root-locus technique, frequency response, Bode plot, Nyquist stability
criterion, Nyquist plot, autopilot stability and command augmentation systems,
introduction to modern control theory, linear state feedback, linear quadratic regulators,
servoelasticity and other aerospace control system design considerations.

Textbook:
Norman S. Nise, Control Systems Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 4
th

edition, 2004.
Reference:
None
1. Model first and second-order LTI systems by differential operator method and state space
method and by Laplace transform.
2. Transform linear equations of motion to the Laplace domain and solve differential equations
using Laplace transforms
3. Derive transfer functions and characteristic equations for dynamical systems, state and apply
initial and final value theorems.
4. Convert from state space to transfer function system representation and vice versa.
5. Infer the relation between pole-zero locations and time response, derive the impulse response
function of first-order, second-order and higher order systems.
6. Identify the system type, and obtain impulse, step, ramp, and acceleration response.
7. Find time and frequency domain solutions of state equations.
8. Define the concepts of the transfer function and the block diagram, and obtain block
diagram reductions for open loop systems.
9. Perform closed loop analysis of second order systems, and obtain closed loop transfer
functions and the corresponding time response characteristics.
10. Analyze root loci, design closed loop systems using the magnitude and angle criteria, and
plot the root locus.
11. Recognize the role frequency response techniques in linear system identification, plot Bode
plots for open loop transfer functions, and reconstruct transfer functions from available Bode
plots.
12. Derive and state the Nyquest stability criterion, and plot Nyquist diagram.
13. Obtain stability and gain/phase margins via the Nyquist diagram, and relate the concepts to
robustness.
14. Design closed loop systems via frequency response to meet closed loop stability and
robustness requirements
15. Design aircraft stability augmentation, attitude hold, altitude hold, and Mach hold control
systems
16. Use state space analysis of dynamical systems to assess system controllability and
observability, and design multivariable control systems via pole placement methodology.
88


Course Topics
Duration in
weeks
Review of LTI systems and differential equations solution by Laplace transform 1
Transfer functions, zeros, poles, initial/final value theorems, block diagram reduction 2

System types, response to impulse, step, ramp, and acceleration inputs 1
State space modeling, time and frequency solution to state equations 1
Closed loop response and transfer functions, time response characteristics of first and
second order systems
1

Root locus analysis and design 1
Frequency response, Bode plots, phase and gain margins 1
Nyquest stability criterion, Nyquist diagram, stability robustness via the Nyquist
diagram.
1
Closed loop design by frequency response
MATLAB computer applications on aircraft stability and control augmentations 1
Introduction to modern control theory, controllability, observability, pole placement 2

Course Schedule:



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 2 1 1 2

*
Evaluation)

89

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Aircraft Design AE 465 465 2 3 - 3
Mission specification. Weight estimation. Sensitivity of weight to different parameters.
Estimating of wing area, take off thrust, and lift coefficient. Configuration design. Overall
configuration. Fuselage layouts. Wing plan-form design. High lift devices. Empennage
design. Control surfaces. Landing gear. Propulsion system selection. Design refinement.

Textbook:
Roskam, J., Airplane Design, Parts I through VIII, DARcorporation, 2nd
edition, 2003.
References:
Roskam, J., Airplane Aerodynamics and Performance,
DARcorporation, 3rd reprint, 2000.
Howe, D., Aircraft Conceptual Design Synthesis, Wiley, 2005.
1. Define an appropriate set of mission requirements and sketch the mission profile of an
airplane.
2. Perform a literature search and collect data to show the need for a particular airplane.
3. Identify the critical mission requirements of an airplane.
4. Evaluate the configuration of airplanes and describe the connection between configuration
choices (ex. High wing, tandem landing gear) and mission requirements.
5. Describe the pros and cons of the various conventional aircraft configurations.
6. Describe the pros and cons of unconventional aircraft configuration such as canards, 3-
surface, swept-forward wings, flying wings, tailless, V/STOL, stealth, etc.
7. Select an appropriate configuration for an airplane with a specified mission.
8. Estimate the takeoff weight of an airplane based on the mission requirements using the
weight fraction method.
9. Calculate the takeoff weight sensitivity of an airplane to change of critical parameter such
as L/D, SFC, etc.
10. Construct a matching graph based on specific performance constraints, such as stall speed,
cruise speed, takeoff distance, and landing distance and used it to predict the required
thrust / power and wing area for an airplane.
11. Prepare CAD drawing of the cockpit and fuselage of an airplane based on the specific
payload requirements.
12. Design the wing, empennage and the landing gear of an airplane using tip-over and
ground clearance criteria.
13. Discuses selected systems applied to the design of the airplane.
14. Calculate the direct operating cost for the designed airplane.
15. Communicate effectively in a team environment, negotiate and resolve conflicts, motivate
and coach others in your team, organized and delegate and resolve as needed, develop a
team vision and set team goals, manage resources.
16. Develop a milestone schedule (timeline) for an engineering project.
17. Write high quality design reports (i.e. using correct language and terminology, correct
technical information, and professionally prepared graphs and graphs and tables).
90

18. Give clear information, technically correct oral presentations using professionally
prepared visual aidsDefine an appropriate set of mission requirements and sketch the
mission profile of an airplane.


Course Schedule:

Design Lab: 3 hours session per week


1. Engineering science: 0 %
2. Engineering design: 100 %


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

*
Evaluation)
Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Determination of the takeoff weight, empty weight, and fuel weight from a given
mission specification. Derivation and discussion of takeoff weight sensitivities to
range, endurance, lift-to-drag ratio specific fuel consumption, and empty weight.
2. Derivation and discussion of performance constraints for: stall speed, takeoff and
landing field length, carrier compatibility, climb to altitude, climb with all-engines-
operational and one-engine-out, specific excess power, cruise speed, maximum speed.
The performance constraint plot and selection of takeoff wing landing and takeoff
trust-to-weight ratio. Preliminary method for determining drag polar. Civil and
military regulation.
3. Selection of the overall configuration. Example of airplane design as a non unique
and iterative process. Preliminary design decision making for: cockpit and fuselage,
wing, high lift devices, propulsion system, empennage, landing gear. Preparation of a
preliminary three-view.
4. Detailed discussion of whys and hows of the design of cockpit and fuselage, wing,
high lift devices, propulsion system, empennage, landing gear. Procedures for
analysis, design, and re-design of airplanes so that all mission, airworthiness and
environmental regulations are met.
5. Discussion of the design of systems. Reversible and irreversible fuel systems.
Hydraulic systems. Electrical and Avionics systems. Water and waste system. Anti-
and de-icing system.
6. Airplane cost analysis and prediction. RDTE cost (through certification),
manufacturing cost, operating cost for civil aircraft, indirect operating cost for civil
aircraft, life cycle cost. The design-to-cost problem. Estimation of aircraft net worth.
Design guides for low cost. Factors in airplane program decision making. Typical cost
breakdown for aircraft. Factors in aircraft program decision making.
7. Alternative schools of aircraft design, and why, the master equation.
8. Technique for Order Preference by Similarity to Ideal Solution TOPSIS
2

2

2

2

2

2

1
1
91

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Propulsion II AE 472 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites
AE371, AE 412
Jet engin components. Aerothermodynamics of intakes, combustors and nozzles.
Aerothermo-dynamics of gas turbine engines turbomachines. Axial and centrifugal
compressors and axial turbines. Matching of engine components. Application to the design
of jet engine components.

Textbook:
Hill, G.H, and Peterson, C.R, Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion,
Prentice Hall, 2
nd
edition 1991.
References:
1. Explain the internal mechanism of various fixed GTE components (inlet, combustors, and
nozzles) in order to describe the factors that impose practical limits on performance.
2. Explain conditions required for high performance of those fixed components.
3. Perform experiments to demonstrate the nozzle flow characteristics and analysis of results.
4. Apply Euler equation for turbomachines on axial and centrifugal compressors and axial
turbines.
5. Explain the internal mechanisms of energy transfer and conversion inside turbomachines to
find out sources of losses and methods to reduce these losses for high performance.
6. Relate the required performance to the rotor and stator blade shapes and angles.
7. Explain factors that impose limits on performance.
8. Explain the new trends in GTE designs, turbine blade cooling, new blade materials, use of
composite materials, wide chord blades and their effect on engine performance.
9. Recognize the importance of components matching and its effect on the overall engine
performance.
10. Proposing the optimum design (main shape and dimensions) of high performing GTE
components to meet specified design requirements.


Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Review of AE371
2. Aerothermodynamics of fixed components
a. Inlets
b. Combustion chambers and afterburners
c. Exhaust nozzles
3. Turbomachines
a. Single and multistage axial compressors
b. Centrifugal compressor
c. Axial turbine
4. General engine topics
5. Laboratory
6. Design project
1

1.5
2
1

2
1.5
2
1
1
1
92

Course Schedule:

Engineering science 75 %


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2

*
Evaluation)
93

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Space Vehicle
Propulsion
AE 473 473 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites
AE372, AE 412
Types and performance of rocket vehicles, Chemical rockets, characteristics, propellants
and combustion, expansion in nozzles, thrust chambers, Electrical rocket propulsion,
Advanced propulsion concepts.

Textbook:
Ronald W. Humble, Gary N. Henry, and Wiley J. Larson, Space Propulsion
Analysis and Design, McGraw-Hill, ISBN 978-0077230296, 1995

References:
1. Identify thrust, specific and total impulse, effective exhaust velocity, inert mass fraction.
2. Develop the design process stages from requirements to final choice.
3. Define mission and develop propulsion system requirements.
4. Apply the gas flow thermodynamic and combustion process basic laws.
5. Apply the design process to a liquid rocket propulsion system.
6. Apply the design process to a solid rocket motor.
7. Identify the hybrid rocket propulsion system ballistics.
8. Explain the fundamentals of nuclear and electric rocket systems.
9. Explain new advancements in propulsion systems.
10. Apply the design process to one space propulsion problem.

94


Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Rocket Fundamentals 1
2. The Design Process 1
3. Mission Analysis 1
4. Thermodynamics and Thermochemistry 1
5. Liquid Rocket Propulsion Systems 2
6. Solid Rocket Motors 2
7. Hybrid Rocket Propulsion Systems 1
8. Nuclear and Electric Rocket Propulsion Systems 1
9. Advanced Propulsion Systems 1
10. Case Study 3

Course Schedule:

Engineering science 67 %


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 2 2 1 2

*
Evaluation)
95

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Air Transport
Engineering
AE 481 481 3 1 - 3
Air-worthiness, Fleet planning, Flight safety, Flight operations, Ground operations,
Maintenance tasks, Initial maintenance programs, Quality control.

Textbooks:
Dr. Wail Harasani, Aeronautical Engineering Department, King Abdul Aziz
University, Hand Outs
Reference:
1. Paul Clark, Buying the Big Jets, Fleet Planning for Airlines, Aldershot: Asqate,
2001.
2. Alexander T. Wells, Airport Planning and Management. TaB Books, 1986
3. C. Yau. 1993. An interactive Decision Support system for Airline Planning. IEEE
transaction on systems, man and cybernetics 23: 1617-1625.


1. Describe and define fleet planning, and the importance of fleet selection.
2. Perform a literature search and collect data to show the need for a fleet planning.
3. Define Market Adaptability, Fleet flexibility, Fleet continuity, and Fleet life cycle.
4. Calculate Operating cost, Indirect operating cost, and direct operating cost
5. Analyses Traffic data
6. Identify suitable aircraft candidate
7. Calculate Aircraft performance, and cost efficiency by each stage length
8. Prepare or arrange traffic allocation and scheduling
9. Identify the preferred fleet choice
10. Communicate effectively in a team environment, negotiate and resolve conflicts,
motivate and coach others in your team, organized and delegate and resolve as
needed, develop a team vision and set team goals, manage resources.
11. Develop a milestone schedule (timeline) for an engineering project.

12. Write high quality design reports (i.e. using correct language and terminology,
correct technical information, and professionally prepared graphs and graphs and
tables).
13. Give clear information, technically correct oral presentations using professionally
prepared visual aids.
96


Course Topics:
Duration
in weeks
1. Introduction to airline fleet planning, definition of airline fleet planning. The importance
of aircraft selection, Market Adaptability, Fleet flexibility, Fleet continuity, and Fleet life
cycle.
2
2. Flight operations, Ground operations, Maintenance tasks, Initial maintenance programs 3
3. Economic criteria, Operating cost, Indirect operating cost, Direct operating cost,
Maintenance operating cost, Fuel operating cost, Crew cost, Fuel cost, Airport fees.
3
4. The process of aircraft selection, which involves traffic data analysis, and identify
suitable aircraft candidate.
3
5. The final stage of aircraft selection, which involves, Aircraft performance, cost efficiency
by each stage length, traffic allocation and scheduling, finally identify the preferred fleet
choice.
3

Course Schedule:

Engineering design: None


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 3 3 3 3 3 2

*
Evaluation)

97

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Aircraft
Maintenance
Systems
AE 482 482 3 1 - 3
Pre-requisites STAT 110, AE 362
Introduction. Reliability theory. Life testing. Maintained systems. Integrated logistic
support (ILS). Aircraft handling. Repair station requirements. Quality systems. Inventory
control. Structural repair. Engine maintenance and overhaul. Maintenance of aircraft
systems and instruments.

Textbooks:
Lewis, E.E.; Introduction to Reliability Engineering, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 1987.
Reference:
Al Bahi, A.M.; Introduction to Aircraft Maintenance Engineering and
Practices Part 1 & 2, KAU, Jeddah, 2006, Course notes (available from
AE Dept.)
1. Define reliability and mathematically formulate failures as a stochastic, age related,
random process.
2. Calculate analytic reliability parameters for components as well as redundant and non
redundant systems.
3. Use life testing to estimate reliability parameters of systems and components.
4. Plan optimal preventive/corrective maintenance policies for engineering systems.
5. Plan inspection/repair interval for both revealed and unrevealed failures.
6. Analyze maintainability, availability, and integrated logistic support parameters to ensure
safe and economic life cycle operation of complex systems.
7. Use simple birth-death processes and queuing theory to measure the effectiveness of
maintenance facilities.
8. Analysis inventory control systems including demand models, replenishment, inventory
costs, and control policies.
9. Identify aircraft handling and servicing operations and their ground support equipments.
10. Describe aircraft repair station requirements and associated FAA regulations,
certifications and publications.
11. Discuss inspection fundamentals applied in aircraft maintenance environment.
12. Evaluate non-destructive testing and crack detection techniques used for aircraft and
engine components.
13. Identify load carrying components of the aircraft and their typical structural repair
procedures.
14. Identify maintenance and overhaul policies for aircraft engines including fixed time
between overhauls, on condition maintenance, cold/hot section inspection, and troubleshooting
of malfunctioning.
15. Describe the main elements of aircraft hydraulic systems.
16. Demonstrate ability to achieve objectives of assigned tasks using independent, well
organized, and regularly reported multidisciplinary team management techniques that
integrate, evaluate, and improve different skills of team members.
17. Communicate details of personal and team assignments and express thoughts clearly and
concisely, both orally and in writing, using necessary supporting material, to achieve desired
understanding and impact
18. Perform professionally and ethically by demonstrating punctuality, behaving honestly,
accepting responsibility, taking initiative, and providing leadership.

98


Course Topics:
Duration
in weeks
1. Introduction, Reliability definitions and function, Mortality curve 1
2. Component mortality, Mean time to failure (MTTF), Useful life, Wearout, Early
life, System Mortality.
1
3. Series systems, Parallel systems, Stand-by systems, Multi-mode systems, De-
rating.
1
4. Reliability testing; Parametric and non-parametric methods, Censoring and
acceleration, Maximum likelihood method, Weibull and exponential reliability
papers.
1
5. Maintained systems; Preventive maintenance (P.M.), Idealized P.M. Imperfect
P.M., Replacement policy, Corrective maintenance, Revealed failures, Unrevealed
failures.
1
6. Maintainability, availability and integrated logistic support (ILS); Down time,
Design for maintainability, Life cycle, Maintenance Eng. Analysis (MEA), Level of
spare protection.
1
7. Queuing theory; Queuing characteristics, Poisson Process, Birth-Death process. 1
8. Queuing theory; Queuing models, M/M/1 model, M/M/C model, Machine
interference model, Measures of effectiveness.
1
9. Aircraft handling; Handling operations, Engine starting, Taxiing, Towing,
Jacking, Tying down, Aircraft servicing, Lubrication, Ground support equipment.
1
10. Repair station requirements; FAA regulations, Organization chart, Certification
requirements, Storage, Publications, Cleaning operations.
1
11. Inspection fundamentals; Regular inspections, Special inspections. Crack
detection and Non Destructive Testing (NDT); Visual inspection, Magnetic Particle
Inspection (MPI), Dye Penetrating Inspection (DPI), Radiography, Ultrasonic, Eddy
current.
1
12. Structural repair of load carrying components; Fuselage, Wing, Tail and control
surfaces, Landing gear, Typical structural repairs.
0.5
13. Engine maintenance & overhaul; Maintenance policy, Fixed Time Between
Overhauls (TBO), on condition maintenance, Engine maintenance and repair, Cold
section inspection, hot section inspection (HSI), Engine overhaul, troubleshooting.
1
14. Aircraft hydraulic systems; Main hydraulic elements; Pumps, valves, Pressure
regulators, Pressure reducers, Accumulators, Actuators. Oral presentation of a
selected subject by each student.
0.5
15. Inventory control systems; Demand models, Replenishment, Inventory costs,
Control policies, some inventory models.
1

Course Schedule:



Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
2 3 3 3 3 3 2

*
Evaluation)

99

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Aeronautical Engineering
Seminar
AE 497 1 - - 1
Pre-requisite AE 412, AE 432
Literature review methodologies and sources. Review of a recently published topics
pertaining to contemporary social, economic or environmental issues in aeronautical
engineering. Delivering a seminar lecture by a team of students based on a term paper
prepared by them.

Faculties and departments requiring this course (if any):
This is an elective course

Textbook:
Different Recommended Material will be used for this course.

References:
None

1. Practice Effective Team Management tools.
2. Prepare effective business communications.
3. Demonstrate the methods of literature review.
4. Analyze recent publication (s) of Aeronautical Engineering.
5. Identify contemporary issues.
6. Prepare and deliver effective presentation using different computer applications.

Topics Covered and Duration:

1. Literature Review Methodologies (3 weeks)
2. Selection of Area of Aeronautical Engineering (1 week)
3. Selection of Field in the Area of Aeronautical Engineering (1 week)
4. Selection of Topic in the particular area of Aeronautical Engineering (2 weeks)
5. Preparation of research paper (4 weeks)
6. Preparation of Business Communication (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
As per Schedule


100


NCAAA Domains
of Learning
Knowledge Cognitive Skills
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET and
additional
Program Outcomes
1 2 a b c e h j l m n i d f g k a
Max. Attainable
Level of Learning
*

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2
*
1: Low level (knowledge & Comprehension), 2: Medium (Application & Analysis), 3: High (Synthesis & Evaluation)

101

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Special Topics in
Aeronautical
Engineering
AE 498 498 3 1 - 3
Selected topics to develop the skills and knowledge in a given field of Aeronautical
Engineering
Textbooks: Varies from semester to semester
Reference: Varies from semester to semester
Course Learning Objectives: Varies from semester to semester
Topic Covered During Class: Varies from semester to semester

Course Schedule:

Varies from semester to semester

Varies from semester to semester
102

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Senior Project AE 499 2 4 - 4
The student is required to function on multidisciplinary team to design a system,
component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints. A standard
engineering design process is followed including the selection of a client defined problem,
literature review, problem formulation (objectives, constraints, and evaluation criteria),
generation of design alternatives, work plan, preliminary design of the selected alternative,
design refinement, detailed design, design evaluation, and documentations. The student is
required to communicate, clearly and concisely, the details of his design both orally and in
writing in several stages during the design process including a final public presentation to a
jury composed of several subject-related professionals.

Textbook: None
References:
Notes by: Dr. Bahattin karagzolu, A Guide to Engineering Design
Methodologies and Technical Presentation, KAU, faculty of engineering,
department of electrical and computer engineering, 2007
AAU Assessment Rubrics for Senior Projects, available from AE ABET
Committee
1. Analyze a project statement, brief, or proposal to identify the real problem and the most
relevant needs and operational constraints.
2. Identify potential customers, their needs, and their operational constraints.
3. Collect and review related data such as technical information, regulations, standards,
and operational experiences from credible literature resources.
4. Integrate previous knowledge from mathematics, basic sciences, engineering
fundamentals and discipline related courses to address the problem.
5. Discuss all applicable realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social,
political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability.
6. Define design objectives, measures of design viability, and the evaluation criteria of the
final project, and reformulate the problem based on collected data.
7. Generate possible solutions; compare alternatives, and select one alternative based on
evaluation criteria and feasibility analysis.
8. Plan an effective design strategy and a project work plan, using standard project
planning techniques, to ensure project completion on time and within budget.
9. Implement a planned design strategy for an Experimental Design Project, if applicable:
9.1 Identify experimental variables and parameter with ranges and desired accuracies.
9.2 Select appropriate experimental tools such as sensors, instruments, and software.
9.3 Explain a reliable experimental setup and experimental procedure that solves the
problem.
9.4 Explain efficient measures to deal responsibly with safety issues and environmental
hazards.
9.5 Use appropriate measurement techniques to ethically collect and record data.
9.6 Analyze experimental data using appropriate tools such as data reduction and
statistical analysis.
9.7 Perform uncertainty analysis.
103

9.8 Judge, verify, and validate the experimental result by comparing them with theory
and/or previous experimental works.
10. Implement a planned design strategy for a Product-Based Design Project, if applicable:
10.1 Identify design parameters as well as assumptions.
10.2 Carry out initial design calculations using modern engineering tools.
10.3 Use modern engineering tools to estimate the performance parameters of the initial
design.
10.4 Use constraint analysis and trade-off studies of the design parameters to refine the
initial design and obtain a final optimized design.
10.5 Evaluate the project related environmental, social, health and safety issues, as well as
hazards anticipated by the project.
10.6 Evaluate project success in satisfying customers needs, design criteria, and
operational constraints.
11. Communicate design details and express thoughts clearly and concisely, both orally and
in writing, using necessary supporting material, to achieve desired understanding and
impact.
12. Demonstrate ability to achieve project objectives using independent, well
organized, and regularly reported multidisciplinary team management techniques
that integrate, evaluate, and improve different skills of team members


Course Schedule:
Weekly meetings with the supervisor
One or more oral presentation(s)
Final general audience presentation and examination


Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
Outcomes
Learning*
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
*
Evaluation)
Course Topics
Duration
in weeks
1. Project selection and team formation
2. Problem Definition
3. Literature review and data collection
4. Problem formulation:
a. Knowledge integration
b. Operational and realistic constraints
c. Design objectives
d. Evaluation criteria
5. Design options and initial layout
6. Work plan and budgeting
7. Progress report and oral presentation
8. Implementation phase
9. Design refinement
10. Final report writing and oral presentation
1
2
3
3

2
1
2
7
3
4
104

DEPARTMENT OF
CHEMICAL AND MATERIALS ENGINEERING
105

INTRODUCTION
Chemical and Materials Engineering are disciplines concerned with the application of basic
and engineering sciences to the study of processes in which raw materials undergo both
chemical and physical changes to produce value added products. Chemical and Material
engineers deal with the design, construction and economic operation of plants and
equipments in which these processes take place. Quality and characteristics of
manufactured materials are also studied in these disciplines.
The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia is endowed with vast resources of petroleum and minerals,
which require the expertise and services of chemical and materials engineers to harness
these resources and contribute to the rapid development and progress of the country. In
order to meet this challenge, the Department of Chemical and Materials Engineering was
established in the year 1981/1982 at King Abdulaziz University. Since its inception, the
Department has produced more than 500 qualified chemical engineers who are serving
various organizations in different parts of the country.
The Department is well equipped to provide effective training to the graduating engineers.
It has a B.Sc. degree program of a five-year duration consisting of 155 credit units with
specialized courses, suitable to the requirements of the Kingdom. The programs leading to
the Master of Science (M.Sc.) in Chemical Engineering and Materials Engineering started
in 1996 G. Each of these programs requires two years of full-time study consisting of 36
credit units of course work and a thesis. The Department has well equipped laboratories
and computer facilities as well as highly qualified faculty and technicians to achieve its
educational aims and objectives.
Commitment to total quality in teaching and scientific research and aspiration to leadership
in chemical and materials engineering education.
The mission of the Chemical and Materials Engineering Department at King Abdulaziz
University (KAU) is to graduate highly qualified chemical and materials engineers who are
well trained and prepared to pursue professional careers in industry, government or
research. Moreover, the department thrives to conduct world-class research and provide
consultation services sectors of the community in the chemical and materials engineering
sciences and technology.

4. Employ their extensive Chemical Engineering knowledge and skills to actively take
part in solving techno-economical problems in private and public industries in
general, and in the petrochemicals, petroleum refining, and gas related industries in
particular
5. Pursue career building skills through long-life learning in the fields of Chemical
Engineering in order to address contemporary local and global issues.
106

6. Uphold and reflect the core values and lofty principles of Islam through personal
and professional integrity, ethical and responsible behaviors, proactivity and a
sincere desire and effort to serve society both individually and within teams.

The department of the Chemical and Materials Engineering has most of the necessary
resources needed to implement the new plan, however, some improvements and extra
resources are needed to increase the ability of the department to accommodate more
students considering the increase in demand for chemical engineers for the expanding
chemical, petroleum and petrochemical industries in the Kingdom. Future plans should
consider the followings:-
9. Modernization and upgrading of the Corrosion Lab
The corrosion lab need to be expanded to accommodate more students and should be
provided with modern and sophisticated equipment needed such as
a. Potentiostat Galvanostst (software & P.C)
b. Thermal and stress corrosion
c. Salt spray unit
10. Modernization and upgrading of the waste treatment lab

The waste treatment lab need to be expanded to accommodate more students and
should be provided with modern and sophisticated equipment needed
11. Providing pore equipment for expanding and upgrading of the Unit operation lab

The unit operation lab need to be expanded to accommodate more students and
should be provided with more modern and sophisticated equipment needed such as
Absorption Column
Evaporators,
Dryers
Mills and crusher
12. Recruiting high professionals to operate and maintain laboratory equipment.
One engineers holding master degree in Chemical engineering
One chemist holding master degree in analytical chemistry
13. Recruiting one additional faculty member specialized in materials science and
engineering.
14. Recruiting one additional faculty member specialized in chemical engineering.

Admission Requirements for the Program
Before each semester and according to the demand and department capacity, a quota is set
by the department council and communicated to AATU. In the specialization form, the
student lists four programs as their preferred choices in ascending order. The applicants for
a given program who have that program as their first choice are ranked according to their
GPA and the students with the highest GPA are selected to join that program. This
procedure is repeated for the second, third and fourth choices for the remaining students in
the list. There is continuous growth in the number and quality of students accepted into the
Chemical Engineering Program. This is attributed to the vast expansion in the area of the
petrochemical and petroleum refining industries which has created a high demand for
chemical engineers.
107

In order to qualify for a BS degree in Chemical Engineering, student must successfully
complete 155 semester units with an overall GPA of 2.75 out of 5 or better. The student has
to complete 50 required courses, two elective courses and summer Training (2 Credit units)
for regular track and 50 required courses and coop work program (8 Credit units) for
cooperative program.
Key of tenth digit in the codes of Chemical and Materials Engineerign Department Courses
0
Basic chemical engineering
1
Materials science and engineering
2
Chemical reactions engineering and catalysis
3
Transport phenomena
4
Process control, modeling and simulation
5
Process and plant design
6
Chemical and petrochemical Technology
7
Special topics and applications
8
Biochemical Engineering
9
Training and research courses and occupational skills
108

UnitsrequiredfortheB.Sc.degreeintheChemicalandMaterialsEngineeringDepartment.
Summer Training 2
Total 155

Cooperative Program
Coop Program 8
Total 155

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 332 Computational Methods in Eng 3 EE 201, MATH 204
CHEM 202 General Chemistry II 4 CHEM 281
CHEM 231 Principles of Organic Chemistry I 4 CHEM 281
CHEM 232 Principles of Organic Chemistry II 4 CHEM 231
CHEM 240 Physical Chemistry for Non Chemistry Majors 4 CHEM 202
ChE 201 Introduction to Chemical Engineering 3
CHEM 281,
IE 200
ChE 210 Materials Science 4 CHEM 281
ChE 301 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics (1) 3 CHEM 202
ChE 302 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics (2) 3 ChE 301
ChE 311 Corrosion Engineering 3 CHEM 240, ChE210, EE251
ChE 321 Chemical Reaction Engineering 3 ChE 302, EE332
ChE 331 Momentum Transfer 3
MATH 203, MATH 204, ChE
201,
ChE 332 Heat Transfer 3 ChE 331, IE 202
ChE 333 Mass Transfer 3 ChE 331
ChE 334 Separation Processes 3 ChE 302,ChE 333
ChE 390 Summer Training (For Regular track) 2 ChE 334
ChE 435 Unit Operation Lab. 3 ChE 332,ChE 334
ChE 441 Modeling and Simulations 3 ChE 321, ChE 334
ChE 442 Process Control 4
ChE 321,ChE 334,
MATH 205
ChE 451 Plant Design 3 ChE 321,ChE 334, IE255
ChE 499 Senior project 4 ChE 321,ChE 334, MENG 130
Total 71
109

ChE 390 the summer training, 400 hours of on-job training distributed over 10 weeks that

Coop students are required to take all of the above mentioned 25 courses except ChE 390
which is replaced by the following course:
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
ChE 400 Coop Work Program 8 ChE 334

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
ChE 411 Polymer Engineering 3 CHEM 232
ChE 412 Engineering Materials 3 ChE 210
ChE 413 Materials Selection 3 ChE 210
ChE 414 Extractive Metallurgy 3 ChE 210
ChE 422 Catalysis 3 ChE 321
ChE 452 Computer Aided Design for Chem. Eng. 3 ChE 441,ChE 451
ChE 462 Petroleum Refinery Engineering 3 ChE 321,ChE 334
ChE 463 Natural Gas Engineering 3 ChE 321,ChE 334
ChE 464 Petrochemical Technology 3 ChE 334
ChE 465 Industrial Pollution Control 3 ChE 321,ChE 334
ChE 466 Safety in Chemical Industries 3 ChE 334
ChE 471 Selected Topics in Chemical or Materials Engineering 3
ChE 334


110

A TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR CHEMICAL AND MATERIALS
ENGINEERING
3
rd
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
CHEM 202 General Chemistry II 4 ChE 331 Momentum Transfer 3
Physical Chemistry for
Engineering
4
MATH 204 Differential Equations I 3 ISLS 201 Islamic Culture (2) 2
MENG 130 Basic Workshop 2 EE 332
Computational Methods in
Engineering
3
ChE 201
Introduction to Chemical
Engineering
3 ChE 301
Chem. Eng. Thermodynamics
I
3
IE 202
Design (2)
2
Total

Total 17

4
th
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 251 Basic Electrical Engineering 4 CHEM 232
Principles of Organic
Chemistry II
4
ChE 332 Heat Transfer 3 ChE 334 Separation Processes 3
ChE 333 Mass Transfer 3 MATH 205 Series and Vector Calculus 3
CHEM 231
Principles of Organic
Chemistry I
4 ChE 321
Chemical Reaction
Engineering
3
ChE 302 Chem. Eng. Thermodynamics II 3 ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2
ChE 311 Corrosion Engineering 3
Total Total 18

semester.
4
th
ChE 390 Summer Training 2 Cr. Hr.

4
th
ChE 400 Coop Work Program 8 Cr. Hr.

111

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ChE 499 Senior project 4 ChE xxx

Elective Course II 3
ChE 442 Process Control 4 ChE 451 Plant Design 2
ChE xxx

Elective Course I 3 ChE 435 Unit Operation Lab 3
ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2 ChE 441 Modeling and Simulation 3
Total Total 12

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ChE 499 Senior Project 4 ChE 435 Unit Operations Lab. 3
ChE 441 Modeling and Simulation 3
ChE 442 Process Control 4
ChE 451 Plant Design 3
ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2
Total
4
Total 18

112

COURSE DESCRIPTION

ChE 201 Introduction to Chemical Engineering (3:3,1)
BroaddefinitionsofChemicalEngineering.Introductiontochemicalengineeringcalculations.
Materialbalancesinprocessesnotinvolvingchemicalreactions/involvingchemicalreactions.
Recyclebypassandpurgecalculations.Criticalpropertiesandcompressibilitycharts.Vapor
liquidequilibria,partialsaturationandhumidity.Computerapplications.
Prerequisite: CHEM 281, IE 200

ChE 210 Materials Science (4:3,2)
Classificationofengineeringmaterials,atomicandmolecularbonding.Propertiesand
microstructure,elasticandplasticbehavior.Orderinsolids,phasesandsolidsolutions,crystal
geometry.Disorderinsolids,atomicmovementandrearrangment,phasediagrams,solidstate
transformations.Applicationsofmetals,ceramics,polymersandcomposites.Servicestability,
corrosionandfailure.Involveslaboratoryexperimentsandpractices.
Prerequisite: CHEM 281

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Chemical Eng.
Thermodynamics
I(Core Course)
ChE 301 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites CHEM 202
Introduction to thermodynamics concepts, first law of thermodynamics, Mass and energy
balances in closed and open systems, volumetric properties of pure fluids, heat effects,
humidity charts, second law of thermodynamics, entropy, Computer applications to
thermodynamics problems.
Textbook: Smith J.M, Van Nees H.C and Abott M.M., Introduction to
Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 7
th
Edition,
McGraw-Hill, 2005
Reference: Annamali K, and Puri I.K., Advanced Thermodynamics
Engineering, CRC Press. 2002
Course Leaning Objectives: By completion of the course, the students should be able to:
1. Define basic thermodynamic properties and concepts.
2. Summarize a general introduction to engineering ethics.
3. Understand the significance of the first law of thermodynamics and learn the
relationship between heat and work.
4. Explain the fundamental meaning of the phase rule and implement it.
113

5. Identify open systems and apply conservation principles (mass and energy) to such
systems.
6. Describe the general nature of the PVT behavior of pure fluids.
7. Provide examples of applications of thermodynamics properties using equations of
state, charts and tables.
8. Distinguish between sensible heat effects and latent heat of pure substances.
9. Understand the applications of energy balances for industrial reactions.
10. Express the second law of thermodynamics in different statements that describe the
general restrictions on processes beyond that imposed by the first law.
11. Analyze heat engines and conclude results related to the second law of
thermodynamics.
12. Relate entropy generation mathematically to the second law and apply that to assess
feasible processes.
13. Calculate the theoretical ideal work and assess efficiency of a process through this
concept.

NO Topic Covered During Class: Duration in Weeks
1 Fundamental principles Thermodynamics 2
2 First law of thermodynamics 3
3 Properties of pure fluids 3
4 Heat effects 2
5 The second law of thermodynamics 3
Class Schedule:
Lecture: two 1:30 hour sessions per week
Tutorial: one three hours session per week

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
CognitiveSkills Knowledge
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
a k g f d i j h e c b a 2 1
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 2 3 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*

*
1:Lowlevel(knowledge&Comprehension),2:Medium(Application&Analysis),3:High(Synthesis&Evaluation)
*One hour tutorial session

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Chemical Eng.
Thermodynamics
II(Core Course)
ChE 302 3 1* - 3
114

Pre-requisites ChE301
Review of first law and second law of thermodynamics. Thermodynamic properties of
fluids. Power and refrigeration cycles. Vapor liquid equilibrium. Theory and applications
of solution thermodynamics. Chemical reaction equilibrium.
Textbook: Smith J.M., Van Nees H.C., and Abott M.M., Introduction to
Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 7
th
, McGraw-Hill,
2005
Reference: Annamali K., and Puri I.K., Advanced Thermodynamics
Engineering, CRC Press. 2002

1. Review previously learned first and second laws of Thermodynamics.
2. Apply first and second laws of thermodynamics to specific processes and systems.
3. Develop from the first and second laws the fundamental property relations which
underlie the mathematical structure of thermodynamics.
4. Derive equations which allow calculation of enthalpy and entropy values from PVT
and heat-capacity data.
5. Calculate changes in thermodynamics properties for ideal gases and for non ideal
gases through the use of residual properties.
6. Explain the criteria of phase equilibrium for a pure substance and its utilization in
the clapeyron equation.
7. Discuss the diagrams and tables by which thermodynamic property values are
presented for convenient use.
8. Estimate of property values by generalized correlations in the absence of complete
experimental information.
9. Apply thermodynamics to flow process, turbines, compressors, and pumps.
10. Analyze of thermodynamics cycles: steam cycles and heat engines.
11. Solve problems involving power systems that results from the production of power
from heat.
12. Identify the assumptions behind Raouls law and Henerys law as well as what
things will make them fail.
13. Recognize the various ways (P-T, P-x-y, T-x-y and x-y) for representing phase
equilibrium behavior of binary mixtures.
14. Show the typical phase equilibrium calculations (Bubl P, Bubl T, Dew P and Dew
T) using Raoults law and modified Raoults law.
15. Perform flash calculations by introducing mass balances, phase equilibria
relationships and evaluation of k-factors.
16. Use computer tools such as Excel spread sheet and MathCAD program.
17. Develop fundamental property relations to open phases of variable composition.
18. Identify the chemical potential and its role in the phase equilibria.
19. Interpret mathematically and graphically partial properties as properties of
individual species as they exist in solution.
20. Show how the ideal-gas mixture model provides a conceptual basis for treatment
of real gas mixtures.
21. Recognize the fugacity definition and utility as a transformation of the chemical
potential that is mathematically well behaved and not as a replacement of pressure.
22. Evaluate fugacity from an equation of state and principle of corresponding states.

115

1 First and second law revision 1
2 Thermodynamic properties of fluid 1
3 Definition and evaluation of residual properties 2
4 Phase equilibrium of a pure substance 1
5 Thermodynamic diagrams and tables 1
6 Production of power from heat 1
7 Fugacity of pure substance and mixtures 2
8 Solutions thermodynamics 2
9 Partial molar properties 1
10 Criteria of phase equilibrium for mixtures 2

Class Schedule:
Lecture: Three 1 hour sessions per week
Tutorials: One 3 hours session per week
*

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 2 2 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Corrosion
Engineering(Core
Course)
ChE 311 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites CHEM 240, ChE 210 & EE 251
116

Electrochemical mechanisms, corrosion kinetics, polarization and corrosion rates,
passivity. Methods of testing corrosion of iron and steel and the effects of various
parameters. Pourbaix diagrams. Effect of stresses on corrosion, (stress corrosion cracking,
cold working, hydrogen cracking, etc.). Corrosion control technologies, corrosion of some
engineering alloys. Design of simple processes.
Textbook Fontana M. G & Greene .N.D, Corrosion Engineering, 3
rd
Edition,
1995
Reference Jones D. A. Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, 2
nd

Edition, John Wiley, 1996
1. Appreciate the impact and importance of corrosion on society and industry
2. Recognize the difference between corrosion engineering and corrosion science.
3. Outline the important tasks that the corrosion engineer must perform.
4. Use the information and the databases related to corrosion.
5. Define corrosion and metallic corrosion.
6. Classify the major environments and categorize the common engineering materials.
7. Describe and appraise that corrosion is a natural process.
8. Recognize the chemistry and electrochemistry of corrosion
9. Recognize the metallurgy of corrosion.
10. Distinguish among all types corrosion of reactions.
11. Describe the common types of corrosion cells.
12. Recognize and apply the equations to calculate the corrosion rates for metals and
alloys.
13. Explain and use the emf series and the galvanic series.
14. Distinguish among the standard electrode and a reference electrode.
15. Categorize and explain the factors that affect corrosion.
16. Classify the different forms of corrosion.
17. Discuss the mechanisms of forms of corrosion.
18. Discuss and explain the thermodynamics of corrosion.
19. Discuss and explain the kinetics of corrosion.
20. Recognize and discuss the various measures used to control corrosion.

1 Introduction 1
2 Basics in corrosion 1
3 Basics in chemistry 1
4 Basics in Metallurgy 1
5 Corrosion reactions 1
6 Corrosion cells 1
7 Corrosion rates 1
8 Electromotive series and Galvanic series 1
9 Factors affecting corrosion 2
10 Forms of corrosion 1
11 Thermodynamics and kinetics of corrosion 2
12 Corrosion control measures 1

Class Schedule:
117

Lab: one 3 hours session per week
Design : 0 %
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 2 1 1 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


118

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Chemical
Reaction
Engineering(Core
Course)
ChE 321 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites ChE 302 & EE 332
The course is intended to develop the student s ability to understand mole balances,
conversion and reactor sizing, rate laws and stoichiometry for single and multiple reactions
and its applications to steady-state no isothermal reactor design. Collection and analysis of
rate data and catalysis and catalytic reactor
Textbook: Fogler H. S, Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering, 3
rd

Edition, Prentice Hall Intl., 1999.
Reference: Smith J. M., "Chemical Engineering Kinetics, 3
rd
Edition,
McGraw- Hill International Book Company, Singapore.
1981.
1. Define the rate of chemical reaction.
2. Apply the mole balance equations to a batch reactor, CSTR, PFR, and PBR (l
at B).
3. Define conversion and space time. (a at A)
4. Write the mole balances in terms of conversion for a batch reactor, CSTR,
PFR, and PBR
5. Calculate the size of reactor needed for a certain duty either alone or in series
once given the rate of reaction, -rA, as a function of conversion, X.
6. Write relationship between the relative rates of reaction.
7. Define reaction order and activation energy.
8. Set up a stoichiometric table for both batch and flow systems and express
concentration as a function or conversion.
9. Calculate the equilibrium conversion for both gas and liquid phase reactions.
10. Write the combined mole balance and rate law in measures other than
conversion.
11. Describe the algorithm that allows the reader to solve chemical reaction
engineering problems through logic rather than memorization.
12. Calculate the size of batch reactors, semi batch reactors, CSTRs, PFRs, and
PBRs for isothermal operation given the rate law and feed conditions.
13. Compute the reaction order and specific reaction rate from experimental data
obtained from either batch or flow reactors.
14. Describe how to use equal-area differentiation, polynomial fitting, numerical
difference formulas and regression to analyze experimental data to determine
the rate law.
15. Describe how the method of half lives, and of initial rate, are used to analyze
rate data.
16. Describe two or more types of laboratory reactors used to obtain rate law data
along with their advantages and disadvantages.
17. Define different types of selectivity and yield.
119

18. Select the type of the reaction system that would maximize the selectivity of
the desired product given the rate laws for all the reactions occurring in the
system.
19. Describe the algorithm used to design reactors with multiple reactions.
20. Calculate the size of reactors to maximize the selectivity and to determine the
species concentrations in a batch reactor, semibatch reactor, CSTR, PFR, and
PBR, systems.
21. Describe the algorithm for CSTRs, PFRs, and PBRs that are not operated
isothermally.
22. Calculate the size of adiabatic and no adiabatic CSTRs, PFRs, and PBRs
needed for a certain duty.
23. Define a catalyst, a catalytic mechanism and a rate limiting step.
24. Describe the steps in a catalytic mechanism and how one goes about deriving
a rate law and a mechanism and rate limiting step consistent with the
experimental data.
25. Calculate the size of isothermal reactors for reactions with Langmuir-
Hinschelwood kinetics.
1 Mole Balances 1
2 Conversion and Reactor Sizing 2
3 Rate Law and Stoichiometry 2
4 Isothermal Reactor Design 2
5 Collection and Analysis of Rate Data 2
6 Multiple Reactions 1
7 Steady-State Nonisothermal Reactor Design 2
8 Catalysis and Catalytic Reactors 2
Class Schedule:
Lecture: Three 1 Hour sessions per week
Tutorials: One Three Hours session per week
Engineering Science: 83.3 %
Engineering Design: 16.7 %
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 2 2 1 3 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


120

CODE /NO CODE/NO. Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Momentum
transfer(Core
Course)
ChE 331 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites MATH 203, MATH 204 & ChE 201
Fluid static, Mass, momentum, and energy balance on finite and differential systems.
Laminar and turbulent flow in pipes. Fluid flow in porous media. Introduction to boundary
layer theory. Fluid flow

Textbook: Welty J. R., Wicks, C. E., Wilson, R. E., & Rorrer, G.,
Fundamentals of Momentum Heat, and Mass Transfer, 4
th

Edition, John Wiley & Sons.2000
Reference McCabe, W.L. Smith J.C. & Harriett P., Unit Operations of
Chemical Engineering, 5
th
Edition. McGraw Hill, 1993


1. Distinguish between a fluid property and a flow property.
2. Find the gradient of a scalar field and discuss its implications.
3. Calculate pressure variation in a static fluid using inertia and non-inertia
coordinate systems.
4. Apply the basic equation of fluid static to manometery and to calculate
forces on submerged forces.
5. Recognize the need to apply the conservation of mass law to solve a given
fluid flow problem.
6. Apply the integral expression of the conservation of mass law to steady
and unsteady sate fluid flow problems of different natures and concerns
using suitable control volumes.
7. Demonstrate an understanding of the implication of the outcome of the
solution of the problem.
8. Recognize the need to apply Newtons second law of motion to solve a
given fluid flow problem.
9. Define an appropriate control volume of a fluid flow system for the
application of the integral expression of linear momentum.
10. Apply the integral expression of linear momentum to steady and unsteady
sate fluid flow problems of different natures and concern by a term-by-
term analysis of this expression as they pertain to the problem.
11. Utilize either a moving or a fixed coordinate system in the application of
the momentum theorem to a control volume moving with a uniform
velocity.
12. Recognize the need to apply the first law of thermodynamics to solve a
given fluid flow problem.
13. Define an appropriate control volume of the fluid flow problem for the
application of the integral expression of the conservation of energy
equation
14. Apply the integral expression of the conservation of energy equation to
steady and unsteady sate fluid flow problems of different natures and
121

concern by a term-by-term analysis of this expression as they pertain to
the problem
15. Recognize conditions and /or assumptions of problems under which the
integral expression of the conservation of energy equation would reduce to
Bernoulli equation.
16. Apply Bernoulli equation to solve problems that satisfy necessary
conditions.
17. Distinguish between Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids in terms of
their stress rate of strain relationships
18. Define fluid viscosity and use appropriate SI and other Engineering
system of units to express it.
19. Use Hirschfelder, Curtiss, and Bird equation to predict the viscosity of a
non-polar gas, and recognize the effects of temperature and pressure on
the viscosity of gases and liquids.
20. Predict shear stress and rate of shear work of a laminar flow of a
Newtonian fluid using Newtons viscosity law.
21. Apply Newtons second law of motion to a differential control volume
suitable for the geometry of an incompressible, fully developed laminar
flow.
22. Derive expressions for the velocity profile, pressure drop, and shear stress
of a Newtonian fluid in fully developed laminar flow in different flow
geometries, such as flow in pipes and between parallel flat plates.
23. Apply the Hagen-Poiseuille equation to find the pressure drop and
associated drag force on a circular conduit resulting from the flow of a
viscous fluid.
24. Develop the differential continuity equation based on a differential
element in different coordinate systems.
25. Recognize the physical meaning of the substantial derivative.
26. Use the Navier-Stokes equation for incompressible flow to solve simple
flow problems.
27. Group the variables in a given physical situation into dimensionless
parameters using the governing equation if available or the Buckingham
Method if such equation is not available
28. Define geometric, kinematic, and dynamic similarities between a model
and a prototype of a system.
29. Recognize the requirements of these similarities to use model data to
predict the behavior of a prototype of a system and apply model theory.
30. Solve simple frictional drag problem of an external flow of a viscous fluid
over a solid surface.
31. Use Blasiuss solution and/ or the approximate solution of the laminar
boundary layer on a flat plate to find boundary layer thickness, local skin
friction coefficient, mean skin friction coefficient, and frictional drag
force.
32. Recognize and use empirical relations of turbulent flow such as empirical
velocity profiles and sheer stress.
33. Use the approximate solution of the turbulent boundary layer over a flat
plate to estimate boundary layer thickness, local and mean skin friction
coefficients, and frictional drag forces.
34. Define and use relationships for fanning friction factor for both laminar
and turbulent flow in pipe flow.
35. Determine friction factor and head-loss for pipe flow and fittings.
36. Analyze simple pipe flow problems.
122

1 Fluid and Flow properties. 1
2 Conservation of mass 2
3 Newtons second law of motion 1
4 Conservation of energy 2
5 Shear stress in laminar flow. 1
6 Analysis of a differential fluid element in laminar flow 1
7 Differential equations of fluid flow. 1
8 Dimensional analysis 1
9 Viscous flow and the boundary layer concept 1
Course Schedule:
Lecture: two 1.5 hour sessions per week

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 2 2 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Heat
Transfer(Core
Course)
ChE 332 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites ChE 331, IE 202
Modes of heat transfer, steady and un-steady-state conduction in different co-ordinates,
convective heat transfer with and without phase change. Correlation's for forced and
natural convection. Analogy between momentum and heat transfer. Heat transfer
applications
Text Book: Incropera F.P &, Dewitt D.P, Fundamentals of Heat & Mass
Transfer 6
th
123

Reference Yunus A. C, Heat Transfer , Second Edition, McGraw- Hill
,2003

1. Define heat transfer and relate its concept to thermodynamics.
2. Apply the laws of heat transfer due to conduction, convection, and radiation to solve simple
problems related to the three modes of heat transfer.
3. Apply the law of conservation of energy to write the energy balance equations for a system.
4. Translate any heat transfer problem by a schematic.
5. Recognize the general HDE in Cartesian coordinates, cylindrical coordinates, and spherical
coordinates.
6. Rewrite the HDE for a specific system using the proper assumptions, including the three
coordinates.
7. Write the initial and the boundary conditions needed to solve the specific HDE.
8. Generate the steady state one dimensional the temperature distribution, using the initial and/or the
boundary conditions for a single wall, a single cylinder, and a sphere with / without convection and
with / without uniform generation.
9. Modify part (1) for composite walls.
10. Diagram the thermal circuit for walls with / without convection and with / without generation.
11. Apply the thermal circuit diagram to find any unknown temperature, overall heat transfer coefficient
and the thermal resistances of a system.
12. Apply the thermal circuit diagram to write different forms of the heat transfer equation.
13. Recognize the different methods to handle transient conduction for different bodies.
14. Analyze transient problems using the lumped capacitance method, approximate solution, charts, and
semi infinite solution.
15. Write the proper equation to determine the required time, temperature or heat transfer rate for a
system.
16. Identify the different forms of Newton Laws.
17. State the concept of each boundary layer including the velocity boundary layer, thermal boundary
layer, and concentration boundary layer.
18. Identify the dimensionless groups related to the three transport phenomena: momentum transfer,
heat transfer, and mass transfer.
19. Recognize the analogies among the three transport phenomena.
20. Analyze problems in heat transfer with conduction and convection.
21. Analyze problems with combined processes of convection and evaporation.
22. Correlate heat transfer coefficient to mass transfer coefficient.
23. Recognize the importance of the ( Blasius solution) similarity solution for laminar flow over a flat
plate.
24. Recognize basic results of the similarity solution for laminar flow over a flat plate.
25. Analyze the laminar flow over a heated flat plate.
26. Analyze the turbulent flow over a heated flat plate
27. Analyze the conditions of mixed (laminar and turbulent) flow over a heated flat plate.
28. Recognize the different methods used to obtain the heat transfer coefficient.
29. Outline the hydrodynamic conditions and the thermal conditions for the flow in a pipe.
30. State the conditions of fully developed flow (hydrodynamic or thermal conditions).
31. Analyze the fully developed region and the entry region in a circular pipe.
32. State the concept of boiling and condensation.
33. Define Newtons law of cooling for boiling and condensation.
34. Analyze the different processes for boiling and condensation.
35. Recognize and diagram the different types of heat exchangers.
36. Use the LMTD method and the Effectiveness NTI method to analyze heat transfer rates in heat
exchangers, and understand which method to choose for a given problem.
37. Applying the fundamentals of conduction, convection and radiation to do the thermal design of heat
exchangers and condensers.

1 Introduction 1
2 General heat conduction equation 1
3 Steady-state conductions 2
4 Heat transfer from extended surfaces 2
124

5 Transient Conduction 2
6 External flow convection heat transfer 2
7 Internal flow convection heat transfer 2
8 Heat exchangers and design oriented problems 2
Class Schedule:
Engineering Science: 83.3 %
Engineering Design: 16.7 %
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
1 3 3 1 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Mass
Transfer(Core
Course)
ChE 333 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites ChE 331,
Fundamentals of mass transfer processes. The control volume approach to the mass transfer
processes, differential equations of mass transfer. Steady and unsteady state molecular
diffusion. Natural and forced convection mass transfer. Mass transfer theories. Convective
mass transfer correlations. Analysis of chemical engineering operations involving mass
transfer. Simultaneous heat and mass transfer; mass transfer accompanied by chemical
reaction
Textbook: Welty J. R., Wicks, C. E., Wilson, R. E., & Rorrer, G.,
Fundamentals of Momentum Heat, and Mass Transfer, 4
th

125

Reference: Incropera F.P &, Dewitt D.P, Fundamentals of Heat & Mass
Transfer 6
th
1. Define the rate of mass transfer and describe the two mass transfer mechanisms
2. List and explain the industrial importance of mass transfer processes and their
relationship with course material
3. Calculate the diffusion coefficients for gases, liquids and solids
4. Write the Ficks rate equation in different forms and define concentration,
diffusion velocity and flux
5. Explain the importance of molecular diffusion inside the pores of porous solids
6. Use the general differential equation for mass transfer to describe the mass
balance associated with a diffusing component in a mixture
7. Distinguish between the four types of boundary conditions used to solve the
differential equation for mass transfer
8. Apply the initial and boundary conditions in solving the differential equation for
mass transfer
9. Describe the steady-state transfer of mass from a differential view point and
explain how to measure the diffusion coefficient for a gas using an Arnold
diffusion cell
10. Recognize the relationship between the convective mass transfer coefficient and
the diffusion coefficient based on the film theory and penetration theory
11. Distinguish between the two types of chemical reactions (homogeneous and
heterogeneous reactions) and write the difference between diffusion controlled
and chemically controlled reactions
12. Apply the differential equation for mass transfer in presence of homogeneous
and /or heterogeneous chemical reactions
13. Identify the difference between steady and unsteady- state molecular diffusion
and define the one directional mass transfer by Fick
s second law of diffusion

14. Describe the transient diffusion in a semi infinite medium, the transient
diffusion in medium under conditions of negligible surface resistance and define
the penetration depth for mass transfer
15. Define the mass transfer by convection and describe the difference between
mass transfers by forced convection and natural convection
16. Recognize the relationship between concentration boundary layer, thermal
boundary layer and momentum boundary layer and recognize the similarities in
the differential equations that describe these transfer processes
17. Use different methods to evaluate the mass transfer coefficient and explain
what the physical significance of Schmidt , Sherwood , and Lewis numbers
18. Use analogy between mass, energy and momentum transfer processes to predict
the behavior of systems for which united quantitative data are available
19. Explain the two film theory
20. Illustrate how to determine the individual and the overall mass transfer
coefficients
21. Describe the different techniques employed to obtain the mass transfer
coefficient
22. Correlate experimental data in terms of empirical correlation and describe how
to use such empirical correlations to calculate the mass transfer coefficient for
different geometries

1 Fundamentals principles of mass transfer 1
2 Diffusion coefficients; mass transfer coefficient 2
126

3 Differential equations of mass transfer 2
4 Steady-state molecular diffusion 2.5
5 Unsteady-state molecular diffusion 1.5
6 Convective mass transfer between phases 1
7 Convective mass transfer 2
Class Schedule:
Lecture: three 1 hour sessions per week
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 1 2 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Separation
Processes(Core
Course)
ChE 334 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites ChE302,ChE333
Phase equilibrium, continuous contact and stage wise processes; fractional distillation, gas
absorption and liquid-liquid extraction processes
Textbook: Seader J. D. & Ernest J. Henley, Separation Process
Principles, 2
nd
Reference: Judson C. K, Separation Processes, 2
nd
Edition, McGraw Hill
Book Co, 1980
1. List the five general separation techniques.
2. Explain how separations are made by phase creation , phase addition and by
introducing selective barriers
3. Explain how separations are made by introducing solid agents and list the three
major separation operations that utilize this technique.
127

4. Explain the concept of phase equilibria in terms of, chemical potential, fugacity,
fugacity coefficients, activity, and activity coefficients.
5. Write vapor-liquid K-value expressions for Ragout's law (ideal), a modified
Ragout's law, and Henry s law.
6. Define relative volatility between two components of a vapor-liquid mixture and
explain the difference between min. and max. boiling azeotropes
7. Use component material balance equations with K-values to calculate bubble-
point, dew-point, and equilibrium flash conditions for multi-component
mixtures.
8. Determine the length and diameter of a flash drum
9. Use T-x-y and y-x diagrams of binary mixtures, with the concept of the q-line, to
determine equilibrium phase compositions.
10. Determine the five construction lines used in the McCabe-Thiele method using
component material balances and vapor-liquid equilibrium relations.
11. Distinguish among five possible phase conditions
12. Apply the McCabe-Thiele method for determining minimum reflux ratio,
minimum number of equilibrium stages and number of equilibrium stages.
13. Calculate condenser and reboiler heat duties and condenser use of a feed pre-
heater.
14. Use the Murphree vapor stage efficiency to determine actual number of plates
from the number of equilibrium stages.
15. Extend the McCabe Thiele method to multiple feeds, side streams, and open
steam (in place of re-boiler).
16. Calculate, by graphical and /or algebraic means, batch still temperature,
residue compositions and instantaneous distillate compositions as a function of
time.
17. List situations where liquid-liquid extraction might be preferred distillation and
list characteristics of an ideal solvent.
18. Define the distribution coefficient and show its relationship to activity
coefficients and relative selectivity of a solute between carrier and solvent.
19. Use triangular phase diagrams for ternary systems with component materials
balances to determine equilibrium phase compositions.
20. Determine the number of equilibrium stages for ternary systems using
equilateral and right triangle diagrams for co-current and counter current contact
21. Determine minimum and maximum solvent- to- feed flow- rate ratios
22. Explain the difference between physical and chemical absorption.
23. Enumerate different types of industrial equipment for absorption and stripping
and explain which are most popular and Compare three different types of trays.
24. Calculate the minimum MSA flow rate to achieve a specified recovery of a key
component in a single-section, countercurrent cascade.

1 General separation Techniques 1
2 Phase equilibrium and phase diagrams 2
3 Equilibrium stages and flash distillation 2
4 Staged binary distillation: McCabe-Thiele 4
5 Liquid-liquid extraction 3
6 Absorption and stripping 2

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: One three hours session per week
128

Engineering science: 83.3%
Engineering design: 16.7%
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 2 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Summer
training(Core
Course)
ChE 390 - - 400** 2
Pre-requisites ChE 334
10 weeks of training in industry under the supervision of a faculty member. Students have
to submit a report about their achievements during training in addition to any other
requirements assigned by the Department
Textbook: None.
By the completion of the summer training, the student should be able to:
1. Formulate an objective or mission statement that identify the real problem and
describe the expected outcomes of the training activity.
2. Break-down a work environment into its units and work functions, and describe
how these units are assembled into a whole entity.
3. Describe a professional organizational structure, its size and how it is related to its
main products and to market issues.
4. Exhibit integrity, punctuality, and ethical behavior in engineering practice and
relationships.
6. Establish successful relationships with team members, advisors, and clients to
understand their needs and to achieve or exceed agreed-upon quality standards.
7. Maintain focus to complete important tasks on time and with high quality, amidst
multiple demands
8. Relate practical work to previous knowledge from basic sciences, engineering
fundamentals, and discipline related courses.
129

9. Collect and review related data such as technical information, regulations,
standards, and operational experiences from credible literature resources
10. Utilize prior knowledge, independent research, published information, and original
ideas in addressing problems and generating solutions
11. Monitor achievement, identify causes of problems, and revise processes to enhance
satisfaction
12. Communicate, clearly and concisely, training details and gained experience, both
orally and in writing, using necessary supporting material, to achieve desired
understanding and impact.

1 Acquainting the trainee by the company, its work
environment, organizational structure, products,
costumers, engineering units, and quality system
2
2 Familiarizing the trainee of one production or design
unit with deep understanding of the work environment,
regulations, standards, etc...
1
3 Allocating the trainee to a project team and allowing
him to study and collect necessary data about the
project using internal and external data sources.
1
4 Working as a team member to execute assigned tasks
with the following objectives:
Use modern engineering tools such as equipment and
computer software.

6

Class Schedule:
faculty members.
Others 100%
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*

130

**
400 hours of on-job training distributed over 10 weeks

CREDITS COURSE
TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Cooperative
Work(Core
Course)
ChE 400 - - 1000*** 8
Pre-requisites ChE334
Textbooks: None
1. Formulate an objective or mission statement that identify the real problem and describe the
expected outcomes of the training activity .
2. Break-down a work environment into its units and work functions, and describe how these
units are assembled into a whole entity.
3. Describe a professional organizational structure, its size and how it is related to its main
products and to market issues .
5. Demonstrate enthusiasm and business focusing .
6. Establish successful relationships with team members, advisors, and clients to understand their
needs and to achieve or exceed agreed-upon quality standards .
7. Maintain focus to complete important tasks on time and with high quality, amidst multiple
demands
8. Relate practical work to previous knowledge from basic sciences, engineering fundamentals,
and discipline related courses .
9. Collect and review related data such as technical information, regulations, standards, and
operational experiences from credible literature resources
10. Utilize prior knowledge, independent research, published information, and original ideas in
addressing problems and generating solutions
12. Communicate, clearly and concisely, training details and gained experience, both orally and in
writing, using necessary supporting material, to achieve desired understanding and impact

NO Topic Covered During Class: Duration in
Weeks
1
Acquainting the trainee by the company, its work
costumers, engineering units, and quality system
2
131

2
Familiarizing the trainee of one production or design
unit with deep understanding of the work
environment, regulations, standards, etc...
2
3
Allocating the trainee to a project team and allowing
him to study and collect necessary data about
the project using internal and external data sources.
2
4
Working as a team member to execute assigned tasks
with the following objectives:
Apply engineering practices related to his
specialization.
computer software.
20
N.B.: If the assigned project is to be completed in less
than 20 weeks, the student should complete his
training period working on several successive projects

Submitting first Progress Report to his academic
supervisor
Submitting second Progress Report to his academic
supervisor
Submitting third Progress Report to his academic
supervisor

End of week #6

End of week #12

End of week #18

Class Schedule:
faculty members
Others: 100%
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*

***
1000 hours of on-job training distributed over 25 weeks

132

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Polymer
Engineering(
Elective Course)
ChE 411 411 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites CHEM 232
Classification of polymeric materials, calculation of molar mass and molar mass distribution,
polymerization reactions, kinetics of polymerization reactions, composites materials, polymer
processing, mechanical and physical properties, commercial polymer.
Textbook: Young R.J, Introduction to polymers, 2
nd
Edition, Chapman & Hall
Publishers, 2000

Reference: Powel P.C, Engineering with polymers, 1
st
Edition, Chapman & Hall
Publishers, .1992
1. Define the basic vocabulary of polymer science.
2. List and explain the classification of polymeric materials.
3. Recognize the different structure of polymeric materials.
4. Distinguish between thermoplastics, elastomers and thermosets Polymers.
5. Explain the difference between homo and copolymers from engineering point of view.
6. Apply the Molar mass distribution.
7. Calculate Molar mass averages.
8. Define the difference between condensation and addition polymerization reactions.
9. Define linear step polymerization
10. List and explain different polycondensation and polyaddition reactions
11. State and apply Carothers theory.
12. Describe ring formation and explain it effect on the molar mass distribution.
13. Define non Linear step polymerization
14. Describe network polymers such as phenol formaldehyde and epoxy resins and defined its
application in engineering.
15. Define polyurethane networks and its application.
16. Define free radical polymerization and the three stages of formation.
17. Explain the rate of Polymerization and the effecting steps.
18. Describe the steady state conditions and its effect on polymerization conditions.
19. Explain auto-acceleration phenomena.
20. Explain chain transfer concept and its effect on polymerization calculations.
21. Describe the effect of inhibitor and retardant on the physical properties of polymeric materials.
22. Define the different methods of free radical polymerization such as bulk, solution, suspension,
emulsion, and Ionic polymerization.
23. Describe the advantage and disadvantage of different methods.
24. Define the term taciticity and its effect on the mechanical properties of polymeric materials.
25. Define the basic vocabulary of reinforced polymer.
26. Describe the principle of polymer reinforcement
27. Explain the mechanism of reinforcement and its effect on the mechanical properties of engineering
polymer.
28. Define the effect of different polymer matrixes such as thermosets and thermoplastic materials.
29. Define the effect of different fibrous reinforcement and the influence of structure on the mechanical
properties of composite materials.
30. Define the effect of different types of fibrous reinforcement such as, glass fiber, carbon fiber, aremid
polymer (fiber) and platelet reinforcement on the mechanical properties of composite materials.
133

31. Explain different forming techniques such as pultrusion, filament winding, hand lay-up, hand spray-
up, compression moulding reinforced reaction injection moulding (RRIM) and reinforced
thermoplastics in engineering applications.
32. Define the mechanics of continuous fibers reinforcements and its mathematical application.
33. Calculate the minimum volume fraction of reinforcement.

Weeks
1
Polymer Chemistry.
1
2
Molar mass and degree of polymerization.
1
3
Classification of polymerization reactions.
1
4
Kinetics of step polymerization reaction.
1
5
Chain polymerization.
1
6
Degree of polymerization.
1
7
Method of free radical polymerization
1
8
Stereochemistry of polymerization
1
9
Reinforced polymer.
1
10
Reinforced plastic
1
11
Fibrous reinforcement
1
12
Forming of reinforcement plastic
1
13
Mechanics of fiber reinforcement
1
14
How the composite fails under load
1

Class Schedule:
Tutorial: One 3.0 hours session per week

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 3 2 3 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*

134


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Engineering
Materials(
Elective Course)
ChE 412 412 3 1* - 3
Ferrous and non-ferrous metals and alloys. Ceramics. Polymers. Composites. Conductors,
semiconductors and superconductors. Glasses
Textbook: Michael F. Ashby, D, Jones, An Introduction to Properties, Applications and
Design, Third Edition, 2008
Reference: Norman E. D Mechanical Behavior of Materials, 3rd Edition, 2006
1- Discovering the breadth of materials science, with sessions exploring not just
engineering materials.
2- Learning the art of materials selection, combination and optimum use in
materials technology across a range of engineering applications
3- Discovering the fundamental relationships between different materials, the form
they take and the jobs they perform
4- Exploring the physical and chemical properties of modern materials and how
they determine their application
5- Working on a team project to design, build and test such as aerospace
component and materials used in car manufacture
6- Improving skills in team building, communication, time management, problem-
solving, planning and presentation

Weeks
1
Discovering the breadth of materials science,
1
2
Learning the art of materials selection, combination and
optimum use in materials technology across a range of
engineering applications
3
3
Discovering the fundamental relationships between different
materials, the form they take and the jobs they perform
3
4
Exploring the physical and chemical properties of modern
materials and how they determine their application
2
5
Working on a team project to design, build and test such as
aerospace component and materials used in car manufacture 3
6
Improving skills in team building, communication, time
management, problem-solving, planning and presentation
2

Class Schedule:
135

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Materials
Selection(
Elective Course)
ChE 413 413 3 1* - 3
Selection criteria for metals, alloys, ceramics and plastics. Mechanical behavior, corrosion
and oxidation resistance at ambient and elevated temperatures. Materials for marine
environments, oil production and transport, refineries, petrochemical and desalination
industries. Refractory materials. Computer applications, and economic considerations
Textbook: Michael F. Ashby , Kara Johnson Materials and Design: The Art and
Science of Material Selection in Product Design, 2005
Reference: Mahmud M. F Materials Selection for Engineering Design: Structure,
Properties and Application, 1997 B002BMJ5QU
1- Provide students with the knowledge and skills required to enable them to carry out the
selection of appropriate materials for a wide range of engineering and other applications.
2- Learning about materials selection procedures. Check lists. Elementary stressing calculations.
Choice of fabrication techniques. Case studies. Data sources. Material selection group exercise.
Material selection individual exercise.
3- familiarity with the chemical names and/or compositions of metals and alloys
4- Understanding of the ranges of properties and processing characteristics exhibited by the above
materials, including the variations within a single family and the differences between families of
materials.
5- Understanding of the importance of consideration of component manufacturing method as part
of the materials selection exercise.
6- Learning how to interrogate the database and become familiar with materials selection charts
and materials selection indices for a wide variety of engineering situations
136

1
Provide students with the knowledge and skills required to
enable them to carry out the selection of appropriate materials for
a wide range of engineering and other applications.
2
2
Learning about materials selection procedures. Check lists.
Elementary stressing calculations. Choice of fabrication
techniques. Case studies. Data sources. Material selection group
exercise. Material selection individual exercise.
2
3
familiarity with the chemical names and/or compositions of
metals and alloys
2
4
Understanding of the ranges of properties and processing
characteristics exhibited by the above materials, including the
variations within a single family and the differences between
families of materials.
3
5
Understanding of the importance of consideration of component
manufacturing method as part of the materials selection exercise.
2
6
Learning how to interrogate the database and become familiar
with materials selection charts and materials selection indices for
a wide variety of engineering situations
2
Class Schedule:

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 2 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Extractive ChE 414 414 3 1* - 3
137

Metallurgy(
Elective Course)
Major operations in the iron and steel-making industry; direct reduction processes, blast furnaces,
converter and electric-arc steel-making and steel refining methods; electro slag (ESR) and vacuum
induction refining (VIR). Bauxite production. Electro-thermal reduction of cryolite to produce
commercial aluminum. Production of TiO
2.
Extractive metallurgy of titanium.

Gold extraction.
Continuous casting.
Textbook: Alan. C, an introduction to Metallurgy, 2
nd
Edition, Arnold, 1975
1. Describe the various fields of material sciences and their relationship and purpose
as well as the relationship of various metallurgic studies and their application
2. Explain the process of extractive metallurgy specific to iron and steel making.
3. Define the characteristics of various metals, the methods of Identification and
material standards.
4. Describe and demonstrate the various types of heat-treatment performed on carbon
steels.
5. Describe and demonstrate various procedures required for basic mechanical testing
of metals.
6. Read and interpret simple binary phase diagrams and explain various topic areas
related to metallographic and structure of metals.
7. Describe and identify key knowledge relating to non-ferrous metals, specialty
materials, surface treatments and testing.

Weeks
1
Describe the various fields of material sciences and their
relationship and purpose as well as the relationship of various
metallurgic studies and their application
2
2
Explain the process of extractive metallurgy specific to iron and
steel making.
2
3
Define the characteristics of various metals, the methods of
Identification and material standards.
2
4
Describe and demonstrate the various types of heat-treatment
performed on carbon steels.
2
5
Describe and demonstrate various procedures required for basic
mechanical testing of metals.
2
6
Read and interpret simple binary phase diagrams and explain
various topic areas related to metallographic and structure of
metals.
2
7
Describe and identify key knowledge relating to non-ferrous
metals, specialty materials, surface treatments and testing.
2
Class Schedule:
Engineering design: 05
138

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 2 2 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Catalysis ChE 422 422 3 1* - 3
Kinetics of homogeneous and heterogeneous catalytic reactions. Physical and chemical
properties of solid catalysts. Preparation, activity, selectivity, deactivation and regeneration
of catalysts. Applications to refining and petrochemical industries
Textbook: M. Albert M, V, Kinetics of Catalytic reactions, Springer, 2000
Reference: Thomas, W, j and Thomas, J, M, Introduction to the Principles of
Heterogeneous Catalysis, Academic Press, London, 2001
1. Define and Understand difference between homogeneous and heterogeneous
catalytic reactions.
2. Design kinetic experiments involving heterogeneous catalysts.
3. Acquire valid rate data, to determine the presence or absence of heat and mass
transfer limitations in these data. A special emphasis is placed on assessing mass
transfer effects, particularly in liquid-phase reactions.
4. Select and simplify reaction models, to derive rate expressions based on
these models, and to assess the consistency of these rate equations.
5. Discuss of the assumptions related to the derivation of adsorption isotherms and
reaction models to understand the limitations of these models and to feel
comfortable in their application.
6. Define the rate of chemical reaction and apply the mole balance equations to a
batch reactor, CSTR, PFR, and PBR.
139

7. Learn Solid catalysts preparation and characterization techniques.
8. Compute the catalyst activity, conversion, selectivity and the yield if catalytic
techniques.
9. Discuss catalyst deactivation and poisoning of the catalyst.
10. Know Industrial catalytic processes.

Weeks
1
Introduction 1
2
Adsorption 2
3
Allied phenomena on catalyst surface 2
4
Design of catalytic reactors 2
5
Preparation of solid catalysts
1
6
Characterization of solid catalysts 1
7
Catalyst deactivation 2
8
Poisoning of catalysts 1
Class Schedule:
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 1 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITL
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Unit operation
laboratory( Core
Course)
ChE 435 1 5 - 3
Pre-requisites ChE 332, ChE 334
Experimental study of unit operations using pilot size equipment. Safety considerations .
Data analysis. Selected topics related to unit operation such as membrane separation and
mechanical separation, etc
140

Textbook: McCabe, W.L. Smith J.C. & Harriott P., Unit Operations of
Chemical Engineering, 5
th
Edition. McGraw Hill, 1993
Reference: Coulson J.M. and Richardson J.F., Chemical Engineering.
Vol. 2, Pergamon Press (U.K.) 1990
1. Determine diffusion coefficients of vapor in air.
2. Determine diffusion coefficients of liquid in liquid.
3. List main heat exchangers used in industry.
4. Explain differences between counter current and co current flow in heat
exchangers.
5. Derive expression for LMTD for double pipe and shell and tube Heat exchanger.
6. Determine overall heat transfer coefficient for double pipe and shell and tube
heat exchanger.
7. Explain effect of change of Reynolds number (R
e
) on the heat transfer
coefficient.
8. Study sedimentation operation and its applications
9. List factors affecting sedimentation operation.
10. Calculate sedimentation velocity of solid particles and the effect of different
concentrations on mass flux.
11. Explain drying operation and its applications.
12. Define drying rate (constant and falling and rising rate)
13. Determine overall drying coefficient
14. Explain size reduction operation and particulate solids characteristics.
15. Draw oversize, undersize and sieve opening curves.
16. Use screen analysis to determine the average particle size.
17. Explain liquid-liquid extraction operation, distribution, extract and raffinate
phases.
18. List types of liquid - liquid extraction equipments.
19. Determine extraction efficiency for ternary system.
20. List safety considerations for flammable and toxic liquids in the laboratory.
21. List the types of cooling towers.
22. List the application of cooling towers in chemical industries.
23. Explain distillation operation and its applications.
24. List the types of distillation columns and distillation operations.
25. Use T-y-x and y-x diagram of binary mixture to determine the effect of reflux
ratio on quality of top product and the pressure drop in the column.
26. Determine the number of theoretical plates by McCabe Thiele method.
27. Determine the overall efficiency and tray efficiency using Murphree method.

1 Liquid Diffusion 1
2 Gas Diffusion 1
3 Heat exchangers 2
4 Sedimentation operation 1
5 Drying Operation 1
6 Size Reduction 1
7 Liquid liquid extraction 1
8 Cooling Towers 1
141

9 Distillation Process and its applications 2

Course Schedule
Lecture: 2 one hour session per week
Lab.: one session 3 hours lab per week
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 3 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Modeling and
Simulation(Core
Course)
ChE 441 3 1* - 3
This course is designed to give a chemical engineering student the ability to solve system
of algebraic- differential equations. The course will develop student abilitys to drive
system models and simulate digitally. The student is also trained on available simulation
computer packages (Design II, ChE-Cad & Math-lab).
Textbook: Luyben W. L, Process Modeling Simulation & Control,
2
nd
Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1990
Reference: Norman .H, Process Modeling and Computer Aided
Design in Chemical Engineering, John Wiley and Sons
,2000

1. Apply Newton-Raphson method and wegstein method to find roots of non-
linear equation.
2. Apply of Euler method and 4
th
order Runge-Kutta method for numerical
solution of ordinary differential equation.
3. Apply of the above root finding method for State equations.
142

4. Breakdown Higher order O.D.E. into system of 1
st
order O.D.E
5. Apply of system of 1
st
order O.D.E. for chemical processes
6. Define Control volume (CV) for any chemical process.
7. Identify CV characteristic to chemical system.
8. State Assumptions for simplifying system model.
9. Analyze Total Material Balance for flow system
10. Write the basic principle of total material balance to holding tank with
constant density.
11. Write Model of holding tank with constant cross-section area and variable
cross-section area.
12. Demonstrate Simulation of holding tank using Euler method or 4
th
order
Rung-kutta method with initial condition and final time using Excel.
13. Develop Component Material Balance for flow system
14. Write Model of mixing tank with multi-inputs and multi-output.
15. Write Model of CSTR with general reversible two reactant and two product
reaction.
16. Illustrate Simulation of mixing tank with total and components material
balance using Euler Method or 4
th
order Rung-kutta method , applying on
Excel
17. Develop energy Balance for flow system with single input single output, and
multi input multi output system. Define enthalpy temperature relation.
18. Write Modeling and setup simulation a heater with input output steams.
19. Write Model and Setup simulation of non-isothermal CSTR.
20. Write Model coil heater/cooler and jacket heater/cooler.
21. Develop Model and Setup simulation of holding tanks in series.
22. Develop Model and Setup simulation of CSTR in series ( with constant
holdup and variable holdup, isothermal and non-isothermal )
23. Develop Model and Setup simulation of Distillation column ( plate,
condenser and re-boiler )
24. Develop Model and setup simulation for CSTR and Distillation in series
25. Define C.V. for distributed parameter system.
26. Apply finite difference method for solving partial differential equation.
27. Develop Model and setup simulation for a fluid flow in pipe
28. Develop Model and setup simulation for a plug flow reactor.
29. Develop Model and setup simulation for a double pipe heat-exchanger.
30. Develop Model and setup simulation for one direction conduction and one
direction diffusion.
31. Develop Model and setup simulation for a closed loop system; study the
effect of different controller type and controller parameters on state variable.

1 Introduction review numerical method 1
2 Total mass balance &Components mole alance 1
3 Energy Balance 1
4 4
th
Order Runge -Kutta method 1
5 System in series 1
6 Distillation Column 1
7 CSTR & Distillation in series 2
8 Closed loop system 2

Class Schedule:
Lecture: Two 1.5 hour sessions per week
143

Tutorial: 2 hours per week
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 2 3 3 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Process
Control(Core
Course)
ChE 442 3 3 - 4
Pre-requisites ChE 321, ChE 334 , MATH 205
Mathematical modeling of process control. Transfer functions. Dynamic behavior of
chemical processes. Feedback control. Dynamic behavior of closed-loop systems. Stability
analysis. Frequency response analysis. Controller design and tuning. Introduction to
computer control. Laboratory and simulations applications
Textbook Donald R. C, Process Systems Analysis and Control,
2
nd
second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1991
Reference:
Luyben W. L, Process Modeling Simulation & Control, 2
nd

Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1990
1. Define what is meant by chemical process control.
2. Describe the needs and the incentives for controlling a chemical process
3. Provide the rationale for studying the material that follows in subsequent topics.
4. Analyze the characteristics of a control system
5. Formulate the problems that must be solved during its design
6. Explain why we need to develop a mathematical description (model)
7. Describe a methodology for the modeling of a chemical process
8. Determine the scope and the difficulties of the mathematical modeling for process
control purpose.
144

9. Develop simple input and output models for chemical processes.
10. Use Laplace transforms.
11. Use initial and final value theory
12. Describe the behavior of different basic systems
13. Analyze various typical processes
14. Describe the dynamic response of the process
15. Develop the transfer function of the process.
16. Identify the order of the process.
17. Develop the response of the system to different forcing function
18. Compare between different order processes.
19. Calculate the process gain and time constant.
20. Analyze the first order systems in series.
21. Develop the main characteristics of second order systems.
22. Discuss the notion of the feedback loop.
23. Describe the hard ware elements needed for its implementation.
24. Identify the types of feedback controllers
25. Examine the effect of feedback controllers and response of a chemical process.
26. Design appropriate types of feedback controllers to control a given process.
27. Design the controller parameters
28. Solve some special problems that are encountered during the design of feedback
controllers.
29. Analyze the stability characteristics of a feedback control system.

1 Meaning of chemical process control 1
2 Characterization of control system 1
3 Simple input and output models for chemical processes 1
4 Laplace transform 1
5 Linear open loop systems 4
6 Linear closed loop systems 6

Course Schedule:
Lecture: two 1.5 hour session per week
Tutorial: one 3 hours session per week
Engineering science: 87.5 %
Engineering design: 12.5 %

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
145

3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Plant
Design(Core
Course)
ChE 451 3 1* -
Pre-requisites ChE 321, ChE 334, IE 255
Chemical and petrochemical processes plant design. Locations and layout of chemical
process plant. Operability, controllability reliability and safety requirement of the design.
Cost estimation. Utilization of simulation and design packages

Textbook: Peter M.S and Timmerhaus K.D., Plant design and
Economics for Chemical Engineers, 5
th
Edition, McGraw-
Hill, 1991
Reference: Turton R, Bailie R, Whiting W & Shaeiwitz J, Analysis,
Synthesis, and design of chemical processes, 1
st
Edition
,Printice Hall, PTR 1998
.
1. List the stages of a plant design process and feasibility study steps
2. Differentiate between optimum economic and operating design alternatives
3. State the various types of diagrams used and be able to interpret and sketch them
and identify the plant site selection, site layout and plant layout criteria
4. Estimate column diameter and calculate tray hydraulic for bubble cap and sieve
tray, calculate pressure drop for packed tower and column cost
5. List types of reboilers and condensers and apply energy balance for the column to
estimate the reboiler and condenser duties and utilities requirement
6. Recognize types of control valves and its operational problems, explain
distillation column control system and calculate important parameters in sizing
the control valves
7. Explain the theory of ejectors, types, steam and cooling water required
8. Differentiate between different types of vessels and recognize vessel operational
problems and their design solutions
9. Estimate diameter, length of horizontal and vertical vessels
10. Identify reactor types and applications
11. Calculate reactor volume, residence time, pressure drop and the reactor cost
12. Outline different heat exchange systems and estimate the heat exchanger cost
13. Recognize fan cooler different types and calculate fan cooler duty and dimensions
14. Apply psychrometric chart and energy balance for cooling tower calculations
15. Estimate moody and Fanning friction factors and calculate line and fittings
pressure drop for a given process
16. Distinguish the difference between bubble, slug, churn and annular flow pattern
146

17. Recognize different types of pump and compressor and describe pump cavitation
and compressor surge problems
18. Explain net positive suction head for a pump, NPSH, and calculate the required
NPSH.
19. Apply affinity law for a pump with different variables and calculate head and
capacity for pumps in series and parallel
20. Construct system curve of a given process and calculate compressor head
21. Identify metallic and non metallic group materials and its characteristics and
select the proper pipe material for a given process
22. Distinguish between atmospheric and pressure storage tanks
23. Estimate storage tank dimensions and storage tanks losses
24. Express important safety measurements
25. Recognize different safety codes
26. Estimate fixed, working capital investments, pay back time and profitability
27. Outline and estimate different cost indexes
28. Use Excel in spreadsheet calculation and graph demonstration and use of any
equation solver software
29. Use either CHEMCAD or HYSYS simulation package to design a chemical
process

1 Design process basics 1
2 Design of a distillation column 1
3 Design of vessels 1
4 Design of a reactor 2
5 Design of heat exchange systems 1
6 Hydraulic calculations and line sizing 1
7 Pumps and compressors 2
8 Materials selection 1
9 Storage tanks 1
10 Safety 1
11 Cost estimation 1
12 Computer use 1
Course Schedule:
Lecture: two 1.5 hour sessions per week
Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
3 3 2 3 3 3 3 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*

147


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Computer Aided
Design for Chem.
Eng. (Elective
Course)
ChE 452 452 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites ChE 441 &ChE 451
Techniques for computer aided design of chemical processing systems. Thermodynamic
property models and data bases. Introduction to linear and nonlinear programming. Design
of unit operations and chemical reactors. Flow sheeting. Process integration. Development
of algorithm. Case studies with extensive use of computer software.
Textbook: Seider W., Seader J. D., Lewin D., Process Design Principles: Synthesis,
Analysis, and Evaluation, John Wiley, 1999

This course provides a hands-on-experience to the art of computer-aided process design
and how to use simulation software to solve process design problems. Flow sheet
simulator (Aspen Plus) will be employed to perform detailed (rigorous) plant design
calculations and to evaluate alternative design and operation options.

Weeks
1
Introduction to computer-aided process design packages
2
2
General structure of computer-aided design programs
2
3
Introduction to Aspen Plus
2
4
Aspen Plus Graphical User Interface
2
5
Aspen Plus Basic Input
2
6
Unit Operations Models; Distillation, Reactors, Heat
Exchangers,
2
7
Design Specification 2
Class Schedule:

148

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 1 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Petroleum Refinery
Engineering(Elective
Course)
ChE 462 462 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites ChE 321 & ChE 334
Oil production. Surface operations. Characterization and classification of crude oils.
Physical properties of oils. Refinery operations; atmospheric and vacuum distillation,
treatment processes, catalytic cracking, reforming, alkylation, coking, asphalt production
and lubricating oil production. Blending of refinery products. Waste treatment.
Textbook: Nelson, W.L., Petroleum Refining Engineering,. McGraw Hill, New York.


1- To present overview of the operations of a typical Refinery
2- To highlight the physical and chemical principles involved and how they are utilized in these operations
3- To highlight important product specification and their relevance to product performance.
4- Major insights into the technology, economics and major trends of the petroleum refining industry
5- Detailed study of petroleum refinery processes and products
6- To understand unit configurations, process variables, and its monitoring
7- To provide students with some case studies in important process parameters and their control

NO Topic Covered During Class:
Duration in Weeks
1
To present overview of the operations of a typical Refinery 2
149

2
To highlight the physical and chemical principles involved and
how they are utilized in these operations
2
3
To highlight important product specification and their relevance
to product performance.
2
4
major insights into the technology, economics and major trends
of the petroleum refining industry
2
5
detailed study of petroleum refinery processes and products 2
6
To understand unit configurations, process variables, and its
monitoring
2
7
To provide students with some case studies in important process
parameters and their control
2
Class Schedule:

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 3 2 3 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Natural Gas
Engineering
(Elective Course)
ChE 463 463 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites ChE 321 & ChE 334
Characterization and properties of natural gas. Gas gathering systems. Gas-oil multistage
separation. Gas treatment and liquefaction. Gas transportation through pipelines, signal-
telemetering Industrial usages.
Textbook: Xiuli.W & Michaels Advanced Natural Gas Engineering, First Edition,
Gulf publishing Company, 2009
150

1. Understand the methods used to predict the volumetric and thermodynamic
properties of natural gas.
2. Predict conditions for hydrate formation in natural gases.
3. Specify compressor power requirements and calculate appropriate efficiencies.
4. Calculate flow rates through valves and chokes.
5. Calculate pressure losses through pipelines, both vertical and horizontal.
6. Understand the derivation of the pseudo-pressure function for flow of gas in
reservoirs.
7. Understand the basis for and application of the various well test methods for gas
reservoirs
Weeks
1
Understand the methods used to predict the volumetric and
thermodynamic properties of natural gas.
2
2
Predict conditions for hydrate formation in natural gases.
2
3
Specify compressor power requirements and calculate
appropriate efficiencies.
2
4
Calculate flow rates through valves and chokes.
2
5
Calculate pressure losses through pipelines, both vertical and
horizontal.
2
6
Understand the derivation of the pseudo-pressure function for
flow of gas in reservoirs.
2
7
Understand the basis for and application of the various well test
methods for gas reservoirs
2
Class Schedule:
Engineering science:
Engineering design:

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 3 2 3 2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*

151

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Petrochemical
Technology(
Elective Course)
ChE 464 464 3 1* - 3
Production technologies of synthesis gas, olefins and aromatic. Manufacture of important
petrochemicals derived from base chemicals and synthesis gas. Production technologies of
important polymers and plastics.
Textbook: Hatch. L.F. & Matter. S. From Hydrocarbons to Petrochemicals,
Gulf Publishing Company, Houston.1981
1. Introduce The students to petrochemical industries in Saudi Arabia.
2. Discuss The major petrochemicals produced in Saudi Arabia and the economic
importance of petrochemical industries.
3. Explain The major components of petrochemical plants.
4. Acquire The knowledge of the different types of catalytic processes, catalytic
reactors and separation techniques.
5. Understanding The safety precautions in petrochemical processes.
6. Knowledge The different processes employed in natural gas purifications.
7. Know The processes for petrochemicals from methane
8. Explain the production of olefins as primary petrochemical products.
9. Discuss The production of petrochemical from ethylene, propylene, higher olefins
and BTX.
10. Understand The concept of thermoplastic and thermosetting resins.
11. Explain The production processes for polyethylene, PVC, polypropylene and
thermosets.

Weeks
1
Introduction
1
2
Petrochemical from methane
2
3
Production of olefins
1
4
Petrochemicals from ethylene
2
5
Petrochemical from propylene and higher olefins
2
6
Petrochemical from benzene, toluene and xylene
2
7
Thermoplastics, thermosetting end engineering resins
2
Class Schedule:
152

Communication,IT,
andNumericalSkills
InterpersonalSkills
andResponsibility
NCAAA
Domains
of
Learning
ABETand
additional
Program
Outcomes
2 X
Max.
Attainable
Levelof
Learning
*


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Industrial
Pollution
Control(Elective
Course)
ChE 465 465 3 1* -
Sources of pollution from chemical industries. Standards and legalization. Health and
environmental effects of pollution. Air pollutants; particulate, SO
x
, NO
x
, and organic
vapors. Air pollution control. Treatment of industrial wastewater. Handling of solid waste.
Monitoring of pollutants. Case studies for specific industries like petrochemicals,
fertilizers, desalination and petroleum refining

Textbook: Howard S. Peavy, Donald R. Rove & George Tchobanoglous, Environmental
Engineering, 4
th
edition, McGraw-Hill, 2001
and , Synthesis , ysis Anal , Shaeiwitz J & Whiting W , Bailie R , Turton R : Reference
design of Chemical processes, 1
st
Edition, Printice
Hall, PTR 1998
.
1. Define the impact of humans upon the environment and the role of the environmental
engineer.
2. Define and characterize the physical, chemical, and biological water quality parameters.
3. Identify and describe basic laboratory measurements, such as BOD, TSS; as stated in
standard Methods.
4. Discuss the microbiological impact of bacteria, virus, and protozoa in wastewater.
5. Classify water purification processes in natural systems.
153

6. Discuss why sanitary wastes must be treated before the liquids and solids are returned to
the environment.
7. Categorize common wastewater plant equipments, definitions and abbreviations.
8. Implement a planned design strategy for a sludge treatment process.
9. Define and characterize the air quality parameters.
10. Classify air pollutants according to origin, chemical composition and state of matter.
11. Apply the natural processes of air purification in engineered systems.
12. List control devices for particulate and gaseous contaminants.
13. List and describe the classes of hazardous materials.
14. Describe the methodologies utilized for the management and disposal of hazardous solid
wastes.

1
Introduction
1
2
Part 1 Water
3
Water Quality
2
4
Water Purification Processes in Natural Systems
2
5
Engineered Systems for Wastewater treatment
2
6
Part 2 Air
7
Air Quality
1
8
Engineered Systems for Air Pollution Control
2
9
Part 3 Solid Waste
10
Solid Waste: Definitions, Characteristics and Perspectives
1
11 Engineered Systems for Solid Waste Management

2

154

DEPARTMENT OF
CIVIL ENGINEERING
155

INTRODUCTION
Civil engineering is the profession which designs, constructs, operates and manages the
basic systems that make civilization possible and which assesses the impacts of such
systems on the natural environment. The civil engineer must deal with the human impact of
engineering, social, moral, legal and environmental issues that concern us to a far greater
degree than ever before. As a matter of fact, civil engineering has played a key role in the
development of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia during the past several decades.

The Department of Civil Engineering is one of the major and active engineering
departments at King Abdulaziz University (KAU) since 1395H/1975G. It offers B.Sc.,
M.Sc. (thesis and non-thesis options) as well as Ph.D. degrees in civil engineering. The
Department has a strong highly qualified and experienced full-time faculty comprising 11
professors, 10 associate professors, 13 assistant professors, and 5 lecturers, apart from the
supporting laboratory and secretarial staff .

Civil engineering programs are intended to satisfy the needs of the country. The rapid
introduction of modern materials, measurement techniques, construction methods and
management tools require properly trained civil engineers. The civil engineering program
and its objectives are continuously updated keeping in view these factors.

The civil engineering program B. Sc. at KAU is designed to develop knowledgeable and
creative engineers with strong capabilities for innovation and management. Civil
Engineering graduates have a wide variety of employment opportunities in both the private
as well as the public sectors. Civil engineering has become an extremely diverse field with
many areas of application.
A distinguished learning and research community in Civil Engineering knowledge
Offer high-quality education and conduct innovative research in Civil Engineering to
provide sustainable solutions for societal needs.

The Program Educational Objectives are:
7. Graduates will have the necessary knowledge of engineering fundamentals for
successful professional careers in civil engineering.
8. Graduates will demonstrate professional skills and actively participate in the
sustainable development of the society.
9. Graduates will continue to learn and adapt to an evolving professional environment.

Aspectsofdevelopment
The department of the Civil Engineering has the basic resources needed to implement the
new plan. However, additional resources are needed to enhance the department ability to
continually improve offering of the program and accommodate additional number of
156

students due to the increase in demand for civil engineers in the Kingdom. Future plans
shall consider the following:
15. Acquisition of specialized software program necessary for teaching of the
different civil engineering subjects.
16. Modernization and upgrading of Civil Engineering Laboratories and facilities.
17. Recruiting highly qualified technicians to operate and maintain laboratories
equipment.
18. Recruiting highly qualified faculty members in all specializations to fill the
vacancies and to replace retiring faculty members.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
In order to qualify for a BS degree in Civil Engineering, students must successfully
complete 155 semester credit units with an overall GPA of 2. out of 5 or better. The
student has to complete 49 required courses and two elective courses with a grade of D or
better including 10 weeks of Industrial Summer Training and a Capstone B.Sc. design
project as detailed in the ChE curriculum requirements described here after.
Key of tenth digit in the codes of CE courses
2 Construction engineering and management
3 Geotechnical Engineering
4 Structural Engineering
5 Water Resources Engineering
6 Environmental Engineering
7&8 Surveying & Transportation Engineering
9 Training and research courses and special topics
5. Each department is referred to by a code of a minimum of two and max of 4 letters
7. The tenth digit refers to specialty within the department/branch
UnitsrequiredfortheB.Sc.degreeintheDepartmentofCivilEngineering.
Summer Training 2
Total 155
157

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics 3 PHYS 281, MATH 202
CE 201 Engineering Mechanics (Statics) 3 IE 200 , PHY 281
CE 202 Strength of Materials 4
CE 201, MENG 130, MATH
203
CE 321 Construction Management 3 IE 255
CE 332 Geology for Civil Engineers 3 CE 202, CHEM 281
CE 333 Geotechnical Engineering 4 CE 332, IE 202, EE 251
CE 340 Structural Analysis-I 3 CE 202, EE 201, MATH 205
CE 341 Materials of Construction 4 CE 202, CHEM 281
CE 342 Reinforced Concrete Design I 3 CE 340, CE 341, IE 202
CE 352 Hydraulics 3 MEP 290, IE 202, MATH 204
CE 353 Hydrology & Water Resources Engineering 3 CE 352
CE 371 Surveying 3 MATH 202, MENG 102
CE 381 Transportation Engineering 3 CE 371, ARAB 201
CE 390 Summer Training 2
CE 321, CE 332, CE 340,
CE 341, CE 352
CE 401 Civil Engineering Fundamentals 1
CE 321, CE 333, CE 342,
CE 352, CE 381
CE 422 Construction Engineering 3 CE 321, CE 342, ISLS 301
CE 434 Foundation Engineering 3 CE 333
CE 440 Structural Analysis -II 3 CE 340
CE 442 Reinforced Concrete Design II 3 CE 342
CE 461 Environmental Engineering 4 CE 352
CE 482 Highway Design & Construction 4 CE 381, CE 341
CE 499 B.Sc. Project 4
CE 321, CE 333, CE 342,
CE 352, CE 381
Total 71

158

Students select 2 courses (6 credit units) out of those in the table.
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
CE 423 Construction Estimating & Scheduling 3 CE 422
CE 424 Construction Contracting 3 CE 321
CE 435 Applications in Foundation Engineering 3 CE 434
CE 439 Soil Improvement 3 CE 434
CE 441 Design of Steel Structures 3 CE 340
CE 444 Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design 3 CE 342
CE 451 Design of Hydraulic Structures 3 CE 352
CE 457 Water Resources Planning & Management 3 CE 353
CE 465 Wastewater Reclamation and Reuse 3 CE 461
CE 471 GPS and GIS Applications 3 CE 371
CE 483 Traffic Engineering 3 CE 381
CE 486 Flexible Pavement Maintenance 3 CE 381 , CE 341
CE 497 Special Topic in Civil Engineering 3 Chairman's Approval
159

A TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING
3
rd
Year
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ARAB 201 Arabic Language(2) 3 CE 202 Strength of Materials 4
CE 201
(Statics)
3
EE 251 Basic Electrical
Engineering
4
CE 371 Surveying 3 ISLS 201 Islamic Culture (2) 2
IE 202
Design II
2
MATH 205 Series and Vector
Calculus
3
MATH 204 Differential Equations 3 MEP 290 FluidMechanics 3
MENG 130 Basic Workshop 2
Total Total 16

4
th
Year
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
CE 321
Construction
Management
3
CE 332
Geology for Civil
Engineers
3
CE 333 Geotechnical
Engineering
4
CE 340 Structural Analysis-I 3
CE 342 Reinforced Concrete
Design - I
3
CE 341 Materials of Construction 4
CE 381 Transportation
Engineering
3
CE 352 Hydraulics 3
CE 353 Hydrology & Water
Resources Engineering
3
CE 390 Summer Training 2
Total

Total 17

4
th
CE 390 Summer Training 2 Cr. Hr.

160

5
th
Year
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
CE 401
Civil Engineering
Fundamentals
1 ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2
CE 422 Construction Engineering 3 CE 440 Structural Analysis -II 3
CE 434 Foundation Engineering 3 CE 442
Reinforced Concrete
Design -II
3
CE 461
Environmental
Engineering
4 CE 482
Highway Design &
Construction
4
CE 499 B.Sc. Project 4 CE xxx Elective from CE Dept. 3
CE xxx Elective from CE Dept. 3
Total Total 15
161

COURSE DESCRIPTION

CE 202 Strength of Materials (4:3,3)
Reviewofstatics,internalreactions.Conceptofstress.Conceptofstrain,Stressstrain
relations.Deformationofaxiallyloadedmembers.Torsionofcircularmembers.Normalforce,
shearforceandbendingmomentdiagrams.Flexureandshearingstressesinbeams.
Transformationofplanestresses.Conceptofdesignofbeams.Conceptofbeamdeflection.
Conceptofbucklingofcolumns.Laboratoryexperiments.
Prerequisite: CE 201, MENG 130, MATH 203

CE 321 Construction Management (3:3,0)
CharacteristicsofConstructionIndustry;projectdeliverysystems.Thedesignand
constructionprocess.Constructioncontracting.Constructionplanning.Cashflow.
Conceptualcostestimation.QualityandSafetyManagement.
Prerequisite: IE 255

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO. Th. Pr. Tr. TCU
Geology for Civil
Engineers
CE 332 3 3 0 3
Pre-requisites
CE 202 Strength of Materials,
CHEM 281 General Chemistry Laboratory
Introduction to engineering geology, earth surface and physical properties of earth
materials, geological processes, types and classification of rocks, physical and
mineralogical properties of rocks, basics of structural geology, soil formation and
properties, clay minerals, groundwater

Textbook(s):
Mathewson, C.C., Engineering Geology, Bell & Howell Co., Columbus, OH 43216, USA,
latest edition.
Dunn, I.S., Anderson, L.R. and Keifer, F.W., Fundamentals of Geotechnical Analysis, John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., N.Y., USA, latest edition.
Das, B.M., Properties of Soils , Engineering Press, Inc. San Jose, CA, USA., latest edition

Reference(s):
McLean,A.C. and Gribble,C.D. Geology for Civil Engineers.
Waltham,T. Foundations of Eng. Geology

Course Leaning Objectives: By completion of the course, the students should be able
to:
1. Explain geology, earth surface features and processes
2. Discuss rock formation and rock types.
3. Describe minerals and their physical properties
162

4. Recognize structural features of earth crust and engineering
considerations
5. Determine weight-volume relationships
6. Classify rocks and soils. According to engineering systems

Course Topics and their Duration:

Sr. No.

Course Topics
Duration
in
Weeks
1

INTRODUCTION:
-Engineering geology and civil engineering; Earth surface;
-Physical properties of earth materials

0.5
0.5
2
PHYSICAL GEOLOGY:
-Surface processes; Work of Wind, River and Sea.
-Weathering of rocks; physical and chemical weathering.
-Landslides and Earthquakes

0.5
1.0
0.5
3
PETROLOGY:
-Rock formation processes;
-Types and properties of rocks; Igneous, sedimentary and
metamorphic rocks
-Tutorial: Lab study of rock specimens;
-Types and properties of rocks; Igneous, sedimentary and
metamorphic rocks
0.5
0.5

0.5
0.5
4
MINERALOGY:
-Physical properties of minerals;
-Tutorial: Lab study of mineral specimens; Hardness and streak

0.5
0.5
5
ENGINEERING CLASSIFICATION OF ROCKS:
-Rock substance classification
-Tutorial: Lab study of Schmidt hammer test;
-Rock mass classification;
-Tutorial: Lab. Study of rock cores for RQD.

0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
6
STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY:
-Introduction to plate tectonics;
-Dip and strike. Folds; Faults; Joints;
Engineering considerations.
1.0
0.5
7
SOIL FORMATION:
-Weathering and soils;
-Important soil types.

CLAY MINERALS:
Types of clay minerals;

0.5
0.5

163

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two 1 hour and twenty minutes sessions per week
Course Contribution
Eng. Science: 100 %
Eng. Design: 0 %

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
Maximum Attainable Level
of Learning*
2 1 2
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by:
Dr. Zaki A Baghdadi

Civil Eng. Dept., Room 219 Building H , E-mail: baghdadiz @ yahoo.com

Last Updated: December 2009

-Particle forces.
0.5
0.5
8
WEIGHT-VOLUME RELATIONSHIPS:
-Introduction to weight-volume relationships; -exercises

0.5,0.5
9

SOIL CLASSIFICATION:
Grain size distribution by mechanical and hydrometer methods;
Atterberg limits;
soil classification systems; AASHTO, and Unified soil
classification systems.
0.5

0.5
10 student presentations.
2 .0

164

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO.
Th. Pr. Tr. TCU
Geotechnical
Engineering
CE 333

4 3 0 4
Pre-requisites CE 332: Geology for Civil Engineers,
EE 251: Basic Electrical Engineering and
IE 202 : Introduction to Engineering Design II.

Weight-volume relationships. Physical properties of soil. Soil classification. Permeability
and seepage. Shear strength. Compressibility, consolidation and settlement. Introduction to
lateral earth pressure and slope stability.

Textbook:
Das, B. M. Principles of Geo-technical Engineering (latest ed.)

Reference:
Dunn, et Al. Fundamentals of Geo-technical Analysis(latest ed.)

to:

1- Identify engineering properties of soil.
2- Apply principles of fluid flow to permeability and seepage problems.
3- Solve for soil stresses: in situ and external loads.
4- Apply principles of shear strength and compressions and its applications in
soils.
5- Apply geotechnical information for solving lateral earth pressure and slope
stability problems
6- Conduct experiment, analyze and interpret data.

SR. NO. COURSE TOPICS
DURATION
IN
WEEKS
1

Review of weight-volume relations;
Engineering classification of soil;
Site investigation.
1
2 Soil water;
Soil permeability
1
3 Seepage

1
4 In-situ stresses;
Stresses in a soil mass;
Mohr circle of stress;
Stresses due to external loads
2
5 Compressibility of soils 2.5
6 Shear strength of soils 2.5
165

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two 1 hour and twenty minutes sessions per week.
There is laboratory work in this course; each lab session is of 3 hours duration. Lab
Reports on lab. experiments are required
Course Contribution:
Eng. Science: 100 %
Eng. Design: 0 %
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
1 1 1 1
*
Evaluation)

Contact:
Dr Muhammed Z. Gutub
Civil Eng. Dept., Room 203 Building H , E-mail: mgutub@hotmail.com

Last Updated: December, 2009

7 Soil compaction 1.5
8 Lateral earth pressure 1.5
9 Slope stability 1
166

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Structural Analysis I CE 340
3 2 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 202: Strength of Materials,
EE 201: Structured Computer programming, and
MATH 205: Series & Vector calculus.
Basic principles. Analysis of statically determinate trusses, beams, frames, arches, suspension
cables. Influence lines for statically determinate structures. Deflection of structures. Buckling
of columns.
Textbook:
R. C. Hibbeler , " Structural Analysis" 6
th
ed. PEARSON Prentice Hall, 2006

By the completion of the course, the students should be able to:
1. Discuss statically determinacy of beams, frames, trusses in 2D space
2. Analyze statically determinate beams and frames by computing the supports
reactions, internal resisting forces, and drawing normal force (N), shear force (V),
and bending moment (BM) diagrams
3. Analyze statically determinate three hinged arches by computing external reactions
and internal resting forces
4. Construct influence lines (IL) for different functions including reactions, shearing
force, and bending moment in statically determinate beams .Also be able to
maximize certain function by setting the critical location and pattern of the live load
(LL) on the beam
5. Calculate deflections for determinate trusses using virtual work method, and for
beams, and frames using virtual work method, double integration method, moment
area method, and conjugate beam method
6. Calculate loads and stresses Buckling of columns using Euler's formula

Topics Chapter
No
of weeks
1- Basic principals, Review of main topics of Static &
Strength of Materials
1 1
2- Stability and Determinacy of Determinate
Structures
2 1
3- Statically Determinate Trusses, Determinacy &
Stability , Method of Joints, Method of Sections,
3 1
167

Topics Chapter
No
of weeks
and Combined Method
4- Statically Determinate Beams. Reactions, Internal
Forces. Axial Force, Shear Force, and Bending
Moment Diagrams using Method of sections
(expressions), and Step-by-Step procedure
(summation)
4 1
5- Statically Determinate Frames. Stability &
Determinacy, Reactions, Internal Forces. (N), (V),
(BM) diagrams
4 1
6- Types of Arches. Analysis of three Hinged Arches.
Suspension Cables
5 1
7- Influence Lines (IL) for Statically Determinate
Beams
6 2
8- Deflection of Trusses using the Virtual Work
Method. Deflection of Beams and Frames using the
Double Integration Method, the Moment Area
Method, the Virtual Work Method, and the
Conjugate Beam Method
8 4
9- Buckling of Columns.
Hand out 2
Total Number of weeks 14

Course Schedule:
Two lecture sessions per week, 80-mintus each. + One session tutorial
Eng. Science: 95 %
Eng. Design: 5 %

168


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2 1 2 2
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by: Dr. Talal A. Radain

Phone: 6952793 / 6402000 ext: 52793 or 684231

169

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Material of
Construction
CE 341
4 3 1 4
Pre-requisites CE 202: Strength of Materials and
CHEM 281: Chemistry Lab
Manufacturing, Properties and Tests of metals, aggregate, cementing materials, fresh and
hardened PC concrete, asphalt concrete, masonry, wood and plastics. Design and
production of PC concrete and asphalt mixtures. Computer applications in mix design.

Text Book: Mamlouk, Michael S. and Zaniewski John P. M, "Materials for Civil and
Construction Engineers", 2nd edition, Pearson and Printice Hall, USA,
2006.

to:
1. Describe manufacturing process, types, and utilization of metals (steel and
aluminum), aggregate, Portland cement, Asphalt, masonry, wood, and plastics.
2. Interpret materials of construction concepts such as behavior, by identifying
physical, chemical, and mechanical properties of metals (steel and aluminum),
aggregates, fresh and hardened concrete, Asphalt, masonry, wood, and plastics
3. Determine weight - volume relations, and grain size distribution of combined
aggregate (Blending of aggregate),
4. List factors affecting durability of Portland cement concrete.
5. Design of Portland cement concrete and hot asphalt HMA mixtures.
6. Practice long life learning through locating sources of information and reporting the
results and recognizing contemporary issues related to construction materials.

Topic No. Duration in weeks
1. Materials Engineering Concepts 2
2. Metals (steel and aluminum) 1.5
3. Aggregates 2.5
4. Cementing Materials 2.5
5. Portland Cement Concrete 2.5
6. Asphalt Cement Concrete 1
7. Masonry & Tiles 1
8. Wood 1
Total

Class Schedule:
Two lecturer sessions per week, 80-mintus each.
Laboratory/tutorial meets once a week , 3 hours

170

Eng. Science: 85 %
Eng. Design: 15 %


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2 2 2 2 2
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by:
Dr. Waleed H. Khushefati.
Phone: 6402000/68223

Last Updated:
Dec. 2009

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Reinforced
Concrete Design I
CE 342 3 2 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 340: Structural Analysis
CE 341: Material of Construction
IE 202: Introduction to Engineering Design II
Introduction to properties of concrete and reinforcing steel. Behavior of reinforced concrete
under flexure and shear. Introduction to ACI-Code. Types of loads ant their factors.
Ultimate strength method of design. Analysis and design of singly and doubly reinforced
sections. Analysis and design of T-section. Design of beams against shear forces. Design of
one-way slab and stairways. Development length. Design of isolated, combined and wall
footings

Textbooks:
Hasson, M. N. and Al-Manseer, A. Structural Concrete- Theory and Design, 4
th

Edition, John Wiley $ Sons, Inc. 2008.

to:
1.Analyze and design rectangular sections
2.Analyze and design T and L-shape beams
3.Design beams for shear
4.Design one-way slab
5.Design isolated, combined and wall footings
6. Specify the Development Length of steel reinforcement
171


Class Schedule:
Two lecture sessions per week
Eng. Science: 88 %
Eng. Design: 12 %

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by:
Topic No.
Duration in
weeks
1- Introduction and revision, materials and properties of concrete and
reinforcing bars.
1.5
2- Analysis and design of singly reinforced concrete beams, ACI safety code
provisions. 1.5
3- Analysis and Design of doubly reinforced concrete beams
1.5
4- Analysis and design of T and L reinforced concrete beams.
1.5
5- Ultimate strength analysis and design for shear and diagonal tension.
1.5
6- Analysis and Design of continuous beam for flexure using ACI moment
coefficients method.
1.5
7- Analysis and design of Reinforced Concrete solid one-way slabs. .
1.5
8- Footings: types, loads, bearing pressure, size, single, combined and wall
footings
2
9- Design for bond, anchorage and development length.
1.5
Total 14
172

Dr. Rashad Husein
Phone: 6402000/68108
Last Updated:
September 2009
CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Hydraulics CE 352 3 2 0 3
Pre-requisites MEP 290: Fluid Mechanics,
IE 202: Introduction to Engineering Design II
MATH 204: Differential Equations
Pipe flow analysis and design. Steady flow in closed conduits and networks. Steady uniform flow
in open channels. Non-uniform flows in open channels. Flow measurements. Hydraulic
machinery (i.e. Pumps and hydraulic turbines), urban storm drainage, Hydraulic structures,
Computer simulation and analysis.

Textbook(s):
Ned H. C. Hwang and Robert J. Houghtalen, Fundamentals of Hydraulic
Engineering Systems, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall, 1996

References:
Roberson, J.A., Cassidy J.J., Chaudhry, M.H., Hydraulic Engineering, 2nd edition,
John Wiley & sons, inc.,1997

to:
1. Design and analyze of flow in pipelines and water distribution systems and using
computer models for simulation.
2. Study, Analyze and Design uniform and Non-uniform flow in different types of
open channels.
3. Study the flow measurements methods in pipes and open channel.
4. Identify and select different types of pumps and learn about cavitation phenomenon.
5. Study, analyze and design storm water sewer systems.
6. Identify different types of dams and reservoirs

173

Topic No.
Duration in
weeks
1- Pipelines and Pipe Networks
4
2- Open Channel Flow
3
3- Hydraulic Machinery (Water Pumps and
Turbines Turbines)
2
4- Storm Water Network

2
5- Hydraulic Structures
2
6 FlowMeasurements
1
Total
14

Class Schedule:
Laboratory meets once a week, 3 hours
Eng. Science: 25 %
Eng. Design: 75 %
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
1 2 1 1 1
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by:
Dr. Abdullah Al-Ghamdi.
Phone: 695-1761
Last Updated: Fall 1430-1431 H (Fall 2009)
CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Hydrology and Water
Resources
Engineering
CE 353

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 352: Hydraulics
174

Principles of hydrology and water resources engineering. Objectives of water resources
development. Water demand. Hydrologic cycle. Measurement and analysis of precipitation,
evaporation, infiltration and stream flows. Water balance. Reservoirs, Dams and Spillways.
Conjunctive use of surface and groundwater. Planning for water resources development.
Economical analysis of water resources projects.

Textbooks:
Linsley, Kohler and Paulhus, "Hydrology for Engineers", 1988
References:
1. Ojha, Berndtsson and Bhunya "Engineering Hydrology", 2008
2. Chow, Maidment and Mays, "Applied Hydrology", 1988.
3. Ram S. Gupta, Hydrology and Hydraulic systems, 1989.
4. Niel S. Grigg, "Water Resources Planning", 1995.

to:
1. Identify the Importance of water for human activities and the water resources
engineering.
2. Understand and review the global water resources especially S. A.
3. Define the Global Hydrologic Cycle and calculate the Hydrologic items in SA.
4. Analyze the rainfall and runoff data.
5. Identify technical, economical and social factors affecting dam type, site selection,
forces of gravity dams and factors cause dam failure
6. Identify and formulate the groundwater flow, aquifers and wells

1. Introduction to water resources
2
2. Water Demand
2
3. Engineering Hydrology
1
4. Evaporation & Transpiration
2
5. Precipitation
1
6. Rainfall Runoff relationship
2
7. Hydraulic structures (dams)
2
8. Groundwater Hydrology structures
(dams)
2
Total
14

Class Schedule:
175

Eng. Science: 75 %
Eng. Design: 25 %
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
1 2 2
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by: Prof. Omar S. Aburizaiza, Dr. Maged H. Hussein
Phone: 6952821
Last Updated: Fall 1430-1431 H

176

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Surveying
CE 371

3 2 0 3
Pre-requisites
MENG 102: Engineering Graphics
MATH 202: Calculus II
Introduction to the basic surveying theory and practice; Units of measurements and
conversions; Error analysis; Distance measurements by taping; Leveling; Angle
measurements; Traversing and traverse computations; Topographic surveying and
mapping; Area and volume computations; Circular curves; Use of surveying software such
as Wolfpack and Surfer.

Textbook:
ELEMENTARY SURVEYING (Twelve Edition 2008) by Paul R. Wolf/ Russel C. Brinker

Reference:
1. SURVEYING (Seventh Edition), by Francis H. Moffitt/ Harry Bouchard
2. SURVEYING WITH CONSTRUCTION APPLICATIONS by Barry F. Kavanagh

to:
1. Explain the surveying fundamentals, and errors.
2. Apply different techniques for surveying observations, such as distance, elevations,
and angles.
3. Analyze and calculate the unknown surveying parameters, and map productions.
4. Calculate area and volume from ground data and maps.
5. Design of simple circular curve, and stakeout by deflection angles.
177

Sr.
No.
Course Topics
Duration
in
Weeks
1

Introduction to surveying.
1.Definition of surveying, classification of surveying, specialized
surveys.
2.Units of measurement, accuracy and precision, significant figures,
rounding off numbers.
0.5

0.6
2
Error analysis.
3.Definition of error, sources of errors, types of error, elimination of
errors.
4.Mean value, residuals, standard error, variance weighted
measurements and their adjustments.
5.Error propagation.
0.3
0.3
0.5
3
Distance measurements.
6. Methods: pacing, stadia, taping, electronic distance measurements,
and others equipment: surveying tapes, EDM instruments.
7. Error and corrections.

1.1

0.2
4
Elevation measurements [leveling].
8. Methods: differential leveling, trigonometric leveling, and profile
leveling.
9. Equipment: automatic level, tilting level, and theodolite T16.
10 Errors and corrections
1.4
1.3
0.7

5
Angle measurements.
11. Horizontal angles: azimuths, bearings, deflection angles, angles to
the right, and others Vertical and zenith angles.
12. Techniques.
0.5
0.7
6
Traversing and traverse computations.
13. Open and closed traverses.
14. Traverse classifications according to measured angles.
15. Traverse computations, adjustments and methods used.

0.3
0.7
0.7

7
Topographic surveys.
16. Contour lines.
17. Maps and scales.
18. Drawing a topographic map.
0.3
0.3
0.8
8
Area and volume computations.
19. Methods of area and volume calculations.
0.4
0.9
178

20. Area and volume computations from maps.
9
Circular curves.
21.Definition of circular curve parameters.
22.Derivation of formulas.
23.Curve layout by deflection angles.
0.4
0.3
0.8

Lectures:
Two 2 hour sessions per week. There is 10 laboratory work in this course

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
1 2 1 2 1
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by: Dr. Adel S. Elkomy

Last Updated: January, 2010 G

179

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Transportation
Engineering
CE 381

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 371 : Surveying
ARAB 201: Arabic Language (2)
Transportation as a system; human and vehicle characteristics; traffic flow characteristics;
highway capacity analysis; highway control devices; public transportation; urban
transportation planning; parking facilities; transportation safety; intelligent transportation
system and computer applications; introduction to railway, waterway, airport and pipeline

Textbook:
Transportation Engineering- An Introduction, C. Jotin Khisty and B. Kent Lall, 3
rd

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.

Reference:
Traffic and Highway Engineering, Nicholas Garber and Lester Hoel, 2
nd
Edition,
PWS Publishing Company, 1997.
Highway Capacity Manual, Special Report 209, Transportation Research Board,
2000.
Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Ministry of Communications,
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Course Leaning Objectives: By:
After successful completion of the course, the students should be able to:
1) Recognize the function and scope of Transportation Engineering
2) Identify Driver, User, vehicle and Roadway characteristics and Analyze the
interaction among the parameters.
3) Analyze Speed-Volume-Density, Perform Highway Capacity Analysis and
Describe Traffic Control System Components and Devices
4) Recognize problems and issues of Parking, Accident, Public Transport and ITS
5) Describe Transportation Planning Process and apply Traffic Forecasting Methods.
Prepare Transportation Impact Analysis Report.
6) Describe basic components of Railway, Waterway, Airport and Pipeline.

Topics Covered during Class

Course Topics Duration in Weeks
1 Introduction, Transportation system components, Transport
modes, specialties in transportation engineering
1.0
2 Characteristics of drivers and vehicles 1.0
3 Traffic flow theory 2.0
180

Course Schedule
Three 1-hour sessions per week (S M W @ 10:00 A.M.)

Engineering Design: 0%

4 Highway Capacity Analysis 1.0
5 Intersection control and design 1.0
6 Parking Study 0.75
7 Public transportation 0.75
8 Transportation planning 2.5
9 Transportation safety 1.0
10 Intelligent transportation system 0.5
11
12
Computer application
Introduction to Railway, Waterway, Airport and Pipeline
1.0
1.5
181


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 1 1 1 2 1
*
Evaluation)
Prepared By: Dr. Md. Jobair Bin Alam

Last Updated: October 2009
182

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Summer
Training
CE 390 0 0 2 2
Pre-requisites
CE 321: Construction Management,
CE 332: Geology for Civil Engineers,
CE 340: Structural Analysis-I,
CE 341: Materials of Construction,
CE 352: Hydraulics
Field training conducted under the supervision of a faculty member. The student must
submit a detailed technical report by the end of training period, explaining what he learned
during this training.

Textbook: None

1.Formulateanobjectivethatidentifiesthetrainingpurposeanddescribetheexpected
outcomesofthetrainingactivity.
2.DescribeaprofessionalorganizationalstructureandBreakdownaworkenvironmentinto
itsunitsandworkfunctions.
3.Completeimportanttasksontimeandwithhighquality.
4.ApplyprinciplesofengineeringpracticesrelatedtoCEspecializations.
5. Communicate, clearly and concisely, training details and gained experience, both
orally and in writing, using necessary supporting material.
183

Topic No.
Duration
in weeks
5. Acquaint the trainee with the company working
environment, organizational structure, regulations,
products, customers, engineering units, and quality system.
2
6. Familiarize the trainee with one of the production or design
units
1
7. Allocate the trainee to a project team and allow him to
study and collect necessary data about the project.
1
8. Work as a team member to execute assigned tasks with the
following objectives:
6
Apply principles of engineering practices related to CE
specialization.
Relate practical work to his theoretical engineering
computer software



Class Schedule:
Oral Presentation after submitting a written training report; both evaluated by at
least 2 faculty members

Eng. Science: 0%
Eng. Design: 0%
Others: 100%

3
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
3 2 2 2 2 2
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by:
Eng. Abdul-Aziz Al-Mohamady (Coordinator)
Phone: 6402000/68117.

184

Last Updated:
October 2009

185

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Civil Engineering
Fundamentals
CE 401

1 0 0 1
Pre-requisites
CE 321 - Construction Management,
CE 333- Geotechnical Engineering,
CE 342 - Reinforced Conc. Design- I,
CE 352 Hydraulics,
CE 381 - Transportation Engineering
The course is designed to review the basic fundamentals of civil engineering. The students
will be exposed to the different fields of Civil Engineering.

Textbook: Non

References: Text books, handouts and lecture notes of the above mentioned prerequisite
courses.

to:
1) Review the fundamentals of Civil Engineering.

Topic No.
Duration
in weeks
1. Introduction
1
2. BuildingStructuralFundamentals
3
3. PrincipalsofConstructionManagement
2
4. SoilPropertiesandBasicFoundationsEngineering
2
5. BasicsofSurveyingand
TransportationEngineeringFundamentals
2
6. FundamentalsofWaterConveyanceandBasicsof
EnvironmentalEngineering
2
7. EthicsandProfessionalmatters
2
Total
14

Class Schedule:
Class meets once a week for 2 hours (tutorial)
186

Eng. Science: 100%
Eng. Design: 0%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2 2
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by:
Dr. Mahmoud A. Taha
Phone: 6402000 / 68906
Last Updated:
December 2009
187

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Construction
Engineering
CE 422

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites
ISLS 301: Islamic Studies (3),
CE 321: Construction Management, and
CE 342: Concrete Design I.
Types, selection, utilization, and unit cost of construction equipment regarding soil
compaction and stabilization, excavation and earthmoving operations. Formwork design.
Detailed cost estimation for civil works. Project control.

Textbook:
Construction Planning, Equipment, and Methods. 7
th
edition. By R.L. Peurify and C. J.
Schexnayder. McGraw Hill, 2006.
Construction Estimating Using Excel. Steven J. Peterson, Prentice Hall, 2007.

to:
1) Describe the characteristics of certain construction equipment e.g. Dozers,
Scrapers, Compactors, Excavating equipment, and Trucks.
2) Calculate the productivity and unit cost of using certain construction equipment
e.g. Dozers, Scrapers, Compactors, Excavating equipment, and Trucks.
3) Design a wooden formwork system for a slab, wall and column.
4) Prepare detailed cost estimation for civil works.
5) Evaluate the performance of a project using Earned Value metrics.
6) Practice long life learning through identifying new course topics, locating sources
of information, and reporting the results.
Course Topics
Duration
(Weeks)
1. Construction Productivity
0.5
2. Labor & EQP cost
1.5
3. Compaction and Stabilization Equipment
1.0
4. Machine Equipment Power Requirements
1.0
5. Dozers, Excavators, Compactors, Graders & Hauling
units.
3.5
6. Q.S & detailed estimate of Civil Works
3.0
7. Project Control
1.0
8. Formwork Design
2.0
9. Life Long Learning
0.5
188

Course Topics
Duration
(Weeks)
T O T A L
14

Class Schedule:
Two lectures per week 11:00-12:20 .S.T.
Eng. Science: 90%
Eng. Design: 10%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 1 1
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by: Dr. Mahmoud A. Taha
Phone: 6402000 / 68906
CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Construction
Estimating &
Scheduling
CE 423

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 422: Construction Engineering
Drawings of a typical civil engineering project. quantity take-off. pricing. use of computer
programs in estimating. identification of activities and their sequence. scheduling of
activities using critical path method. resource leveling and allocation. time-cost trade-off.
using PERT technique. Project scheduling using MS Project and Primavera software.

Textbooks:
1. Construction Estimating Using Excel. Steven J. Peterson, Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. R.S. Means Cost Data.
3. Computer-Based Construction Project Management. Tarek Hegazy. Prentice Hall 2002.


1. PreparedetailedcostestimateforcivilworksaccordingtoMasterFormat2004.
189

2. Prepareconstructionschedulesusingprecedencediagramwithcomplexlogic.
3. Constructalinearscheduleforaprojectofarepetitivenature
4. Performresourcemanagement:loading,levelingandtimecosttradeoff.
5. PerformPERTanalysis.
6. Usecomputerbasedschedulingsoftwaretodevelopandcommunicateaschedulefora
constructionproject.

1. Introduction to Estimating
1.0
2. The quantity take off
3.0
3. Putting costs to the estimate
1.0
4. Finalizing the bid
1.0
5. Precedence diagram with complex logic
1.5
6. Scheduling Repetitive Projects
1.0
7. Resource Allocation & Leveling
1.5
8. Time-Cost Tradeoff
1.0
9. Schedule Updating
1.0
10. Probabilistic Networks
1.0
TOTAL
14

Class Schedule:
2 Lectures per week

Eng. Science: 100%
Eng. Design: 0%

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 1 2
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by: Dr. Mahmoud A. T. Salem (Coordinator)
190

Phone: 6402000/68906
191

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Construction
Contracting
CE 424

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 321: Construction Management
Participants in a construction contract. Contract definition. Types of contracts; formation
principles of a contract, performance or breach of contractual obligations. Analysis and
comparison of the different kinds of construction contracts. Bidding logistics. Legal
organizational structures. types and uses of specifications. Sample of different forms of
contracts utilized in construction.

Textbooks:
"Construction Contracting," 6th Edition, Richard H. Clough and Glenn A. Sears
Reference:
"Construction Contract Administration," Charles S. Phillips. 1999.
1. Identify and deal with the respective roles of design professionals, owner/developers
and prime contractors in the design and construction process.
2. Understand the different types of construction contracts and how the construction
supervisors role may be affected by them.
3. Learn how to recognize, develop and manage a documentation system.
4. Understand the effects of changes as they are encountered and develop methods to
react to potential conflicts resulting from changes.
5. Know how to handle schedule impacts, delays, accelerations, suspensions and
disruption of time related work activities.

Topic No.
Duration in
weeks
1. Contract Definition
1.0
2. Company Organization
1.5
3. Contractual Relationships
1.0
192

Topic No.
Duration in
weeks
4. Drawings and Specifications
1.5
5. Managing General Conditions
3.0
6. Implementing the Contract
4.0
7. Site Management Documents
2.0
TOTAL
14
Class Schedule:
Two lecturers per week 11:00-12:20 .S.T.
Eng. Science: 100%
Eng. Design: 0%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2
*
Evaluation)
Phone: 6402000/68906
CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Foundation
Engineering
CE 434 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 333: Geotechnical Engineering,
Site exploration and selection. Types of foundations. Bearing capacity of shallow
foundations. Foundation settlement. Deep foundations. Lateral earth pressure. Retaining
walls. Computer applications.

Textbook : Das, B.M., Principles of Foundation Engineering (latest ed.)
Reference: Bowles, J.E., Foundation Analysis and Design (latest ed.)
1. Know the different types of foundations and their advantages.
2. Describe the methodology and techniques of soil exploration.
3. Apply bearing capacity theories and allowable pressure equations to shallow
foundations.
193

4. Apply different methods of calculating soil layers deformations to evaluate
foundation settlements.
5. Know types and benefits of mat foundations and evaluate their bearing capacity.
6. Know types of deep foundations, classifications of piles and apply methods of
evaluating the bearing capacity and settlement of piles.

Sr.
No.
Course Topics
Duration
in
Weeks
1

Introduction to foundation engineering and its
importance.
Classification of foundations exploration
1
2
Site exploration 1
3
Bearing capacity of shallow foundations
2
4
Allowable settlements
Review of elastic and consolidation settlements
1.5
5
Combined footings. Mat foundations; types and
bearing capacity.
2.5
6
Allowable bearing pressure in sand based on
settlement
1
7 Deep foundations; types and bearing capacity 3.5
8 Review of lateral earth pressure. Retaining walls. 1.5

Class Schedule:

The class meets twice a week and each session is 1 hr 20 min. long.
Course Contribution:
Eng. Science: 75 %
Eng. Design: 25 %
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2 2 1 2 2
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by:
Dr. Abdulghany O. Sabbagh
Contact: Civil Engineering Department Room 248 E mail: agsabbagh@yahoo.com
Last Updated: Dec 2009

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
194

Applications in
Foundation
Engineering
CE 435

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 434: Foundation Engineering
Introduction to foundation engineering; purpose and classification of foundations; site
exploration and foundation selection; loads and calculations of allowable pressures and
settlements; foundations in variety of conditions; foundations on fill and improved ground;
combined footings; slope stability; computer applications.

Textbooks:
Das, B. M. Principles of Foundation Engineering (latest ed.)
Reference:
Bowles, J, E,, Foundation Analysis and Design (latest ed)
1- Calculate loads on foundations.
2- Calculate allowable pressures and settlements.
3- Solve for a variety of footing conditions.
4- Analyze foundations on different ground conditions.
5- Analyze slope stability.
6-Use computer programs for foundation and slope problems.
195

Sr.
No. Course Topics
Duration
in
Weeks
1 Introduction to Foundation Engineering, purpose and
classification of foundations.
1
2 Site exploration and foundation selection 1
3 Types of loads on foundations: gravity and lateral
loads.
1
4 Calculations of allowable pressures and settlements. 1
5 Comparative selection of footing sizes: interaction
within a group; relative settlement between footings;
applications in selecting footing sizes; effect of close
proximity; effect of unequal loads; effect of
intermixed footing types; effect of adjacent
excavations
3

6 Foundations on slopes and foundations on layered
soils.
1
7 Foundations on fill and improved ground 1
8 Combined footings; lateral friction loads on footings;
foundations on expansive soils; introduction to
liquefaction.
1

9 Slope stability; analysis of stability of earth slopes. 2
10 Computer applications: shallow and deep
foundations. Slope stability
2

Class Schedule:
Two lectures per week 11:00-12:20 .S.T.
Eng. Science: 75%
Eng. Design: 25%
196

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 1 2 2
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by: Prof. Zaki A. Baghdadi and Dr Ahmed M. Khan

Civil Eng. Dept., Rooms 219 / 250 Building H ,
E-mail: baghdadiz@yahoo.com / akhan@kau.edu.sa
Phone: 6402000/68906

197

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Soil Improvement CE 439

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 434: Foundation Engineering
Principles of soil improvement. Types of improvement and factors influencing them.
Mechanical and hydro improvements. Physical and chemical improvements. Computer
applications.

Textbooks:
Hausmann, Manfred R. Engineering Principles of Ground Modification, McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company, N.Y., USA, 1990

Reference:
Ingles and Metcalf, Soil Stabilization, Butterworths Pty. Ltd., Sydney, 1972.

1- Define ground improvement techniques.
2- Explain shallow and deep compaction principles and techniques.
3- Describe modification by admixtures.
4- Discuss soil reinforcement techniques.
5- Discuss practical aspects of soil improvement techniques.
6- Present a selected topic on soil improvement.
198


Sr.
No.
Course Topics
Duration
in
Weeks

1
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of the course; Options when encountering
problematic soils; Ground improvement techniques;
The traditional objectives and emerging trends.

1

2
MECHANICAL
MODIFICATION(COMPACTION)
Compaction purposes; Laboratory compaction; Field
shallow compaction.
Deep compaction techniques; pre-compression; Heavy
tamping and dynamic consolidation; vibro-compaction;
Compaction grouting

2

3
PRINCIPLES OF SOIL DENSIFICATION
Moisture content; Compaction effort; Soil type and
preparation; Confinement.
1

4
PROPERTIES OF COMPACTED COHESIVE
SOILS
The effect of compaction on strength; over-compaction;
stress-strain behavior of compacted soils;
The effect of compaction on compression; swelling;
shrinkage and permeability.
2

5 PROPERTIES OF COMPACTED
COHESION_LESS SOILS
Compactibility; Shear strength; Liquefaction ; Collapse.
1
6 GEOSYNTHETICS
Types of geo-synthetics; Uses of geo-synthetics,
Filtration; Separation; Reinforcement; Erosion control.
1

7
PRELOADING AND VERTICAL DRAINS
Purpose of pre-loading; Purpose of vertical drains;
Methods of vertical draining; sand drains and geo-
synthetic drains.
Preloading without vertical drains; Preloading with
vertical drains.
Radial consolidation; Combined vertical and redial
consolidation.
3

8
MODIFICATION BY ADMIXTURES
Uses of admixtures; Types of Admixtures; Cement
stabilization;
Soil-cement-water reactions; Engineering benefits of
cement stabilization.
Lime stabilization; Types of lime; Soil-lime reactions;
Engineering benefits of lime stabilization.
3

9 Student presentations. 1

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two 1 hour and twenty minutes sessions per week.
199

Eng. Science: 80%
Eng. Design: 20%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
3 2 3 2 3
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by: Dr. Ahmed M. Khan
Civil Eng. Dept., Room 250
Building H , E-mail akhan@kau.edu.sa
Phone: 6402000

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Structural
Analysis II
CE 440

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 202: Strength of Materials,
EE 201: Structured Computer programming, and
MATH 205: Series & Vector calculus.
Analysis of statically indeterminate structures by method of consistent deformations.
Method of slope-deflection and moment distribution. Influence lines for statically
indeterminate structures. Approximate methods of analyze of multi-sections forms.
Classical stiffness method of structural analysis. Direct stiffness method for trusses.

Textbook : R. C. Hibbeler , " Structural Analysis" 6th ed. PEARSON Prentice Hall, 2006

1. Discuss statically determinacy of beams, frames, trusses in 2D space
2. Analyze statically determinate beams and frames by computing the supports
reactions, internal resisting forces, and drawing normal force (N), shear force
(V), and bending moment (BM) diagrams
3. Analyze statically determinate three hinged arches by computing external
reactions and internal resting forces
4. Construct influence lines (IL) for different functions including reactions, shearing
force, and bending moment in statically determinate beams .Also be able to
maximize certain function by setting the critical location and pattern of the live
load (LL) on the beam
5. Calculate deflections for determinate trusses using virtual work method, and for
beams, and frames using virtual work method, double integration method,
200

moment area method, and conjugate beam method
6. Calculate loads and stresses Buckling of columns using Euler's formula

Topics Chapter
No. of
weeks
1. Basic principals, Review of main topics of
Static & Strength of Materials
1 1
2. Stability and Determinacy of Determinate
Structures
2 1
3. Statically Determinate Trusses, Determinacy
& Stability , Method of Joints, Method of
Sections, and Combined Method
3 1
4. Statically Determinate Beams. Reactions,
Internal Forces. Axial Force, Shear Force,
and Bending Moment Diagrams using
Method of sections (expressions), and Step-
by-Step procedure (summation)
4 1
5. Statically Determinate Frames. Stability &
Determinacy, Reactions, Internal Forces.
(N), (V), (BM) diagrams
4 1
6. Types of Arches. Analysis of three Hinged
Arches. Suspension Cables
5 1
7. Influence Lines (IL) for Statically
Determinate Beams
6 2
8. Deflection of Trusses using the Virtual Work
Method. Deflection of Beams and Frames
using the Double Integration Method, the
Moment Area Method, the Virtual Work
Method, and the Conjugate Beam Method
8 4
9. Buckling of Columns.
Hand out 2
Total Number of weeks 14

Course Schedule:
Two lecture sessions per week, 80-mintus each. + One session tutorial
Eng. Science: 95 %
Eng. Design: 5 %

201

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2 2 2
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by: Dr. Talal A. Radain
Phone: 6952793 / 6402000 ext: 52793 or 684231
202

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Design of Steel
Structures
CE 441

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 340: Structural Analysis I
Properties of steel. Types of loads. Philosophy of allowable stress design (ASD) method.
Analysis and design of tension and compression members. Axially loaded columns. Base
plate. Design of beams for flexure and shear. Beams with cover plates. Unsymmetrical
bending. Deflection. Design of beams-column. Bolted and welded connections.

Textbooks:
1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction
2. Structural Design by Jack C. Mc Cormac, 3rd Edition
3. Applied Structural Steel Design by Leonard Spiegel and George F. Limbrunner.

1. Analyze tension and compression members, flexural members, beam-column s,
bolted connections and welded connection.
2. Design of tension and compression members, flexural members, beam-column s,
bolted connections and welded connection.

1. Introduction:
0.5
2. Tension members:
2
3. Compression members:
2.5
4. Flexural members:
3
5. Bending and axial stress:
2
6. Bolted connections:
2
7. Welded connections:
2
Total
14

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Three lecturer sessions per week, 50-mintus each.
203

Eng. Science: 50%
Eng. Design: 50%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
3 2 2

*
Evaluation)
Prepared by: Prof. Samir A. Ashour
Room 259 Building H,

Phone: 6402000/68496


CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Reinforced
Concrete Design II
CE 442 3 3 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 342 - Reinforced Concrete Design I
Review ACI 318- Code provisions. Design of Continuous Beams and Frames: Continuity
of reinforced concrete structures, load combinations. Design of Two-way slabs: Edge
supported vs. column supported slab systems(DDM). Design of rectangular and circular
Reinforced Concrete Columns:, Axialy and eccentrically loaded columns, interaction
diagrams. Slender columns and biaxial bending.

Textbooks:
Hasson, M. N. & Al-Manaseer,A., Structural Concrete- Theory and Design, 4th Edition,
Wiley, 2008.
References:
1. Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete and Commentary- ACI
318M-08.
2. Saudi Building Code (SBC).

By the completion of the course, the students should be able to :
1. Recognize and define basic knowledge of material properties and reinforced
concrete behavior.
2. Design of two-way solid slabs using the moment coefficient method (Method 2).
3. Design of two-way slabs using the Direct-Design Method.
4. Design of short columns.
204

5. Design of long (Slender) columns.
6. Apply Computer calculation.
Topic No.
Duration in
weeks
1. Review of knowledge gained in CE 342
1.5
2. RC slab: different types; behavior of one-way and two-way slabs;
internal actions in two-way slabs; design requirements.
1.0
3. Analysis and design of two-way edge supported slabs by method of
coefficients (method 2). 1.0
4. Analysis and design of two-way solid slab using the direct design
method: ACI code requirements for thickness and moment distribution
ff
2
5. Analysis and design of two-way beamless slab by direct design method:
ACI code requirements for thickness and shear design in flat plate and
2
6. RC columns: types of columns; Short columns; behavior of axially
loaded short tied and spiral columns under compression. 1.5
7. Analysis and design of Short column under Uni-axial loading; interaction
diagrams, investigation of rectangular sections for various failure
conditions and ACI code provision design charts and tables; Whitney's
2
8. Analysis and design of Short columns under Bi-axial loading.
1
9. Analysis and design of slender columns; ACI code provisions; design
charts. 2
Total
14

Course Schedule:
Three lecture sessions per week, 50-mintus each.
Eng. Science: 50 %
Eng. Design: 50 %
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2 2
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by:
Prof. Faisal F. Wafa.
Phone: 6951814
205

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Advanced Reinforced
Concrete Design
CE 444

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 342: Reinforced Concrete Design I
Introduction to Prestressed Concrete, ACI provisions. Types of Pre-stressing. Losses,
Stresses, Deflection, Flexural and Shear Strengths of P.S.C. Retaining Walls, Types and
Forces on R.W., Design of R.W.. Design and Construction of R.C. Water Tanks. Water-
Proofing, Loads Detailing of Reinforcements, Joints. Design of Circular and Rectangular
Tanks.

Textbooks:
TBA
1. Analysis and Design of Pre-stressed Concrete Members
2. Analysis and Design of Retaining Walls
3. Design of Circular Tanks
4. Design of Rectangular Tanks

Topic No.
Duration in
weeks
1. Analysis and Design of Pre-stressed Concrete Members
3
2. Analysis and Design of Retaining Walls
4
3. Design of Circular Tanks
3
4. Design of Rectangular Tanks
4
Total
14

206

Class Schedule:
Lectures: TBA

Eng. Science: 50%
Eng. Design: 50%

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
3 2 2
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by: Prof. Faisal F. Wafa

Phone: 6951814


207

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Design of
Hydraulic
Structures
CE 451

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 352: Hydraulics
Types. Advantages and functions of hydraulic structures. Flow through orifices. Culverts.
Under gates. Over weirs and spillways. Energy dissipation below hydraulic structures.
Hydraulic design of culverts. Weirs. Spillways. Aqueducts. Syphons. Regulators and dams.

Textbooks:
1. Novak, Moffat, Nalluki, and Nararyanan Hydraulic Structures, 2007, ,Taylor and
Francis. (available at Alsheqri Book Store at Students' Affairs Building).
2. Golze, A. R. , Hand book of Dam Engineering, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company.
3. Design of Small Canal Structures, United States Bureau of Reclamation.
4. Hand outs
1. Analyze and design different dams and select the proper dam for any practical
problem he may encounter in his professional life.
2. Analyze and design different spillways.
3. Design and supervise the construction of conveyance structures.
4. Design various protection structures.
5. Design of various energy dissipation structures.

Topic
Duration in
weeks
1- Elements of Dam Engineering
1
2- Embankment dam engineering
2
3- Concrete Dam Engineering
2
4- Spillways and Outlet Works
2
5- Energy Dissipations
2
6- Dam Safety
1
7- Diversion works
2

208

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two lecturer sessions per week

Eng. Science: 20%
Eng. Design: 80%

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
1 2 1 1
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by: Dr. Abdullah Alghamdi

Phone: 6402000/68237

209

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Water Resources
Planning and
Management
CE 457

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 353: Hydrology and Water Resources
Engineering
Introduction to planning and management principles; evaluation of alternatives by the
principles of engineering economy; levels of planning; planning approach and planning
environment; project formulation; project evaluation; Environmental considerations in
planning; System analysis in water planning; multipurpose and multi objective projects.

Textbooks:
1- Neil, S. Grigg., Water Resources Planning, McGraw Hill, USA, 1995 .
2- Alvin, S. Goodman, Principles of Water Resources Planning, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
USA, 1984.
3- Neil, S. Grigg., Water Resources Management , McGraw Hill, USA,1999.

1- To introduce senior students in civil engineering to the principles of Water Resources
planning and management of basic projects
2- To develop students ability to apply these principles to Water projects.

Topic No.
Duration
in weeks
1- Planning, Management and Public
Projects
3
2- Elements of Project Formulations and
3
3- Organization for Water Projects
2
4- Economics and Multi objective
Evaluation
2
5- Information, Computers , Mathematical
System
3
6- Analysis of Risk and Uncertainty and
other Studies Involving Probabilities
1
Total
14

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two lecturer sessions per week
210

Eng. Science: 100%
Eng. Design: 0%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 3 3
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by: Prof. Abdullah M. Mohorjy

Phone: 6951411

211

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Environmental
Engineering
CE 461 4 3 0 4
Pre-requisites CE 352 Hydraulics
In this course, the physical, chemical, mathematical and biological principles for defining,
quantifying, and measuring environmental quality are described. Next, the processes by
which nature assimilates waste material are described and the natural purification processes
that form the bases if engineering systems are detailed. Finally, the engineering principles
and practices involved in the design and operation of conventional environmental
engineering works are covered at length.

Textbook(s):
Peavy, Rowe and TCUobanoglous. Environmental engineering, McGraw-Hill, 1985.
Reference(s):
1. Warren Viessman, Jr., and Mark. J. Hammer. Water Supply and Pollution Control,
6th edition, Harper Collins, 1998
2. Metcalf& Eddy, Wastewater Engineering: Treatment and Reuse, 4
th
edition,
McGraw-Hill, 2003.
3. Mackenzie L. Davis and Davis A. Cornwell. Introduction to Environmental
Engineering, 3
rd
edition, McGraw-Hill, 1998.
1. Define environmental quality
2. Quantify environmental quality
3. Measure environmental quality
4. Understand the principles involved in environmental engineering.
5. Apply engineering principles and practice in the design and operation of
environmental engineering works.
Topic No.
Duration
in weeks
1. EnvironmentandHumanInteraction
1
2. WaterQuality:Definitions,Characteristics,andPerspective
3
3. EngineeredsystemsforWastewaterTreatmentand
Disposal 3
4. AirQuality:Definitions,Characteristics,andPerspective
2
5. EngineeredSystemsforAirPollutionControl
2
6. SolidWaste:Definitions,Characteristics,andPerspective
1
7. EngineeredSystemsforSolidWasteManagement
2
212

Topic No.
Duration
in weeks
Total
14

Class Schedule:
Three lectures per week
Laboratory meets once a week , 3 hours
Course Contribution to Professional Component :
Eng. Science: 75 %
Eng. Design: 25 %

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2 2 1 2 2
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by:
Dr. Saleh F. Magram
Last Updated: Fall 1430-1431 H
CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Wastewater
Reclamation
and Reuse
CE 465

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 461: Environmental Engineering
Potential reuse applications. Sources of water for reuse. Treatment technologies suitable for
water reuse applications. Criteria for each type of reuse application. The overall procedures
for determining the feasibility and planning of water reuse systems as well as the
management structure of reuse projects. The management of the biosolids resulting from
the treatment of wastewater and related regulations governing their use and disposal. Each
student has to prepare and work on a mini-research/project throughout the course and
present/submit it at the end of the course.
Textbooks:
Handbook of wastewater reclamation and reuse, Donald R. Rowe, Isam Mohammed
Abdel-Magid, CRC Press, 1995
Metcalf& Eddy, Wastewater Engineering: Treatment and Reuse, 4
th
edition, McGraw-Hill,
2003.
213

1. Understand the basic concepts and issues involved in wastewater reclamation,
recycling and reuse .
2. Understand major issues involved in developing water and biosolids reclamation
criteria .
3. Select appropriate treatment technologies for reclaiming and reusing wastewater .
4. Assess the suitability of reclaimed water for any reuse application .
5. Apply knowledge of water and wastewater engineering for designing water
reclamation processes .
6. Understand the procedures for planning and managing water reclamation projects .
Topic No.
Duration in
weeks
1. Introduction
(5 hr)
2. Water Reclamation and Reuse Criteria: and
assessment (4 hr)
3. Agricultural and Landscape Irrigation
(3 hr)
4. Industrial Water Reuse
(2 hr)
5. Groundwater Recharge with Reclaimed
Water (2 hr)
6. Recreational/Environmental Enhancement.
(2 hr)
7. Water Reclamation Inside Buildings
(2 hr)
8. Treatment Requirements for Water Reuse
(10 hr)
9. Reuse and Disposal of Wastewater Bio-
solids
(8 hr)
10. Planning and Managing Water Reuse
Projects
(8 hr)
Total
48 hr

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two Lectures per week
Eng. Science: 50%
Eng. Design: 50%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 3 3 3
*
Evaluation)
Prepared by: Dr. Saleh F. Magram
214

Phone: 6402000/68237

215

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
GPS and GIS
Applications
CE 471

3 2 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 371: Surveying
Introduction to the basic for GPS and GIS applications; Geodesy: introduction, the
ellipsoid and geoids, geodetic position , geoids undulation ,deflection of the vertical,
geodetic coordinate system ; Map Projection : projections used in state plane coordinate
systems, UTM projection; GPS : overview of GPS, differential GPS, GPS static survey,
GPS kinematic survey; GIS: introduction to GIS, GIS data sources and data format,
creating GIS databases, GIS applications, use of surveying software such as GeoMedia and
Leica Geo Office.

Textbooks:
ELEMENTARY SURVEYING (Twelfth Edition 2008) by Charles D. Ghilani and Paul R.
Wolf.

Reference:
Land Navigation Handbook: The Sierra Club Guide to Map, Compass and GPS by W.S.
Kals, (Second Edition 2005).

1. Explain geodetic principals, and coordinate Systems.
2. Explain map projection and UTM projection.
3. Describe GPS system, software, and applications.
4. Describe GIS system, software, and GIS applications.
5. Integration between GPS and GIS systems.


Sr. No. Course Topics
Duration
in
Weeks
1

Introduction to Geodesy.
1. The Ellipsoid and Geoids.
2. Geodetic Position and Ellipsoidal Radii of
Curvature.
3. Geoids Undulation and Deflection of the Vertical.
4. Geodetic Position Computations.
5. Geodetic Coordinate System.
6. Three-Dimensional Coordinate Computations.

0.4

0.4

0.3
0.4
0.5
0.5
2
Map Projection.
7. Projections used in State Plane Coordinate
Systems.

0.5

216

8. Lambert Conformal Conic Projection, Direct
Problem, and Inverse problem.
9. Transverse Mercator Projection, Direct Problem,
and Inverse problem.
10. Data Reduction to State Plane Coordinate Grids.
0.75

0.75

0.5
3
Introduction to GPS.
11. Overview of GPS, and GPS Signal.
12. Reference Coordinate Systems for GPS.
13. Errors in GPS Observations.
14. Differential GPS.
15. Field Procedures in GPS Static Surveys, and
Sources of Errors in GPS Work.
16. GPS Kinematic Surveys, and Errors.
17. Data Processing and Analysis.

0.4
0.4

0.3
0.4
1.5

0.5
1.5
4
Introduction to GIS.
18. GIS Data Sources and Classifications.
19. Spatial Data, and Data Format Conversions.
20. Creating GIS Databases.
21. GIS Analytical Functions and Applications.

0.5
0.5
1.0

1.0

2.0
Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two 2 hour sessions per week.
There is 10 laboratory work in this course

Eng. Science: 100%
Eng. Design: 0%

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
1 2 1 2 1
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by: Dr. Adel S. El-komy
Phone: 6402000

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Highway Design
& Construction
CE 482 3 3 0 4
217

Pre-requisites
CE 341: Materials of Construction and
CE 381: Transportation Engineering
Characteristics of driver, pedestrian vehicle, and traffic flow affecting highway design;
geometric design of highways; layouts of intersections, interchanges and terminals;
highway drainage; review of highway paving materials; design of asphalt paving mixtures;
pavement design; highway construction and supervision; categorize common pavement
surface distress and associated correction activates; introduction to maintenance
management system; computer applications on highway geometric design.

Textbook(s):
Highway Engineering. Paul H. Wright and Karen K. Dixon, 7
th
Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc.

Reference(s):
Highway Engineering Handbook. Building and Rehabilitating the Infrastructure. Roger L.
Brockenbrough and Kenneth J. Beodecker. McGraw-Hill.

1. Explain the elements of geometric design of highways and use appropriate methods
to calculate value of each element.
2. Identify various types of at-grade and grade-separated intersections configurations.
3. Identify method used for pavement drainage and technique used to control erosion
in highway drainage.
4. Design a paving mixture according to the local design practice using local
materials.
5. Design flexible pavements using the AASHTO design method.
6. Define different types of pavement distresses and maintenance activities, and
identify the common causes of pavement distress.

Course Topics and Their Duration:

Course
Schedule:
Two 80-minute sessions per week (S T @ 9:300 A.M.)
Course Topics
Duration in
Weeks
1 Driver, Pedestrian, and Vehicle Characteristics 0.5
2 Traffic Flow Characteristics 0.5
3 Geometric Design of Highways 4.0
4 Intersections, Interchanges, and Parking Facilities 2.0
5 Highway Drainage 1.0
6 Design of High Quality Paving Materials 2.0
7 Design of Flexible Pavements 1.5
8 Highway Construction 1.0
9 Highway Maintenance and Rehabilitation 1.5
218

Engineering Design: 40%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 3 1 2 1 1 1
*
Evaluation)
Prepared By: Dr. Shaher Zahran
Last Updated: January 2010
CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Traffic
Engineering
CE 483

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 381: Transportation Engineering
Traffic Engineering studies and measurement; traffic flow theory and queuing theory;
highway capacity analysis; parking analysis and layout design; traffic signs, marking and
channelization; signalized intersection design and operation; roundabout design and
management; ITS applications in traffic engineering; computer application in traffic
engineering.

Textbooks:
Traffic Engineering, 3rd Edition, Roger P. Roess, Elena S. Prassas, and William R.
McShane, Prentice Hall, 2004.

References:
Traffic and Highway Engineering, Nicholas Garber and Lester Hoel, 2nd Edition,
PWS Publishing Company, 1997.
Highway Capacity Manual, Special Report 209, Transportation Research Board,
2000.
Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Federal Highway Administration,
Washington, D.C., 2002.

219

1. Explain traffic system components and functions. Describe the characteristics of
traffic stream parameters and analyze their functional implications on traffic
operation.
2. Identify different traffic flow parameters and queue characteristics, Explain
macroscopic and microscopic relationships among the parameters.
3. Analyze highway capacity for urban and rural roads, Apply the capacity and
level of service concepts highway performance analysis, planning and design.
4. Perform speed, volume and delay studies, parking study and Analyze traffic
data. Prepare Traffic Study Reports.
5. Describe functional parameters of signalized intersection and, Design signal
phases and roundabout.
6. Define application of Intelligent Transport System (ITS) and Demonstrate
expertise on usage of computer models in Traffic operation and management.

Course Topics Duration in
Weeks
1 Introduction, scope and responsibilities of Traffic Engineering 1.0
2 Characteristics of traffic stream parameters 1.0
3 Analysis of Traffic flow parameters, application of traffic flow theory
and queuing theory
2.0
4 Highway Capacity Analysis and application in planning and design 2.0
5 Traffic Study: Speed-Flow-Density data collection and analysis 1.5
6 Parking Study- Demand assessment and facility design 1.0
7 Signalized intersection design and performance analysis 1.5
8
9
Roundabout design and traffic operation management
ITS Application in Traffic Engineering
1.0
1.0
10 Application of computer models HCS, SIDRA, SYNCHRO,
AIMSUN
2.0

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two 80 minute sessions per week

Eng. Science: 80%
Eng. Design: 20%


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 2 1 1 1 2 1
220

*
Evaluation)

Prepared by: Dr. Md. Jobair Bin Alam

Phone: 6402000

221

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Flexible Pavement
Maintenance
CE 486

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites CE 341: Materials of Construction and
CE 381: Transportation Engineering
Essential terminologies and concepts of preservating existing highway asphalt pavements;
characterizing flexible pavement distresses and identifying possible cause of distresses;
relating pavement distress types and distress severity to cost-effective repair alternatives;
simple procedure to inventory pavement conditions and select maintenance methods

Textbooks:
Instructor Lecture presentations and Handouts

1) Define the common. terminologies used in pavement maintenance and
rehabilitation
2) Identify various types of maintenance activates and explain the major
differences between corrective maintenance activities and rehabilitation
concepts
3) Accrue practical information on the subject of surface treatments overview
including of crack sealing materials and application methods; and pothole
patching decisions
4) Accrue essential information on milling, recycling; and constructing non-
structural overlays
5) Accrue practical knowledge on surface treatments for low-volume roads and
parking facilities
6) Implement simple procedure to inventory pavement conditions and select
maintenance methods

222

Course Topics
Duration
in Weeks
1 INTRODUCTION
Definition of Flexible Pavement Maintenance and the
concept of serviceability
Definition of Preventive Maintenance VS Rehabilitation

1

2 Identification of pavement distresses and Severity 1
3 Characterization of Flexible Pavement Distresses 1
4 Identification of Possible Causes of Flexible Pavement
Distresses 1
5 Categorization of Maintenance Activates 1
6 Recommended Treatment Practices For
Pothole Patching and Repair
Crack Treatments
Treatments for Surface Defects
4
7 Milling and surface leveling treatments 1
8 Design of Non-structural overlays and ULTRA-THIN
Asphalt Overlay
2
9 Design of overlays to restore the pavement structural
capacity (stability)
2

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two 80-minute sessions per week

Eng. Science: 50%
Eng. Design: 50%

223

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
3 2 1 2 3
*
Evaluation)

Prepared by: Dr. Shaher Zahran
Phone: 6402000

224

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
Senior Project CE 499 0 4
Pre-requisites
CE 321: Construction Management,
CE 333: Geotechnical Engineering,
CE 342: Reinforced Conc. Design- I,
CE 352: Hydraulics,
CE 382:Transportation Engineering
Team-work on a civil engineering capstone design project involving comprehensive design
experience; exposure to professional practice with practitioner involvement. Preparation of
the project report and its presentation.

Textbooks: TBA

1. Understand and practice the basic concepts and elements of engineering design for a
multidisciplinary civil engineering project.
2. Practice group learning and teamwork by working on a multidisciplinary project.
3. Improve oral and written communication skills.
4. Do integrated project planning, scheduling, and cost analysis for a moderately-sized,
civil engineering project.

225

1. Project selection and team 1
2. Problem Definition 2
3. Literature review and data 3
4. Problem formulation: 3
- Knowledge integration
- Operational and realistic
constraints
---
- Design objectives
- Evaluation criteria
5. Design options and initial layout 2
6. Work plan and budgeting 1
7. Progress report and oral 1
8. Implementation phase 7
9. Design refinement 3
10. Final report and oral presentation 3

Class Schedule:
2 general audience oral presentations of 30 minutes each
Eng. Science: 0%
Eng. Design: 100%
NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and
Numerical Skills
ABET and Additional
Program Outcomes
of Learning*
2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
*
Evaluation)
Phone: 6402000/68906
226

DEPARTMENT OF
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING

227

INTRODUCTION
The Department of Electrical Engineering at King Abdulaziz University was established in
1394 H (1975 G). In 1407H, the name of the Department of Electrical Engineering was
changed into the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering. The Department
consists of four branches: Electric Power and Machines Engineering, Electronics and
CommunicationsEngineering,ComputerEngineering,andBiomedicalEngineering.
TheDepartmentisprimarilyconcernedwiththeprovisionofhighcaliberengineersinthe
fourfieldsofElectricalandComputerEngineeringtoworkforgovernmentalandindustrial
agenciesintheKingdomandtheGulfarea.
VISIONANDMISSIONSTATEMENTS
Vision of the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering (ECE) is to be
innovative pioneers in effective engineering education, collaborative research, and
communityserviceinvariousfieldsofelectricalengineering.
Mission of the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering (ECE) is to provide
high quality education to students that enable them to enhance services to the
communitythroughtheirprofessional,technical,managerial,communication,teamwork,
andresearchcompetenciesinaccordancewithIslamicteachings.
MissionoftheElectricPowerandMachinesEngineering(PME)Programistoprovidethe
studentsaneducationtoservethesocietyandtoinstillinthemtheattitudes,values,and
vision required for lifelong learning and leadership in electric power and machines
engineeringcareer.
Mission of the Electronics and Communications Engineering (E&CE) Program is to
provide a high quality engineering education in electronics and communications and
equip graduates with the proper technical, research, learning, communication, and
managerialskillstocontributetothedevelopmentofthesociety.
Mission of the Computer Engineering (CoE) Program is to prepare and produce highly
qualified computer engineers who can participate effectively in the service and
sustainabledevelopmentofthesocietythroughtheirprofessional,technical,managerial,
teamwork,lifelonglearningandresearchcompetencies.
Mission of the Biomedical Engineering (BME) Program is to provide a high quality
engineering education with lifelong learning skills so that graduates shall enhance the
healthcare services and participate in sustainable development of the society through
their professional, technical, managerial, communication, teamwork, and research
competencies.
EDUCATIONALOBJECTIVES
EducationalobjectivesofallfourprogramsofDepartmentofElectricalandComputerEngineering
arephrasedtoaddressthecareerandprofessionaldevelopmentsenvisagedas:
228

Graduateswillsuccessfullyengageincareersintheareasofspecializationstoservethe
needsofindustryandacademiainboththeprivateandpublicsectorsinSaudiArabiaand
GulfCountries.
Graduateswillengageinactive,continuousandlifelongprofessionaldevelopment,seek
learningandtrainingopportunitiesincludinggraduatestudies,adapttotherapidchanges
inworkenvironment,andtoattainleadershippositionsintheirbusiness,professionand
community.
ADMISSIONANDGRADUATIONREQUIREMENTS
StudentsAdmissionsintotheDepartmentofElectricalandComputer
Engineering
Distribution of students to majors is carried out by the Academic Affairs and Training Unit of
Faculty of Engineering at the beginning of the Fall and Spring terms. The distribution is based on
theGradePointAverage(GPA)ofstudents,students'demandsforparticularmajor,andquotasof
academic departments. On average, 20 students are admitted to each academic program in the
DepartmentexcepttheBMEprogramthataccepts11studentseveryterm.
GraduationRequirements
ForgraduationinanyprogramofDepartmentofECE,astudentmust
complete155creditunitswithaminimumGPAof2.75outof5.
takeallcompulsorycoursesortheirequivalents(53forPMEprogramand50forothers)
3coursestotaling9creditunitsforregularand1coursewith3creditunitsforcoop
programastechnicalelectivesforallprogramsexceptthePMEprogramforwhichthe
electiverequirementis2courses(6creditunits)andnoelectivecourseforregularand
coopprogramsrespectively
a10weeksummertrainingwith2creditunitsfortheregularprogramanda26weeks
trainingwith8creditunitsforthecoopprogram.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES
TheDepartmentofElectricalandComputerEngineeringaimsatproducinghighcaliberengineers
in various fields of electrical and computer engineering, and qualifying them for work in
governmental, military, and industrial institutions in Saudi Arabia and in the rest of Arabian Gulf
area. The programs offered by the Department are so strong and efficient as to be considered
similar and comparable to programs accredited by the USbased Accreditation Board for
Engineering and Technology (ABET). In fact, ABET has certified in October 2003 that each of the
fourprogramsofferedbytheDepartmentattheB.Sc.levelisSUBSTANTIALLYEQUIVALENTtothe
corresponding similar programs in the United States of America. All four programs achieved full
accreditationstatusforABETin2009.
It is very difficult to make an exhaustive survey of the career opportunities available to the
Departmentgraduates.Afewrepresentativeexamplesoftheseopportunitiesareoutlinedbelow:
GraduatesoftheProgramofPowerandMachinesEngineeringworkin
o Electricpowergenerationstations
o Transmissionlinesandsubstationsforhighandmediumvoltage
229

o Loaddispatchcenters
o Industrialcomplexesthatareheavilydependentonelectricpowerutilization
o Safeandeffectivedistributionandconsumptionofelectricpowerinresidential
areasandinfactories.
o Energyresourcemanagement,andprogramsforenergyconservation.
GraduatesoftheProgramofElectronicsandCommunicationsEngineeringworkin
o Theinstallation,operationandmaintenanceofvariouscommunicationsystems,
suchasmicrowaveandradarsystems,opticalcommunicationsystems,and
mobilecommunicationsystems.
o Thedesign,construction,operationandmaintenanceof
Electronicequipmentinvariousindustrialinstallations.
Controlsystems,telemetryequipment,andassociatedequipment.
Informationandnetworktechnologies
Electronicentertainmentdevices.
GraduatesoftheProgramofComputerEngineeringworkinthedesign,construction,
operation,andmaintenanceofComputernetworks
o Informationtechnologydepartments
o Electronicprinting(textsandgraphics).
o Specializedcomputerlaboratories
o Computerinterfacingincontrol,measurement,andtelemetryapplications.
o Computerdrivenvehiclesandtransportationsystems.
o Computeraideddesignandmanufacturingsystems.
o Administrationsystems.
o Specialpurposeoperatingsystems
o Databasesystems
GraduatesoftheProgramofBiomedicalEngineeringworkinthefollowingfields:
o Asclinicalengineersperformingengineeringtasksrequiredinmedicalcareunits,
andcooperatingwithphysiciansinthedesignandimplementationofprograms
neededforenhancingandraisingthestandardsofmedicalcare.
o Asspecialistsinmedicalequipmentandinstrumentation,medicalelectronics,
computermedicalapplications,andbioinformatics.
o Aselectricalengineersconcernedwithequipment,measurement,control,and
signalprocessing.
FACILITIES
The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering has a large number of laboratories that
supportitseducationalandresearchactivities.Inadditiontothespecializedequipmentthateach
lab contains, all the labs are equipped with basic utilities such as DC and AC electric sources,
voltageregulators,signal(function)generators,oscilloscopes,andanaloganddigitalmultimeters
for measuring the basic quantities (voltage, current, and resistance). Labs also have a number of
integratedpersonalcomputersystemstooperateeducationalsoftware.Everystudenthasagood
chancetohaveahandsonexperienceandpracticeexperimentalworkasthenumberofstudents
perexperimentalstationrangesfromtwotofouronly.Thecurrentdepartmentallabsare:
Powersystemlab.
Electricalmachineslab.
Powerelectronicslab.
Electricalandelectronicsmeasurementslab.
230

Basicelectricalengineeringlab.
Electronicslab.
Computerlab.
Communicationslab.
Highvoltagelab.
Experimentalengineeringlab.
Digitalsystemslab.
Controllab.
Personalcomputerlab.
Microwavelab.
Biomedicalinstrumentationslab.
Biomedicalsystemslab.
Mobilecommunicationslab.

KeytoCourseNumbersandDepartmentCode
Eachcourseisreferredtobyanalphabeticalcodeandathreedigitsnumberasfollows:
1. ElectricalandComputerEngineeringDepartmentisreferredtobythecodeEE
2. Thehundredthdigitreferstotheschoolyear
3. Thetenthdigitreferstospecialtywithinthedepartment
4. Theonesdigitreferstocourseserialwithinthesamespecialtyasindicatedinthe
followingtable.
KeyoftenthdigitsinElectricalandComputerEngineeringDepartmentCourses
TensDigit DelicateSpecialty
0 BasicElectricalEngineeringFoundationCourses
1 ElectronicsEngineering
2 CommunicationsEngineering
3 ControlEngineering
4 ElectricPowerEngineering(MachinesandDrives)
5 ElectricPowerEngineering(PowerSystems)
6 ComputerEngineering(Hardware)
7 BiomedicalEngineering
8 BiomedicalComputingandComputerEngineering(Software)
9 TrainingandResearchCoursesandOccupationalSkills
UnitsrequiredfortheB.Sc.degreeintheDepartmentofElectricalandComputerEngineering.
ECE Departmental Requirements 30
Sub Major Requirements 45
Summer Training 2
Total 155

231

Cooperative Program
Departmental Requirements 30
Coop Program 8
Total 155

Departmental Requirements (32 Cr. Hrs.)
RegularstudentsinallECEprogramsarerequiredtotake32credits(10courses)astheECE
Departmentalrequirementsasindicatedinthetable:
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 202 Object-Oriented Computer Programming 3 EE201
IE 256 Engineering Management 2 IE 202, IE 255
EE 300 Analytical Methods in Engineering 3 MATH 203
EE 301 Electrical Circuits and Systems 3 EE250, MATH 204
EE 311 Electronics I 4 EE 250
EE 321 Introduction to Communications 4 EE 301
EE 360 Digital Design I 4 EE 250
EE 366 Microprocessors and microcontrollers 3 EE 360, EE 202
EE 390 Summer Training 2 EE 321, EE 366
EE 499 Senior Project 4 EE 321, EE 366
Total 32
EE390thesummertraining,400hoursofonjobtrainingdistributedover10weeksthatis
includedinthecountingoftrainingunits.
Coopstudentsarerequiredtotakealloftheabovementioned10coursesexceptEE390whichis
replacedbythefollowingcourse:
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 400 Coop Work Program 8 EE 321, EE 366
Sub major Requirements

Specialization of Electric Power and Machines Engineering Requirements
Compulsory (39 Cr. Hrs.)
Course No. Course Title Cr. Prerequisites
232

Hr.
MEP 261 Thermodynamics I 3 MATH 110, PHYS 281
EE 302 Electromagnetic Fields 3 EE 250, MATH 205
EE 303 Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation 3 EE 311, STAT 110
EE 331 Principles of Automatic Control 4 MATH 204, EE 300, EE 301
EE 332 Numerical Methods in Engineering 3 MATH 204, EE 201
EE 341 Electromechanical Energy Conversion I 3 EE 302
EE 351 Electrical Power Systems I 3 EE 250
EE 404 Power systems lab 1 EE 442*, EE 451* and EE 454*
EE 405 Machines lab 1 EE 441**
EE 441 Electromechanical Energy Conversion II 3 EE 341, EE 351
EE 442 Power Electronics I 3 EE 311
EE 451 Electrical Power Systems II 3 EE 351
EE 453 Power Transmission and Distribution 3 EE 351, STAT 110
EE 454 Switchgear and Protection of Power System I 3 EE 341, EE 351
Total 39
*:Canbetakenconcurrentlyupontheapprovalofacademicadvisor
233

Electives (6 Cr. Hrs. for Regular Stream and none for Coop Stream)
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
MEP 369 Power Plants for Electrical Engineers 3 MEP 261
EE 431 Advanced Control Systems 3 EE 331
EE 444 Power Electronics II 3 EE 442
EE 445 Utilization of Electrical Energy 3 EE 341, EE 351
EE 448 Power System Planning and Reliability 3 EE 351, STAT 110
EE 450 Power System Control 3 EE 441, EE 331
EE 452 High Voltage Techniques I 3 EE 351
EE 455 Economic Operation of Power Systems 3 EE 451, STAT 110
EE 458 Computer Applications in Power Systems 3 EE 451
EE 490
Special Topics in Electrical Engineering
3
Approval of the ECE
Department
EE 491 Special Topics in Electrical Power Engineering 3 EE 451
EE 492 Special Topics in Electrical Machines 3 EE 441
XX XXX
Any Course offered by the Department, Faculty or
University and approved by the Department
2 or
3 or
4
Approval of the ECE
Department
234

Specialization of Electronics and Communications Engineering Requirements
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 306 Electrical Engineering Technologies 3 EE 250, STAT 110
EE 312 Electronics II 4 EE 311
IE 331 Probabilities and Engineering Statistics 3 MATH 202, STAT 110
EE 413 Communication Circuits 4 EE 312, EE 321
EE 421 Communication Theory I 3 EE 321, IE 331
EE 423 Electromagnetic Waves 3 EE 302, MATH 204
EE 425 Communication Systems 3 EE 421, EE 423*
Total 39
*:Canbetakenconcurrentlyupontheapprovalofacademicadvisor
Electives (9 Cr. Hrs. for Regular Stream and 3 Cr. Hrs. for Coop Stream)
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 411 Digital Electronics 4 EE 311, EE 360
EE 416 Optoelectronics 3 EE 312
EE 418 Microwave and Optical Devices 3 EE 312, EE 423
EE 420 Microwave Circuits 3 EE 312, EE 423
EE 424 Antennas and Propagation 3 EE 423
EE 426 Digital Communications 3 EE 421
EE 429 Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 3 EE 321
EE 490 Special Topics in Electrical Engineering 3
Approval of the ECE
Department
EE 493 Special Topics in Electronics 3 EE 312
EE 494 Special Topics in Communications 3 EE 321
xx xxx
Any Course offered by the Department, Faculty or
University
2 or
3 or
4
Approval of the ECE
Department
235

Specialization of Computer Engineering Requirements
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 305 Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications 3 EE 202, MATH 204, IE 202
IE 331 Probabilities and Engineering Statistics 3 MATH 202, STAT 110
EE 361 Digital Computer Organization 3 EE 360, STAT 110
EE 364 Advanced Programming 3 EE 202
EE 367 Data Structures and Algorithms 3 EE 305, EE 364
EE 460 Digital Design II 4 EE 360
EE 462 Computer Communication Networks 3 EE 321
EE 463 Operating Systems 4 EE 361, EE 367
Total 36
236

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 431 Advanced Control Systems 3 EE 331
EE 432 Digital Control Systems 3 EE 331
EE 466 Computer Interfacing 3 EE 361, EE 366
EE 467 Databases 3 EE 367
EE 468 Systems Programming 3 EE 361, EE 367
EE 469 Compiler Construction 3 EE 367
EE 482 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence 3 EE 367
EE 484 VLSI Design 3 EE 460, EE 411
Approval of the ECE
Department
EE 495 Special Topics in Computer Engineering 3 EE 361, EE 367, EE 331
EE 496 Special Topics in Automatic Control 3 EE 331, IE 331
xx xxx
Any Course offered by the Department, faculty or
University
2 or
3 or
4
Approval of the ECE
Department
237

Specialization of Biomedical Engineering Requirements

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
BIO 321 Biology for Biomedical Engineers 3 CHEM 281
EE 370 Biomedical Engineering Primer 4 EE 306, BIO 321
EE 372

Physiology for Biomedical Engineers 3
BIO 321
EE 374 Experimentation and Data Analysis in Health Care 3 BIO 321, STAT 110
EE 470 Biomedical Signals and Systems 4
EE 321, EE 370, EE 374,
IE 202
EE 471 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 EE 370, EE 312, EE 372
EE 472 Biomedical Imaging Systems 3 EE 302, EE 370
EE 474
Safety, reliability and Maintenance in Health Care
Facilities
3
EE 370
Total 36
238

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 331 Principles of Automatic Control 4
MATH 204, EE300,
EE301
EE 341 Electromechanical Energy Conversion I 3 EE 302
BIOC 370 Biochemistry for Biomedical Engineers 3 CHEM 281
MEP 392 BioFluid Mechanics 3 Instructor approval
EE 473 Introduction to Rehabilitation Engineering 3 EE 370
EE 475 Biomolecular Engineering 3 BIO 321
EE 476 Biomedical Systems Management 3 IE 256, EE 370
EE 477 Essentials of Medical Informatics 3 EE 370
EE 478 Biosensors and Biochips 3 EE 370
EE 479 Genetic Engineering and Health Diagnostics 3 EE 370
EE 480 Computer Applications in Biomedical Engineering 3 EE 366
Approval of the ECE
Department
EE 497 Special Topics in Biomedical Engineering 3 EE 370
xx xxx
Any Course offered by the Department, faculty or
University and approved by the Department
2 or
3 or
4
Approval of ECE
Department

239

A TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

ELECTRIC POWER AND MACHINES ENGINEERING GROUP

3
rd
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 202
Object-Oriented
Computer Programming 3 IE 202
Introduction to
Engineering Design (2) 2
MATH 204 Differential Equations I 3 MEP 261 Thermodynamics I 3
MATH 205
Series and Vector
Calculus 3
EE 300
Analytical Methods in
Engineering 3
EE 250
4 EE 301
Electrical Circuits and
Systems 3
EE 311 Electronics I 4
Total
Total 17

The student must select Regular or Cooperative track immediately after the sixth semester.
4
th
Year (Regular)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
IE 256 Engineering Management 2 ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2
EE 302 Electromagnetic Fields 3 EE 331
Principles of Automatic
Control 4
EE 303
Electrical Measurements
and Instrumentation 3 EE 332
Numerical Methods in
Engineering 3
EE 321
Introduction to
Communications 4 EE 341
Electromechanical
Energy Conversion I 3
Electrical Power
Systems I 3

EE 366
Microprocessors and
microcontrollers 3
Total
Total 18

240

4
th
EE 390 Summer Training 2 Cr. Hr.

4
th
Year (Cooperative)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 302 Electromagnetic Fields 3
IE 256
Engineering
Management 2
EE 303
Electrical Measurements
and Instrumentation
EE 321
Introduction to
Communications
4 EE 331
Control
4
Engineering
3
Electromechanical Energy
Conversion I
3
EE 366
Microprocessors and
microcontrollers
3
Total
Total 17

4
th
EE 400 Coop Work Program 8 Cr. Hr.

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 441
Electromechanical Energy
Conversion II
EE 442 Power Electronic I 3 EE 404 Power systems lab 1
EE 451 Electrical Power System II 3 EE 405 Machines lab 1
EE 454
Switchgear and Protection of
Power System I
3 EE 453
Power Transmission and
Distribution
3
EE 499 Senior Project 4 xx xxx Elective I 3
xx xxx Elective II 3
Total
Total 13
241

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 499 Senior Project 4 ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2
EE 404 Power systems lab 1
EE 405 Machines lab 1
EE 441
Electromechanical
Energy Conversion II
3
EE 442 Power Electronic I 3

EE 451
Electrical Power System
II
3

EE 453
Power Transmission
and Distribution
3

EE 454
Switchgear and
Protection of Power
System I
3
Total
4
Total 19
242

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING GROUP

3
rd
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 202
Object-Oriented
Introduction to
MATH 204
Differential Equations I
3 EE 300
Engineering
3
MATH 205
Series and Vector
Calculus 3 EE 301
Systems 3
EE 250 Basic Electrical Circuits 4 EE 302 Electromagnetic Fields 3
EE 306
Electrical Engineering
Technologies
3
Total
Total 16

4
th
Year (Regular)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
IE 256 Engineering Management 2 ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2
EE 311 Electronics I 4
EE 312
Electronics II 4
EE 321
Introduction to
Communications 4
EE 331
Control 4
IE 331
Probabilities and
Engineering Statistics 3
EE 332
Engineering 3
EE 360 Digital Design I 4
EE 366
Microprocessors and
microcontrollers 3
Total
Total 16

4
th

243

4
th
Year (Cooperative)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 311 Electronics I
4
IE 256
Engineering
Management 2
EE 321
Introduction to
Communications
IE 331
Probabilities and
Engineering Statistics
3
EE 312 Electronics II
4
EE 351
Electrical Power Systems I 3 EE 332
Engineering
3
Microprocessors and
microcontrollers
3
EE 421 Communication Theory I 3
Total
Total 17

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 351
Electrical Power Systems
I
EE 421 Communication Theory I
3 EE 413 Communication Circuits 4
EE 423 Electromagnetic Waves
3 EE 425 Communication Systems 3
EE 499 Senior Project 4 xx xxx Elective II 3
xx xxx Elective I 3 xx xxx Elective III 3
Total
Total 15

244

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 499 Senior Project 4
EE 331
Control 4
EE 413 Communication Circuits 4
EE 423 Electromagnetic Waves 3
EE 425 Communication Systems 3
xx xxx Elective 3
Total
4
Total 19

245

COMPUTER ENGINEERING GROUP

3
rd
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 202
Object-Oriented
Introduction to
MATH 204
3 EE 300
Engineering
3
MATH 205
Series and Vector
Calculus 3 EE 301
Systems 3
EE 250
4
EE 306
Technologies
3
IE 331
Probabilities and
3
Total
Total 16

4
th
Year (Regular)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
IE 256 Engineering Management 2
EE 321
Introduction to
Communications
4
EE 305
Discrete Mathematics
and Its Applications 3
EE 332
Engineering
3
EE 311
Electronics I 4
EE 361
Digital Computer
Organization
3
EE 360
Digital Design I 4
EE 366
Microprocessors and
microcontrollers
3
EE 364
Advanced Programming 3
EE 367
Data Structures and
Algorithms
3
Total

Total 16

246

4
th

4
th
Year (Cooperative)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 305
Discrete Mathematics
and Its Applications
3
IE 256
Engineering
Management 2
EE 311 Electronics I 4 ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2
EE 321
Introduction to
Communications
4 EE 331
Control
4
Digital Computer
Organization
3
EE 364 Advanced Programming 3 EE 366
Microprocessors and
microcontrollers
3
EE 367
Data Structures and
Algorithms
3
Total
Total 17

4
th

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ISLS 301
Islamic Culture (3)
EE 460 Digital Design II 4 EE 462
Computer Communication
Networks
3
EE 331
Control
4 EE 463 Operating Systems 4
Total
Total 15
247

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 332
Engineering
3
EE 460 Digital Design II 4

EE 462
Computer
Communication
Networks
3
EE 463 Operating Systems 4
xx xxx Elective 3
Total
4
Total 19

248

BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING GROUP
3
rd
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 202
Object-Oriented
Introduction to
MATH 204
3 EE 300
Engineering
3
MATH 205
Series and Vector
Calculus 3 EE 301
Systems 3
EE 250
4
EE 306
Technologies
3
BIO 321
Biology for Biomedical
Engineers
3
Total
Total 16

semester.
4
th
Year (Regular)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 302 Electromagnetic Fields 3 IE 256 Engineering Management 2
EE 311 Electronics I 4 EE 312 Electronics II 4
EE 360 Digital Design I 4
EE 321
Introduction to
Communications
4
EE 372

Physiology for Biomedical
Engineers
3 EE 366
Microprocessors and
microcontrollers
3
EE 374
Experimentation and Data
Analysis in Health Care
3 EE 370
Biomedical Engineering
Primer
4
Total

Total 17

4
th

249

4
th
Year (Cooperative)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
EE 302 Electromagnetic Fields 3
IE 256
Engineering
Management 2
EE 311 Electronics I 4 ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2
Introduction to
Communications
4
Microprocessors and
microcontrollers
3
EE 372
Physiology for Biomedical
Engineers
3 EE 370
Biomedical Engineering
Primer
4
EE 374
Experimentation and Data
Analysis in Health Care
3
Total
Total 18

4
th

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ISLS 301
Islamic Culture (3)
EE 470
Biomedical Signals and
Systems
4 EE 472
Biomedical Imaging
Systems
3
EE 471 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 EE 474
Safety, reliability and
Maintenance in Health
Care Facilities
3
Total
Total 14

250

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4)
2

EE 470
Biomedical Signals and
Systems
4
EE 471 Biomedical Instrumentation 3

EE 472
Biomedical Imaging
Systems
3

EE 474
Safety, reliability and
Maintenance in Health
Care Facilities
3
xx xxx Elective 3
Total
4
Total 18
251

COURSE DESCRIPTION

EE 201 Structured Computer Programming (2:1,3)
Introductiontocomputers.Simplealgorithmsandflowcharts.Solvingengineeringand
mathematicalproblemsusingamathematicallyorientedprogramminglanguage.Programming
concepts:I/O,assignment,conditionalloops,functionsandsubroutines.Programmingselected
numericalandnonnumericalproblemsofmathematicalandengineeringnature.
Prerequisite: MATH 110, CPIT 100

EE 202 Object-Oriented Computer Programming (3:2,3)
Objectorientedprogramming:classes,objectsandmethods.Objectorienteddesign.Simpledata
structures.Bestprogrammingpractices(structuredcoding,documentation,testingand
debugging).
Prerequisite: EE 201

EE 250 Basic Electrical Circuits (4:3,2)
Electricquantitiesandcircuitelements.Kirchhoffslaws.Meshandnodeanalyses.Sinusoidal
steadystateanalysisusingphasors.Networktheoremandtransformations.Idealtransformers.
Threephasecircuits.
Prerequisite: PHYS 202

EE 251 Basic Electrical Engineering (4:3,2)
Electricalengineeringapplications,basicconceptsofelectricity,electriccomponents,elementary
circuitanalysisandmeasurements,balancedthreephasesystems,idealtransformers,application
specificcircuits,electricalsafety,DCgeneratorsandthemotors,basicoperationofsensorsand
actuators,conceptofdataacquisitionsystems.

EE 300 Analytical Methods in Engineering (3:3,1)
Linearalgebra:matricesanddeterminants,eigenvaluesandeigenvectors.Complexanalysis:
complexarithmetic,complexalgebra,differentiationandintegrationinthecomplexplaneand
residueanalysis.Graphs,Fundamentalloopsandfundamentalcutsets.
Prerequisite: MATH 203

EE 301 Electrical Circuits and Systems (3:3,1)
252

Resonancecircuits.Magneticallycoupledcircuits.Opampcircuits.Transientanalysisviathe
conventionalandLaplacemethods.Fourieranalysiswithapplicationstocircuits.Twoport
networks.
Prerequisite: MATH 204, EE 250

EE 302 Electromagnetic Fields (3:3,1)
Electrostaticfields.PoissonandLaplaceequations.SteadyElectricCurrent.SteadyMagneticField.
Timevaryingelectricandmagneticfields.Maxwellequations.
Prerequisite: EE 250, MATH 205

EE 303 Electrical Measurements and instrumentation (3:2,3)
FundamentalMeasurementConcepts,Generalizedmeasurementsystem,errorsin
measurements,characteristicsofmeasuringinstrumentsstatisticalanalysisoferrors.
Oscilloscopes,analogACandDCinstruments,measurementofpower,DCandACbridges,
transducers,fundamentalofelectronicinstruments,attenuators,converters,peakandaverage
detectors.RMSdetectors.digitalinstruments,digitaldisplayunits,digitalvoltmeter.
Prerequisite: EE 311, STAT 110

EE 305 Discrete Mathematics and their Applications (3:3,1)
Functions,relationsandsets.Basiclogic.Prooftechniques.Basiccounting.Graphsandtrees.
Modeling.Computation.Typesoffunctionsandrelations.Cartesianproductsandpowersets.
Propositionallogic,Logicalequivalencequantifiers.Mathematicalinduction,recursivedefinitions.
Pigeonholeprinciple,permutations,combinations,recurrencerelations.Binarytrees,traversals.
GraphIsomorphism,connectivity,EulerandHamiltonpaths.Planargraphs.Graphcoloring.
Formallanguages,grammars,andfinitestatemachines.Turingmachinesandcomputability.
Prerequisite: EE 202, MATH 204, IE 202

EE 306 Electrical Engineering Technologies (3:2,3)
Electricalengineeringfieldsofactivities.Sourcesofelectricalenergy:powersupplies,batteries,
generatorsandalternativepowersources.Distributionandutilizationofelectricalenergy,
commutatorsandprotectiondevices.Conversionofelectricalenergy;sensorsandactuators.
Electricalsafety.Principlesofelectricalandelectronicmeasurementsandinstrumentation,
standardsandcalibration.Sourcesofmeasurementerrors,andanalysisofmeasureddata.

EE 311 Electronics I (4:3,3)
Conductioninmetalsandsemiconductors,PNjunctions,diodecircuits.Fieldeffectandjunction
transistors.Lowfrequencyequivalentcircuits.Basicamplifiers.
253


EE 312 Electronics II (4:3,3)
Feedbackinamplifiers.Frequencyresponseofamplifiers.Operationalamplifiers:designand
applicationsaslinearandnonlinearanalogbuildingblocks,adders,subtractors,differentiators,
integrators,analogsimulation,andactivefilters.Logarithmicandexponentialamplifiers,precision
converters,analogmultipliers,waveshapers,sinusoidalandsquarewaveoscillators.

EE 321 Introduction to Communications (4:3,3)
FourierSignalAnalysis.LinearModulation:AM,DSBSC,SSB,FrequencyConversion,generation
anddetection.FDM,ExponentialModulation:FM,PM,NBFM,WBFM.PulseModulation,Sampling
Theorem,PAM,PDM,PPM,PCM,TDM,DigitalModulationASK,PSKandFSK.

EE 331 Principles of Automatic Control (4:3,2)
Introductiontocontrolsystemswithexamplesfromdifferentfields.Transferfunctionsandblock
diagramalgebra.Stabilityanalysis(RouthHurwitzandNyquist).DesignofControlSystemsusing
Bodediagramsandrootlocustechniques.
Prerequisite: MATH 204, EE 300, EE 301

EE 332 Numerical Methods in Engineering (3:2,2)
Introduction.Solutionofnonlinearequations.Solutionoflargesystemsoflinearequations.
Interpolation.Functionapproximation.Numericaldifferentiationandintegration.Solutionofthe
initialvalueproblemofordinarydifferentialequations.

EE 341 Electromechanical Energy Conversion I (3:3,1)
Theoryandmodelingofelectromechanicaldevices.Magneticcircuit.Powertransformers.Physical
constructionandapplicationsofD.C.machines.QualitativeintroductiontoA.C.Machines.

EE 351 Electrical Power Systems I (3:3,1)
ElectricalCharacteristicsandsteadystateperformanceofoverheadtransmissionlines.Equivalent
CircuitandPowerCircleDiagrams.PerunitSystemsandSymmetricalShortCircuitcalculations.
Powersystemseconomics.IntroductiontoSwitchgearandProtection.
254

EE 360 Digital Design I (4:3,2)
RepresentationandmanipulationofdigitalinformationBasicBooleanlogic.Elementsofdigital
buildingblocks.Computerarithmeticunit.Memoryunit.InputOutputunit.Basicoperationofthe
computercontrolunit.

EE 361 Digital Computer Organization (3:3,1)
Basicstructureofcomputers.Addressingmethodsandmachineprograms.Instructionsetsand
theirimplementation.CentralProcessingUnit.Microprogrammedcontrol.InputOutput
Organization.ArithmeticUnit.Mainmemory.Computerperipheralsandinterfacing.

EE 364 Advanced Programming (3:3,1)
Structuredprogrammingconceptsandcontrolstructure.Systematicprogramdesign.
Modularizationandscopeconcepts.Useofavarietyofdatastructuresandprogramming
techniques.Iterationandrecursion.Memorymanagement.Programcorrectness,informal
verificationandtesting.

EE 366 Microprocessor and Microcontrollers (3:2,3)
Designofmicrocontrollerbasedembeddedsystems.Overviewofasinglechipmicrocontroller,
hardwareandsoftwareconceptsinmicrocontrollers.Systemarchitecture,centralprocessingunit
(CPU),internalmemory(ROM,EEPROM,RAM,FLASH).Input/Outputports,serialcommunication,
programmableinterrupts.ADC,DAC,interfacingandtimers.Microcontrollerprogrammingmodel
andinstructionset,assemblyandClanguageprogramming.
Prerequisite: EE 202, EE 360

EE 367 Data Structures and Algorithms (3:3,1)
Basicconceptsofdataandtheirrepresentationsinsideacomputer(scalar,structuredand
dynamic).Manipulationofarrays,strings,stacks,queues,linearlists,circularlists,orthogonallists,
treesandgraphs.Sortingandsearchingalgorithms.Fileorganizationandfileaccessmethods.

EE 370 Biomedical Engineering Primer (4:3,3)
Biomedicalengineeringfieldsofactivity.Research,development,anddesignforbiomedical
problems,diagnosisofdisease,andtherapeuticapplications.Modularblocksandsystem
integration.Physical,chemicalandbiologicalprinciplesforbiomedicalmeasurements.Sensorsfor
255

displacement,force,pressure,flow,temperature,biopotentials,chemicalcompositionofbody
fluidsandbiomaterialcharacterization.Patientsafety.
Prerequisite: EE 306, BIO 321

EE 372 Physiology For Biomedical Engineers (3:2,2)
Bodyenvironment,fluidsandcompartments,digestivesystem.Metabolism,energeticsofglucose
metabolism.Respiratorysystemandartificialrespiration.Cardiovascularsystemanditsregulatory
mechanism,hemodynamics.Metabolismandbodytemperatureregulation.Endocrinology,
reproductivesystemandrenalphysiology.
Prerequisite: BIO 321

EE 374 Experimentation and Data Analysis in Health Care (3:3,1)
Descriptivestatistics;elementaryprobability;discreteandcontinuousrandomvariablesandtheir
distributions;hypothesistestinginvolvingcontinuousandcategorical(nominalandordinal)
variables,twoandmoretreatments;linearregression;analysisofsurvivaldata.Designofclinical
trials;samplesizeandselectionofsamples;selectionandpreparationofapparatusandpreparing
experimentalprotocols.Clinicalstandardsfordatacollection,organization,summarizationand
verification;medicalsamplehandling,transportinganddisposal;sterilization,cleansingand
hygiene.Applicationsofessentialstatisticaltechniquesforuseinanalyzingdatafromdifferent
typesofengineeringexperiments,biologicalexperimentsandclinicalstudies.Termproject.
Prerequisite: BIO 321, STAT 110

EE 390 Summer Training (2:0,4)
10weeksoftraininginindustryunderthesupervisionofafacultymember.Studentshaveto
submitareportabouttheirachievementsduringtraininginadditiontoanyotherrequirementsas
assignedbythedepartment.

EE 400 Cooperative Work (8:0,16)
Extensive25weeksoftraininginindustryunderthesupervisionofastaffmember.Students
shouldsubmitafinalreportabouttheirtraininginadditiontoanyotherrequirementsasassigned
bythedepartment.

EE 404 Power Systems Lab (1:0,3)
Thelabintroducesexperimentsappliedtopowersystemanalysis,systemprotectionandpower
electronicscourses.
256

Thelabconsistsoffollowingexperiments:thyristorgatecontrolcircuit,controlledrectifiers,AC
voltagecontrollers,currenttransformers,loadflowandtransientstability,modelingofabalanced
threephasetransmissionline,overcurrent,differentialanddistanceprotections.
Co-requisite: EE 442, EE 451 and EE 453 with approval academic advisor

EE 405 Machines Lab (1:0,3)
Thelabintroducesexperimentsappliedtoelectromechanicalenergyconversioncourses.
Thelabconsistsoffollowingexperiments:transformers,DCgenerators,DCmotors,three
phasesynchronousgenerator,alternatorsynchronization,synchronousmotor,wound
rotorinductionmotorandsinglephaseinductionmotor.
Co-requisite: EE 441 and approval academic advisor

EE 411 Digital Electronics (4:3,3)
Switchingofelectronicdevices.Integratedcircuitgates,multivibrators,registers,chargecoupled
device.Memories.Digitaltoanalogandanalogtodigitalconverters.

EE 413 Communication Circuits (4:3,3)
BehaviorofTransistorsathighfrequencies.Analysisanddesignofelectroniccircuitsemployedin
electronicandcommunicationsystems.

EE 416 Optoelectronics (3:3,1)
Theopticalfiber:Types,effectsofdispersion,attenuation,nonlinearities.Couplingbetween
opticalsourcesandwaveguides.Opticaldetectorsandnoise.Opticalsources:Opticalradiation
andamplification,lasers.Opticaldevices:Sensorsandmodulators.

EE 418 Microwave and Optical Devices (3:3,1)
Structure,AnalysisandtheprincipleofoperationofsomeselectedMicrowaveDevices.These
Devicescanbeeitherintheformof2TerminalDevicessuchasGunn,GaNbasedGunn,InP
Gunn,Impatt,GaNImpatt,3CSICImpatt,Dovett,Trapatt,Baritt,Tunnel,MitattQWITT,Varactors
andTunnett.Orintheformof3TerminalDevicessuchasMESFET,4HSiCMESFET,HFETand
HEMTs.Designhighqualitystableandtunablemicrowaveoscillators.Designahighgain,lowFM
noiseandnoiseFigureand.lowintermodulationdistortionmicrowaveamplifiers.

257

EE 420 Microwave Circuits (3:3,1)
ReviewofTransmissionlineTheory,SomeofItsApplicationsandSmithChart.Briefdiscussionon
varioustypesoftransmissionlines.DerivationofMicrostripparametersandlosses.Distinguish
betweennormalandhigherordermodeofpropagationinMicrostrip.DerivationoftheScattering
matrixparametersofanygivennetworkunderreview.FiltersimplementedinMicrostripline.
DerivationofalltheparametersofCoupledLineMicrostripanditsapplications.Theoretical
AnalysisandDesignofsomeselectednetworkssuchasQuadratureCouplers,Power
Combiner/Divider,PhaseShifterandMagicTeeetc.ReviewingofFerromagneticMaterialand
itsapplicationsespeciallyinmicrostripcirculators,isolatorandphaseshifters.DesignofMicrostrip
antennaandswitches.

EE 421 Communication Theory I (3:3,1)
Autocorrelationfunctionandspectraldensity.Randomsignaltheory:Continuousanddiscrete
randomvariables,transformationofrandomvariables,stationaryrandomprocesses,time
averagesandergodicity,powerspectraldensityofstationaryrandomprocesses.Signaltonoise
ratioandprobabilityoferror.Noiseequivalentbandwidth.Optimumreceivers.Pulsedetection
andmatchedfilters.Signaldistortionintransmissionandequalization.Noiseinlinearand
exponentialmodulation.PCMsystems:Uniformandnonuniformquantization,noiseinPCM,
DPCMandDM.Noiseinpulsemodulation.
Prerequisite: EE 321, IE 331

EE 423 Electromagnetic Waves (3:3,1)
ElectromagneticTheory.Planwaves,Maxwellsequations,boundaryconditions,Pointing
theorem,Waveequation,Planewaves.Transmissionlines:Distributedcircuitparameters,HF
transmissionlines,reflections,standingwaves.T.L.measurements.Waveguides:TEM,TMandTE
transmission,parallelplateswaveguidesTEandTMmodes,.Cavityresonators.Impedance
TransformationandMatching.SmithChart.

EE 424 Antennas and Propagation (3:3,1)
RadiationandAntennaFundamentals.LinearAntennas,Currentdistribution,ShortdipolesAnd
Monopoles/2dipoles,radiationresistanceandgain,longerdipoles,foldeddipoles.Antenna
Arrays.ApertureAntennas.Specialtypesofantennas.Travelingwaveantennas,loopantennas.
Frequencyindependentantennas,helicalAntennas,cornerreflector,lenses.SpaceWave
Propagation.GroundWavePropagation.Troposphericwaves.Ionosphericwaves.

EE 425 Communication Systems (3:3,1)
258

Detaileddescriptionofatleastthreeoutofthefollowingsystems.RadiobroadcastingSystems.TV
andVideoSystems.RadarSystems.MicrowaveLinks,Telephony,TelegraphyandTelexsystems.
SatelliteCommunicationSystems.OpticalCommunicationSystems.AircraftandShipnavigational
systems.
Prerequisite: EE 421, EE 423 (concurrent)

EE 426 Digital Communications (3:3,1)
Samplingtheorem,PCM,bandpassdigitalmodulationmethods(ASK,FSKandPSK),noiseanalysis
anderrorprobability,digitalfilters,anddigitalanddiscretetimesignalprocessing,Ztransform,
digitalfilterdesigninfrequencydomain,digitalmatchedfilters,interferenceandjamming,effects
ofsamplingerrors,moderndigitalmodulationmethods,chirpmodulation,spreadspectrum.

EE 429 Introduction to Digital Signal Processing (3:3,1)
Discretetimesignalsandsystems,FourieranalysisofdiscretetimesignalsandSystemsFast
FourierTransformDigitalFilterDesignComputerapplicationsAdvancedTopics.

EE 431 Advanced Control Systems (3:3,1)
Statespacerepresentationandrealization,controllabilityandobservability.Liapunovandpopov
stabilitycriteria,stochasticandsampleddatacontroltheory,optimalcontroltheory.

EE 432 Digital Control Systems (3:3,1)
Derivationofdifferential/differenceequationsforphysicalsystems.TheLaplacetransform.TheZ
transform.Thetransferfunction.StabilityintheZplane.Systemresponseinthetimedomain.
ControllabilityandObservabilityDesignofClosedloopdigitalcontrolsystems:a)byconventional
means:b)bythedigitalcomputers.

EE 441 Electromechanical Energy Conversion II (3:3,1)
Polyphaseinductionandsynchronousmachines.Modelsandperformancecharacteristicsfor
steadystateoperations.Fractionalhorsepowermachines,theirperformanceandapplication.

EE 442 Power Electronics I (3:3,1)
259

Thyristors,theoryofoperation,methodsofturningon,thyristorlimitations,commutation
methods.SingleandthreephaseACvoltagecontrollersforresistiveandinductiveloads.Single
phaseandthreephaseACDCconvertersforresistiveandlargeinductiveloads.AnalysisofDCDC
convertersforresistive,largeinductive,andgeneralinductiveloads.Singlephaseandthreephase
invertersfordifferentloads.Singlephasetosinglephasecycloconverter,outputvoltageand
frequencycontrol.

EE 444 Power Electronics II (3:3,1)
Staticswitches.Powersupplies.DCdrives.ACdrives.TrafficSignalControl.PowerTransistors.
Solidstatetemperatureandairconditioningcontrol.Lightactivatedthyristorapplications.Test
andprotectionofpowerelectronicdevicesandcircuits.

EE 445 Utilization of Electrical Energy (3:3,1)
Fossilfuelsandconventionalpowerplants,nuclearpowerplants,hydroelectricpowerplants,,
powergenerationfromrenewableenergyresources,environmentalimpactofpowergeneration
andutilization,safetyinelectricalenergyutilization,groundingandshockhazardsinelectrical
energyutilization,powergridsandblackouts.

EE 448 Power System Planning and Reliability (3:3,1)
Engineeringsystemreliabilityassessment,EffectofLoadForecasting,PrinciplesofPowerSystems
Reliability,Generationsystemmodeling,PlanningforFutureExpansioninGenerationSystems.
Prerequisite: STAT 110, EE 351

EE 450 Power System Control (3:3,1)
PowerfactorControl,Automaticgenerationcontrol,LoadfrequencyControl,Economicdispatch,
UnitCommitment,reactivepowercontrol,PotentialInstabilityandBreakdown,Reactivepower
distribution.
Prerequisite: EE 331, EE 441 (concurrent)

EE 451 Electrical Power Systems II (3:3,1)
LoadFlowAnalysis,SolutionofLoadFlowEquations,GaussSeidelandNewtonRaphson
Techniques,AsymmetricalFaults,PhaseSequenceNetworks,UseofMatrixMethods.Power
SystemStability:SteadyStateandTransient.
260

EE 452 High Voltage Techniques I (3:3,1)
GenerationofhighACandDCimpulsevoltages,andimpulsecurrents.Measurementofhigh
voltagesandcurrents.Dielectriclossandcapacitancemeasurements.Travelingwaves.

EE 453 Power Transmission and Distribution (3:3,1)
Transmissionlineparameters,Mechanicaldesignofoverheadtransmissionlines,Underground
cables,DistributionSystems.Distributionsubstationdesign.Surgesontransmissionsystems,
Systemearthing.

EE 454 Switchgear and Protection of Power Systems I (3:3,1)
Switchgear,busbarsystems,couplers,cubicles,auxiliaries,andsinglelinediagram.Relays,
electromagnetic,static,thermalrelay,andovercurrent,voltage.Distancerelays.Differential
relays.Feederprotectionsystem.Transformerprotectionsystem.Generatorprotectionsystem.

EE 455 Economic Operation of Power Systems (3:3,1)
Operatingconstraints.Shorttermloadforecast.Loadcurveanalysis.Economicalloadsharing
betweenunitsandbetweenstations.Tariffs.incrementalcosts.Unitcommitmentandgenerator
scheduling.VoltageandVARcontrol.Energyconservation.

EE 458 Computer Applications in Power Systems (3:3,1)
Powernetworkequationsanddigitalsolutiontechniques.Networkreductionmethods.Computer
programsforsteadystateanalysisofpowersystems;TransmissionLineperformance,Shortcircuit
calculations,and,Loadflowstudies.Digitalandanaloguesimulationofpowersystemcomponent
dynamics.Digitalevaluationofpowersystemstability.Computerapplicationsinutilitiesand
powerindustry.

EE 460 Digital Design II (4:3,2)
Analysisandsynthesisofgatenetworks.Elementsofminimizationtechniques.Synthesisusing
NANDandNORgates.Analysisofsequentialnetworks.Synthesisofpulsemodeandfundamental
modesequentialnetworks.FlowtablesandStatediagrams.Hazards.UseofMSIandLSIinthe
implementationofcombinationalandsequentialcircuits.
261


EE 462 Computer Communication Networks (3:3,1)
Componentsofdatacommunicationsystems.Errordetectiontechniques.NetworkProtocols
includingtheOpenSystemInterconnectionmodel.Communicationcarrierfacilities.System
planningconsiderations.

EE 463 Operating Systems (4:3,3)
Operatingsystemsasresourcemanagers.Processconcepts.Synchronousconcurrentprocesses.
ConcurrentprogrammingmonitorsandtheADArendezvous.Realandvirtualstorage
management.Processorscheduling.Diskscheduling.Filesystems.Somecasestudies.

EE 466 Computer Interfacing (3:3,1)
Basicsofdatatransfer(Serialandparallelmodes,110transferinitiationusingpollingand
interruptschemes,Standardbusses),Interfacecomponentsandtheircharacteristics,(Drivers,
receivers,interfacechips,Analogtodigitalconverters).Designinginterfacecircuitsforstandard
busses.

EE 467 Databases (3:3,1)
Theneedforthedatabaseapproach.Storagestructures.Basicdatastructures(relational,
hierarchical,andnetworkapproaches).Thenetworkapproach(ArchitectureoftheDBTGsystem,
Setconstructs,externallevelofDBTG,datamanipulationcommands).Thehierarchicalapproach
(IMSdatastructure,externalandinternallevels,datamanipulation).TheRelationalapproach
(relationalalgebraandcalculus.Querybyexample).

EE 470 Biomedical Signals and Systems (4:3,3)
Modelsforbiomedicalsystems.Nondeterministicnatureofbiomedicalsignals,physiological
systemsandquantitativeanalysis.Feedbacksystems,transferfunctionsandstability.Frequency
responseofsystemsandcircuits,andBodediagrams.A/Dconversion,sampling,anddiscretetime
signalprocessing.Biomedicalamplifiers,filters,signalprocessorsanddisplaydevices.Laboratory
andcomputationalexperienceswithbiomedicalapplications.Termproject.
Prerequisite: EE 321, EE 370, EE 374, IE 202

EE 471 Biomedical Instrumentation (3:2,3)
262

Electricalsafetyandprecautionsrequiredinmedicalapplications.Electrocardiography(ECG),
analoganddigitalprocessingofECGsignals.Measurementofbloodpressure,heartsound,flow
andvolumeofblood.Statisticalanalysisofheartrateandbloodpressuremeasurements.Basic
respiratorysystemmeasurements.Principlesofclinicallabinstrumentation.Termproject.
Prerequisite: EE 312, EE 370, EE 372

EE 472 Biomedical Imaging Systems (3:3,1)
Fundamentalsofmedicalimagingphysicsandsystems:Xrayradiography,ultrasound,
radionuclideimaging,andmagneticresonanceimaging(MRI).Biologicaleffectsofeachmodality.
Tomographicalreconstructionprinciples,includingXraycomputedtomography(CT),position
emissiontomography(PET),andsinglephotonemissioncomputedtomography(SPECT).

EE 473 Introduction to Rehabilitation Engineering (3:3,1)
Conceptsoftherapy,rehabilitation,prosthesis,orthosis.Therapeuticeffectsofelectricalcurrent.
Examplesofcommondevices:pacemakersanddefibrillators.Sensoryandcommunicationaids.
Neuromuscularstimulators.Physicaltherapyequipment.Electrosurgicalequipment.Medical
applicationsoflasers.Ventilators.Artificialkidney.Neonatalcare.Radiationtherapy.

EE 474 Safety, Reliability and Maintenance in Health Care Facilities (3:3,1)
Definitionofsafety.Electrical,gas,andfiresafetyandhowtomakesafeenvironmentforpatients,
medicalpersonnelandattendants.Reliabilityinhealthcarefacilities.Trainingofoperatorsfor
properuseofequipment.Generationofacomputerdatabaseforequipment,suppliers,dealers
andmanufacturers.Preventivemaintenanceprocedures.Correctivemaintenance,repairand
amendmentofexistingequipment.Basictroubleshootingprinciples.Retrievinginformationfrom
manufacturer'scatalogsandtechnicallibraries.

EE 475 Biomolecular Engineering (3:3,1)
Thermodynamics,biomolecularinteractions,enzymekineticsandbioenergetics.Biodesign,
molecularmodelingandcasestudies.Cellularwarfare,bioreactionnetworks.Application
examplesandtermproject.
Prerequisite: BIO 321

EE 476 Biomedical Systems Management (3:3,1)
263

Responsibilitiesofbiomedicalengineersworkinginhealthcarefacilities.Codes,standardsand
regulationsgoverningclinicalengineeringpractices.Bidspreparationandtenderevaluation.
Designingandlayoutofmedicalfacilities.Equipmentselectionandevaluation.Termproject.
Prerequisite: IE 256, EE 370

EE 477 Essentials of Medical Informatics (3:3,1)
ElectronicMedicalRecord(EMR),hospitalinformationsystem(HIS)standardsandsystems;image
datacompression,datacommunicationandtransmission,securityandprotectionformedical
imagedata.Picturearchivingandcommunicationsystems(PACS),radiologyinformationsystem
(RIS),labinformationsystem(LIS)andmedicalimaginginformatics(MII)forfilmlesshospitals.A
knowledgebaseddigitallibraryforretrievingscenariospecificmedicaltextdocuments.Integrated
multimediapatientrecordsystems,computeraideddiagnosis(CAD),clinicaldecisionsupport
systems(CDSS).Medicalroboticsandcomputerintegratedinterventionalmedicine.Molecular
imaginginbiologyandpharmacology.Theevolutionofehealthsystemsandsmartmedicalhome.

EE 478 Biosensors and Biochips (3:3,1)
Biosensors:introduction,conceptsandapplications;biosensorsforpersonaldiabetes
management;microfabricatedsensorsandthecommercialdevelopmentofbiosensors;
electrochemicalsensorsandchemicalfibrosensors.Biochips:introduction,basicsofbiochipsand
microarraytechnology;construction,typesofmicroarrays,dataanalysis;biochipsinhealthcare
anddiagnostics,otherapplications;biochipsapplicationtogenomics.Microfluidics,BIAcorean
opticalbiosensor,useofmicroarraysinpopulationgeneticandepidemiology,useofmicroarrays
onforensics,DNAchiptechnologyforwaterqualitymanagement;bioagentchip,limitationof
biochiptechnology,commercialaspectsofbiochiptechnology,DNAcomputing.

EE 479 Genetic Engineering and Health Diagnostics (3:3,1)
Introductiontogeneticengineeringanditsroleinhealthdiagnosis.Enzymesingenetic
engineering.Nucleicacidhybridyzadizationandamplification.DNAbaseddiagnosis,biochemical
diagnostics,cellbaseddiagnosticsandimmunodiagnostics.Imagingdiagnosticsanditsrelationto
geneticexpressions.

EE 480 Computer Applications in Biomedical Engineering (3:2,2)
Classificationofcomputerapplicationsinthebiomedicalfield.Availabletoolsandtechniques:
hardwareandsoftwareresourcesinthePCfield.Selectedapplicationexamples:medicalrecord
system,labandpharmacyinformationsystem,officepracticesystem,clinicaldecisionsupport
system.Computerizeddiagnosticandtherapeuticequipment.
264

EE 482 Artificial Intelligence (3:3,1)
Problemsolvingmethods.Searchspaces.Knowledgerepresentation.Reasoning.Naturallanguage
understanding.Patternrecognition.Computervision.Expertsystems.AIlanguages.

EE 490 Special Topics in Electrical Engineering (3:3,1)
Selectedtopictodeveloptheskillsandknowledgeinagivenfield.
Prerequisite: Approval of the ECE Department

EE 491 Special Topics in Electrical Power Engineering (3:3,1)

EE 492 Special Topics in Electrical Machines (3:3,1)

EE 493 Special Topics in Electronics (3:3,1)

EE 494 Special Topics in Communications (3:3,1)

EE 495 Special Topics in Computer Engineering (3:3,1)
Prerequisite: EE 331, EE 361, EE 367

EE 496 Special Topics in Automatic Control (3:3,1)
Prerequisite: EE 331, IE 331
265

EE 497 Special Topics in Biomedical Engineering (3:3,1)

EE 499 Senior Project (3:3,1)
Selectionoftopic:literaturereview;projectdesignplanning,arrangingfordatacollection,and
experimentalwork.Experimentalworkanddatacollectionorfieldstudy(ifany).Dataprocessing
analysisandresults.Preparationofthefirstdraftoffinalreport.Presentationoftheproject.

DescriptionofCoursesfromOutsideofFacultyofEngineering

BIO 321 Biology For Biomedical Engineers (3:2,2)
Introductiontobiology,tissues,cellsandchemistryoflife.Skeleton,joints,muscles.Nervous
system,it'sorganization,divisionandfunctions,senseorgans.Processingoffood.Basicanatomy
andphysiologyofcardiovascular,lymphatic,respiratoryandurinarysystems.

BIOC 370 Biochemistry For Biomedical Engineers (3:2,3)
Wateranditsimportancetobiologicalsystems,pHlevels,buffers.Aminoacids,peptides,
proteins,enzymes,vitamins,carbohydrates,lipids,phospholipids.Metabolism,energeticsof
glucosemetabolism.Nucleicacids.Biochemicaltestsinbloodandurineinhospitallabs.&their
diagnosticuses.

266

DEPARTMENT OF
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

267

INTRODUCTION
Department of Industrial Engineering (IE) at KAU was established in 1395 A. H. (1975 G)
and, thus, became the pioneer in imparting IE education and training in the Kingdom.
Some of the areas where our Industrial Engineers have been working in technical or
managerial positions include manufacturing industries of all types, banks, hospitals,
transportation companies, communications, and defense industries. In the context of
Saudi Arabia, scope for Industrial Engineering application is getting vast because (a) The
Kingdom is short of manpower and every effort is needed to get engineers to design,
install, and maintain automated systems, and (b) The pace of development is very fast
andthereisconsiderablescopeforimprovementindifferentaspectsofworkinginalmost
every organization. Currently the Department has 30 faculty members with an
undergraduateenrollmentofmorethan250students.
Innovation and leadership in industrial engineering and its applications
To prepare Industrial Engineering graduates equipped with the world-class professional
competencies capable of conducting scientific research and rendering community services
allowing for a sustainable development.
.
It is published in the webpage of the of Industrial Engineering department:
http://engg.kau.edu.sa/ie/
Undergraduate Program Mission Statement
The mission of the undergraduate Industrial Engineering Program is to prepare
graduatingindustrialengineersequippedwiththeworldclassprofessionalcompetencies
capableofrenderingcommunityservicesallowingforasustainabledevelopment.
ItispublishedatDepartmentofIndustrialEngineeringwebsite:
http://engg.kau.edu.sa/ie/aboutus/aboutus.htm
The educational program of the Industrial Engineering Department at King Abdulaziz
Universitypreparesitsgraduatesto:
1. be effective in applying contemporary tools of industrial engineering to cater to
theneedsofupcomingchallengesofthechangingindustrialworld.
2. advance their careers by way of exhibiting their professionalism, leadership
qualitiesandeffectiveoralandwrittencommunicationskills.
3. function effectively in diverse teams to handle problems pertaining to different
industrialandmanagerialsettings.
4. demonstrate professional and ethical responsibilities towards their profession,
society,andtheenvironment.
5. apply effectively emedia, computers and software in solving engineering
problems.
268

AspectsofDevelopment
The success of the IE Program would depend upon the competence and ability of the IE
faculty and the support of the Faculty of Engineering in keeping the faculty and the
students abreast of the technological advances in the IE field so as to best cater to the
needs of the concerned potential employers of the region. Thus, the process of
continuous improvement addresses the problem of how well the skills and attributes of
ourgraduatingengineersmatchtheneedsoftheemploymentmarketoftheregionaland
global levels. In this context, employers constituencies are surveyed and a list of their
needsintermsofthepertinentjobskillsisprepared.Inlightoftheseneedsthecurricula
are modified and prespecified educational objectives are targeted. Presently,
Department of Industrial Engineering prepares graduates having ability to design,
develop, implement and improve integrated systems comprising of people, equipment,
materials, energy and information for serving the community at the local and global
levels.Thesegraduatesshould
1. be effective in applying contemporary tools of industrial engineering to cater to
theneedsofupcomingchallengesofthechangingindustrialworld.
2. advance their careers by way of exhibiting their professionalism, leadership
qualitiesandeffectiveoralandwrittencommunicationskills.
3. function effectively in diverse teams to handle problems pertaining to different
industrialandmanagerialsettings.
4. demonstrate professional and ethical responsibilities towards their profession,
society,andtheenvironment.
5. apply effectively emedia, computers and software in solving engineering
problems.
Along with the undergraduate program the Department has also been running Masters
level programs since last 27 years or so. The geographical location of the University in
Jeddah,thatisthehubofindustrialactivities,providesahighlysuitableappliedresearch
environment. Most of our faculty members are involved in independent funded
researches. Some of these are internally funded by the Faculty of Engineering/King
Abdulaziz University, whereas there are many schemes available from external sources
also (e.g. from Governmental and industrial sectors). These research programs employ
undergraduate or graduate students as research assistants. A large number of papers
were published in refereed journals and presented in national and international
conferencesinthelastfewyears.Thefacultymembersaresupportedandencouragedby
the Department to update their competencies and skills continually. Research proposals
submittedbythemareawardedwithfundsbasedonqualityoftheproposedwork.They
are encouraged to attend national and international conferences. In terms of the near
future developments, plans are already set by the Department for establishing the
following new centers/laboratories to satisfy the educational and research needs of the
departmentandtheKingdomsindustrialhouses:
1) IndustrialDesignLaboratory
2) CenterforPrototypingDevelopment
3) SimulationLaboratory
269

4) QualityControlLaboratoryand
5) ChemicalEnvironmentalFactorsLaboratory.

The actual policy of theIndustrial Engineeringdepartment is to accept, each semester, a
fixed number of students (normally between 30 and 35) of the highest GPA (normally
above 3.75/5) from those expressing their interest to join the department with good
standinginmathematicsandEnglish.
In order to qualify for a BS degree in Industrial Engineering, students must successfully
complete 155 semester credit hours with an overall GPA of 2.75 out of 5 or better. The
student has to complete 49 required courses and two elective courses with a grade of D
or better including 10 weeks of Industrial Summer Training and a Capstone B.Sc. design
projectasdetailedintheIEcurriculumrequirementsdescribedbelowinthisreport.

ConventionalProgram Category(CreditUnits)

Requirements Units
Math & Basic
Sciences
Eng.
Topics
General
Ed.
Eng.
Design
Preparatoryyear 27 15 12
UniversityRequirements 14 14
FacultyRequirements 37 25 5 4 3
DepartmentalRequirements 77 2 55 20
Total 155 42 60 30 23

CooperativeProgram Category(CreditUnits)

Requirements Units
Math & Basic
Sciences
Eng.
Topics
General
Ed.
Eng.
Design
Preparatoryyear 27 15 12
UniversityRequirements 14 14
FacultyRequirements 37 25 5 4 3
DepartmentalRequirements 69 2 47 20
CoopProgram 8 8
Total 155 42 60 30 23

Graduates' Employment Opportunities
Althoughaconsiderablepercentageofthegraduatesjoinavarietyofentitiesinthe
Kingdombothintheprivateandpublicsectors,aconsiderablenumberofthegraduates
workasengineersorasresearchers,orjoinmilitaryandmanyofthemchoosetocontinue
theireducationbyobtainingMasterand/orPhDdegrees.
Eachcourseisreferredtobyanalphabeticalcodeandathreedigitnumberasfollows:
270

9. IndustrialEngineeringDepartmentisreferredtobythecodeIE.
10. Thehundredthdigitreferstotheschoolyear.
11. Thetenthdigitreferstoaspecialtygroupwithinthedepartmentforthenumbers
from1to5,0referstocoursesadministeredorsetbytheFacultyofEngineering,
and9referstotrainingorprojectbasedcourses.
12. TheonesdigitreferstocourseserialwithinthesamespecialtyasshowninThe
tablebelow.
KeyoftenthdigitsinIndustrialEngineeringDepartment
TensDigit DelicateSpecialty
1 OperationsResearchGroup
2 InformationSystemsGroup
3 StochasticProcessesGroup
4 HumanFactorsGroup
5 EngineeringManagementGroup
0 AdministeredorsetbyFacultyofEngineering
9 Training,researchorprojectbasedcourse

271

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
MENG130 BasicWorkshop 2 MENG102
MATH241 LinearAlgebra 3 MATH202
IE256 EngineeringManagement 2 IE202,IE255
IE311 OperationsResearchI 3 MATH241
IE321 FundamentalsofComputerSystems 3 EE201
IE322 ComputerApplicationsinIndustrialEngineeringI 3 EE251,IE321
IE323 ComputerApplicationsinIndustrialEngineeringII 3 IE322,MENG130
IE331 ProbabilityandEngineeringStatistics 3 STAT110,MATH202
IE332 EngineeringStatistics 3 IE331
IE341 WorkStudy 3 IE331
IE342 HumanFactorsEngineering 3 IE341
IE351 IndustrialManagement 3 IE256
IE352 SystemAnalysisandDesign 3 MATH204,IE321
IE390 SummerTraining(forregulartrack) 2 IE422,IE432
IE395 IESeminar 1 IE351
IE411 OperationsResearchII 3 IE311,IE332
IE422 IndustrialSystemsSimulation 3 IE323,IE332
IE431 IndustrialQualityControl 3 IE332,IE351
IE432 DesignofIndustrialExperiments 3 IE332
IE441 IndustrialSafetyEngineering 3 IE342,IE351
IE451 ProductionPlanningandControl 3 IE341,IE351
IE453 FacilitiesPlanning 3 IE342,IE352
IE499 SeniorProject 4 IE422,IE432
Total 65

IE 390 the summer training, 400 hours of on-job training distributed over 10 weeks that

Coop students are required to take all of the above mentioned 23 courses except IE 390 which
is replaced by the following course:
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
IE 400 Coop Work Program 8 IE 422, IE 432

272

students 2 elective courses (6 credit units) are required.
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
IE412 DecisionAnalysis 3 IE255,IE331
IE413 NetworkAnalysis 3 IE311,IE331
IE415 ProjectManagement 3 IE351
IE421 IndustrialInformationSystems 3 IE323
IE423 ComputerAidedManufacturingSystems 3 IE323
IE424 DataProcessingOperations 3 IE323
IE425 IndustrialInformationSecurity 3 IE322
IE433 ReliabilityEngineering 3 IE332
IE434 IndustrialStochasticSystems 3 IE331
IE435 QueuingSystems 3 IE331
IE436 DynamicForecasting 3 IE332
IE442 IndustrialHygieneEngineering 3 IE342
IE443 IndustrialEnvironmentalEngineering 3 IE342
IE444 OccupationalBiomechanics 3 IE342
IE450 MarketingManagementandResearch 3 IE351
IE452 MaintenanceandReplacementPolicies 3 IE332,IE351
IE454 EngineeringCostAnalysis 3 IE255
IE455 MaterialHandlingandPackaging 3 IE255,IE331
IE456 FeasibilityStudies 3 IE255,IE352
IE457 SupplyChainManagement 3 IE351,IE451
IE458 StrategicManagementinIndustry 3 IE351
IE459 IntroductiontoEntrepreneurship 3 IE351
IE490 SpecialTopicsinIndustrialEngineering 3 DepartmentApproval
IE491 IndustrialEngineeringPractice 3 IE341,IE351
xxxxx CourseofferedbytheFacultyorUniversity 3 DepartmentApproval

273

A TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
3
rd
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ISLS201 IslamicCulture(2) 2 ISLS301 IslamicCulture(3) 2
IE202
IntroductiontoEngineering
DesignII
2 MENG130 BasicWorkshop 2
MATH241 LinearAlgebra 3 MATH204 DifferentialEquationsI 3
EE251 BasicElectricalEngineering 4 IE256 EngineeringManagement 2
IE321
FundamentalsofComputer
Systems
3 IE311 OperationsResearchI 3
IE331
ProbabilityandEngineering
Statistics
3 IE322
ComputerApplicationsin
IndustrialEngineeringI
3
IE332 EngineeringStatistics 3
Total

Total 18

4
th
Year (Regular)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ARAB201 ArabicLanguage(2) 3 IE342 HumanFactorsEngineering 3
MATH205 CalculusIV 3 IE352 SystemAnalysisandDesign 3
IE323
IndustrialEngineeringII
3 IE395 IESeminar 1
IE341 WorkStudy 3 IE411 OperationsResearchII 3
IndustrialSystems
Simulation
3

IE432
DesignofIndustrial
Experiments
3
Total Total 16

4
th
IE 390 Summer Training 2 Cr. Hr.

274

4
th
Year (Cooperative)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ARAB201 ArabicLanguage(2) 3 IE342 HumanFactorsEngineering 3
MATH205 CalculusIV 3 IE395 IESeminar 1
IE323
IndustrialEngineeringII
3 IE411 OperationsResearchII 3
IE341 WorkStudy 3 IE422
IndustrialSystems
Simulation
3
DesignofIndustrial
Experiments
3
IE352 SystemAnalysisandDesign 3 IE451
ProductionPlanningand
Control
3
Total Total 16

4
th
IE 400 Coop Work Program 8 Cr. Hr.

275

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
IE431 IndustrialQualityControl 3 ISLS401 IslamicCulture(4) 2
IE451
ProductionPlanningand
Control
3 IE441
IndustrialSafety
Engineering
3
IE499 SeniorProject 4 IE453 FacilitiesPlanning 3
IExxx ElectiveI 3 IExxx ElectiveIII 3
IExxx ElectiveII 3 IExxx ElectiveIV 3
Total Total 14

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
IE 499 Senior Project 4
ISLS401 IslamicCulture(4) 2

IE431 IndustrialQualityControl 3

IE441
IndustrialSafety
Engineering
3

IE453 FacilitiesPlanning 3

IExxx ElectiveI 3

IExxx ElectiveII 3
AE 436 Aircraft Structural Design
Total
4
Total 17

276

COURSE DESCRIPTION

IE 200 Technical Communication Skills (2:0,5)
Communicationskills:artoflistening,toolsofindepthreading,informationgathering,
analysing,andcriticizing;electronicmeansofcommunication.Writingskills:writingstrategies,
generalversustechnicalwriting,technicalreportwriting.Presentationskills:useofspoken
English,professionalcomputerbasedoralpresentations.Projectbasedcourseworkon
technicalcommunication.
Prerequisite: ELCS 102

IE 201 Introduction to Engineering Design I (3:0,6)
Introductiontoactivelearning:teamwork,teamdynamics,teamnormsandcommunication,
conductingeffectivemeetingsandqualityassessment.Problemsolvingprocedure:problem
definition,generationofsolutions,selectionmethodology,solutionimplementation,
assessmentofimplementation.Levelsoflearninganddegreesofinternalization.Ethical
decision.Organizationoftheworkanddesignnotebook.Reverseengineeringanddesign
projects.
Prerequisite: COMM 101, ELCS 102

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Introduction to
Engineering Design
II
IE 202 - 4 - 2
Pre-requisites IE 200, IE 201
Engineering design process. Computer modeling and heuristics for problem solving.
Hands-on real life and teambased engineering design project: customer requirements,
conceptual design, prototyping, functional testing, preparation of operational manual.
Communicating design outcomes.

Faculty of Engineering

Textbooks:
Anthony M. Starfield, Karl A. Smith, and Andrew L. Bleloch, HOWTO MODEL IT,
PROBLEMSOLVING FOR THE COMPUTER AGE, McGraw Hill, (1994).
Class notes and handouts material by the instructor (downloadable from the course web
site http://engg.kau.edu.sa/ie202

References:
None

277

1. Definethe problem, identify customer needs, and transform the needs into design requirements.
2. Access information from a variety of sources, and critically evaluate their quality, validity and accuracy.
3. Planan effective design strategy with manageable subtasks and timelines.
4. Developand compare alternative solutions to select a baseline design.
5. Consider realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social, manufacturability, and
sustainability.
6. Integrate prior knowledge of science and mathematics with engineering principles, heuristics and
modeling techniques to formulate unstructured engineering problems.
7. Effectivelyuse modern engineering tools to carry on design and performance calculations.
8. Evaluatethe baseline design and argue suitable improvements and changes.
9. Work in a student team to Build, test, and evaluate a working prototype of the designed artifact.
10. Document the design procedure, communicate design details and express thoughts clearly and
concisely, both orally and writing.
11. Demonstrateability to achieve objectives using independent, well organized, and regularly reported
multidisciplinary team management techniques.
278

Course Topics and Duration:

1. Introducing Course Design Project (2 weeks )
2. Concept Design Phase (5 weeks )
3. Drawing and Prototyping Phase (4 weeks)
4. Testing and Evaluation (1 weeks)
5. Communication of Design Details (1 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The class meets twice a week, 110 minutes per class.

o Engineering science: None
o Engineering design: 100 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Knowledge CognitiveSkills
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 2 3 3 3 2
*
279

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Engineering
Economy
IE 255 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisite MATH 110
Fundamentals of engineering economy. Time value of money. Evaluation of alternatives.
Replacement and retention analysis. Break even analysis. Depreciation methods. Basics of
inflation.
*Onehourtutorialsession

Faculty of Engineering

Textbook:
Blank, L. T. and Tarquin, A. J., BASICS OF ENGINEERING ECONOMY, McGraw-Hill,
(2008), ISBN 978-0-07-128762-3.

References:
Park, C. S., FUNDAMENTALS OF ENGINEERING ECONOMY, (2004), ISBN 0-13-030791-
2
White, J . A., Case, K. E., Pratt, D. B. and Agee, M. H., PRINCIPLES OF ENGINEERING
ECONOMIC ANALYSIS , 4th ed., John Wiley Sons, Inc., (1998), 491 pp., ISBN 0-471-
11027-2.

1. Understandthe fundamentals of engineering economy and the basic principles of the time value of
money.
2. Drawthe cash-flow diagrams (CFD).
3. Identify and Compare different interest rates i.e., Simple, compound, MARR, ROR, nominal and
effective.
4. Computeequivalent values for time based cash flows of varying complexities.
5. Compareeconomic alternatives based on equivalent present worth (PW), future worth (FW), capitalized
cost (CC), payback period (PbP), annual worth (AW) values and Benefit cost ratios (B/C).
6. Computethe internal rate of return (IRR) and evaluate an economic alternative on the basis of IRR.
7. Make analytical decisions by replacement and breakeven analysis of different projects / alternatives.
8. Understandand computedepreciations related to machines / projects using straight line (SL), Sum of
Year Digits (SYD), Declining Balance (DB) and Double Declining Balance (DDB) method.
9. Understandand computeeffects of inflation.
10. Writereports related to engineering economy by using modern engineering tools.
280


1. Foundation of Engineering Economy: Interest (simple & compound), cash flows, MARR,
rate of return (ROR) & CFD
(2 weeks)
2. Factors: How time and interest affect money, combining Factors: Single payment, Uniform
Series, Arithmetic & Geometric Gradient, shifting of series, determination of unknown I & n,
Interpolation
(2 weeks)

3. Nominal And effective Interest Rates: Nominal and effective interest and equivalence
relations involving Payment period and Compounding period
(1 week )

4. Tools for the evaluation of alternatives: PW, FW, AW, CC, PbP, ROR, B/C Analysis (4 weeks)
5. Making Decisions on real world. Replacement study & its applications, Break Even
Analysis
(2 weeks)

6. Depreciation Methods: SL, SYD, DB, DDB (2 weeks)
7. Effects of Inflation, Evaluation of alternatives adjusted for inflation (1 week)

Class Schedule:
The class meets three times in a week. Two times are for regular sessions of 1 hour 20 minutes of
lecture times and 2 hours of tutorial time.

o Engineering science: 50%
o Engineering design: 50%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 2 3
*

281

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Engineering
Management
IE 256 2 - - 2
Role of engineers in management of organizations. Managerial functions related to
production, inventory and human resources. Project planning and control. Case studies
pertaining to engineering problems.

Industrial Engineering Department and Electrical Engineering Department

Textbook:
Morse, L. C. and Babcock, D. L., MANAGING ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY, 4th
ed., Prentice Hall, (2007), ISBN: 0-13-205026-9.

References:
Chang, C. M., ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT: CHALLENGES IN THE NEW
MILLENNIUM, Prentice Hall, (2005), ISBN: 0-13-144678-9.
Payne, A. C., Chelsom, J. V. and Reavill, L. R. P., MANAGEMENT FOR ENGINEERS, John
Wiley, (1996), ISBN: 0-471-95603-1.

1. Apply knowledge of math, science and engineering in engineering management
2. Work efficiently in Teams
3. Use Managerial Skills in Engineering
4. Learn to Learn (long life learning)
5. Communicate effectively in written/oral communication skills
6. Use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering management
practices
7. Use soft skills
282


1. Introduction to Engineering & Management ch1 (1 week)
2. Historical Development of Engineering Management ch2 (1 week)
3. Function of Management handout (1 week)
4. Planning & Forecasting ch3 (2 weeks)
5. Organization ch5 (2 weeks)
6. Decision Making ch4 (2 weeks)
7. Motivation ch7 (1 week)
8. Project Management ch14 (2 weeks)
9. Planning Production Activities ch11 (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
This is a common course. The class meets 3 times a week for some sections each taking 50 minutes,
or 2 times a week each taking 80 minutes.

o Math and Basic Science: 20 %
o Engineering Science: 20 %
o Engineering Design: 20 %
o Human and Social Science: 40 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 2 3 3
*
283

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Operations
Research I
IE 311 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisite MATH 241
Introduction to Operations Research. Formulation of linear programming problems.
Graphical solution. The Simplex algorithm. Duality and sensitivity analysis. Transportation
and assignment problems. Integer and Goal programming.

Industrial Engineering Department

Textbook:
Hillier, F. S. and Lieberman, G. J., INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH, 7
th

edition, McGraw Hill, Singapore, (2001), ISBN: 0-07-232169-5.

References:
Taha, H. A., OPERATIONS RESEARCH: AN INTRODUCTION, 7th ed., Pearson Education,
Singapore, (2002), ISBN: 81-7808-757-X.

1. Understand the integrated nature of the discipline.
2. Understand the basic principles of linear programming.
3. Comprehend the concepts of Simplex algorithm.
4. Analyze the concept of duality and post optimality analysis.
5. Learn the Assignment model used for solving a linear program.
6. Learn the Transportation problem for solving a linear program.
7. Identify, formulate, and solve basic engineering and managerial problems.
284


1. Introduction to Operations Research. (1 week)
2. Introduction to Linear Programming. (1 week)
3. The Simplex Method. (1 week)
4. Sensitivity Analysis. (2 weeks)
5. Duality. (2 weeks)
6. Transportation, Assignment, and Transshipment Problems. (2 weeks)
7. Network Models. (1 week)
8. Examples on Integer Programming (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The class meets three times a week. Sunday and Tuesday, for lectures from 9:30 am to 10:50 am, and on
Tuesday for tutorial, from 2:30 to 4:30 pm

o Engineering Design : 50 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 2 1 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
*
285

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE /NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO.
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Fundamentals of
Computer
Systems
IE 321 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisite EE 201
Fundamentals of computer: hardware, software and computer systems concepts.
Introduction to operating systems and data processing. Overview of programming
languages. Internet and computer security. Introduction to software packages for Industrial
Engineering applications.


Textbook:
Norton P., INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS, 6th ed., McGraw Hill, (2004), ISBN13: 978-
0-07-297890-2.

Reference:
Rainer, R. K. and Turban, E., INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS:
SUPPORTING AND TRANSFORMING BUSINESS, 1st ed, Wiley (2008), ISBN10:
0471736368
ISBN13: 9780471736363.

1. Recognize the role information technology in todays life
2. Identify and define the functions of computers
3. Learn how to communicate in the information age
4. Understand the significance of the Internet
5. Identify the usage of different software & packages
6. Function in multi-disciplinary teams
7. Communicate effectively in oral and written presentation
286


1. Introducing Computer Systems (1 week)
2. Presenting the Internet (1 week)
3. Interacting with Your Computer (1 week)
4. Seeing, Hearing, and Printing Data (1 week)
5. Processing Data (1 week)
6. Storing Data (1 week)
7. Using Operating Systems (1 week)
8. Working with Application Software (1 week)
9. Networks (1 week)
10. Working in the Online World (1 week)
11. Data Base Management (1 week)
12. Development of Information Systems (1 week)
13. Software Programming and Development (1 week)
14. Protecting Your Privacy, Your Computer and Your Data (1 week)

Class Schedule:
The class meets four times a week; three times as regular sessions of 50 minutes each and a tutorial
class for 90 minutes.

o Math and Basic Science: 25%
o Engineering Science: 25%
o Engineering Design: 25%
o Human and Social Science: 25%

NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3
*
.
287

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Computer Applications in
Industrial Engineering I
IE 322 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites EE 251, IE 321
Basics of computer programming languages. Object oriented programming concepts.
Development of application and appropriate algorithms for solving Industrial Engineering
problems.


Textbook:
Dietel, Dietel, Hoey, Yaeger, SIMPLY C#, Prentice Hall, (2004), ISBN 0-13-142641-9.

Refrences:
Michelsen, K., C#PRIMER PLUS, 4th ed., Sams Publisher, (2002), ISBN 0-672-32152-1.

1. Explain the fundamentals of C# language.
2. Understand the Visual IDE of C#.
3. Understand and define the real world problem.
4. Develop a problem solving process for the problem.
5. Translate a written problem statement into a mathematical model.
6. Develop flow chart for the process.
7. Develop / select appropriate algorithm for solving the model.
8. Convert mathematical model into C# codes.
9. Solve fundamental engineering problems using C#.
10. Develop and design a software prototype for the envisaged solutions.
11. Understand the importance of lifelong learning.
12. Access information from various online resources.

288


1. Introduction to C#, Visual IDE, its structure and compilation (1 week)
2. Understanding errors ,debugging and exception handling (1 week)
3. Defining real world problems (1 week)
4. Computer memory concepts & data types and matrices. (1 week)
5. Flow charting (1 week)
6. Control structure & Decision making with C# (1 week)
7. Lifelong learning concept. ( week)
8. Methods and classes in C# (1 week)
9. File handling ( week)
10. Arithmetic, logical operators & algorithms. (2 weeks)
11. Visual IDE and prototype designing (2 weeks)
12. Menus and graphics (1 week)

Course Schedule:
The class meets three times in a week. Two times for regular sessions of 1 hour 20 minutes of lecture
time and 2 hours of tutorial time

o Engineering Science: 1 credit for 25%
o Engineering Design: 2 credit for 50%
o Human and social science: 1 credit for 25%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 3 2 2 2
*
289

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Computer Applications in
Industrial Engineering II
IE 323 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites MENG 130, IE 322
Introduction to computer applications, databases and relational database management
systems. Design and development of databases. Management of database users and
security. Introduction to front-end and its connectivity with the database.


Textbook:
Ahmad, W., ESSENTIALS OF ORACLE, McGraw-Hill, (2009), ISBN: 978-0-077-12586-8.

References:
Oracle Education Press, ORACLE 8: INTRODUCTION TO ORACLE PL/SQL,
Student Guide production 1.1, Volume 1.2,

Course Material is also available on the website www.wahmad.net or www.wahmad.com. You need to
register yourself in order to access the resource material. Your computer No. is your user name select
your password accordingly

1. Understand the concepts of Database and software applications in industrial
engineering.
2. Understand concepts of ORDBMS.
3. Understand and work in client / server Environment.
4. Understand the basic principles of Object oriented Technology.
5. Design databases using RDBMS Tools
6. Develop Databases and computer programs for the solution of engineering
Problems.
7. Develop and design reports and forms using GUI tools.
8. Research, identify and understand a working knowledge of variety of different latest
programming techniques, softwares and their applications.
9. Research, write and present technical report using modern engineering tools.
290


1. Introduction to Excel 2000 ( week)
2. Solving Statistical Problems Using Excel (1 week)
3. Creating Graphs in Excel 2000 ( week)
4. Introduction to SQL / PLSQL (1 week)
5. DDL Commands (1 week)
6. DML Commands (1 week)
7. Function Of SQL Plus (1 week)
8. Select Statement with all options ( week)
9. Creating, Dropping and Altering Tables (1 week)
10. Introduction to developer 2000 version (2.1) Form designer 5.0 ( week)
11. Creating Simple forms (1 weeks)
12. Form Properties ( week)
13. Canvas and Canvas Properties (1 weeks)
14. Introduction to Report designer 3.0 (1 week)
15. Creating Simple Reports (1 weeks)

Class Schedule:

o Human & Social Science: 25 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3
*

291

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Probability and
IE 331 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites STAT 110, MATH 202
Descriptive statistics with graphical summaries. Basic concepts of probability and its
engineering applications. Probability distributions of random variables. Confidence
intervals. Introduction to hypothesis testing. Correlation and linear regression.


Textbook:
Navidi, W., STATISTICS FOR ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill Higher
Education, (2008), ISBN: 978-0-07-110222-3.

References:
Walpole, R. E., Myers, R. H., Myers, S. L. and Ye, K., PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS
FOR ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS, 7th ed., Prentice Hall Inc, (2002), ISBN: 0-13-
098469-8.
Peck, R., Olsen, C., Lay L., INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS AND DATA ANALYSIS, 2nd
ed., Devore; Duxbury Press, (2004), ISBN: 0534467105.
Hines, W. W., Montgomery, D. C., Golsman, D. M., Borror, C. M., PROBABILITY AND
STATISTICS IN ENGINEERING, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., (2003).

1. Calculate the most important descriptive statistics.
2. Apply fundamental theories of probability.
3. Identify and calculate the statistics of discrete and random variables.
4. Apply some discrete and continuous probability distributions to real life problems.
5. Express statistical results graphically.
6. Perform confidence intervals calculations.
7. Perform statistical hypothesis tests.
8. Perform simple linear regression and correlation.
9. Use some statistical packages, and apply it to real world problems.
10. Interpret the obtained statistical results.
292


1. Sampling and Descriptive Statistics
- Summary Statistics
- Graphical Summaries
(2 weeks)
2. Probability
- Basic probability theories.
- Conditional Probability and Independence
- Random Variables
(4 weeks)
3. Commonly Used Distributions
- The Binomial Distribution
- The Poisson Distribution
- The Exponential Distribution
- The Normal Distribution
- The Central Limit Theorem
- The Student's t Distribution
(4 weeks)
4. Confidence Intervals (2 weeks)
5. Hypothesis Testing (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
This is usually multi-section classes and therefore different sections will have different schedules. Each
section will meet either three times a week (1 hour duration) or two times a week (1 hour 20 minutes
duration) and 2 hours of tutorial time.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 1 3 1 3
*
293

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Engineering
Statistics
IE 332 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisite IE 331
Basic notions of statistics applicable to engineering problems. Moment generating
functions. Random samples and sampling distributions. Parameter estimation. Hypothesis
testing. Nonparametric tests. Simple and multiple regression.


Textbook:
Walpole, Myers, Myers and Ye, PROBABILITY &STATISTICS FOR ENGINEERS AND
SCIENTISTS, 7th ed., Prentice Hall, (2002), ISBN: 0-13-098469-8.

References:
Jiju Antony, DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS FOR ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS,
Butterworth-Heinemann, (2003), ISBN: 0-7506-4709-4.
Hayter, A.J., PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS FOR ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS,
PWS Publishing Company, New York, NY, (1996), ISBN: 053495610-6.
Class notes and handouts by instructor

1. Understand the importance of statistics
2. Identify and define statistical problems related to Industrial Engineering.
3. Demonstrate the ability to set up the procedure for appropriate solutions.
4. Comprehend professional skills and ethics in professional life.
5. Adopt analytical approach to problems faced by individuals or society.
6. Interpret the results and communicate effectively
294


1. Joint Probability Distributions (1 weeks)
2. Functions of Random Variables (2 weeks)
3. Some Important Continuous Distributions ( week)
4. Random Samples and Sampling Distributions (1 week)
5. Parameter estimation (2 weeks)
6. Tests of Hypotheses (3 weeks)
7. Simple linear regression and Correlation (2 weeks)
8. Multiple Regression ( week)
9. Nonparametric Statistics (1 week)

Class Schedule:
The class meets four times a week. Three times as regular sessions of 1 hour each on Saturday,
Monday and Wednesday from 9 AM to 10 AM and a tutorial class for 1.5 hours on Monday from 1:00
PM to 2:30 PM



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 2 2 3 3
*
295

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Work Study
IE 341 3 2 - 3
Introduction to Work Study (WS). Productivity and WS. WS approaches. Basic procedure
of motion study: job selection, recording facts, critical examination, etc. String diagram,
Multiple activity chart, Travel chart. Principles of motion economy. Two-handed chart.
Fundamental hand motions. Micro-motion and Memo-motion studies. Cyclegraph and
Chrono-cyclegraph. Work Measurement (WM). Work sampling. Time study.
Computerized WM. PMTS: MTM, Work factor and Standard data. Wage payment and
incentive plans.


Textbook:
Kanawati, G., (Ed), INTRODUCTION TO WORK STUDY, 4th Rev. ed., (1992), International
Labor Office: Geneva, ISBN: 92-2-107108-1.

References:
Lawrence, SA, WORK MEASUREMENT AND METHODS IMPROVEMENT, John Wiley &
Sons, (2000), ISBN: 0-471-37089-4.
Barnes, RM, MOTION AND TIME STUDY: DESIGN &MEASUREMENT OF WORK, 8th
ed., John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, (1980).
Mundel, ME, MOTION AND TIME STUDY: PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE, (1989), Prentice
Hall, New Jersey.
Niebel, BW, MOTION AND TIME STUDY, (1972), Illinois, Richard Irwin.
Class notes/handout material provided by instructor
Web-page for the Course: Group name: works8;
Group home page: http:// groups.yahoo.com/group/works8; Group email:
works8@yahoogroups. com

1. Understand meaning and Basic Procedure.
2. Explain/use the tools and techniques of method study (Charts/diagrams, micro-motion studies &
Principles of Motion economy).
3. Explain/use the tools and techniques of work measurement (WM), (Basic concept of WM and various
Techniques of WM).
4. Design, perform and analyze the studies/experiments related to WS (e. g. Process analysis, operation
analysis, time study, Pre-determined motion time system (PMTS), Standard data and work sampling
with statistical analysis).
5. Work in a team and communicate effectively in performing the assigned works (Home works/Term
Project).
296


[A] Introduction to Work Study:
Definition and scope of Work Study (2)
Productivity and Work Study(2)
Work Study, the Approach: Value of the Work Study, Techniques, Basic Procedure (3)
(1 weeks)
[B] Method Study:
Method study and Job Selection (2)
Recording Facts (3)
Critical Examination (2)
String Diagram (1)
Multiple Activity Chart (1)
Travel Chart (1)
Principles of Motion Economy (2)
The Two Handed Chart; Operation Analysis and Fundamental Hand Motions (1)
Micro-motion and Memo-motion analysis (1)
Cyclegraph and Chrono-cyclegraph (1)
Evaluation, Definition, Installation and Maintenance of the new method (2).
(5 weeks)
[C] Work Measurement:
The Definition, Purpose, Use and Techniques (2)
Work Sampling (3)
Time Study :Equipment, Forms, Job-selection, Timing, Steps, Sample size (3)
Rating (2)
Basic time, Selected time, Allowances, Standard Time, Computer-Aided Time study(CAT)(2)
PTS: Wok Factor (2)
MTM(2)
Standard Data(2)
Case Studies pertaining to Human Factors, Wage Payment/Incentive plans(2)
(7 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The classes are held thrice per week for lectures (Saturdays, Mondays & Wednesdays 0900-0950
Hours) and once in a week for laboratory (Mondays: 1430-1630 Hours).

o Math and Basic Science: 12.5%
o Human and Social Science: 12.5%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3
*
297

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Human Factors
Engineering
IE 342 3 2 - 3
Introduction to human factors engineering. Muscular work. Nervous control. Work
efficiency. Body size and anthropometrics. Work station design. Heavy work. Handling
loads. Man-machine systems. Mental activity. Fatigue. Stress and boredom. Vision and
lighting. Noise and vibration.


Textbook:
Kroemer, KHE & Grandjean, FITTING THE TASK TO THE HUMAN: A TEXT BOOK OF
OCCUPATIONAL ERGONOMICS, 5th ed., E. Taylor & Francis Publishers, London, (1997).

References:
Tayyari, F. and Smith, J., OCCUPATIONAL ERGONOMICS, PRINCIPLES &
APPLICATIONS, Chapman & Hall, London, (1997), [SITE: www.thomson.com]
Bridger, R S, INTRODUCTION TO ERGONOMICS, New York: McGraw-Hill, (1995).
Class notes/handout material provided by instructor.
Web-page for the Course: Group name: zahid_jmi; Group home page: http://
groups.yahoo.com/group/zahid_jmi; Group email: zahid_jmi@yahoogroups.com

1. Explain the Basic Concepts of human factors engineering.
2. Identify, formulate, and solve human factors problems and implement them.
3. Explain basic principles and impact of environmental factors such as illumination, noise, and vibration.
4. Develop verbal and written communication skills through written reports and presentations.
5. Explain and use ergonomic tools/ techniques to conduct experimental and analytical studies.
6. Work in a Team and communicate effectively.
298


Introduction to human factors engineering (4); Muscular Work: physiological principles, Static
effort (4); Nervous Control of Movements (4)
(3 weeks)
Work Efficiency (4); Body size and Anthropometrics (4); Workstation Design: Working height,
Neck & head, Room to Grasp, sitting at work, Computer work station and Design of the
keyboard (6)
(3 weeks)
Heavy Work: Physiological principles, Energy consumption, Upper limits, Energy efficiency,
Heart rate as a measure of workload; Work and Heat, Case histories (6)
(2 weeks)
Handling loads: Back troubles, ID Pressure, Biomechanical models of Lower Back, IO
Pressure, Subjective judgment (4)
(1 week)
Human-machine Systems: Introduction, Displays, Controls, C/D relationship (6) (2 weeks)
Mental Activity: Elements of Brain work, Uptake of information, Memory, Sustained alertness
(vigilance) (2)
( week)
Fatigue: Muscular, General, Fatigue in industry and Measurement of Fatigue (4) (1 weeks)
Introduction to Occupational Stress (2), Boredom (2), Vision & Lighting (2), and Noise and
Vibration(2)
(1 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The classes are held three times in a week for lectures (Saturdays, Mondays & Wednesdays: 1000-
1050 Hours) and once in a week for laboratory (Wednesdays: 1430-1630 Hours).

o Math and Basic Science: 0 Credit or 0%
o Engineering Science: 1 Credit or 25%
o Engineering Design: 2 Credit or 50%
o Human and social science: 1 Credit or 25 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 3 3 2 2 3 2
*
299

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial
Management
IE 351 3 1* - 3
Introduction to industrial management. Economic concepts in industry. Organizational
structure and design. Human resource management. Motivating the work force. Managing
information technology. Financial management. Engineers in marketing and services. Job
analysis, job description and job specification. Preparation of business plan.


Textbook:
Bovee, Thill, Mescon, EXCELLENCE IN BUSINESS, 3rd ed., Prentice Hall, ISBN: 0-13-
187047-5.

References:
Ferrel, H. F., BUSINESS A CHANGING WORLD, 7th ed., McGraw-Hill, (2006), ISBN 0-07-
111581-1.
Boone, L. E. and Kurtz, D. L., CONTEMPORARY BUSINESS, Thomson South-Western,
(2006), ISBN: 0-324-33587-7.
Class notes and handout material by instructor is available on website at
http://elearning.alhaque.com. The site requires registration by the students.

1. Identify and define the functions of management, authority relationship, and ethical responsibilities of
business.
2. Compare and contrast the prevalent economic systems.
3. Explain the organization structure and design, methods of departmentalization commonly used.
4. Discuss the significance of Human Resource Management.
5. Compare and contrast the different Motivational approaches available to the managers.
6. Identify and discuss the information technology tools required for managers.
7. Understand and discuss the importance of Financial Management.
8. Identify, define, compare and contrast customer driven marketing Strategies.
9. Analyze and design Job description and specifications.
10. Function in multi-disciplinary teams.
11. Communicate effectively in oral and written presentation.
12. Understanding the importance of Business Plan.

300


Fundamentals of Business & Economics (2 weeks)
Forms of Business Ownership (1 week)
Information Technology & E-Commerce (2 weeks)
The Functions of Management (1 week)
Entrepreneurs and Small Business (1 week)
Organization & Team Work (1 week)
Employees Motivation, Workforce Trends & Labour Relations (1 weeks)
Managing Human Resource (1 weeks)
The Art & Science of Marketing (1 week)
Financial Management (1 weeks)

Class Schedule:
This is a Departmental Core Course. The class meets 3 times a week for lectures, and tutorial. The
lecture is of 80 minutes, and the tutorial is for 110 minutes.

o Engineering Design: -


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3
*
301

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
System Analysis
and Design
IE 352 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisites MATH 204, IE 321
System definition, characteristics and concepts. Systems development projects:
identification, selection, initiation, planning and managing. System analysis: determining
and structuring requirements. System design: overview, forms and reports, interfaces and
dialogues, and finalizing design specifications. Designing distributed and internet systems.
System implementation and maintenance.


Textbook:
Hoffer, J. A., George, J. F. and Valacich, J. S., MODERN SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND
DESIGN, 4th ed., Prentice Hall, (2005), ISBN: 0-13-127391-4.

References:
Kendal and Kendal, SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND DESIGN, 4th ed., Prentice Hall, ISBN: 0-
13-954934-X.
Deitel, Deitel and Goldberg, INTERNET AND WORLD WIDE WEB: HOWTO PROGRAM,
3rd ed., Prentice Hall, (2004), ISBN: 0-13-124682-8.

1. Develop and enhance students' understanding of the concepts of systems, systems thinking, systems
analysis and design as well as other related concepts and terminology.
2. Develop the analytical and design abilities of the students throughout the system development life cycle
with a variety of methodologies, techniques and tools and how to apply them in improving/developing
systems in organizational contexts.
3. Develop awareness and understanding of the latest modern technological developments and trends
specifically the widespread development and use of internet-based systems and mobile devices and
also their impact on work in system analysis and design.
4. Provide learning opportunities for students to know and have hands-on experience in using software for
web design, project management and charting as well as CASE tools.
5. Develop the students' abilities to communicate in various media and participate effectively in team
work.
302


1. The Systems Development Environment (1 week)
2. Systems Concepts and Succeeding as a Systems Analyst (1 week)
3. Sources of Software (1 week)
4. Managing the Systems Project (1 week)
5. Identifying and Selecting Systems Development Projects (1 week)
6. Initiating and Planning Systems Development Projects (1 week)
7. Determining System Requirements (1 week)
8. Structuring System Requirements : Process Modeling (1 week)
9. Structuring System Requirements : Logic Modeling (1 week)
10.Structuring System Requirements: Conceptual Data Modeling (1 week)
11. Design Overview (1 week)
12. Designing Forms and Reports (1 week)
13. Finalizing Design Specifications (1 week)
14. Designing Distributed and Internet Systems (1 week)
15. System Implementation & Maintenance (If Time permits) (1 week)
16. Object-Oriented Analysis and Design (Optional) (1 week)

Class Schedule:



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
*
303

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Summer Training
IE 390 - 4 400 2
On-site industry based training spanning over a period of 10 weeks in a manufacturing or
service industry under the supervision of an industry based advisor. Documentation of the
training in the form of an Industrial Training report presenting details of the work
undertaken. Multimedia presentation illustrating the achievements of training.


Textbook:
None

References:
None

3. Describe a professional organizational structure, its size and how it is related to its main products and
to market issues.
6. Establish successful relationships with team members, advisors, and clients to understand their needs
and to achieve or exceed agreed-upon quality standards.
10 Utilize prior knowledge, independent research, published information, and original ideas in addressing
problems and generating solutions.
11. Monitor achievement, identify causes of problems, and revise processes to enhance satisfaction.
304


1. Acquainting the trainee by the company, its work environment, organizational structure,
products, costumers, engineering units, and quality system.
4. Familiarizing the trainee of one production or design unit with deep understanding of the
work environment, regulations, standards, etc.
5. Allocating the trainee to a project team and allowing him to study and collect necessary
data about the project using internal and external data sources.
6. Working as a team member to execute assigned tasks with the following objectives:
(10 weeks)

Class Schedule:
Oral Presentation after submitting a written training report; both evaluated by at least 2 faculty
members.

o Engineering Science: -


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
*
305

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
IE Seminar
IE 395 - 2 - 1
Literature review methodologies and sources. Review of a recently published IE book or
topic pertaining to contemporary social, economic or environmental issues in industrial
engineering. Delivering a seminar lecture by a team of students based on a term paper
prepared by them.


Textbook:
Different Recommended Material will be used for this course.

References:
None

1. Practice Effective Team Management tools.
2. Prepare effective business communications.
3. Demonstrate the methods of literature review.
4. Analyze recent publication (s) of Industrial Engineering.
5. Identify contemporary issues.
6. Prepare and deliver effective presentation using different computer applications.
306


1. Literature Review Methodologies (3 weeks)
2. Selection of Area of Industrial Engineering (1 week)
3. Selection of Field in the Area of Industrial Engineering (1 week)
4. Selection of Topic in the particular area of Industrial Engineering (2 weeks)
5. Preparation of Business Document (4 weeks)
6. Preparation of Business Communication (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
As per Schedule



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2
*
307

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Cooperative Work
Program
IE 400 - 16 1000 8
Undertaking practical training for 26 weeks under supervision of an academic advisor and a
company supervisor in a company performing industrial engineering activities. Submitting,
as per schedule, three coop progress reports. Submitting a coop final report containing
matters as specified in the cooperative education program document. Multimedia
presentation of achieved work.


Textbook:
None

References:
None

15. Describe a professional organizational structure, its size and how it is related to its main products and
to market issues.
18. Establish successful relationships with team members, advisors, and clients to understand their needs
and to achieve or exceed agreed-upon quality standards.
problems and generating solutions.
23. Monitor achievement, identify causes of problems, and revise processes to enhance satisfaction.
308


8. Acquainting the trainee by the company, its work environment,
organizational structure, products, costumers, engineering units and quality
system.
(2 weeks)
(2 weeks)
10. Allocating the trainee to a project team and allowing him to study and
collect necessary data about the project using internal and external data
sources.
(2 weeks)
objectives:

N.B.: If the assigned project is to be completed in less than 20 weeks, the student should
complete his training period working on several successive projects

(20 weeks)
12. Submitting first Progress Report to academic supervisor
End of
week #6
13. Submitting second Progress Report to academic supervisor
End of
week #12
14. Submitting third Progress Report to academic supervisor
End of
week #18

Course Schedule:
faculty members

o Engineering Science: -


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
*
309

Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Operations Research II IE 411 3 1* - 3
Non-linear programming. Dynamic programming. Inventory models. Waiting line models.
Markov analysis. Introduction to Game theory. Applications in industrial, service and
public systems.


Textbook:
Render, B., Stair (Jr), R. M. and Henna, M., QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS FOR
MANAGEMENT, 9th ed., Prentice Hall International Inc., (2006).

References:
Taha, H. A., OPERATIONS RESEARCH, 7th ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., (2002).
Hillier, F. S. and Lieberman, G. J., INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH, 8th
ed., McGraw-Hill Company, (2004).

1. Develop the knowledge of analytical techniques of OR-II.
2. Understand the basic principles and techniques of OR-II.
3. Comprehend the Nonlinear programming and its applications.
4. Waiting line models and queuing theory.
5. Comprehend the dynamic programming and its applications.
6. Understand and apply Inventory models.
7. Understand and apply Markov analysis.
8. Understand Game Theory and its applications.
9. Analyze & solve a real life problem for Term project with a team.
10. Realize the computer software applications and solve OR-II problems.
11. Interpret the results of OR-II problems after the computer or manual solutions.
310


1. Non-linear Programming; graphical illustration, concave and convex functions,
unconstraint optimization; one & multi variables, one dimensional search alg., gradient
search method, Khun Tucker conditions, Frank Wolfe alg.
(3 weeks)
2. Waiting Lines and Queuing Theory Models: characteristics of models. Single, multi
channel models, constant service time model, finite population model.
(2 weeks)
3. Dynamic Programming; shortest route problem by DP, terminology, notations, knapsack
problem, air transportation service problem, resource allocation problems, distribution of
effort problem.
(2 weeks)
4. Inventory models, elements of inventory control, inventory control systems, economic
order quantity models, quantity discounts, reorder point, order quantity for a periodic
inventory system.
(2 weeks)
5. Markov Analysis: introduction, states & state probabilities, transition matrix, predicting
future market share, equilibrium conditions, absorbing states & the fundamental matrix
(2 weeks)
6. Game theory: language of games, the minimax criterion, pure strategy games, mixed
strategy games, dominance.
(2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
50 minutes sessions each per week & Tutorial: one 2 hours per week

o Math and Basic Science: -
o Human and Social Science: -


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
*
311

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Decision Analysis IE 412 3 1* - 3
Principles of decision making under uncertainty. Decision models: influence diagram and
decision tree. Solution and analysis of decision problems. Value of information. Attitudes
towards risk. Utility theory. Multi-attribute decision problems.


Textbook:
Clemen, R. T. and Reilly, T., MAKING HARD DECISIONS WITH DECISION TOOLS,
Duxbury Press, (2001), ISBN13: 978-495-01508-6.

References:
Holloway, C. A., DECISION MAKING UNDER UNCERTAINTY: MODELS AND CHOICES,
Prentice Hall, (1979), ISBN 0-13-197749-0.

1. Explain fundamentals of decision analysis with logical and chronological thinking.
2. Model decision problems under uncertainty.
3. Solve decision problems using the roll-back procedure.
4. Identify structure of decision problems.
5. Perform sensitivity analysis of decision problems.
6. Compute the value of perfect and imperfect information.
7. Explain attitudes towards risk.
8. Do projects in decision analysis, and use various computer skills.
9. Work in teams to solve homework problems and do projects.

312


1. Introduction to Decision Analysis: Why are decisions hard? Subjective judgments
in decision-making, the decision-analysis process, requisite decision models, where
is decision analysis used?
(1 week )
2. Modeling Decisions: Elements of Decision Problems: Values and objectives,
making money: a special objective, sequential decisions, uncertain events,
consequences, the time value of money: a special kind of trade-off
(1 week )
3. Structuring Decisions: Structuring values, structuring decisions: influence
diagrams, sequential decisions, intermediate calculations, structuring decisions:
decision trees, decision details: defining elements of the decision, defining
measurement scales for fundamental objectives
(2 weeks)
4. Making Choices: decision trees and expected monetary value, solving influence
diagrams: overview, risk profiles, dominance: an alternative to EMV, making
decisions with multiple objectives, assessing trade-off weights
(2 weeks)
5. Sensitivity Analysis: one-way sensitivity analysis, Rainbow diagrams, Tornado
diagrams, dominance considerations, two-way sensitivity analysis, sensitivity to
probabilities, two-way sensitivity analysis for three alternatives
(2 weeks)
6. Value of Information: Value of information: some basic ideas, expected value of
perfect information, expected value of imperfect information, value of information and
experts
(2 weeks)
7. Modeling Preferences: Risk Attitudes: Risk, risk attitudes, expected utility, certainty
equivalents, and risk premiums, utility function assessment, risk tolerance and the
exponential utility function, decreasing and constant risk aversion
(2 weeks)

Course Schedule:
The class meets four times a week. Three times are for regular sessions of 50 minutes of lecture times
and 2 hours of tutorial time. Ramadan times are 35 min. of lecture times and 1 hour of tutorial time.

o Human & social science: 33%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 2 2 3 1 3 3
*
313

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Network Analysis IE 413 3 1* - 3
Introduction to network analysis with industrial applications. Systems modeling and
analysis using network techniques. CPM with LP formulation, PERT with LP formulation
and cost analysis. Other network algorithms: Minimum spanning tree, shortest path and
maximal flow problem. Flowgraph theory. GERT: exclusive OR networks.


Textbook:
Whitehouse, G. E., SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND DESIGN USING NETWORK
TECHNIQUES, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall, Inc., (1973), ISBN 0-13-881474-0.

References:
Moder, J. J. and Phillips, C. R., PROJECT MANAGEMENT WITH CPMAND PERT, 2nd
ed., Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, (1970), ISBN 0-442-15666-9.
Bazaraa, M. S., Jarvis, J. J., and Sherali, H. D., LINEAR PROGRAMMING AND NETWORK
FLOWS, 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., (1990), ISBN 0-471-63681-9.
World Wide Web (The internet).

1. Comprehend the fundamentals of network analysis and basic notations.
2. Comprehend network models and representations for project management and generate project
schedules.
3. Apply various algorithms for solving network problems.
4. Comprehend network problems and know how to solve those using available techniques.
5. Comprehend the logic of introducing uncertainty into network models.
6. Use of computer software in solving network problems.
7. Work in teams to solve network problems.
8. Apply network algorithms to a real life problem using various sources such as the internet and
investigate various relevant areas of knowledge.
9. Make clear presentations of network problems and solutions.

314


1. Introduction: Systems Modeling and Analysis Using Network Techniques, system
modeling, types of models to be studied, advantages and disadvantages of network
modeling techniques
(1 week)
2. Activity Networks: PERT and CPM, arrow diagrams, PERT: Program Evaluation
and Review Technique, CPM: Critical Path Method, project control, using Microsoft
Office Project, linear programming formulation and using Excel
(3 weeks)
3. Shortest Path Algorithms: Directed acyclic networks, directed cyclic networks,
Dijkstras algorithm, the revised cascade method, some applications, other related
algorithms to be obtained from the internet and presented in class such as minimum
spanning tree algorithm
(3 weeks)
4. Maximal Flow Analysis: Ford and Fulkersons labeling procedure, Max-Flow-Min-
Cut theorem, the matrix approach, relationship between linear programming and
maximal flow problem, other applications
(2 weeks)
5. Flowgraph Analysis: Definition of flowgraph analysis, methods of solution of
flowgraphs, topological equivalence, node reduction methods, applications of
flowgraphs for system modeling
(3 weeks)
6. Stochastic Networks: GERT An analytical approach to stochastic networks,
Elements of the GERT network, evaluation of Exclusive-OR GERT network, counters
and conditional MGFs, applications of Stochastic Networks
(3 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The class meets four times a week. Three times are for regular sessions of 1 hour of lecture time and 2
hours of tutorial time.

o Engineering science: 50 %
o Human & social sciences: 15%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3
*
315

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Project Management IE 415 3 1* - 3
Introduction to engineering project management. Planning successful projects. Specifying,
budgeting, implementing, executing, scheduling, delivery options, and closeout. Scheduling
tasks and resources. Resource leveling. Common characteristics of projects. Network tools
for project planning and monitoring. Cost optimization to meet project objectives. Project
crashing, time-cost trade-offs. Risk analysis. Software for project planning and scheduling.


Textbook:
Meredith, Jack R. and Mantel, S. J. Jr. PROJECT MANAGEMENT: A MANAGERIAL
APPROACH, 7th ed., John Wiley and Sons, (2008), ISBN-13:9780470226216.

References:

Project Management Institute, A GUIDE TO THE PROJECT MANAGEMENT (2004) BODY
OF KNOWLEDGE, 3rd ed., (PMBOK Guide), An American National Standard ANSI/PMI
99-001-2004 Four Campus Boulevard, Newtown Square, PA 19073-3299 USA, (2004).
Kerzner, H., PROJECT MANAGEMENT: A SYSTEMS APPROACH TO PLANNING,
SCHEDULING, AND CONTROLLING, 7th ed., John Wiley and Sons, New York, (2001).

1. Understand the role of project managers in a developing country
2. Learn how to initiate a project determining project goals, deliverables, and process outputs.
3. Acquire practical knowledge on managing project scope, schedule, and resources, document
constraints, assumptions.
4. Define budgets, refine time and costs, estimates, and establish project controls.
5. Measure performance, take corrective action, evaluate its effectiveness, and ensure plan compliance.
6. Get acquainted with popular software used by project management professionals.
7. Facilitate closure, preserve product records and tools and release resources.
316


1. Introduction to Engineering Project Management. Planning successful projects. (1 week )
2. Specifying, budgeting, implementing, executing, scheduling, delivery options and
closeout.
(2 weeks)
3. Common characteristics of projects (1 week )
4. Resource leveling. Scheduling tasks and resources. (2 weeks)
5. Network tools for project planning and monitoring (2 weeks)
6. Project crashing, time-cost trade-offs. (2 weeks)
7. Cost optimization to meet project objectives.
8. Project risk management. Risk management planning. Risk Identification. (1 week )
9. Qualitative Quantitative Risk Analysis. Risk Response Planning. Risk Monitoring and
Control
(1 week )
10. Software for project planning, scheduling and cost estimation. MS Project, Prima-Vera,
and Timberline.
(2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The classes are held three times in a week for lectures and once in a week for tutorials. The duration of
lecture classes will be 50 minutes and 1.30 hours for tutorial.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 1 3 3 3
*
317

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Information
Systems
IE 421 3 1* - 3
General concepts. Values and attributes of information. Different types of information
systems. Concepts of managerial information systems. Analysis, design and development of
industrial information systems. Developing information systems by using microcomputers.


Textbook:
Laudon & Laudon, MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGING THE
DIGITAL FIRM, Prentice Hall: ISBN: 0-13-153841-1

References:
Thomson, E. O., MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS, ISBN 0-619-21538-0.
Class notes and handouts material by the instructor is available on website at
http://elearning.alhaque.com. The site requires registration by the students.

1. Explain the importance of Information Systems for business & management.
2. Identify ethical implications of Information Systems.
3. Describe how enterprise applications promote business process integration
4. Identify how to improve organizational performance with Information Systems
5. Explain the Strategic Role of Information Systems in Organizations
6. Analyze how internet technology has changed value propositions and business models
7. Identify the challenges posed by enterprise applications and management solutions
8. Describe how building new systems produce organizational change.
9. Demonstrate harmony by communicating effectively in multi-disciplinary teams
10. Deliver clear oral and written presentation using visual aids
11. Demonstrate Information Systems fundamentals during class project using computers
318


1. Introduction to Information Systems (1 weeks)
2. Information Systems for Competitive Advantage (1 week)
3. Using Information Technology to Engage in Electronic Commerce (1 weeks)
4. System Users and Developers (1 weeks)
5. Systems Development (2 weeks)
6. Information in Action (1 weeks)
7. Information Security (1 weeks)
8. Ethical Implications of Information Technology (1 weeks)
9. Decision Support Systems (2 weeks)
10. Web /HTML Project Using Microsoft FrontPage I (1 weeks)
11. Web/HTML Project Using Microsoft FrontPage - II (1 weeks)
12. Class Project (1 week)

Class Schedule:
This is a Departmental Elective Course. The class meets 3 times a week for lectures, and tutorial. The

o Human & Social Science 25%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2
*
319

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Systems
Simulation
IE 422 3 1* - 3
Basic theory of industrial simulation. Building simulation models. Organization of
simulation studies. Simulation modeling and application to medium and large-scale
production and service system problems. Output analysis. Variance reduction and
optimization. Use of software such as ARENA for discrete and continuous system
simulation.


Textbook:
Kelton, W. D., Sadowski, R. P. and Sturrock, D. T., SIMULATION WITH ARENA, 3rd ed.,
McGraw-Hill, (2004).

References:
Law, A. L. and Kelton, D., SIMULATION MODELING AND ANALYSIS, 3rd ed., McGraw-
Hill, (2000).

1. Provide a comprehensive understanding of fundamental simulation concepts and ideas in general and
the Arena simulation software in particular.
2. Ability to study and analyze systems under investigations, and define the statement of the problem
under consideration.
3. Develop a skill to build basic, intermediate, and detailed operation models, analyze input data, verify,
validate, well-animate and run these models using Arena simulation software.
4. Develop an ability to design experiments, analyze and interrupt the simulation results, and to present
the findings effectively
5. Demonstrate effective communication by working in teams and through writing proficiency at the level
expected for a senior engineering student
320


1. What is Simulation? ( week)
2. Fundamental Simulation Concepts (1 week)
3. 3A Guided Tour through Arena (2 weeks)
4. Modeling Basic Operations and Input (2 weeks)
5. Modeling detailed Operations (3 weeks)
6. Statistical Analysis of Output from Terminating Simulations (1 week)
7. Intermediate Modeling and Steady-State Statistical Analysis (1 week)
8. Entity Transfer (1 week)
9. Further Statistical Issues (1 week)
10. Conducting Simulation Studies (1 week)

Class Schedule:
Lecture: Two 1.5 hour sessions per week.
Tutorial: One 2 hours session per week.

o Mathematical science: 25 %
o Human and social science: 25 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3
*
321

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Computer Aided
Manufacturing Systems
IE 423 3 1* - 3
Foundation of CAD/CAM. Fundamentals of CAM. Computer graphics software and data.
Computer aided manufacturing: numerical control, NC part programming, NC, DNC and
CNC systems. Industrial robots and applications. Computer Integrated manufacturing
systems (CIMS).


Textbook:
Valentino, J., and Goldenberg J., INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER NUMERICAL
CONTROL, 3rd ed., Prentice Hall, (2003).

References:
iWeatherall A. and Butterworth, H., COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING,
(1985).
Seamens, W.S., COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL CONCEPTS AND
PROGRAMMING, Delmar, (1983).

1. Develop the knowledge of CNC Machines
2. Understand the basic principles and techniques of CAM
3. Comprehend the different types of CNC machines especially milling and lathe machines
4. Understand the different machining operations and tooling used for these operations
5. Explore the advanced features of the modern CNC machining centers
6. Understand and write NC part programs
7. Understand the preparatory functions
8. Understand the auxiliary functions
9. Analyze & solve a real life problem for Term project with a team
10. Understand the basic elements of APT programming language
11. Comprehend the advantages of using the latest CAD/CAM technology
322


1. Introduction to CNC machines: advantages of CNC machines, different CNC machines,
different machining operations, tooling for milling and lathe operations, cutting fluids for CNC
operations, automatic tool changing systems, pallet loading systems.
(2 weeks)
2. Programming hole operations: programming language format, preparatory functions,
dimensional functions, miscellaneous functions, fixed cycles, hole operation commands.
(3 weeks)
3. Programming linear profiles: linear interpolation commands, writing linear profiling
programs, determining cutter offsets for inclined line profiles.
(3 weeks)
4. Programming circular profiles: specifying the plane, circular interpolation commands,
profiling at constant feed rate.
(2 weeks)
5. CNC lathe programming: lathe axes of motion, basic lathe operations, lathe setup
commands, preparatory functions, miscellaneous functions.
(2 weeks)
6. Introduction to Computer-Aided-Part-Programming: basic elements of APT programming
language, geometry commands, setup commands, tool motion commands.
(2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The classes to be held twice per week for lectures of 80 minutes (Sundays & Tuesdays: 8.00 -9.20 am)
and tutorial once in a week for 120 minutes (Sundays: 2.30 - 4.30 pm).

o Math and Basic Science: 0.75 credit or 25%
o Engineering Science: 0.90 credit or 30%
o Engineering Design: 0.75 credit or 25%
o Human and Social Science: 0.60 credit or 20%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 2 1 3 3 2
*
323

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Data Processing
Operations
IE 424 3 1* - 3
Concepts of advanced database management system design, principles and techniques.
Entity relationship diagram. Normalization. Object oriented and object relational databases.
Data warehousing. Data mining. Web and semi structural data. Data Security.


Textbook:
Connolly, T. and Begg, C., DATABASE SYSTEMS, 4th ed., Addison-Wesley, (2005),
ISBN: 9780321294012.

References:
Price, J. and Price, J., iORACLE DATABASE 10g CERTIFICATION SQL EXAM
GUIDE, ISBN: 0072229810.
Snevely, R., ENTERPRISE DATA CENTER DESIGN AND METHODOLOGY, Prentice Hall,
(2002), ISBN: 0-13-047393-6.

1. Understand two important stages of a database development project: data modelling and
database design
2. Understand and demonstrate popular design methods of a relational database such as normal
forms and entity relationship diagrams.
3. Demonstrate and understand the backup and restore procedures and disaster recovery
methods.
4. Develop and implement a SQL/PLSQL relational database system.
5. Management of Data warehousing, Data Mining , and distributed systems
6. Research, write and present technical report using modern engineering tools

324


1. Introduction to Databases (1 week)
2. Database Theory (1 week)
3. Database Application Lifecycle (1 week)
4. Oracle Forms and Triggers (3 weeks)
5. Data Modeling (1 week)
6. Database Users and Administration (1 week)
7. PLSQL control structures and loops (2 weeks)
8. Database Security, Integrity and Recovery (1 week)
9. Object Databases (1 week)
10. Client Server, Distributed and Internet Databases (1 week)
11. Data Warehousing, Mining and Web Tools (1 week)

Class Schedule:

o Engineering Science: 2 Credits or 50%
o Human and Social science: 1 Credit or 25%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3
*
325

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Information
Security
IE 425 3 1* - 3
Introduction to information security. Assessment of threats, vulnerabilities and risk
exposure. Models for estimating risks and optimizing return on information security
investment. Computer forensics, electronic evidence, frauds, cyber terrorism and computer
criminal laws.


Textbook:
Volonino, L., Robinson, S. R., PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF INFORMATION
SECURITY, Prentice Hall, ISBN-10: 0131840274, ISBN-13: 9780131840270.

References:
Boyle, R., APPLIED INFORMATION SECURITY, ISBN-10: 0136122035, ISBN-13:
9780136122036.

1. Understand basic terminology associated with information security.
2. Learn common information security threats including viruses, worms, Trojan horses etc.
3. Identify and rank organizations information assets.
4. Recognize vulnerabilities and security threats in organizations information network and prioritize
them for remediation.
5. Determine methods used to verify the identity and authenticity of an individual.
6. Learn basic essentials of security in transmission and security in infrastructure.
7. Learn the concept and importance of information security audit.
8. Learn operational /organizational security.
9. Understand how policies and procedures play important role in addressing the security needs of an
organization.
10. Know the laws and standards that govern information security.
11. Implement an appropriate information protection scheme to meets organizations requirement.
12. Investigate and analyze the computer system for compliance with organizational policies.

326


1. Importance of information security management , definitions and terms associated with
information security
(1 weeks)
2. Information security basics, access controls and authentication. (2 weeks)
3. Vulnerability, threats and risk exposure including hacking, viruses, worms, Trojan horses
etc.
(2 weeks)
4. An overview of security in transmission and security in infrastructure (2 week)
5. Information security auditing (2 weeks)
6. Information security standards, policies and procedures. (2 weeks)
7. Computer forensic, electronic evidence and computer crime laws. (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:

o Engineering Science: 1.5 credits for 50%
o Human and social science: 1.5 credits for 50 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 3 2
*
327

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Quality Control IE 431 3 1* - 3
Introduction to quality systems. Cost of quality. Total quality management. Quality systems
and standards: six sigma and ISO. Reengineering. Statistical quality control: control charts
for variables and attributes, process capability analysis, acceptance sampling plans. Quality
function deployment. Quality circles. Quality loss functions.


Textbook:
Montgomery, D. C., INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL, 4th ed.,
John Wiley & Sons, (2001), ISBN: 0-471-31648-2.

References:
Juran, J. M. and Gryna, F. M., QUALITY PLANNING & ANALYSIS, McGraw-Hill
International Editions, (1993).
Class notes and handout material are provided by instructor

1. Understand principles and the basic notations of probability and probability distribution.
2. Do point and interval estimation of quality parameters.
3. Do statistical hypothesis testing from the quality engineering viewpoint
4. Understand the basic methods of statistical process control (SPC) as problem solving tools and
methods for process capability analysis and statistical inferences
5. Describe the statistical basis of Control charts for variables and attributes outcomes
6. Develop team work for meeting challenges in professional life
7. Build professional skills and ethical behavior in professional life
8. Develop ability to adopt a scientific approach to any type of problems faced by individuals or society
9. Develop and extend the students knowledge of analytical techniques and application of statistical
methods
328


1. Introduction to quality Cost of Quality. ( week)
2. Review of statistical concepts/ methods. ( week)
3. Process control. (1 week)
4. Control charts. (2 weeks)
5. Acceptance sampling. (2 weeks)
6. Operating characteristics curves. (1 week)
7. Process capability. (1 week)
8. Quality Systems:
- Total Quality Management
- Reengineering concepts
- ISO systems
- Taguchi Loss function
(3 weeks)
9. Introduction to quality Cost of Quality. (1 week)
10. Review of statistical concepts/ methods. (1 week)

Class Schedule:
The class meets three times a week. Twice as regular sessions of 1hour 20 minutes lecture each on
Sunday and Tuesday from 8:00 to 9:20 AM and once for tutorial for 2 hours on Sunday from 14:30 to
16:30 PM.

o Math and Basic Science: 0.8 Credits or 20%
o Engineering Science: 2.4 Credits or 60%
o Engineering Design: 0.8 Credits or 20%
o Human and Social Science: -


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3 3 3 3
*
329

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Design of Industrial
Experiments
IE 432 3 1* - 3
Principles of experimental design. Randomized complete block designs. Latin square and
Graeco-Latin square designs. General factorial designs. 2
k
Factorial designs. Response
surface methodology and robust design. Planning, performing and analysing industrial
experiments.


Textbook:
Montgomery, D. C., DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTS, 6th ed., John Wiley and
Sons, New York, (2005).

References:
Antony, J. DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS FOR ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS, 1st ed.,
Butterworth-Heinemann, (2003).
Hines and Montgomery, PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS FOR ENGINEERS, John
Wiley and Sons, NY, (1990).
Moen, R. D., Nolan, T. W. and Provost, L. P., QUALITY IMPROVEMENT THROUGH
PLANNED EXPERIMENTS, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, (1999).

1. Comprehend the fundamentals of experimental designs and basic notations
2. Understand the basic differences between types of experiments
3. Use appropriate methods for representing and analyzing experiments
4. Recognize the role of standards in society and their impact on experiments and results
5. Interpret results of experiments and draw meaningful conclusions and recommendations
6. Use computer skills to analyze experiments
7. Design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data
8. Make clear presentation of experiments results and conclusions

330


1. Some typical applications of experimental designs, basic principles, using statistical
techniques in experimentation
(1 week)
2. Basic statistical concepts, sampling and sampling distributions, inferences about
differences in means, randomized designs, inferences about differences in means and
variances of normal distributions
(2 weeks)
3. The Analysis of variance: Analysis of the fixed effects model, model adequacy checking,
practical interpretation of results, non-parametric methods in the analysis of variance
(2 weeks)
4. Randomized Blocks, Latin Squares & Related designs: Randomized complete block
designs, Latin Square design, the Graeco-Latin Square design, balanced incomplete block
designs
(1 weeks)
5. Factorial Designs: The advantage of factorials, the two factor factorial designs, the
general factorial designs, fitting response surface curves and surfaces, blocking in factorial
designs
(3 weeks)
6. 2
k
Factorial Designs: The 2
2
design, the 2
3
design, the General 2
k
factorial design,
confounding the 2
k
factorial design in 2
p
blocks
(3 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The class meets three times a week. Twice as regular sessions and 50 minutes lecture each on
Saturday, Monday and Wednesday from 8.00 to 9.00 a.m. and once for Tutorial on Saturday from 2.30
to 4 pm.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
*
331

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Reliability Engineering IE 433 3 1* - 3
Introduction to reliability analysis. Reliability measures: reliability function, expected life,
hazard function of important distribution functions. Hazard models and product life.
Extreme value distribution. Static reliability models. Dynamic reliability models. System
effectiveness measures. Reliability allocation and optimization. Introduction to fault tree
analysis and human reliability.


Textbook:
Kapur, K.C. and Lamberson, L. R., RELIABILITY IN ENGINEERING DESIGN, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., (1977), ISBN 0-471-51191-9.
Smith, C. O. and Robert, E., INTRODUCTION TO RELIABILITY IN DESIGN, Krieger
Publishing Company, Inc., Malabar, Florida, (1983), ISBN 0-89874-553-5.

References:
. . . . . . . .
~ .

1. Explain fundamentals of reliability analysis.
2. Model and analyze reliability problems.
3. Study static reliability models and solve various static reliability problems.
4. Study dynamic reliability models and solve various dynamic reliability problems.
5. Study and analyze extreme value problems in relation to reliability systems.
6. Apply system effectiveness measures.
7. Explain reliability optimization and fault tree analysis.
8. Effectively use computer packages to solve reliability problems.
9. Search the internet for being updated with recent developments in reliability studies

332


1. Introduction to reliability and Reliability Measures: Reliability Function, the expected life, the
failure rate and hazard function, Reliability and hazard function for well-known distribution
functions.
(2 week)
2. Hazard models and product life: constant, linearly increasing, bathtub, power function and
exponential model, Estimating the hazard function, Distribution selection: exponential, Weibull,
and geometric distributions, the extreme value distribution and applications.
(3 week)
3. Static Reliability Models: Series systems, parallel systems, combinations, complex system
analysis, Reliability considerations in design,
(2 weeks)
4. Dynamic Reliability Models: The series system, series chain, parallel system, parallel
redundant systems, and standby redundant systems. Perfect switching and imperfect switching.
Shared load parallel models.
(2 weeks)
5. System Effectiveness Measures: Maintainability, operational readiness, availability, intrinsic
availability.
(1 weeks)
6. Introduction to life testing. Reliability allocation and optimization algorithms and approaches.
(2 weeks)
7. Introduction to fault Tree Analysis and its engineering applications.
(2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The class meets four times a week. Three times are for regular sessions of 50 minutes of lecture times
and 2 hours of tutorial time. Ramadan times are 35 min. of lecture times and 1 hour of tutorial time.

o Math and Basic Science: 1.0 Credit or 33%
o Engineering Science: 1.0 Credit or 33%
o Engineering Design: 1.0 Credit or 33 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 1 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 3
*
333

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Stochastic
Systems
IE 434 3 1* - 3
Deterministic and stochastic processes. Poisson process and related distributions. Birth and
death processes. Markov processes with continuous state space. Renewal process and
theory. Markovian decision processes in industry. Markovian and non-Markovian systems.
Stochastic models for transportation and maintenance systems. Introduction to simulation
modeling of stochastic systems.


Textbook:
Tijms, H. C., A FIRST COURSE IN STOCHASTIC MODELS, Wiley New York, (2003).

References:
Gross, D. and Harris, C. M., FUNDAMENTALS OF QUEUING THEORY, 3rd ed., John
Wiley and Sons, New York, (1998).
Tijms, H.C, STOCHASTIC MODELS AN ALGORITHMIC APPROACH, Wiley New York,
(1994).
Barlette, M.S, AN INTRODUCTION TO STOCHASTIC PROCESSES, Cambridge University
Press, London, (1978).
Wong, E. and Hajek, B., STOCHASTIC PROCESSES IN ENGINEERING SYSTEMS,
Springer Verlag, New York, (1985).

1. Realize and identify the fact that most of the natural processes
are stochastic in nature
2. Apply engineering sciences and theory related to processes of
stochastic nature
3. Identify, formulate, analyze and solve engineering problems
4. To provide professional expertise in solving problems in
industrial systems of society.
5. To provide expertise in using appropriate modern techniques,
skills and engineering tools, in classroom, laboratories, and other educational settings.
6. Function effectively in multidisciplinary teams, in a wide range of
organizations,
7. Communicate effectively in written and oral media,
8. To provide students with the necessary education to understand
the impact of engineering solutions in local and global societal contexts

334


1. Stochastic and deterministic processes, Poisson process and related distributions, birth
and death processes
(1 week)
2. Markov processes with discrete state space, definition and examples of Markov chains (1 week)
3. Transition probabilities, statistical inference on Markov chains (1 week)
4. Markov processes with continuous state space, Renewal process and theory (1 week)
5. Time series models, statistical analysis of time series (1 weeks)
6. Markovian decision processes in industry and service sectors (1 weeks)
7. Modeling and design and queuing systems, steady state and transient behavior in queuing
systems, Non-Markovian queuing systems
(1 weeks)
8. Probabilistic inventory models, single period and multi-period inventory models, perishable
inventory system modeling
(1 weeks)
9. Stochastic modeling of transportation systems (2 weeks)
10. Simulation modeling of stochastic systems (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
to 4 pm.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
*
335

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Queuing Systems IE435 3 1* - 3
Characteristics of queuing systems. General arrival and service patterns. Poisson process
and Erlangian models. Birth and death processes in queuing systems. Markovian and non-
Markovian queuing models. Steady state and transient solutions. Optimization in queuing
systems. Queuing applications in production, transportation, communication and public
service systems.


Textbook:
Gross, D. and Harris, C. M., FUNDAMENTALS OF QUEUING THEORY, John Wiley &
Sons, (2002).

References:
Bose, S. K., AN INTRODUCTION TO QUEUING SYSTEMS, Kluwer Academic /Plenum
Publishers, New York, (2002), ISBN 0-306-46734-8.
Saaty, T. L., ELEMENTS OF QUEUING THEORY WITH APPLICATIONS, McGraw-Hill, NY,
(1961).

1. Understand formulation of queuing systems of different types.
2. Learn the concepts of analytical modeling techniques.
3. Get exposed to the converting real life systems into mode Is.
4. Be trained to use these models for analyzing and predicting responses of real life systems to changing
factors that influence their behavior.
5. Develop ability to adopt a scientific approach to any type problems faced by individuals or society.
6. Improve their overall outlook of facing difficult situations in life.
7. Learn the use of advanced software packages needed in professional life.
8. Acquire an overall improvement in analytical and computing power.
336


1. Basic concepts of waiting line theory. (1 week)
2. Analysis of Queuing systems and Performance measures. (1 week)
3. Markovian Queues. Birth-Death Process Modeling. (1 week)
4. Steady state and Transient behaviour. (1 week)
5. Non-Markovian Queuing systems. (1 weeks)
6. Optimization problems in queuing. (1 weeks)
7. Simulation of Queuing Systems. (1 weeks)
8. Applications of Queuing Theory in industry and service organizations,
Communication, Computer Networks etc.
(1 weeks)
9. Applications and case studies in production, transportation communication and
public service systems.
(2 weeks)
10. Software Applications. (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
to 4 pm.

o Mathematics and Basic Science: 1 Credit or 25%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
*
337

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Dynamic Forecasting IE 436 3 1* - 3
Time series and forecasting. Forecasting accuracy. Monitoring and controlling forecasts.
Linear and multiple regression with forecasting applications. Box-Jenkins (ARIMA)
methodology. Introduction to fundamental and technical analysis with applications in
financial markets. Introduction to neural networks. Judgmental forecasting.


Textbook:
Hanke, J. E. and Wichern, D. W., BUSINESS FORECASTING, 8th ed., Pearson/Prentice
Hall, New Jersey, (2005), ISBN 0-13-122856-0.
Russell, R. S. and Taylor, B. W., OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT, 4th ed., Pearson Prentice
Hall, (2005).

References:
None

1. Understand the difference between time series forecasting and causal (regression) forecasting.
2. Compute forecasts using the various methods and tools presented in the course outline.
3. Measure forecast accuracy.
4. Learn how to use forecasting packages (Minitab and Excel) for various forecasting.
5. Apply Box-Jenkins (ARIMA) methodology for forecasting.
6. Work in a group for case studies analysis and reporting.
7. Develop & use power-point for case studies oral presentation.

338


1. Introduction to Forecasting (1 week)
2. Exploring data Patterns (1 week)
3. Choosing a Forecasting Technique ( week)
4. Measures of forecasting accuracy ( week)
5. Moving averages (1 week)
6. Exponential smoothing (1 week)
7. Trend, Seasonal & cyclic variations in data (2 weeks)
8. Simple Linear regression (1 week)
9. Multiple Regression Analysis (1 week)
10. Introduction to Box-Jenkins (ARIMA) Methodology (2 weeks)
11. Judgmental Forecasting (1 week)
12. Case Study (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The class meets 3 times a week for lectures and tutorial. The lecture is of 80 minutes and the tutorial is
for 110 minutes.

o Engineering Science: 1 credit or 33 %
o Math and Basic Sciences: 2 credits or 67%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 2 3 1 3 3
*
339

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Safety
Engineering
IE 441 3 1* - 3
Accident: causes and costs. Appraising safety performance and risk assessment. Analysis of
accident causes. Accident reports and records. Job safety analysis. Plant inspection.
Accident investigation. Plant layout and arrangement. Plant housekeeping. Maintenance
and safety. Material handling and safety. Machine guarding. Explosion and fire prevention.
Personal protection. First aid. Planning for emergencies.


Textbook:
Asfahl, C.R., INDUSTRIAL SAFETY AND HEALTH MANAGEMENT, 5th ed., Prentice Hall
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, (2005).

References:
Krieger, G. R. (Ed), ACCIDENT PREVENTION MANUAL FOR BUSINESS AND
INDUSTRY: Administration and Programs (Vol. I), Engineering and Technology (Vol. II),
11th ed., National Safety Council, Itasca, Ill, USA, (1997).

1. Anticipate and recognize work hazards and accident causes, analyze them and assess their impact
on productivity.
2. Initiate and maintain a safety program for an organization.
3. Comprehend safety aspects and control of work accidents.
4. Improve communication skills with industry for solving industrial safety problems.
340


1. Safety instructions ( week)
2. Accident during work: cost and causes (1 week)
3. Appraising safety performance and risk assessment (1 week)
4. Analysis of accident causes (1 week)
5. Accident report and records
( week)
6. Job safety analysis (1 week)
7. Plant inspection ( week)
8. Accident investigation (1 week)
9. Plant layout and arrangement (1 week)
10. Plant housekeeping ( week)
11. Maintenance and safety (1 week)
12. Material handling and safety (1 week)
13. Machine guarding ( week)
14. Explosion and fire prevention (1 week)
15. Personal protection (1 week)
16. First aid ( week)
17. Planning for emergencies (1 week)

Class Schedule:
The class meets three times in week. Two times are for regular sessions of 1 hour 20 minutes of
lecture times and 3 hours of laboratory time



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

1 2 3 3 3 2 1 1
*
341

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Hygiene
Engineering
IE 442 3 1* - 3
Occupational exposure: permissible levels and legal aspects. Hazards' anticipation and
recognition. Physical hazards particularly heat, noise and vibration, light, non-ionizing and
ionizing radiations: assessment and control. Chemical agents: assessment and control.
Industrial ventilation. Design of local exhaust systems.


Textbook:
Di Nardi, S.R. (Ed), THE OCCUPATIONAL ENVIRONMENT: ITS EVALUATION AND
CONTROL, American Industrial Hygiene Association, Fairfax, VA, (1997).
Class notes and handouts by the instructor
References:
Harris, R. (Ed), PATTYS INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE, Vol. 1, 2, 3 & 4, 5th ed., American
Industrial Hygiene Association, Fairfax, VA, (2000).
Plog, B. A., Niland, J. and Quinlan, P. J., FUNDAMENTALS OF INDUSTRIAL
HYGIENE, National Safety Council, Itasca, III, USA.

1. Anticipate effects of environmental conditions on human health and productivity, and in
particular as related to developing countries.
2. Anticipate and recognize environmental hazards arising from or during work.
3. Evaluate environmental hazards and assess risk.
4. Solve environmental and work problems, eliminate hazards and abate and control work
hazards.
5. Communicate with industry and community for solving industrial environmental problems (case
studies).

342


1. Introduction and background: philosophy and history of industrial hygiene ( week)
2. Occupational exposure limits and legal aspects (1 weeks)
3. Occupational hazards: anticipation and recognition (1 week)
4. Physical hazards: recognition, assessment and control: heat, noise,
light, non-ionizing and ionizing radiations
(5 weeks)
5. Chemical agents in industry: recognition, assessment and control:
i. Particulates: fate of industrial particles
ii. Non-particulates: entry, absorption, detoxification, elimination and effects
(3 weeks)
6. Permissible levels: development and application (1 week)
7. Industrial ventilation: general ventilation vs. local exhaust, design of local
exhaust system: operating and maintenance
(2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The class meets three times in week. Two times are for regular sessions of 1 hour 20 minutes
of lecture times and 3 hours of laboratory time.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 2 3 3 2 1 1 2
*
343

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Environmental
Engineering
IE 443 3 1* - 3
Basics of natural systems. Industrial environment as part of the ecological system. Water
quality management. Waste water treatment. Air pollution. Noise pollution. Solid waste
management. Hazardous waste management. Ionizing radiation. Case studies.


Textbook:
Davis, M. L., Masten, S. J., PRINCIPLES OF ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING AND
SCIENCE, 1st ed., McGraw-Hill, (2004).

References:
Koren, H., Bisesi, M., I HANDBOOK OF ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH, Vols. I & II,
4th ed., CRC Press, (2002).

1. Anticipate the impact of natural and man-made factors on the ecosystem and on human health, activity
and productivity.
2. Anticipate and recognize environmental hazards arising from or during human activities.
3. Evaluate environmental hazards and assess risks.
4. Solve environmental and human activities problems, eliminate hazards and abate and control
environmental hazards.
5. Communicate with governmental agencies, industry and community for solving environmental problems
(case studies).

344


1. Introduction to environmental engineering and science ( week)
2. Environmental legislation, regulation and ethics ( week)
3. Basics of natural systems ( week)
4. Industrial environment as a part of ecological system ( week)
5. Risk assessment and management ( week)
6. Materials and energy balances ( week)
7. Water quality management (1 weeks)
8. Water treatment (1 week)
9. Waste water treatment (1 weeks)
10. Air pollution (1 weeks)
11. Air pollution control (1 weeks)
12. Solid waste management (1 week)
13. Hazardous waste management (1 week)
14. Noise pollution (1 week)
15. Ionizing radiation (1 week)

Class Schedule:
The class meets three times a week. Two times are for regular sessions of 1 hour 20 minutes of lecture
times and 2 hours of tutorial and laboratory time.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 3 3 1 2 2 2
*
345

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO.
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Occupational
Biomechanics
IE 444 3 1* - 3
Introduction to Occupational Biomechanics. Kinematics and kinetics. Anthropometry.
Mechanical work-capacity evaluation. Bio-instrumentation for Occupational Biomechanics.
Biomechanical models. Methods of classifying and evaluating manual work. Manual
material handling limits. Biomechanical considerations in machine control and workplace
design. Hand tool design guidelines. Guidelines for seated work.


Textbook:
Chaffin, D. B., Andersson, G. B. J. and Martin, B. J., OCCUPATIONAL BIOMECHANICS,
3rd ed., John Wiley, New Jersey, (2006), ISBN 978-0-471-72343-1.

References:
Kroemer, K. H. E., Kroemer, H. B. and Kroemer-Elbert, K. E., ERGONOMICS: HOWTO
DESIGN FOR EASE AND EFFICIENCY, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall, New Jersey, (2000), ISBN
978-0137524785.
Tayyari, F. and Smith, J., OCCUPATIONAL ERGONOMICS: PRINCIPLES &
APPLICATIONS, Chapman & Hall: London. (1997), [SITE: www.thomson.com].
Bridger, R. S., INTRODUCTION TO ERGONOMICS, New York, McGraw-Hill, (1995).
Class notes/handouts materials provided by instructor.

1. Explain the Basic Concepts of Occupational Biomechanics.
2. Solve for forces, moments and/or moment arms for a given free body diagram that is said to be in static
equilibrium.
3. Estimate all required anthropometric values necessary in the equations of motion.
4. Model a given joint with appropriate anatomical structures and then calculate the muscular and joint
reaction forces which are required to maintain static equilibrium in the joint.
5. List the risk factors for occupational low back, neck, hand/wrist, elbow, shoulder etc. injuries and be
able to identify them in a given work situation.
6. Work in a Team and communicate effectively.
346


1. Definition of Occupational Biomechanics. Historical Development of Occupational
Biomechanics. The Need for an Occupational Biomechanics Specialty. Who Uses
Occupational Biomechanics?
(1 week)
2. Connective Tissue, Skeletal Muscle, Joints. (1 week)
3. Measurement of Physical Properties of Body Segments, Anthropometric Data for
Biomechanical Studies in Industry, Summary of Anthropometry in Occupational
Biomechanics.
(1 week)
4. Joint Motion: Methods and Data, Muscle Strength Evaluation, Summary and
Limitations of Mechanical Work-Capacity Data.
(1 week)
5. Why Model? Planar Static Biomechanical Models, Three-dimensional Modeling of
Static Strength Dynamic Biomechanical Models, Special-purpose Biomechanical
Models of Occupational Tasks
(2 weeks)
6. Traditional Methods of classifying and evaluating manual work, Traditional Work
Analysis System, Contemporary Biomechanical Job Analysis
(2 weeks)
7. Lifting Limits in Manual Material Handling, Pushing and Pulling Capabilities,
Recommendations for improving Manual Materials Handling Tasks
(1 week)
8. Practical Guidelines for Workplace and machine Control Layout, Maintaining the
Facilities Plan
(1 week)
9. The Need for Biomechanical Concepts in Design, Shape and Size considerations,
Hand-Tool Weight and Use Considerations, Force Reaction Considerations in
Powered Hand-tool Design Keyboard Design Considerations
(2 weeks)
10. General Considerations Related to Sitting Postures, Anthropometric Aspects of
Seated Workers, Comfort, The Spine and Sitting The Shoulder and Sitting, The Legs
and Sitting, The Sitting Workplace
(2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The class meets three times a week. Two times are for regular sessions of 1 hour 20 minutes
of lecture times and 2 hours of tutorial and laboratory time.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
*
347

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Marketing Management
and Research
IE 450 3 1* - 3
Study of marketing theory. Methods of marketing. Interrelationship of the different phases
of marketing strategies. Consumer decision processes through behavioral sciences. Theories
and techniques of planning, analyzing and presenting market studies. Methodologies of
marketing research with emphasis on primary research including questionnaire design.


Textbook:
Kotler, P. and Armstrong, G., PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING, 13th ed., Pearson, (2010),
ISBN: 978-0-13-700669-4.
References:
Peter, J. P. and Donnelly, J. H., Jr., MARKETING MANAGEMENT, 9th ed., McGraw Hill,
(2009), ISBN: 978-0-07-128076-1.
Class notes / handout material provided by instructor
Web-page http://elearning.alhaque.com Username and password on registration and
authenticity

1. Define, describe and demonstrate method of marketing.
2. Compare and contrast different phases of marketing strategies.
3. Identify the customer decision process.
4. Identify and analyze the techniques of planning, analyzing and presenting market studies.
5. Compare and contrast different methodologies of market research.

348


1. Marketing: Creating and capturing Customer Values (1 weeks)
2. Company and Marketing Strategy (1 weeks)
3. Analyzing the Marketing Environments (1 weeks)
4. Managing Marketing Information to Gain Customer Insight (1 weeks)
5. Consumer Markets and Consumer Behavior (1 weeks)
6. Customer Driven Marketing (1 weeks)
7. Pricing Understanding and capturing values (1 weeks)
8. Pricing Strategies (1 week)
9. Marketing Plan (3 weeks)
Class Schedule:



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2
*
349

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Production Planning and
Control
IE 451 3 1* - 3
Basic concepts of Production and Operations Management (POM). Design of products and
services. Processes and technologies. E-commerce and operations management. Inventory
management. Supply-Chain management. Just-in-time and lean production. Forecasting.
Material Requirements Planning (MRP). Introduction to Enterprise Requirement Planning
(ERP). Capacity and Aggregate planning. Scheduling.


Textbook:
Heizer J., and Render B. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT, 8th ed., Pearson Prentice Hall,
(2007).

References:
Russell R. and Taylor III, B.W., OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT, 4th ed., Pearson Prentice
Hall, (2003).

1. Understand basic concepts of production and operations Management (POM): Various
production processes including JIT (Just-in-Time), Aggregate production planning (APP), Material
requirement planning (MRP), Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP),Inventory management, Supply
chain management system (SCM), Forecasting and Scheduling
2. Design of products and services, techniques for improving design process, technology in design.
3. Explain/use the tools and techniques of various forecasting methods to calculate product
demands, different inventory models to calculate reorder points and safety stock
4. Develop/computeaggregate production planning, MRP structure, Master production schedule
(MPS), Bill of materials (BOM), Capacity requirement planning (CRP), and PerformScheduling and
loading, and sequencing jobs
5. Work within a team and communicate efficiently to perform the assigned tasks (Home
works/Group Project)

350


1. Production and operations management,(POM): Introduction, why study POM,
Categories of E-commerce, competitiveness, and productivity
(1 week)
2. Design of products and services: Introduction, techniques for improving design
process, technology in design
(1 week)
3. Processes and technologies: Types of production processes, Process planning e-
manufacturing
(1 week)
4. Inventory management: Periodic inventory system, ABC classification system, EOQ
models, Quantity discounts, Reorder points, Safety stock
(2 weeks)
5. Supply-Chain management: What is SCM, Information in SCM, Distribution and
Warehouse management, Transportation methods, Global supply chain
(1 week)
6. Forecasting: Strategic role of forecasting, Time series methods (Moving average,
Weighted moving average, Exponential smoothing, Regression method
(2 weeks)
7. Just-in-time (JIT) and Lean production: Elements of JIT, The pull system, Kanban
production system
(1 week)
8. Capacity and Aggregate planning: What are Capacity planning and Aggregate
production planning (APP), Inputs and Outputs to APP, APP using pure and mixed
strategies, APP by linear programming model, Available-to-Promise (ATP), Aggregate
Planning for Services, Yield Management
(2 weeks)
9. Material Requirements Planning (MRP) and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP): MRP
structure, Master production schedule (MPS), Bill of materials, Lot-sizing techniques, and
ERP fundamentals
(2 weeks)
10. Scheduling: Objectives, Loading and sequencing jobs in work centers (1 week)

Class Schedule:
The classes to be held twice per week for lectures of 80 minutes (Sundays & Tuesdays: 8.00 -9.20 am)
and tutorial once in a week for 150 minutes (Sundays: 2.30 - 4.30 pm).

o Human and social science: 0.75 credit or 25%
o Math and Basic Sciences: 0.90 credit or 30%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 2 3 3 3 3 2
*
351

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Maintenance and
Replacement Policies
IE 452 3 1* - 3
Maintenance systems. Maintenance operation and control. Preventive Maintenance:
concepts, modeling, and analysis. Maintenance planning and scheduling. Maintenance
material control. Computerized Maintenance Management Systems. Replacement studies.
Case studies.


Textbook:
Duffuaa, S. O., Raouf, A. and Campbell, J. D., PLANNING & CONTROL OF
MAINTENANCE SYSTEMS, Modeling and Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, USA ,
(1999)ISBN: 0-471-17981-7.

References:
J D, STRATEGIES FOR EXCELLENCE IN MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT CAMPBELL,
Productivity Press, Portland, 1995.
British Standard Institute, GLOSSARY OF GENERAL TERMS IN MAINTENANCE
MANAGEMENT: BS 3811.
Smith, A. M., RELIABILITY CENTERED MAINTENANCE, McGraw Hill, New York, (1993).
Palmer, D., MAINTENANCE PLANNING AND SCHEDULING HANDBOOK, McGraw-Hill,
New York, (1999).
Class notes/handout material provided by instructor
Web-page for the Course, Group name: mrp2
Group home page: http://groups.yahoo.com/group/mrp2
Group email: mrp2@yahoogroups.com

1. Explain maintenance-function as a system.
2. Operate and control a maintenance system.
3. Explain the mechanism of the breakdown repair.
4. Explain and design complete maintenance system based on maintenance planning, scheduling and
control, and also demonstrate how to handle and evaluate various computerized maintenance
management systems (CMMS s)

352


1. Maintenance systems (2 weeks)
2. Maintenance operation and control (2 weeks)
3. Preventive maintenance, concepts, modeling and analysis (2 weeks)
4. Maintenance planning and scheduling (2 weeks)
5. Maintenance material control (2 weeks)
6. Computerized maintenance management systems (2 weeks)
7. Replacement studies (2 weeks)
8. Case studies
Class Schedule:
The classes are held twice per week for lectures (Sundays & Tuesdays during 0930-1050 Hours) and
once in a week for Tutorials (Tuesdays: 1430-1600 Hours).

o Engineering science: 1 Credit
o Engineering design: 2 Credits


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 2 3 3
*
353

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Facilities Planning IE 453 3 1* - 3
Fundamentals of facilities planning. Facilities design. Flow, space and activity
relationships. Material handling systems. Layout planning models. Warehouse operations.
Quantitative facilities planning models. Preparing, presenting, implementing and
maintaining facilities plan.


Textbook:
Tompkins, W. et al., FACILITIES PLANNING, 3rd ed., John Wiley, New Jersey, (2003),
ISBN: 0-471-41389-5.

References:
Sule, D. R., MANUFACTURING FACILITIES: LOCATION, PLANNING, AND DESIGN, 3rd
ed., Publisher: CRC, USA, (2008), ISBN: 1420044222.

1. Understand the integrated nature of the discipline.
2. Acquire the knowledge of flow process analysis to develop the material movement strategies.
3. Identify and develop different facilities layouts and solve real life industrial problems
4. Emphasize the importance and role of facilities planning in cost reduction and increased productivity
5. Work individually or within a team and communicate effectively to perform the assigned tasked
(Homework/Group Project).
354


1. Introduction to Facilities Planning
Objectives of Facilities Planning; Strategic Facilities Planning
Examples of Inadequate Planning
(1 week)

2. Product, Process, and Schedule Design
Scrap Estimates; Equipment Fractions; Facilities Design
(1 week)
3. Flow, Space, and Activity relationships
Departmental Planning; Activity Planning; Flow Patterns;
Measuring Flow; Space Requirements
(2 weeks)
4. Material Handling
Scope and Definitions of Material Handling; Material Handling Principles; Designing
Material Handling Systems Unit Load Design; Estimating Material Handling Costs
(1 week)
5. Facilities Layout
Basic Layout Types; Layout Procedures; The impact of Change;
Developing Layout Alternatives; Commercial Facility Layout Packages
(2 weeks)
6. Warehouse Operations
Missions of a Warehouse; Functions in the Warehouse; Receiving and Shipping
Operations; Dock Locations; Storage Operations
(2 weeks)
7. Facilities Planning Models
Facility Location Models; Location Allocation Model; Linear Assignment Model
(2 weeks)
8. Implementing and Maintaining the Facilities Plan
Preparing the Facilities Plan; Implementing the Facilities Plan
Maintaining the Facilities Plan
(2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The classes to be held twice per week for lectures of 80 minutes (Saturdays & Mondays: 1.00 -2.20
pm) and tutorial once in a week for 110 minutes (Mondays: 5.00 - 6.50 pm).



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 2 1 3 3 2
*
355

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Engineering Cost Analysis IE 454 3 1* - 3
Importance of cost analysis in engineering. Cost terms and concepts. Cost estimation for
decision making: cost-volume-profit analysis, measuring relevant costs and revenues, cost
assignment and activity-based costing. Cost evaluation of engineering alternatives. Case
studies.


Textbook:
Drury, C., MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING FOR BUSINESS, Thomson Learning, (2005),
ISBN: 1-84480-152-7.

References:
Resources Material: All Material is available on the website
www.wahmad.net /www.wahmad.com. You need to register yourself in order to access the resource
material. Your computer No is your user name select your password accordingly

1. Understand the concepts of cost analysis, cost terms and management accounting.
2. Calculate and apply Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
3. Make decisions by Measuring relevant cost and revenues.
4. Calculate and explain the cost assignment.
5. Compute and explain Activity based costing.
6. Use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for cost decision practices.

356


1. Introduction to Cost Analysis and Management Accounting (1 week)
2. Introduction to Cost Terms (1 weeks)
3. Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis (1 weeks)
4. Measuring Relevant Costs and Revenues for Decision-Making (2 weeks)
5. Cost Assignment (2 weeks)
6. Distinguish between cause-and-effect and arbitrary cost (2 weeks)
7. Activity Based costing (3 weeks)
Class Schedule:
The classes are held twice per week for lectures (Sundays & Tuesdays during 0930-1050
Hours) and once in a week for Tutorials (Wednesday: 1430-1600 Hours).



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3
*
357

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Material Handling and
Packaging
IE 455 3 1* - 3
Historical development of material handling and packaging. Objectives and principles of
material handling. Material handling concepts: unit load, containerization, ASRS. Types of
material handling equipment and their economics. Role of packaging in material handling.
Areas of special importance to packaging. Package design. Economics of packaging.
Package research and testing. Management of the packaging function.


Textbook:
Kulwiec, R. A., MATERIAL HANDLING, John Wiley, New Jersey, (1985).
Soroka, K. and Warrington, R., FUNDAMENTALS OF PACKAGING TECHNOLOGY,
(1995).

References:
Rudenko, N., MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIPMENT, Mir Publications, Moscow, (1969).

1. Learn fundamental principles of material handling systems.
2. Develop understanding of special concepts in material handling.
3. Learn analytical procedures for the study of different material handling equipment.
4. Learn fundamental principles of packaging.
5. Improve presentation and team work skills.

358


1. Basis for material handling analysis (1 week)
2. Principles of material handling (2 weeks)
3. The unit load concept (1 week)
4. Packaging principles (2 weeks)
5. Materials used for Packaging (2 weeks)
6. Equipment selection Procedure (2 weeks)
7. Material handling cost concepts (2 weeks)
8. Storage and Warehousing (1 weeks)
Class Schedule:
The class meets three times a week. Two times are for regular sessions of 1 hour 20 minutes
of lecture times and 2 hours of tutorial and laboratory time.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 3 3 2 3 2
*
359

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Feasibility Studies IE 456 3 1* - 3
Introduction to feasibility studies: project identification, product mix and scope. Marketing
feasibility: present and future market study, demand, pricing, and revenue. Technical
feasibility: site selection, material, labor, equipment, knowhow, and shipping. Financial
feasibility: project financing, production cost, break-even analysis, profitability analysis
Organizational and administrative feasibility: Organizational structure, governmental
regulations, safety and environmental standards, patents and human relations. Reporting
and presentation. Case studies.


Textbook:
PCH Publications (Editors), FEASIBILITY STUDY: PREPARATION AND ANALYSIS,
ASIN: B000VFH16K

References:
Behrens, W. and Hawranek, P. M., MANUAL FOR THE PREPARATION OF INDUSTRIAL
FEASIBILITY STUDIES, (2007, rev. ed.), Published by United Nations Industrial
Development Organization, (UNIDO), Order No.ID/372.
Bentley, L. and Whitten, J., SYSTEMANALYSIS & DESIGN FOR THE GLOBAL
ENTERPRISE, 7th Edition, (2007).
Stevens, R. R., HOWTO PREPARE A FEASIBILITY STUDY: A STEP-BY-STEP GUIDE
INCLUDING 3 MODEL STUDIES, Prentice-Hall, (1982), ISBN-10: 0134292413, ISBN-13:
978-0134292410
Lesonsky, R., START YOUR OWN BUSINESS, 4th ed., Entrepreneur Press, (2007), ISBN-
10: 1599180812, ISBN-13: 978-1599180816.
Taha, A., FEASIBILITY STUDIES, Aldaar Alhandsyh, (2003).
Lotfi, A., THE FEASIBILITY STUDY OF CAPITAL PROJECTS, Aldaar Aljamyh, (2005).

1. Create a technically and economically feasible concept.
2. Present an idea or project to secure the required funding and support and convince stakeholders.
3. Present problems in a way which does not prejudice the project's prospects.
4. Accurately analysis and properly assess the potential and viability of the venture.
5. Study a project and optimize it before starting to save time and money.
6. Effectively plan and schedule projects.
7. Comprehensively analyze market, prepare cash flow projections.
8. Do critical and sensitivity analysis.
9. Use COMFAR, UNIDO's Computer Model for Feasibility Analysis and Reporting.
360


1. Introduction to feasibility studies (1 week)
2. Basic aspects of pre-investment studies and the investment project (1 week)
3. Project / product identification, determining product portfolio (1 weeks)
4. Financial feasibility, marketing research, breakeven analysis (2 weeks)
5. Implementation planning and financial analysis and investment appraisal (1 weeks)
6. Technical feasibility, raw materials, engineering and technology, organization and
overhead costs, human resources
(2 weeks)
7. Profitability analysis, administrative feasibility (1 week)
8. Organizational structure, governmental regulations, safety and environmental standards (1 week)
9. Software for feasibility study preparation, COmputer Model for Feasibility Analysis and
Reporting (COMFAR) and PROPSPIN
(1 week)
10. Case studies (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The classes are held three times in a week for lectures and once in a week for tutorials. The duration of
lecture classes will be 50 minutes and 1.30 hours for tutorial.

o Math and Basic Science: 0.45 Credit or 15%
o Engineering Science: 0.75 Credit or 25%
o Engineering Design: 1.50 Credits or 50%
o Human and social science: 0.30 Credit or 10%


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 3 3
*
361

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Supply Chain
Management
IE 457 3 1* - 3
Introduction to Supply Chains (SC). Flow across SC of products, information and revenue.
SC operations: issues, opportunities, tools, approaches, inter-corporate relationships,
incentives and risk factors. SC design: customer service, quality, logistics, inventory,
business processes, system dynamics, control, design, and re-engineering. Integrated SC
management: forecasting, global sourcing, and virtual integration. Technology as an SC
tool: internet technologies and digital coordination of decisions and resources. Case studies.


Textbook:
Meredith, Chopra, S. and Meind, P., SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT, 4th ed., Prentice
Hall,(2010). ISBN-10: 0136080405 / ISBN-13: 9780136080404.

References:
Simchi-Levi, D., Kaminsky, P. and Simchi-Levi, E., DESIGNING AND MANAGING THE
SUPPLY CHAIN, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill.

1. Understating the fundamental concepts of Supply Chain Management.
2. Design the Supply Chain Network.
3. Model the planning demand and supply in supply chain network.
4. Determine the optimal capacity and product availability.
5. Determine the Sourcing, Transportation, and Pricing.
6. Identify the competition and coordination in Supply Chains.
7. Solve real case studies.
8. Work in group to solve homework problems and do projects.
362


1. Understanding the Supply Chain (1 week)
2. Supply Chain Performance: Achieving Strategic Fit and Scope ( week)
3. Designing Distribution Networks (1 weeks)
4. Network Design in the Supply Chain (1 week)
5. Designing Global Supply Chain Networks (1 week)
6. Sales and Operations Planning: Planning Supply and Demand in a Supply Chain (1 week)
7. Supply Chain Performance: Achieving Strategic Fit and Scope ( week)
8. Managing Economies of Scale and Uncertainty in a Supply Chain; Cycle, and Safety
Inventory
(2 weeks)
9. Managing Uncertainty in a Supply Chain: Safety Inventory (1 weeks)
10. Determining the Optimal Level of Product Availability ( week)
11. Sourcing Decisions, Pricing and Revenue Management in a Supply Chain (2 weeks)
12. Information Technology in a Supply Chain ( week)

Class Schedule:
The class is held three times per week for lectures and once in a week for tutorials.

o Math and Basic Science: -
o Human and social science: 10 %


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 2 3 2 3 2 3
*
363

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Strategic Management in
Industry
IE 458 3 1* - 3
Overview of operations strategy for competitive advantage. Evaluation of a firms external
environment using Porter Five Forces Model. Evaluation of a firms internal capabilities
using the VRIO framework. Cost leadership versus product differentiation strategies.
Vertical integration and corporate diversification. Strategic alliances, mergers and
acquisitions. Real life examples and case studies from industry.


Textbook:
Barney, J. and Hesterly, W., STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND COMPETITIVE
ADVANTAGE, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall Inc., (2007), ISBN-ISBN-10: 013613520X, ISBN-13:
978-0136135203.

References:
None

1. Comprehend the fundamentals of Strategic Management
2. Understand various types of strategic planning and management in industry
3. Organizing framework (VRIO)
4. Recognize the role of strategic management in industry at various organizational levels and their
impact on organizational development and success
5. Identify the key differences between strategic planning and long term planning
6. Study the industrial environment in the region and analyze the extent of application of strategic
management principles in various industrial organizations.
7. Learn how strategic plans are developed and implemented

364


1. What Is Strategy and the Strategic Management Process? (1 week)
2. Evaluating a Firms External Environment (1 weeks)
3. Evaluating a Firms Internal Capabilities (1 weeks)
4. Cost Leadership (1 week)
5. Product Differentiation (2 weeks)
6. Vertical Integration
Corporate Diversification
Organizing to Implement Corporate Diversification
(4 weeks)
7. Strategic Alliances
Mergers and Acquisitions
(3 weeks)

Class Schedule:
Saturday, Monday and Wednesday from 9.00 to 10.00 a.m. and once for Tutorial class.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 1 3 3 3
*
365

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Introduction to
Entrepreneurship
IE 459 3 1* - 3
Basic framework for understanding the process of entrepreneurship, principles of
management and related techniques in decision making, planning, marketing, and financial
control. Exercises in product design and prototype development, preparation of workable
project feasibility reports, practical ideas about launching own enterprises. Classroom
lectures are combined with field study and exercises supplemented with guest lectures and
case studies on small and medium scale industries.


Textbook:
Timmons, J. A. and Spinelli, S., NEWVENTURE CREATION: ENTREPRENEURSHIP FOR
THE 21ST CENTURY, 6th ed., Irwin/McGraw-Hill, (2004), ISBN: 0072498404.
Kuratko, D. F. and Hodgetts, R. M., ENTREPRENEURSHIP: THEORY, PROCESS, AND
PRACTICE (WITH INFOTRAC), 6th ed., South-Western College Pub, (2003), ISBN:
0324258267.
Kaplan, J. M., GETTING STARTED IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP, John Wiley, (2001), ISBN:
0-471- 9456-X.
Web-page for the Course: Group name: ent1-kau; Group home page:
http://groups.yahoo.com/group/ent1-kau ; Group email: ent1-kau1@yahoogroups.com

References:
None

1. Explain the entrepreneurial traits and skills.
2. Select and evaluate a business idea against a personal vision involving lifestyle, and professional and
financial goals.
3. Manage a small/medium scale industry in terms of human resource management (HRM), marketing,
finance and project management, and successfully interact with experts in the field for developing an
understanding of the practical aspects of the entrepreneurship.
4. Apply analytical and critical thinking skills to determine the feasibility of a business concept and build
an effective and persuasive case for the feasibility of a selected business concept.
5. Prepare a technically and financially viable project proposal for submission to financial institutions for
approval to start an entrepreneurial venture.
366


1. Introduction to entrepreneurship ( week)
2. Introduction to small & medium scale industries ( week)
3. Product selection (1 week)
4. Management of small/medium scale industries: human resource management (1 week)
5. Management of small/medium scale industries: marketing (1 week)
6. Management of small/medium scale industries: financial management (3 weeks)
7. Project management (1 weeks)
8. Feasibility studies: operational aspects (1 week)
9. Feasibility studies: technological aspects ( weeks)
10. Prototype development (4 weeks)
Class Schedule:
The classes are held twice per week for lectures and once in a week for tutorials.

o Engineering science: 2 Credits
o Engineering design: 1 Credit


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 3 3 3 3 3 2
*
367

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Special Topics in
Industrial Engineering
IE 490 3 1* - 3
Pre-requisite Department Approval
In-depth study of relevant industrial engineering topics not covered in other courses of the
program in order to enhance students' knowledge in the field of industrial engineering.


Textbook:
Web-page for the Course: Group name: ent1-kau; Group home page:
http://groups.yahoo.com/group/ent1-kau ; Group email: ent1-kau1@yahoogroups.com

References:
None

1. Explain the entrepreneurial traits and skills.
2. Select and evaluate a business idea against a personal vision involving lifestyle, and professional and
financial goals.
3. Manage a small/medium scale industry in terms of human resource management (HRM), marketing,
finance and project management, and successfully interact with experts in the field for developing an
understanding of the practical aspects of the entrepreneurship.
4. Apply analytical and critical thinking skills to determine the feasibility of a business concept and build
an effective and persuasive case for the feasibility of a selected business concept.
5. Prepare a technically and financially viable project proposal for submission to financial institutions for
approval to start an entrepreneurial venture.

368


1. Introduction to entrepreneurship ( week)
2. Introduction to small & medium scale industries ( week)
3. Product selection (1 week)
4. Management of small/medium scale industries: human resource management (1 week)
5. Management of small/medium scale industries: marketing (1 week)
6. Management of small/medium scale industries: financial management (3 weeks)
7. Project management (1 weeks)
8. Feasibility studies: operational aspects (1 week)
9. Feasibility studies: technological aspects ( weeks)
10. Prototype development (4 weeks)
Class Schedule:
The classes are held twice per week for lectures and once in a week for tutorials.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 3 3 3 3 3 2
*
369

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Industrial Engineering
Practice
IE 491 3 2 - 3
Overview of all areas of Industrial Engineering (IE). Identification of specific IE tools for
industrial and business enterprises. Brainstorming sessions of several pre selected industrial
and business enterprises. Visiting the sites and conducting walk-through surveys. On-site
studies of IE applications and practices. Preparation of visit reports containing findings,
comments and recommendations pertaining to every visit. Multimedia-based presentation
of visit-reports.


Textbook:
Heizer, J. and Render, B., PRODUCTION AND OPERATION MANAGEMENT, 7th ed.,
Pearson Prentice Hall, (2005).

References:
Tompkins, W. et al., FACILITIES PLANNING, 3rd ed., John Wiley & Sons, (2003).
Kanawati, G. (Ed), INTRODUCTION TO WORK STUDY, 4th ed., International Labour
Organization, Geneve, (1992).
Asfahl, C.R., INDUSTRIAL SAFETY AND HEALTH MANAGEMENT, 5th ed., Prentice Hall,
(2005).

1. Use industrial engineering knowledge in actual life situations, in general, and in particular as related
to the following aspects.
2. Apply the skills of "productivity-enhancement" in industrial and non-industrial environments of work;
as well as comparing and contrasting the prevalent economic systems, verifying the significance of
human resource management, the organization structure and design in professional life.
3. Understand the strategic role of Information Systems in organizations, and their application for
promoting business process integration and improving organizational performance.
4. Anticipate, recognize and suggest controls for work and environmental hazards, as well as accident
causes.
5. Work efficiently in multidisciplinary team, and work efficiently in assigned work.
6. Communicate effectively in written/oral communication skills.

370


The students visit selected industrial and business enterprises (twelve visits during
one semester) with the following objectives:
1. Walk-through survey of the industrial operations, reviewing:
a) Facility layout and general design of workplace and workstations.
b) Job design and performance.
2. Discussion with key manager(s) as related to the application of IE principles in:
a) Operation planning and control.
b) Management systems design.
c) Work measurement and design.
d) Application of information systems.
e) Quality control.
f) Financial and personnel management(s).

The students are divided into 5-6 teams, who are rotating their interest in the field
visits towards the different IE aspects. The teams prepare and present in one class
outlines and basic information for the forthcoming visit, as well as present reports in
class for the previous visit, including students' observation, comments,
recommendations, and have discussion among each other, directed by the
coordinator(s), of all their technical interests in the visit.
(14 weeks)
Class Schedule:
The class meets twice weekly. One for regular session of 1 hour 20 minutes for preparation of the
forthcoming field visit, and presentation and discussion as related to the previous one; the second
session of 4-6 hours for the field visit of the selected industrial, service and/or business enterprise.



NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

2 2 3 1 2 3
*

371

CREDITS
COURSE TITLE
ENGLISH
CODE/NO
ARABIC
CODE/NO
Th. Pr. Tr. TCH
Senior Project IE 499 2 4 - 4
Pre-requisites IE 422 and IE 432
Technical writing skills. Project work: a team-based capstone design work involving a
practical, open ended, real life unstructured problem having a set of alternative solutions;
emphasis on synthesis of knowledge and skills to assimilate and demonstrate a professional
attitude and ethics in problem solving with assessment of environmental, cultural and social
impacts; final output in the form of written report based on specified standard format,
followed by a multimedia presentation of the work undertaken in the project.


Textbook:
Dieter, E., ENGINEERING DESIGN, P edition, McGraw-Hill, (2000).
Fogler, and LaBlanc, STRATEGIES FOR CREATIVE PROBLEMSOLVING, Prentice Hall,
(1995).
Software manuals

References:
(Web-page for the Course)
Group name: Project-ie-499
Group home page: ;
Group email: project-ie-499@yahoogroups.com

1. Apply the fundamentals developed in the curriculum to an actual design project.
2. Foster and develop creative, conceptual and analytical thinking skills.
3. Create proficiency with modem design tools including statistical tools and software systems
applications.
4. Develop teamwork concepts and understand the importance of developing good team dynamics.
5. Enhance written and oral communication skills, and
6. Implant a sense of ethics and professionalism.

372


1. Design Methodology, Synthesis, Creativity and Conceptualization (1 week)
2. Project Management Techniques (1 week)
3. Problem Solving Heuristic (1 week)
4. Teamwork Skills (2 weeks)
5. Communication Skills; Written and Oral (1 week)
6. Use of standards and design codes (2 weeks)
7. Software Tutorials (e.g. MS Info Path, Mind Manager, MS Project, Arena etc.) (1 week)
8. Cost Analysis (2 weeks)
9. Engineering profession Ethics (2 weeks)

Class Schedule:
The classes are held twice per week for lectures (Technical Report Writing part) and once in a week
while meeting with the advisor(s) (Project part).


NCAAADomainsof
Learning
Interpersonal
Skillsand
Responsibility
Communication,
IT,andNumerical
Skills
ABETandadditional
ProgramOutcomes
Max.Attainable
LevelofLearning
*

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
*

373

DEPARTMENT OF
MINING ENGINEERING
374

INTRODUCTION
Mining Engineering involves the extraction of mineral matter out of the earths crust. This
includes metallic ores, industrial minerals, precious and ornamental stones, solid fuels and
radioactive minerals. Mineral production in the past has contributed to the prosperity or
decline of civilizations. Nowadays, one of the measures of the prosperity of a nation is its
per capita consumption of minerals. The existence of basic and secondary industries is
dependent on available resources. Extraction, processing, and utilization of the mineral
resources contribute to the economic development and self-reliance of a nation which may
be of strategic importance.
As a result of a massive exploration effort in the past three decades, a large number of
mineral deposits of gold, silver, copper, zinc, iron, phosphate, bauxite, silica, magnesite,
etc., has been discovered and delineated in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. Additionally, a
large variety of elegant granites and marbles is being exploited for local consumption and
export. In order to diversify its economic base, the Ministry of Petroleum and Mineral
Resources is entrusted with the task of promoting the development of these resources. The
Department of Mining Engineering at King Abdulaziz University endeavors to produce
Saudi mining engineers capable of planning and exploiting projects related to the mining
and mineral industry.

VISION
To be a leader in the field of Mining Engineering, Applied Research and Community
Services.

MISSION
To prepare motivated and qualified mining engineers and promote research applied to the
exploitation of the indigenous mineral resources as a contribution to national wealth.

OBJECTIVES
Mining Engineering Program prepares its graduates to achieve the following career and
professional accomplishments:
1. Engage in productive career in the mining industry in Saudi Arabia as well as
government and academic settings
2. Demonstrate responsible, professional, and ethical behavior integrated with a
commitment to serve the needs of the society.
3. Pursue personal professional development and contribute to the development of the
profession
4. Advance in responsibility and leadership in the fields of mining engineering.

PROGRAMS OFFERED
The Department of Mining Engineering offers the degree of Bachelor of Science in Mining
Engineering and has recently offered graduate studies in Mining Engineering Sciences. The
program is intended to provide the graduating students with a good background in the field
of specialization in addition to basic sciences such as physics, chemistry, mathematics and
geology. The main objectives of the curriculum of the Mining Engineering program can be
summarized as follows:
To prepare mining engineers capable of working in the field of mining and minerals
engineering.
To prepare the program of study so as to include essential courses of the
specialization in addition to the essential basic physical sciences.
To offer elective courses covering various fields of mining engineering such as
Tunneling Engineering, Mineral Processing, Experimental Rock Mechanics, Mine
375

Environment, and Mine Data Analysis, so as to assist students to gain additional
knowledge in various aspects of the specialization.
To cover relevant experimental work for all the essential courses of the program.

The Department of Mining Engineering offers degree of Bachelor of Science in Mining
Engineering. This program has been accredited as Substantially Equivalent to the
accredited programs in the USA by the Accreditation Board for Engineering and
Technology Inc. (ABET). It offers opportunities for graduates of the program to work as
engineers in surface and underground mining operations and related fields such as
tunneling and quarrying, covering the technologies of mineral exploration, mining
economics, rock fragmentation, minerals extraction, stability of rock structures, minerals
and rock processing, mine ventilation, safety, environment and management..

FACILITIES
The Department has the following laboratories:

Mineral Processing Laboratory: The functions of this laboratory include crushing and
grinding of raw ores, and separation of useful minerals from worthless (gangue) minerals
associated with them.
Rock Mechanics Laboratory: This laboratory has equipment and instruments for testing
strength and other mechanical properties of rocks in compression, tension and other modes
of loading. This is needed for the evaluation of deformation behavior of rocks and
assessment of the means of rock support in the ground excavations.
Mine Ventilation Laboratory: This laboratory is specifically used for the evaluation of the
(conventionally) adequate quantities of air required for the ventilation of mine openings
and stops underground. This laboratory is equipped with devices related to the analysis of
gases and soil, determination of moisture content, heat and air flow rate.
Chemical Analysis Laboratory: This lab is equipped with an XRF and XRD instruments
for analyzing specimens to determine mineralogical and metallic contents of ores and
rocks.

Requirements for the B.Sc. degree from Mining Engineering Department

Requirements Cr. hrs
Preparatory Year Requirements 27
University Requirements 14
Total 155

Cooperative Program
Requirements Cr. hrs
Preparatory Year Requirements 27
University Requirements 14
Coop Program 8
Total 155
376

Departmental Requirements Core Courses (71 hrs)
Course
No.
Course Title Cr. hrs Prerequisite
IE 256 Engineering Management 2 IE 202, IE255
MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics 3 PHYS 281, MATH 202
CE 201 Engineering Mechanics (Static) 3 PHYS 281, IE 200
CE 371 Surveying 3 MATH 202, MENG 102
EMR 201 Physical Geology 4 ---
MinE 300 Ore Deposit Characteristics 3 EMR 201
MinE 301
Principles of Mining &
Metallurgical Engineering
3 EMR 201
MinE 302 Mining Field Practice 4 IE 200, MinE 301
MinE 303 Mining Operation System 3 IE 202, MATH 204
MinE 311 Rock Mechanics 4 MENG 270, MinE 300
MinE 312 Drilling & Blasting in Mining 3 MinE 301, MinE 311
MinE 322 Surface Mining 3 MinE 301, MinE 303
MinE 323 Underground Mining 3 MinE 301, MinE 303
MinE 330 Ore Transportation & Handling 3 EE 251, MinE 303
MinE 342 Mineral Processing 3 CHEM 281, MinE 330
MinE 390 Summer Training 2 MinE 302
MinE 401 Mine Surveying 3 CE 371, MinE 301
MinE 402 Mining & Metallurgical Economics 3 IE 255, MinE 301
MinE 422 Mine Ventilation & Safety 3 MEP 290, MATH 205
MinE 423 Mine Law, Planning & Management 3 IE 256, MinE 312
MinE 451
Extractive Metallurgy & Alloys
Production
3 MinE 301, MinE 342
MinE 499 Senior Project 4 MinE 322, MinE 323
Total 71

Departmental Requirements Elective Courses (6 Cr.hr)

The student has to choose two out of courses listed below.
Course
No. Course Title
Cr. hrs Prerequisite
MinE 405
Computer Application in
Mining & Metallurgy
3 EE 201
MinE 411
Applied Rock Mechanics
3 MinE 311
MinE 412
Rock Blasting
3 PHYS 202, CHEM 281
MinE 421
Tunnels Engineering
3 EE 201
MinE 424
Mine Environment
3 CHEM 281
MinE 425
Analysis of Mining &
3 EE 201
377

Metallurgical Data
MinE 433
Methods of Ore Analysis
3 CHEM 281
MinE 441
Applied Mineral Processing
3 MinE 342
MinE 452
Powder Metallurgy
3 CHEM 281
MinE 470
Special Topics in Mining
Engineering
3 EE 201
MinE 471
Special Topics in Metallurgical
Engineering
3 IE 255
xx xxx
Out of Department Course
3 Advisor Approval

Total credit hours required for graduation is 155.

378

A TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR MINING ENGINEERING STUDENTS

3
rd
5
th
Semester Courses 6
th
Semester Courses
Course No. Course Title Cr.hrs Course No. Course Title Cr.hrs
ISLS 201 Islamic Culture (2) 2 MENG 270 Mechanics of Materials 3
EE 251 Basic Electrical Engineering 4 MATH 205 Series & Vector Calculus 3
EMR 201 Physical Geology 4 ARAB 201 Writing Skills 3
MATH 204 Differential Equations I 3 MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics 3
CE 201
(Statics) 3 MinE 300
Ore Deposits
Characteristics 3
IE 202
Design II 2 MinE 301
Principles of Mining and
Metallurgical Engg. 3
Total 18 Total 18

4
th
Year (Regular)
7
th
Semester Courses 8
th
Semester Courses
ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2 MinE 312
Drilling & Blasting in
Mining
3
CE 371 Surveying 3 MinE 322 Surface Mining 3
MinE 302 Mining Field Practice 4 MinE 323 Underground Mining 3
MinE 303 Mining Operation System 3 MinE 330
Ore Transportation &
Handling
3
IE 256 Engineering Management 2 ISLS 401
Islamic Culture: Work
Ethics
2
MinE 311 Rock Mechanics 4
Total 18 Total 14

4
th
Year (at summer)
SummerTraining(Regular) SummerTraining(Cooperative)
MinE 390 Summer Training 2 MinE 400 Cooperative Work Program 8

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester Courses 10
th
Semester Courses
ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2 MinE 312
Drilling & Blasting in
Mining
3
CE 371 Surveying 3 MinE 322 Surface Mining 3
MinE 302 Mining Field Practice 4 MinE 323 Underground Mining 3
MinE 303 Mining Operation System 3 MinE 330
Ore Transportation &
Handling
3
379

IE 256 Engineering Management 2 ISLS 401
Islamic Culture: Work
Ethics
2
MinE 311 Rock Mechanics 4
Total 18 Total 14

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester Courses 10
th
Semester Courses
MinE342 MineralProcessing 3 Mine402
MiningandMetallurgical
Economics
3
MinE401 MineSurveying 3 MinE423
MineLaw,Planning&
Management
3
MinE422 MineVentilation&Safety 3 MinE451
ExtractiveMetallurgy&
AlloysProduction
3
MinE499 SeniorProject 4 MinExxx Elective(2) 3
MinExxx Elective(1) 3
Total 16 Total 12

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester Courses (Cooperative) 10
th
Semester Courses (Cooperative)
MinE499 SeniorProject 4
MinE342 MineralProcessing 3

MinE401 MineSurveying 3

Mine402 MiningandMetallurgicalEconomics 3

MinE422 MineVentilation&Safety 3

MinE423 MineLaw,Planning&Management 3

MinE451 ExtractiveMetallurgy&AlloysProduction 3
Total 4 Total 18
380

COURSE DESCRIPTION

COURSE DESCRIPTION

MinE 300 Ore Deposit Characteristics (3:2,2)
Economic mineral deposits: Origin, Types, Properties, Characteristics, etc. Economic ores
in Saudi Arabia. Primary and secondary ore deposits. Forming of economic mineral
deposits. Geological mapping. Computer Applications in ore deposit characteristics.
Prerequisite: EMR. 201

MinE 301 Principles of Mining & Metallurgical Engineering (3:2,2)
Basic definition. Mining history - Mining contribution to civilization - Common minerals
and their uses - Mineral resources in Saudi Arabia. Stages of mine operations (prospecting,
exploration, drilling, blasting, supporting, development and exploitation) - Ore reserve
estimation - Types of mining - Important terms of surface mining & some examples -
Important terms of underground mining & some examples. Mine ventilation& safety -
Mineral Processing & Smelting Operations - An introduction to metallurgical engineering
- Metallurgy of pig iron - Blast furnace - Manufacture of steel - Production of copper and
alumina - Recovery of gold, silver, lead and zinc - Computer application in mining and
metallurgy.
Prerequisites: EMR 201

MinE 302 Mining Field Practice (4:2,4)
Because of the special nature of mine operations, student will stay for two weeks at the
mine field "operation" with faculty member(s) to participate at running the mine unit
operations e.g. surveying, blasting, loading and hauling, stability assessment and mineral
processing. The student will submit and orally defend a field practice report.
Prerequisites: IE 200, MinE 301

MinE 303 Mining Operation System (3:2,2)
Application of mathematics to the solution of management, operations and engineering
decision making problems in order to attain some predefined goal or optimum condition.
Using computer programs e.g., spreadsheets to solve common operations research
problems. Solution techniques in OR such as Linear Programming, network formulations,
project scheduling and Monte Carlo simulation will be discussed in their relation to
problems in the minerals industries.
Prerequisite: IE 202, MATH 204

MinE 311 Rock Mechanics (4:3,2)
Physical and mechanical properties of rocks - Stress and strain analysis and their
distribution around openings - Criteria of rock failure - Deformation behavior of rock -
Introduction to slope stability - Rock mass& discontinuities behavior - Geological and
engineering classification of rock- Rock testing - Computer applications in rock
mechanics.
Prerequisites: Meng 270, MinE 300

MinE 312 Drilling & Explosive in Mining (3:3,2)
Applications of Rock Drilling - Drilling Theory - Drill ability - Types of Drilling. Drilling
mechanism - Drilling Machines - Drilling bits - Drilling fluids - Properties of explosives -
Blasting agent - Types of cuts Pattern Design - Application of computer programs in
drilling and blasting..
Prerequisites: MinE 301, MinE 311
381

MinE 322 Surface Mining Engineering (3:2,3)
Current and future status of surface mining - Prospecting and exploration- Land and water
acquisitions - Preliminary evaluation - Planning and engineering design of open-pits,
quarries, and alluvial mining operations - Unit operations (drilling, blasting, excavation;
Loading, haulage & transportation, etc) - Design and planning of mine operations with
emphasis on the design and planning of surface layouts - Auxiliary operations -
Organization management and economics - Applying computer programs.

MinE 323 Underground Mining Engineering (3:2,3)
Underground Mining Terms - Geological Consideration - Prospecting& Exploration stages
- Development& Exploitation Stages - Drilling & Blasting of Underground Mine - Loading
and Haulage Operations in Underground Mining - Types of Roof Mine Supports -
Different Types of Underground Mining Methods Selection and design of a Suitable
Mining Methods - Application of computer methods.

MinE 330 Ore Transportation & Handling (3:3,2)
A review of applied mechanics principles - A review of material & ore handling -
Classification of mine plant and equipment - Design parameters and selection of machines
and other miscellaneous underground equipments - Design of haulage systems:
locomotives, conveyors, elevators, trucks and fluid transport - Design of hoisting and rope
haulage systems, including monorails and aerial ropeways - Applying computer-aided
design programs.
Prerequisites: EE 251, MinE 303

MinE 342 Mineral Processing (3:3,3)
Introduction to mineral processing - Efficiency of operations Liberation- Concentration
and Metallurgical balances Comminution and classification - Sampling. Sizing. Gravity
concentration - Heavy medium separation - Magnetic and electrostatic separation -
Dewatering and tailings disposal - Examples of flow sheets and computer applications in
mineral processing - Introduction to brief flotation.
Prerequisites: CHEM 281, MinE 330

MinE 390 Summer Training (2:2,0)
Prerequisites: MinE 302 + 120 Hrs.

MinE 401 Mine Surveying (3:3,2)
Triangulation net works. Underground traverses - Connecting an underground traverse with
triangulation net work - Theory of errors and probability - Computer application in mine
survey data analysis and mine maps plotting - Application of surveying in mine and quarry
development for optimum extraction of ore deposits
Prerequisites: CE 371, MinE 301

382

MinE 402 Mining & Metallurgical Economics (3:3,3)
An overview of mining economics - The economic minerals: Resources and reserve -
Patterns of production, consumption, transportation, and marketing etc. - Perspective of the
past, present and future supplies of minerals worldwide and in Arab countries - Finance
and economic analysis and interpretation of economic data - The concept of cash flow and
time value - Sensitivity and risk analysis techniques etc. - Introduction to writing of
technical reports and preliminary feasibility study reports using spreadsheet computer
applications.

MinE 405 Computer Application in Mining & Metallurgy (3:2,3)
Application of computer in mine layouts design. Estimation of ore reserves utilizing both
AutoCAD and specialized mining softwares. Mine stability assessment using computer
modeling. Ventilation circuits modeling via Vensim program. Examine economical
merits of mining operation via spread sheets. Modeling of mineral processing unit
operation and metallurgical unit processes using commercial softwares.

MinE 411 Applied Rock Mechanics (3:3,3)
In situ strength of rocks and its measurements. Design, supporting and reinforcement of
underground openings. Roof control and pillar design Rock hazards and risk assessment.
Design, monitoring and protection of slopes. Computer applications in applied rock
mechanics.
Prerequisite: MinE 311

MinE 412 Blasting Engineering (3:3,2)
Fragmentation principles - Strength characteristics of rock - Properties of explosives - High
explosives - Blasting agent. Initiation devices safety fuse, electric shotfiring and detonating
cords - Primers and boosters. Sequential firing - Practical usage of explosives - Blast-hole
drilling. Blasting theory - Types of cuts. Application of computer programs in designing
drill patterns for blasting in tunnels and other main headings - Blasting in stope operations
and in mines.
Prerequisites: PHYS 202, CHEM 281

MinE 421 Tunnels Engineering (3:2,3)
Classification of tunnels - Preliminary studies including economic - Geological and geo-
technical parameters and their influence on tunnelling - Route survey and alignment of
tunnels - Stress distribution around tunnels - Methods and techniques employed in
tunnelling in hard and medium rocks as well as in weak rock and soils - Tunnelling under
water - Application of computer programs.

MinE 422 Mine Ventilation & Safety (3:3,3)
General introduction - Nature and importance of ventilation and its control - Sources of
heat and humidity in mines - Heat conduction in rocks - Mine hygrometry and
psychrometry - Temperature and humidity control - Mine cooling systems. Mine
ventilation: Quality control. Normal air. Mine air. Gas flow through strata. Gas adsorption -
Physiological effects and permissible limits - Methane drainage system - Mine dusts:
Sources of dust. Dust suppression. filtration etc. - Physiological effects and permissible
limits - Mine fires and explosions - Principle of ventilation flow and its laws. Natural
ventilation. Artificial ventilation. Ventilation systems - Ventilation ducts & Airways -
Occupational diseases of miners - Mine drainage and pumping. Application of computer
383

programs.
Prerequisites: MEP 290, MATH 205

MinE 423 Mine Law, Planning and Management (3:2,3)
Mine layout for surface & underground operations- Surface & underground accesses -
Selection of a suitable mining method and equipment for a certain ore body - Pit and stope
optimization performance - Plan & schedule mine development and production. Select a
suitable mineral processing plant - Estimate capital/operation cost & productivity - Use a
mining software & spreadsheets for mine planning - Management structure of a modern
mining industry - Co-ordination and control - Human relations - Principles of Operations
research and its application in mining, using a computer software, PERT, CPM, and other
deterministic methods.

MinE 424 Mine Environment (3:3,2)
Gas & Dust pollution in mining & related industries - Dust measurements, characterization,
and control techniques - Impact of mining on environment - Mine surface vegetation
control - Air, water and noise pollution and their control - Planning, methods, and costs -
Legislative regulations and implementation - Public relations - Mine land. Reclamation and
regional restoration - Safety rules to avoid hazards - Mine accidents causes of physical
accidents and their nature - Accidents statistics frequency and severity rates - The
international mine safety rating scheme - General aspects of mine safety - Safety
organizations - Industrial hygiene - Personal protective equipment - Safety first aid
programs - Mine health and safety laws - Mine rescue and recovery operations/procedures -
Applications of computer programs.
Prerequisites: CHEM 281

MinE 425 Analysis of Mining & Metallurgical Data (3:2,3)
Introduction to principles of statistics-random variables. Sampling & distributions.
Statistical analysis. Principles of geostatistics. Krigging method. Geostatistical simulation
for mineral prospecting. Ore grade and ore reserve estimation. Geostatistical applications in
Mining Engineering. Utilizing computer program.
Prerequisites: EE 251

MinE 433 Methods of Ore Analysis (3:3,3)
Ore composition - Mineralogical analysis of ores - Instruments of mineralogical analysis
(Theory and practice- quantative and qualitative) - Elemental analysis of mineral and rocks
- Classical elemental analysis (Instruments, Theory and, Applications) - Advanced
elemental analysis of mineral and rocks (Instruments, Theory and, Applications).
Prerequisites: CHEM 281

MinE 441 Applied Mineral Processing (3:3,3)
Introduction to the theory of flotation- Reagents in flotation - Contact angle at
solid/liquid/air interface - Gibbs adsorption equation as applied to flotation - Adsorption of
collectors on minerals - The importance of pH in flotation - Activation and depression in
flotation - Theories of the electrical double layer at mineral-water interfaces - Flotation
circuits and machines - Concentration of iron, phosphates, copper, lead, zinc, and other
ores, by flotation- Application of computer programs in concentration of some ores by
flotation and other mineral processing techniques.
Prerequisite: MinE 342
384

MinE 451 Extractive Metallurgy & Alloys Production (3:3,3)
Extraction and production of iron ore by blast furnace and direct reduction processes -
Batch and continuous steel making - Extraction of nonferrous metals, e.g. aluminum,
copper, titanium, uranium and manganese. Metals refining. Melting and solidification of
metals - Design of some units and role of transport phenomena in metallurgical processes.
Site and layout of metallurgical plants - Production economic - Pollution control - Waste
heat recovery - Production of alloys and alloys characterization.
Prerequisites: MinE, 301; MinE 342

MinE 452 Powder Metallurgy (3:3,2)
Introduction and historical background - Production and characterization of metallic
powders - Pressing technology - Sintering theory of metallic compacts and its application -
Mechanical properties of sintering parts - Investigation and quality control of products -
Properties and applications fields of some powder systems.

MinE 470 Special Topics in Mining Engineering (3:3,2)
Selected topics in major to specialize in one of the Mining Engineering areas.

MinE 471 Special Topics in Metallurgical Engineering (3:3,2)
Selected topics in major to specialize in one of the Metallurgical Engineering areas

MinE 499 Senior Project (4:2,5)
Prerequisites: MinE 322, MinE 323 +120 hrs

385

DEPARTMENT OF
NUCLEAR ENGINEERING
386

INTRODUCTION
The Department of Nuclear Engineering was established in the year 1977 to meet the
current and future needs of Saudi Arabia for graduates in the fields of Nuclear Reactors and
Nuclear power, Radiation Safety, Radioisotope Applications in Medicine and Industry .
In the year 2007, the Department of Nuclear Engineering introduced two new tracks in
addition to Nuclear Power Engineering track, namely, (i) Medical Physics track, and (ii)
Radiation Protection tracks. The new tracks have broadened the curriculum to include
radiological engineering, and health physics, and further broadened the appeal of the
program. Accordingly, the undergraduate enrollment trend in the Department shows
consistent increase every year. The trend of renewed interest in nuclear education among
students was also evident through improved student retention as a result of exposure to
nuclear technologies other than nuclear power technologies.
To be on the leading edge of technology, teaching and research in the field of nuclear
engineering.
To prepare highly qualified nuclear engineers, medical physicist, health physicist and
faculty who are capable of serving the community to a level that meet international
standards and the demands of the century.

The NE Program Educational Objectives are statements that describe what graduates of the
NE program should be able to do by graduation time and during the first several years of
their engineering profession careers following graduation. The following are the
educational objectives of the program as published in the departmental bulletin and the
departmental web site.

1. Take up careers as nuclear engineers and work efficiently in industries, health
sectors, nuclear power facilities, environmental protection agencies, and research
centers or excel in higher studies, to meet the requirements of Saudi Arabia.

2. Engage professionally, update effectively, demonstrate quality, to earn the
recognition of their employers and/or professional societies and advance in their
positions in all related hierarchies.

3. Contribute to the service of the society as professional members and enable it to
reap the benefits of modern technologies and values as and when needed.
The department of the Nuclear Engineering has most of the necessary resources needed to
implement the new plan, however, some improvements and extra resources are needed to
increase the ability of the department to accommodate more students considering the
increase in demand for nuclear engineers and medical and health physicists. Future plans
should consider the followings:
387

19. Modernization and upgrading of the Radiation Detection Lab
20. Modernization and upgrading of the Medical and Health Physics lab
21. Providing appropriate equipment for expanding and upgrading of the imaging lab
22. Recruiting additional faculty members in high demand specialties (medical
physics)
23. Recruiting highly qualified medical physics technicians
The actual policy of the Department of Nuclear Engineering is to accept, each semester, a
reasonably predetermined number of students (normally between 20 and 30) of the highest
GPA from those interested in joining the program.
Students eligible for a B.Sc. degree in Nuclear Engineering must successfully complete 155
credit hours with an overall GPA of 2.0-5.0 on a 0.0-5.0 scale. The 155 credit hours are
distributed as follows:
University requirements: 41 credit hours
Faculty requirements: 37 credit hours
Department requirements: 77 credit hours
FACILITIES
The facilities of the department include eight laboratories and a library.

Laboratories
The laboratories of the department are:

Radiation Detection Laboratory
Radiation Protection Laboratory
Low Counting Laboratory
Non-Destructive testing Laboratory I & II
Radioisotopes Application Laboratory
Computation and Computer Laboratory
Radio-analysis Laboratory
Electronics and Maintenance Laboratory
Diagnostic Radiography Laboratory
Calibration Laboratory

A brief description of each laboratory is given in the following sections:

Radiation Detection Laboratory
The Radiation Detection Laboratory provides a background to the students in the various
processes and techniques used to detect, identify and measure the different types of nuclear
radiation. Equipment includes various types of radiation detectors like GM tubes,
scintillation detectors, BF3 neutron detectors, high resolution high purity Ge detectors for
gamma ray spectroscopy, surface barrier detectors and other types of detectors. A portable
388

high purity germanium detector is also utilized for more precise gamma and X-ray
measurements along with multichannel analyzers for spectral analysis. Students learn
handling of these instruments and conduct experiments in radiation detection and
measurements as required by the course NE 340. Several new equipments such as detectors
and up-to-date multichannel analyzers are being ordered to update this laboratory.

Radiation Protection Laboratory
The radiation protection laboratory deals with all aspects of radiation protection and safety.
This laboratory enables students to study and apply the principles of radiation protection,
radiation shielding, decontamination and proper use and handling of radiation sources. The
laboratory has different kinds of dose rate-meters, one neutron monitor and several TLD
readers for dose readout using thermo-luminescence technique. There is also an air monitor
setup, a modern ionex dose measurement system, and one hand and foot radiation
contamination monitor in addition to other protective accessories like lead apron and
spectacles. The laboratory has also several radioactive reference point sources (alpha, beta,
and gamma emitters) for students use in various experiments. These equipments help the
students through different experiments to acquire a thorough knowledge of various factors
related to radiological health physics like radiation dose assessment, radiation safety
measures, radiation shielding, decontamination, and proper handling of radiation sources
and calibration of radiation measurement devices. The laboratory fully facilitates the
requirements of courses NE 351 and NE 451.

Low Counting Laboratory
The laboratory provides experiments and equipments for measuring low concentration of
radioactivity in soil, water, food samples, etc. The lab has three high purity germanium
detectors for gamma and X-ray detection, one sodium iodide detector, three multichannel
analyzers for spectral analysis, one "phoswich" detector for gross alpha and beta
measurement and one liquid scintillation analyzer for precise counting of low level alpha
and beta radiations, in addition to several different liquid standard radioactive sources.
Students practicing measurements in this lab acquire practical knowledge of standard
source preparation, and more sophisticated analysis techniques through modern PC-based
Multichannel analyzers (PCMCA). Moreover, students learn in this lab measurement of
different radionuclides present in our environment and their concentrations. The lab serves
students of NE340 as well as research projects.

Non-Destructive testing Laboratory I & II
Students using this facility learn Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) techniques used for
detection of minute cracks, flaws, corrosion and welding defects in materials using
radiation. The lab has a diagnostic X-ray unit, an industrial X-ray machine, human body
phantoms and a facility to develop exposed X-ray films. X-ray and gamma-ray
radiography, neutron radiography, eddy current and ultra sonic testing are the basic NDT
techniques taught students in the lab. The students learn the operation of the X-ray unit,
radiography techniques, developing radiography films, and reading the exposed films. Also
they learn the properties of scattered X-ray beams and evaluation of dose arising from
exposure to x-rays. Students of NE455 utilize the lab for various experiments.

Radioisotopes Application Laboratory
The main purpose of the Isotope Application laboratory is to familiarize the students with
the uses of radioisotopes in various fields. Experiments on activation analysis, neutron
capture gamma-ray for mineral exploration, thickness and level gauges etc. are
demonstrated. The laboratory contains a neutron source (Americium-Beryllium), two
multichannel analyzers, two isotope calibrators and several low and high activity standard
389

radioactive sources. Students learn the neutron activation analysis technique, neutron
radioactive capture phenomenon, radiation attenuation, shielding design, and the use of
calibrators. Students of NE360 utilize the lab for their entire course related and/or design
project experiments.

Computation and Computer Laboratory
Students use modern simulation software to understand different aspects of nuclear
reactors' dynamic behavior. Ten modern networked personal computers are utilized in the
lab used by students to solve nuclear computational problems. The laboratory has a number
of useful software packages like Matlab, MCNP, nuclear reactor neutronics computer
codes, thermal hydraulics, and shielding computer codes. Students of NE402 and NE411
utilize this lab. The lab also serves as a general computer lab and its workstations are
loaded with productivity software like MS Office and internet connectivity. Workstations
are available to all students and faculty of the department.

Radio-analysis Laboratory
Students use this laboratory to learn the quantification of trace elements to levels as low as
parts per billion. The lab comprises an X-ray fluorescence analyzer (XRF) and an atomic
absorption spectrometer (AAS) for this purpose. Undergraduate students practice such
techniques through NE330 and NE360 courses.

Diagnostic Radiography Laboratory
This laboratory has diagnostic x-ray unit, Am-241 source and two tissue equivalent body
phantoms. Experiments on imaging, direct and scattered X-ray measurements and shielding
are performed. Students in NE 351, 451, 450 and 455 use the lab.

As far as the non-NE courses are concerned, the following laboratories in the department of
civil and thermal engineering are used:

a. Strength of Materials lab.
b. Fluid Mechanics lab.
c. Heat Transfer lab.

Electronics and Maintenance Laboratory
This workshop covers the practical part of the Nuclear Electronics course NE440.
Electronics experiments are performed in this lab in addition to some electronics
experiments oriented for the Nuclear Engineering field.

Calibration Laboratory
The laboratory contains standard
137
Cs and
241
Am sources for calibration of survey meters
and personnel dosimeters

Library
The Department of Nuclear Engineering has a dedicated library that serves the needs of the
students and the faculty for textbooks, references and scientific journals. Textbooks are
updated for new editions from time to time and new collections of reference books added
periodically. Major scientific journals related to Nuclear Engineering as well as
Radiological Sciences are made available in the library. In addition, large number of books
is available in the central and faculty libraries.
390

13. Nuclear Engineering Department is referred to by the code NE
Key of tenth digit in the codes of AE courses
0 Basic nuclear sciences
1 Nuclear reactors physics
2, 3
Interdisciplinary Nuclear reactors engineering
sciences
4 Radiation measurements engineering
5 Radiation protection engineering
6 Radioisotopes applications and engineering
7, 8 Engineering medical physics
9 Special topics and applications
UnitsrequiredfortheB.Sc.degreeintheDepartmentofAeronauticalEngineering.
NE Departmental Requirements 29
Summer Training 2
Total 155

Cooperative Program
NE Departmental Requirements 29
Coop Program 8
Total 155

391

All departmental students are required to take 31 credits (10 courses) as indicated in the
table.
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
IE 331 Probability and Engineering Statistics 3
MATH 202, STAT 110
EE 202 Object-Oriented Computer Programming EE 201
EE 332 Numerical Methods in Engineering 3 EE 201, MATH 204
NE 301 Atomic and Nuclear Principles for Engineers 2 PHYS 202
NE 302 Nuclear Engineering Fundamentals 3 NE 301
NE 340 Nuclear Radiation Measurements 4 NE 302, EE 251
NE 351 Radiation protection I 3 NE 302
NE 390 Summer Training 2 NE 340, NE 451
NE 451 Radiation protection II 4 NE 351
NE 499 Senior Project 4 NE 340, NE 451
Total 31

NE 390 the summer training, 400 hours of on-job training distributed over 10 weeks that

Compulsory Courses for Nuclear Power Engineering Track (37 credit hours)
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
ChE 210 Material Science 4 CHEM 281
MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics 3 MATH 202, PHYS 281
NE 303 Energy and the environment 2 PHYS 281
NE 304 Introduction to Nuclear Engineering 3 NE 302
NE 311 Nuclear Reactor Analysis 3 NE 302
NE 321 Nuclear Heat Transport 4 NE 311, MEP261
NE 330 Nuclear Materials 3 NE 311, ChE 210
NE 360 Radioisotope Applications I 3 NE 340
NE 402 Computational Methods in Nuclear Engineering 3 EE 332, NE 321
NE 411 Thermal Reactor Dynamics and Kinetics 3 NE 311
NE 450 Radiation Shielding Design 3 NE 451, EE 332
Total 37

Compulsory Courses for Engineering Medical Physics Track (34 credit hours)
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 300 Analytical Methods in Engineering MATH 203
NE 341 Nuclear Electronics I EE 251
NE 370 Introduction to Medical Physics NE 302
NE 371 Medical Terminology BIO 110
NE 372 Radiobiology CHEM 281, BIO 110
NE 470 Radiotherapy I NE 370, NE 371
NE 471 Medical Imaging I NE 341, NE 370, NE 371
NE 472 Nuclear Medicine NE 370, NE 451
392

NE 473 Dosimetry NE 451, NE 470
NE 474 Medical Imaging II NE 471, EE 332
NE 489 Practical Training NE 451, NE 470, NE 471
Total 34

Compulsory Courses for Radiation Protection Engineering Track (31 credit hours)
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
NE 307 Experimental Data Analysis IE 331
NE 341 Nuclear Electronics I EE 251
NE 360 Radioisotope Applications I NE 340
NE 370 Introduction to Medical Physics NE 302
NE 372 Radiobiology CHEM 281, BIO 110
NE 441 Advanced Nuclear Radiation Measurements NE 340, NE 341or EE 311
NE 450 Radiation Shielding Design NE 451, EE 332
NE 453 Rules and Regulations of Nuclear Radiation NE 451
NE 454 Environmental Radioactivity NE 351, NE 340
NE 456 Operational Radiation Protection NE 451
NE 489 Practical Training NE 451, NE 470, NE 471
Total 31

393

1) Nuclear Power Engineering Track: 9 Credit Units of which at least 6 Credit Units
from nuclear engineering courses.
2) Engineering Medical Physics Track (Regular): 12 Credit Units of which at least 9
Credit Units from nuclear engineering courses.
3) Engineering Medical Physics Track (Cooperative): 6 Credit Units, all of which from
nuclear engineering courses.
4) Radiation Protection Engineering Track: 15 Credit Units of which at least 12 Credit
Units from nuclear engineering courses.

Note: Student can choose, as elective, from the required courses list of other tracks.
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
NE 300 Fundamentals of Nuclear Engineering Calculations 3 MATH 204, MATH 205
NE 350 Non-Ionizing Radiations 3 NE 302
NE 361
Introduction to Non Destructive Testing and Visual
Inspection
3 ChE 210
NE 452 Technology of Radiation Equipments 3 NE 340, NE 351
NE 457 Low Level Radioactive Waste Management 3 NE 451
NE 460 Radioisotope Applications II 3 NE 360
NE 461
Eddy Current Testing and
Magnetic Particle
Testing
3 NE 361
NE 462 Ultrasonic Testing and Liquid Penetrant Testing 3 NE 361
NE 463 Industrial Radiography 3 NE 361
NE 464 Radioanalytical Techniques 3 NE 340
NE 467 Radiochemistry 3 NE 351, NE 340
NE 475 Radiotherapy II 3 NE 470
NE 478 Quality Assurance of Medical Equipments 3 NE 340, NE 451, NE 370
NE 492 Special Topics in Radiation Protection Engineering (I) 3 Consent
NE 493 Special Topics in Radiation Protection Engineering (II) 3 Consent
NE 494 Special Topics in Engineering Medical Physics (I) 3 Consent
NE 495 Special Topics in Engineering Medical Physics (II) 3 Consent
NE 496 Special Topics in Nuclear Power Engineering (I) 3 Consent
NE 497 Special Topics in Nuclear Power Engineering (II) 3 Consent
NE --- Any course from the required courses of other tracks
2,3
or 4
Consent

394

A TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR NUCLEAR ENGINEERING
Nuclear Power Engineering Track
3
rd
Year
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MATH 204 Differential Equations I 3 MATH 205 Series & Vector Calculus 3
NE 301
Atomic and Nuclear Principles
for Engineers
2 EE 332
Engineering
3
ARAB 201 Arabic Language (2) 3 NE 302
Nuclear Engineering
Fundamentals
3
IE 202
Design II
2 IE 331
Probabilities and
3
EE 251 Basic Electrical Engineering 4 ISLS 201 Islamic Culture (2) 2
EE 202
Object-Oriented Computer
Programming
3 NE 303
Energy and the
environment
2
Total
Total 16

4
th
Year
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MEP 261 Thermodynamics 3 ChE 210 Material Science 4
MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics 3 NE 321 Nuclear Heat Transport 4
NE 304
Introduction to Nuclear
Engineering
3 NE 330 Nuclear Materials 3
NE 311 Nuclear Reactor Analysis 3 NE 351 Radiation protection I 3
NE 340
Nuclear Radiation
Measurements
4 NE 360 Radioisotope Applications I 3
ISLS 301 Islamic Culture III
Total Total 17

4
th
Year Summer Training
NE 390 Summer Training 2 Cr. Hr.

395

5
th
Year
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2 NE 402
Nuclear Engineering
3
NE 411
Thermal Reactor Dynamics and
Kinetics
3 NE 499 Senior Project 4
NE 450 Radiation Shielding Design 3 NE xxx Elective Course 3 3
NE 451 Radiation protection II 4 NE xxx Elective Course 4 3
NE xxx Elective Course 1 3
Total Total 13

396

Engineering Medical Physics Track (Regular Program)
3
rd
Year (Regular)
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 301
for Engineers
2 EE 332
Engineering
3
Nuclear Engineering
Fundamentals
3
IE 202
Design II
2 IE 331
Probabilities and
3
EE 202
Programming
3
Total

Total 14

4
th
Year (Regular)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 351 Radiation protection I 3 NE 370
Introduction to Medical
Physics
3
EE 300
Engineering
3 NE 341
Nuclear Electronics I
4
NE 371 Medical Terminology 2 NE 372 Radiobiology 3
NE 340
Nuclear Radiation
Measurements
4 NE 451 Radiation protection II 4
ISLS 301 Islamic Culture (3) 2 NE xxx Elective Course 1 3
Total Total 17

4
th

397

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 470 Radiotherapy I 4 NE 489 Practical Training 2
NE 471 Medical Imaging I 3 NE 473 Dosimetry 3
NE 472 Nuclear Medicine 3 NE 474 Medical Imaging II 4
NE 499 Senior Project 4 ISLS 401 Islamic Culture 4
NE xxx Elective Course 2 3 NE xxx Elective Course 3 3
NE xxx Elective Course 4 3
Total Total 17

398

Engineering Medical Physics Track (Cooperative Program)
3
rd
Year (Cooperative)
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 301
for Engineers
2 EE 332
Engineering
3
Nuclear Engineering
Fundamentals
3
IE 202
Design II
2 IE 331
Probabilities and
3
EE 202
Programming
3 EE 300
Engineering
3
NE 371 Medical Terminology 2
Total

Total 17

4
th
Year (Cooperative)
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 351 Radiation protection I 3 NE 470 Radiotherapy I 4
NE 372 Radiobiology 3 NE 471 Medical Imaging I 3
NE 340
Nuclear Radiation
Measurements
NE 370 Introduction to Medical Physics 3 ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2
NE 341 Nuclear Electronics I 4 NE xxx Elective Course 2 3
Total Total 19

399

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 474 Medical Imaging II 4
NE 472 Nuclear Medicine 3
NE 499 Senior Project 4
NE 473 Dosimetry 3
NE 489 Practical Training
NE 490 Coop Work Program 8
Total Total

400

Radiation Protection Engineering Track
3
rd
Year
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 301
for Engineers
2 EE 332
Engineering
3
ISLS 201 Islamic Culture (2) 2 NE 302
Nuclear Engineering
Fundamentals
3
IE 202
Design II
2 IE 331
Probabilities and
3
EE 251 Basic Electrical Engineering 4 ARAB 201 Arabic Language (2) 3
EE 202
Programming
3 NE 303
Energy and the
environment
2
Total
Total 17

4
th
Year
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 351 Radiation protection I 3 NE 360 Radioisotope Applications I 3
NE 307 Experimental Data Analysis 2 NE 341 Nuclear Electronics I 4
NE 370 Introduction to Medical Physics 3 NE 372 Radiobiology 3
NE 340
Nuclear Radiation
Measurements
Total Total 17

4
th
Year Summer Training

401

5
th
Year
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
NE 450 Radiation Shielding Design 3 NE 454 Environmental Radioactivity 3
NE 453
Rules and Regulation of
Nuclear Radiation
3 NE 456
Operational Radiation
Protection
3
NE 441
Advanced Nuclear Radiation
Measurements
4 NE xxx Elective Course 4 3
NE xxx Elective Course 2 3 NE xxx Elective Course 5 3
NE xxx Elective Course 3 3 NE 499 Senior Project 4
Total Total 16

402

COURSE DESCRIPTION

NE 301 Atomic and Nuclear Principles for Engineers (2:2,1)
Specialtheoryofrelativity.Wavepropertiesofmatter.Quantumtheoryoflight.Wavefunction
anditsphysicalsignificance.Originofquantumhypothesis.DeBroglieshypothesisofmatter
wave&itsexperimentalverification.Uncertaintyprinciple.Atomicstructure.Bohratomand
atomicspectra.Xrays.Periodictable.FreeElectronmodelofsolids:conductors,insulatorsand
semiconductors.Intrinsicandextrinsicsemiconductors.pnjunctions.Sizesofnuclei.Atomic
masses.Bindingenergy.Excitedstatesofnuclei.,anddecay.Internalconversion.
Electroncapture.Conservationlawsforradioactivedecay.

NE 302 Nuclear Engineering Fundamentals (3:3,0)
Thestronginteractionbetweennucleons.Liquiddropandshellmodels.Interactionofionizing
radiationwithmatter:Slowingdownofelectrons.Positiveionsandfissionfragmentsin
matter.Collisionlosses:theBetheBlochstoppingpowerformula.InteractionsofXandray
photonswithmatter:photoelectriceffect,Comptonscattering,pairproduction,photo
nuclearreactions.Theinteractionofneutronswithmatter:Slowingdownandabsorptionof
neutrons.Nuclearfission.Theneutroncycleofthermalreactors.Nuclearfusionasanenergy
source.Cosmicrays.
Prerequisite: NE 301

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Code/No. Th. Pr. Tr. Credit
Energy and the
Environment
NE 303 2 - - 2
Prerequisites PHYS 281
Renewable and non-renewable energy resources including oil, coal, nuclear, hydro, solar,
wind, and geothermal. Utilization, reserves, production, consumption and geographical
distribution of energy sources. Environmental and economic implications of energy
production and utilization. Energy conservation and policies.


Textbook: A. Maheshwari and G. Parmar, A Textbook of Energy, Ecology,
Environment and
Society. Anmol Publications Pvt Ltd; (2004).

Reference: R. Wolfson, Energy Environment and Climate. W. W. Norton & Company;
1
st
edition
403

(2008).

Course Learning Objectives: By completion of the course, the students should be able to:

1. Define energy efficiency.
2. Describe Nuclear energy.
3. Describe nuclear energy economy, environmental impact and limitations.
4. Describe oil and gas energy and world resources
5. Oil and gas energy economy, environmental impact and limitations.
6. Describe world resources of coal, its economy, environmental impact and
limitations.
7. Describe solar- thermal energy system, their economy and limitations
8. Describe solar voltaic cells economy and limitations
9. Describe wind energy economy and limitations
10. Describe biomass, tidal and other sources of energies economy and limitations

1 Nuclear energy 2
2 Oil and gas 2
3 Coal energy 2
4 Solar thermal 1
5 Solar voltaic 1
6 Wind energy 2
7 Other sources of energy 2
8 Energy reports 1
9 Review 1

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: One 1.0 hours sessions per week


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
i f a b c e h j f d i g k a
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 1 1 - - 1 3 3 1 - 1 2 - 1

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Introduction to
Nuclear
NE 304 - - 3
404

Engineering
Prerequisites NE 302
Application of radioactive decay equations, energy from fission and fuel burnup, radiation
shielding, selection of nuclear materials for reactor cooling, moderation, and cladding,
multiplication factor (k), neutron diffusion, criticality equation, rate of heat production and
types of reactors.


Textbook: J.R. Lamarsh and A.J. Baratta, Introduction to Nuclear Engineering.
Prentice Hall; 3
rd
edition (2001).

Reference: J. K. Shultis and R. E. Faw, Fundamentals of Nuclear Science and
Engineering. CRC
Press 2
nd
edition (2007).
B001HON5DW

21. Use the radioactive decay equations for compound decay,
14
C dating,
238
U
dating,
40
K dating and neutron activation.
22. Apply the knowledge of nuclear reactions to calculate the energy released
from nuclear fission and nuclear fuels.
23. Apply the knowledge of cross-sections for neutron reactions and reaction
rates to calculate fuel consumption rate in a nuclear reactor for the
production of electrical power.
24. Discuss different components of a nuclear reactor.
25. Discuss the material frequently used for different components of a reactor
and the major steps in selecting the material.
26. Define and discuss infinite multiplication factor and effective multiplication
factor.
27. Classify nuclear reactors according to their applications.
28. Use the knowledge of neutron flux and cross section to estimate the thermal
power in a nuclear reactor.
29. Discuss neutron migration and hence deduce diffusion equation.
30. Discuss reactor radiation sources and methods of shielding.

Duration in Weeks Topic Covered During Class: NO
1
Decay Law, T
1/2
, T
av
., T
E
, Activity, units,
Compound decay
1
405

1 Radioactive Equilibrium,
14
C dating,
238
U &
40
K dating, Neutron Activation, Problems
2
1 Nuclear Reactions, Nuclear Fissions, Energy
Calculations.
3
1 Cross-section for nuclear reactions, reaction
rates.
4
1 Nuclear fuel performance, problems. 5
1 Nuclear Reactors, Components of Nuclear
reactors, Cladding.
6
1 Reactor Materials, Multiplication factor. 7
1 Criticality calculation. 8
1 Heat sources in Reactor system, Reactor
power.
9
1 Diffusion of neutrons, diffusion equation. 10
1 Neutron migration (slowing down), Problems. 11
1 Reactor radiation sources, Reactor shielding. 12
1 Shielding calculations. 13

Class Schedule:
Lecture: two 1:30 hour sessions per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
f i a b c e h j f d i g k a
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 2 - 1 2 - 2 - - - - 1 2

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Experimental
Data Analysis
NE 307 2 - - 2
Prerequisites IE 331
Binomial distribution, Poisson distribution, normal distribution, linear and non-linear
fitting, error distribution, Chi square test, F test, Statistical data processing. Application to
radiation Protection and Medical Physics.

406

Textbook: J. Antony, Design of Experiments for Engineers and Scientists.
Butterworth Heinemann; 1
st
edition (2003).

Reference: D. C. Montgomery, Design and Analysis of Experiments. Wiley; 7
th

edition (2008).


26. Define data and range.
27. State the procedure for finding the range of a set of numbers.
28. Compute the range of a set of numbers.
29. Apply range procedures to solve problems.
30. Describe the characteristics and differences between simple random
sampling stratified random sampling,
31. Measure minimum detection limits and then estimate means and
variances for censored data
32. Apply appropriate methods for detecting and estimating trends and
seasonality in datasets
33. Recognize the importance (and limitations) of statistics in scientific
research.
34. Describe the characteristics and limitations of research data.
35. Calculate and interpret 1 and 2-sample tests of mean and variance.
36. Construct, analyze, and interpret simple and multiple linear regression
models.
37. Apply time series for analysis and forecasting
38. Identify distributions of variables using goodness of fits tests and other
statistics
39. Apply appropriate transformations for normalizing data
40. Apply linear regression to develop predictive models for health indices
and environmental data
41. Apply statistical tests to detect autocorrelation in regression models and
use appropriate methods to handle autocorrelation in regression.
42. Apply conditional logistic regression to develop predictive models for
health indices and environmental data.
43. Apply Poisson regression to develop predictive models for health
indices and environmental data

1 Random Variables 1
2 Probability Theory 2
3 Data characterization 1
4 Probability Distributions 1
5 Statistical model; Binomial distribution, Poisson
distribution, and normal distribution
2
6 Application of statistical models 3
7 Error propagation 2
8 Optimization of counting experiments 1
9 Limits of detestability 1
407

Class Schedule:
Lecture: Two 1 hour sessions per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 - 2 3 3 2 1 - 1 - - - 2 2

408

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Nuclear Reactor
Analysis
NE 311 3 - - 3
The fission chain reaction. Nuclear fuels. Nuclear reactors and their components. Neutron
flux. Diffusion equation. Neutron moderation. One group diffusion equation and criticality
calculations. Reflected reactors. Multi-group calculations and heterogeneous reactors.


Textbook J.R. Lamarsh and A.J. Baratta, Introduction to Nuclear
Engineering. Prentice Hall; 3
rd
edition (2001).

Reference W. M. Stacey, Nuclear Reactor Physics. Wiley-VCH; 2
nd
edition (2007).

1. Analyze simple nuclear reactor core performance
2. Derive and determine solution to neutron diffusion equation using one
group diffusion
3. equation
4. Develop multi-group diffusion equations
5. Solve problems the one-group diffusion theory for multi-region reactors
6. Derive and solve the point reactor dynamic equation for a point reactor
7. Compute dynamics and safety characteristics using point kinetics models
with reactivity
8. feedback
9. Compute reactivity effects due to depletion and fission product buildup
10. Design heterogeneous reactors with specified characteristics

1 Fission chain reaction 1
2 Nuclear reactors and their components 2
3 Neutron flux 2
4 Diffusion equations 2
5 Neutron moderation 2
6 One group diffusion equation and criticality
calculations
2
7 Reflected reactors 1
8 Multi-group calculations and heterogeneous
reactors
2

Class Schedule:
Lab: one 3 hours session per week
409

Design : 0 %


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 3

410

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Nuclear Heat
Transport
NE 321 - - 4
Prerequisites NE 311, MEP 261
Heat generation in homogeneous and heterogeneous reactors, reactor shutdown heat
generation, temperature distributions in fuel, cladding and coolant, core heat transfer
coefficients. Two-phase flow, critical heat flux and burnout, boiling channel hydraulics.
Boiling water reactors and pressurized water reactors.

Faculties and departments requiring this course (if any): none

Textbook: N. E. Todreas and M. Kazimi, Nuclear Systems Volume I: Thermal
Hydraulic
Fundamentals. Taylor & Francis; 2
nd
edition (1989).

Reference: Y. Cengel and M. Boles, Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach.
McGraw-Hill
Science; 6
th
edition (2006).

1. Explain the process of heat generation inside a nuclear reactor.
2. Calculate the volumetric heat generation at any location inside a reactor and
look for the data required for calculation.
3. Calculate heat generated in the radiation shield inside nuclear reactor core.
4. Explain the process of heat generation after reactor shutdown and its
variation with operation time and time after shutdown.
5. Apply his knowledge with homogeneous reactors to calculate heat
generation in heterogeneous nuclear reactors.
6. Calculate temperature distribution in nuclear fuel in all dimensions.
7. Describe the function and behavior of major nuclear reactor core
components during reactor operation and heat generation.
8. Use critical heat flux and hot spot factors as limiting operating and design
parameters.
9. Apply his information and computer skills to reactor thermal design.

1 Review, Atomic and nuclear structure and
reactions
1
2 Review, Neutron flux distribution in cores 1
3 Reactor heat generation 2
4 Heat conduction in reactor elements; General and 3
411

1D SS
5 Heat conduction in reactor elements; Some special
1D SS
2
6 Heat conduction in reactor elements; 2D steady
state cases
1
7 Heat transfer with change in phase 2
8 Two phase flow 1
9 The boiling core 1

Class Schedule:
Lecture: Two 1.5 Hour sessions per week
Tutorials: Two 2.0 Hours sessions per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - 2

412

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Nuclear Materials NE 330 3 - - 3
Prerequisites NE 311, ChE 210
The role of materials in reactors. Components of a nuclear reactor: fuel, reflector, coolant,
structure, shielding, moderator, cladding and control rod materials. Fuel materials including
uranium, plutonium and thorium. Radiation effects theory. Radiation effects on different
reactor materials including structural metals, ceramics and organics.

Textbook: Selected Nuclear Materials and Engineering Systems, Materials Science
International
Team MSIT, Springer; 1
st
edition (2007).

Reference: W. M. Bowen, C. A. Bennett, Statistical methods for nuclear material
management,
Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Washington, DC, USA (1988).


1. Review those aspects of fundamental concepts of nuclear reactors that are
pertinent to understand the working condition of nuclear reactors.
2. Review those aspects related to crystal structure fundamentals.
3. Study the factors that affect on material selection in the nuclear reactors.
4. Describe the role of materials in reactors.
5. Review those aspects of fundamental of theory of radiation damage in
materials.
6. Show how radiation affects the mechanical properties of fuel, cladding,
and structural materials in nuclear reactors.
7. Apply the concepts of selecting a material to uranium as a nuclear fuel.
8. Identify radiation damage picture of uranium in reactors.
9. Explain the behavior of metallic, ceramic, and cermet fuel how they are
formed, and how they affect properties of the fuel and other major reactor
components.
10. Compare between metallic, ceramic, cermet materials from radiation,
thermal, and mechanical points of view.
11. Present crystal structure outlines, and radiation damage to some nuclear
structural materials.

1 Introduction: types of reactor and their materials. 1
2 Crystal structure of solids; point defect types
and structures.
1
3 Radiation deformation in solids: point, line, and 1
413

volume defects.
4 Mechanical properties of metals. 1
5 Fission product behavior in nuclear fuel; fission
products, swelling and release.
2
6 Polycrystalline solids; recrystallization and grain
growth.
1
7 The role of materials in reactors. 1
8 Radiation damage in metals. 1
9 Uranium; structure, mechanical properties, thermal
properties, manufacturing, and radiation damage.
2
10 Structural metals; Aluminum, Zirconium, and stainless
steel.
1
11 Ceramics and cermets; structure, mechanical
properties, thermal properties, manufacturing, and
radiation damage.
1
12 Nuclear fuel elements. 1

Course Schedule:
Lecture: Three 1.0 hour sessions per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 1 3 - - 3 2 1 - - 1 3 - 3

414

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Nuclear
Radiation
Measurements
NE 340 -
Prerequisites NE 302, EE 251
Counting statistics. Properties of ionization chambers. Proportional counters. Geiger-
Muller counter. Scintillation detectors. Solid-state and other types of detectors. Radiation
monitoring equipment. Quantitative and qualitative analysis of radiation. Experiments on
alpha, beta, gamma, and neutrons measurements.

Textbook: G. F. Knoll, Radiation Detection and measurements. John Wiley; 3
rd
edition
(2000).

Reference: N. Tsoulfanidis, Measurements and Detection of Radiation. Taylor &
Francis; 3
rd

edition (2010).


1. Define detection overall and intrinsic efficiencies
2. Describe pulse formation in pulse detector
3. Measure gamma ray intensity and analyses spectrum
4. Measure beta ray intensity and analyze spectrum
5. Measure alpha ray intensity and analyze spectrum
6. Measure radiation exposure
7. Describe how gas filled detector functions & the counter functions
8. Describe how scintillation detector functions
9. Describe how solid state semi-conductor detector functions
10. Design an application specific detection system

1 Interaction of radiation with matter 1
2 Simplified detector model, modes of operation
of detectors
1
3 energy resolution, detection efficiency, dead time 1
4 Alpha and beta spectra 1
5 Gamma spectra 1
6 General properties of gas filled detectors 1
7 Ionization chambers, proportional counters 1
8 Proportional counters, G-M counters 1
9 General properties of scintillation detectors 1
10 Solid scintillation detectors and applications 1
415

11 Liquid scintillation detectors and applications 1
12 General properties of semiconductor detectors 1
13 Spectra and application of semiconductor detectors 1
14 Review of project work 1

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: Two 2.0 hours sessions per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3

Hours
Course Title
English
Code /No
Arabic
Nuclear
Electronics I
NE 341 3 -
Prerequisites EE 251
416

DC and AC circuits, introduction to semiconductors, diode applications, special-purpose
diodes, Bipolar Junction transistors - BJT, transistor Bias Circuits. Some advance topics in
electronics such as power amplifiers, operation amplifiers, and oscillators & timers.


Textbook: T. L. Floyd, Electronic Devices. Prentice Hall International; 5
th
edition
(1999).

Reference: A. P. Mavino Electronic Principles. McGraw-Hill
Science/Engineering/Math; 6
th

Edition (1998).

1. Review and identify the DC & AC circuits
2. Explain the semiconductor theory
3. Describe the general purpose diodes
4. Describe the special purpose diodes
5. Describe general & special purpose diodes applications
6. Explain the bipolar junction transistors (BJTs)
7. Explain the field effect transistors
8. Describe the power amplifiers
9. Describe the theory of operational amplifiers
10. Use advanced electronic devices such as op-am, oscillators, & timers.

1 Review Fundamentals in Electronics
Direct Current Circuits - DC
Alternating Current Circuits - AC
1
2 Introduction to Semiconductors
Semiconductors, conductors, & insulators
N-Type & P-Type Semiconductors
The PN Junction & The Diode
1
3 Diode Applications
Half & Full Wave Rectifiers
Power Supply filters
2
4 Special-Purpose Diodes
Zener & Optical Diodes & their
applications
Finalize Power Supply Components
1
5 Bipolar Junction Transistors - BJT
Transistor Construction & Basic Transistor
Operation
Transistor as an Amplifier & as a Switch
3
6 Transistor Bias Circuits
DC Operating Point, Base, Emitter, &
Collector Bias
1
417

Voltage-Dividing Bias
Small Signal Amplifiers
7 Advance Topics in Electronics
Power Amplifiers
Operation Amplifiers
Oscillators & Timers
1

Class Schedule:
Tutorial: Two 2.0 hours sessions per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 3 2 1 2 - - - - - 2 3 3

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radiation
Protection I
NE 351 3 - -
Radioactivity, half-life, average life, serial transformation, interaction of radiation with
matter. Radiation dosimetry: exposure measurements, absorbed dose measurements,
exposure-dose relationship, specific gamma ray emission, internal dose calculations, dose
commitment. Biological effects of radiation, dose limits, relative biological effectiveness
(RBE), quality factor (QF) and dose equivalent.


418

Textbook: H. Cember and T. Johnson, Introduction to Health Physics. McGraw-Hill
Medical; 4
th

edition (2008).
B001IQWATE

Reference: M. G. Stabin, Radiation Protection and Dosimetry: An Introduction to Health
Physics.
Springer; 1
st
edition (2007).

1. Define Radioactivity and discuss the transformation mechanisms for ,
, and emission from nucleus.
2. Examine the basics of radioactive decay kinetics including determining
half-life, activity, secular equilibrium and transient equilibrium. Apply this
knowledge to solve problems related to activity, half-life, equilibrium, and
specific activity.
3. Discuss how gamma photons interact with matter
4. Discuss how and particles interact with matter
5. Gain understanding of the concepts of dosimetry and exposure.
6. Explain different exposure measuring instruments
7. Use of the Gamma ray emission constant () to calculate dose and
exposure
8. Calculate dose rate and total dose for internal radiation sources
9. Explain the basic biological effects of radiation on human cells. Explain
acute, delayed and genetic effects of radiation. Explain the stochastic and
non-stochastic effects of radiation
10. Give internet research based oral presentation on different aspects of the
biological effects of radiation

1 Radioactivity and Transformation Mechanism 1
2 Transformation Kinetics, half life, Activity,
Specific Activity, Units.
1
3 Serial Transformation- Equilibrium of growth and
decay.
1
4 Interaction of beta particles with matter, Mechanism of
Energy loss
1
5 Interaction of alpha particles with matter, Mechanism
of Energy loss
1
6 Gamma radiation-Exponential absorption, interaction
mechanism, photoelectric, Compton effects and pair
production.
2
7 Radiation dosimetry-Absorbed dose, Exposure,
Exposure measurement,-Air well chamber, Free air
chamber.
2
8 Exposure-dose relationship 1
9 Specific gamma ray emission. 1
10 Biological effects of radiation-Dose response 1
419

characteristic, direct and indirect actions.
11 Radiation effects-Acute effects, Delayed effects,
Genetic effects.
1

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 2 2 1 - 1 - 2 - - 2 - - 2

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radioisotope
Applications I
NE 360 3 1 - 3
Natural and artificial radioisotope production of radioisotopes, radiotracing. Selection of
radioisotopes. Radiotracing applications. Radiography application with alpha and beta
particles. Radiography applications with gamma rays.


Textbook: G. A. Johansen and P. Jackson, Radioisotope Gauges for Industrial Process
Measurements. Wiley; 1
st
edition (2004).

420

Reference: G. Foldiak, Industrial Application of Radioisotopes. Elsevier
(1986).

1. Design a liquid level gauge based on gamma ray attenuation.
2. Design metal thickness gauge based on gamma ray attenuation.
3. Design a thickness gauge based on gamma backscattering.
4. Design a density gauge using radioactivity.
5. Calculate gamma ray attenuation in multi-layers.
6. Calculate gamma ray backscattering energy.
7. Calculate detector response to back scattered radiation.
8. Calibrate NaI(Tl) detector and counting system for gamma ray energy.
9. Calibrate Cd-Tl x-ray detector and counting system for characteristics x-
ray.
10. Design an experiment by selecting appropriate radioactive source for
radiographic imaging.
11. Design an experiment for identifying unknown metal or alloy.
12. Describe an experiment for using contrast media for better contrast in x-
ray radiography.

1 Production of Radioisotopes 1
2 Radio-Tracing Principles and Techniques 1
3 Radio-Tracer Applications 2
4 Radio-gauging principles and techniques 1
5 Radio-gauging with charged particles 2
6 Radio-gauging with EM radiation 2
7 Radio-gauging with neutrons 2
8 Radiography 2
9 Miscellaneous Applications of radioisotopes 2

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
421

Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 1 2 3 2 2 - - - 1 1 2 2 2

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Introduction To
Medical Physics
NE 370 - - 3
The course focuses on medical imaging and therapy. The content will cover the Radiation
Imaging by ionizing radiation such as X-Ray, Nuclear Medicine and non-ionizing radiation
like Ultrasound Imaging and Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI). Radiation Therapy.
Planning, treatment by linear accelerator, treatment by sealed and unsealed sources.
Radiation Protection.


Textbook: E.B. Podgorzak, Radiation Oncology Physics: A Handbook for Teachers
and
Students. IAEA Library Cataloguing in Publication Data (2005).

References: J. E. Bushberg, J. A. Seibert, E. M. Leidholdt J. R, and J. M. Boone, The
Essential Physics of Medical Imaging Published. Lippncott
Williams
& Wilkens; 2nd edition (2002).

Faiz M. Khan, The Physics of Radiation Therapy. Lippincott Williams and
Wilkins.
3rd edition (2003).

1. Define the medical physics Field and responsibilities of a medical physicists
2. Define and describe the major medical physics subfields
3. Describe a radiation therapy system and break down into its main components, for
each of the radiation therapy machines covered (Co-60, Linac, and Breakytherapy)
4. Describe an imaging system and break some of it down into its main components
5. Relates the interaction of charge particles & photons with matter in main
therapeutic and diagnostic system machines
6. Describe scientific articles that relate to medical physics and be able to
communicate their understanding in a professional manner
7. Learn to communicate the physical principles behind medical technology and
relevant applications
8. Practice and apply elements of active learning, develop team norms and writing
skills.
9. Describe how ideas from physics are integrated into medicine
10. See themselves as people who are more educated about medical physics than the
average layperson
11. Able to inform and educate other intelligent citizen about the role of medical
physics in personal and public life
422

12. Be excited about medical physics as a broad, complex, multifaceted field of study
13. Value the importance of precise language in the field of medical phyiscs work as
part of professionalism
14. Be able how to read assigned materials responsibly.

1 Introduction to the Engineering of Medical Physics
Syllabus in details
Introduction to Medical Physics (Define field,
subfield, responsibilities and roles)
2
2 Introduction to the Physics of Radiation Therapy
Basics Radiation Physics
1
3 Dosimetry Principles, Quantities and Units 1
4 Radiation Monitoring 1.5
5 Treatment Machines for External Beam Radiotherapy 1.5
6 External Photon Beams: Physics Aspects 1
7 Clinical Treatment Planning In External Photon Beam
Radiotherapy
1
8 Electron Beams: Physical and Clinical Aspects 1
9 Introduction to the Physics of Medical Imaging
Physics of the Eyes and Vision
1.5
10 Introduction to Medical Imaging
Introduction to Radiation with Matter in Dx
1.5
11 Computers in Medical Imaging 1

Class Schedule:
Lecture: Two 1.5 hour sessions per week.
Tutorials: None.



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 1 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

423

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Code/No.
Th. Pr. Tr. Credit
Anatomy and
Physiology for
Medical
Physicists
NE 371 2 - 1 2
Pre-requisites BIO 110
Introduction to human anatomy and physiology. Medical terminology of human organs and
of human diseases. Understanding basic medical anatomy from 3D re-sliced medical
images: Axial, Sagittal, Coronal, and oblique reformat and from 2D projections of medical
data: anterior-posterior and posterior-anterior orientations.


Thieme . Atlas of Human Anatomy , Heinz Feneis and Wolfgang Dauber : Textbook
Flexibook; 5
th
edition (2000).

; Prentice Hall . Medical Terminology with Human Anatomy , Race . J : Reference
5
th
edition
(2004).

: the students should be able to , By completion of the course : Course Learning Objectives

1. Define the nomenclature of the different organs, bone, muscles, of the human body.
2. Describe the physiology of the different human body organs.
3. Describe the anatomy of human body.
4. Explain information about the metabolic pathways of the human body.
5. Communicate well with the physicians, nurses and technologists in the hospital
during the practical work.
424

6. Identify the biological relation between muscles and the skeletal bones.
7. Differentiate between normal organs and abnormal ones.
8. Adapt the scientific concepts and engineering technologies with the human body.
9. Handle, set-up and have a good response with patients during medical or diagnostic
investigations.

1 Human skeletal bones 2
2 Human Muscle 2
3 Human Digestive System 2
4 Human myocardium System 2
5 Hyman Lymphatic System 2
6 Human Secretion System 2
7 Human CNS 1
8 Human Respiratory system 1
9 Human Brain 1

Course Schedule
Tutorial: One 1.0 hour session per week

: e Contribution to professional Component Cours

: Course Relationship to Program Outcomes

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest
Attainable Level
of Learning
- 1 2 1 1 3 - 1 - - 1 - 3 2

425

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radiobiology NE 372 0
Prerequisites BIO 110, CHEM 281
Physico-chemical aspects of interaction of ionizing radiation with the cell, radiation effects
on macromolecules, cellular radiation biology, radiobiology of tissues and organs, cell
survival curves, radiation biology as applied to radiation therapy, effects of radiation on the
environment and man.


Textbook: E. J. Hall and A. J. Giacci, Radiobiology for the Radiologist.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins edition; 6
th
edition (2005).

Reference: K. N. Prasad, Handbook of Radiobiology. CRC Press; 2
nd
edition (1992).


32. Describe the various types of ionizing radiation
33. Define the main radiation quantities (units) used in the measurement of
radiation levels
34. Describe the physical and chemical events that follow an ionizing event,
including their spatial distribution, and the time scale
35. Define and give examples of direct and indirect effects of radiation
36. Describe the induced damage to the DNA and macromolecules
37. Describe the effect of radiosensitizers and radioprotectors
38. Construct a dose survival curve
39. Explain the practical aspects of dose fractionation in radiotherapy
40. Explain the radiation syndromes including: bone-marrow, gastrointestinal,
central nervous system and hematopoietic syndromes
41. Discuss genetic effects of radiation and effects of radiation on
embryogenesis
42. Describe the process leading to cancer
43. Explain the long term effects of radiation exposure, specifically as it relates
to leukemia and other cancers, cataracts, Life shortening
426

1 Interaction of radiation with matter: 1
2 Absorption of energy 1
3 Radiation chemistry 1
4 Basic cell biology 1
5 Cellular radiation damage 2
6 Modification of cellular radiation damage 1
7 Molecular radiation biology 1
8 Repair of radiation damage 1.5
9 Radiation syndromes 1.5
10 Radiation carcinogenesis 2
11 Radiation induced genetic damage 1

Class Schedule:
Tutorial: None



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 - - - - - - 2 1 2 - 2 - -

427

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Summer
Training
NE 390 - -
Prerequisites NE 340, NE 451
Training is usually arranged at an industrial establishment under the supervision of a
faculty member. Students have to submit a report regarding their achievements in addition
to any other requirements as assigned by the department.


Textbook: Donald Dinero, Training Within Industry: with CDROM. Productivity
Press; (2005).

Reference: Health and Safety at Work: A Guide for Trainees (Engineering Training
Guide).
Training Publications Ltd; 2
nd
edition (1990).

25. Formulate an objective or mission statement that identify the real
problem and describe the expected outcomes of the training
activity.
26. Break-down a work environment into its units and work functions,
and describe how these units are assembled into a whole entity.
27. Describe a professional organizational structure, its size and how it
is related to its main products and to market issues.
28. Exhibit integrity, punctuality, and ethical behavior in engineering
practice and relationships.
30. Establish successful relationships with team members, advisors,
and clients to understand their needs and to achieve or exceed
agreed-upon quality standards.
31. Maintain focus to complete important tasks on time and with high
quality, amidst multiple demands
32. Relate practical work to previous knowledge from basic sciences,
engineering fundamentals, and discipline related courses.
33. Collect and review related data such as technical information,
regulations, standards, and operational experiences from credible
literature resources
34. Utilize prior knowledge, independent research, published
information, and original ideas in addressing problems and
generating solutions
35. Monitor achievement, identify causes of problems, and revise
processes to enhance satisfaction
36. Communicate, clearly and concisely, training details and gained
experience, both orally and in writing, using necessary supporting
material, to achieve desired understanding and impact.
428

1 Acquainting the trainee by the company, its work
costumers, engineering units, and quality system.
2
2 Familiarizing the trainee of one production or design
unit with deep understanding of the work environment,
regulations, standards, etc.
2
3 Allocating the trainee to a project team and allowing
him to study and collect necessary data about the
project using internal and external data sources.
6

Class Schedule:
faculty members.

Others 100%


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
1 2 a b c e h j f d i g k a
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - 3 3 -

429

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Coop Work
Program in
Medical Physics
NE 490 - - 4 2
Prerequisites NE 340, NE 451, NE 470, NE 371
Students of the Engineering Medical Physics Track are assigned coop clinical rotational
training in different radiological departments at hospitals to familiarize the students with
actual procedures and practices in the field of medical physics.


Textbook: AAPM Presidential Ad Hoc Committee on the Clinical Training of
Radiological
Physicists, Essentials and guidelines for hospital based medical physics
residency
training programs. (AAPM report); (1992)

Reference: Douglas P. Beall, Radiology Sourcebook: A Practical Guide for Reference
and
Training. Humana Press; 1
st
edition (2010).

1. Identify the role of medical physicist in realistic profession environment.
2. Apply theoretical medical physics concepts
3. Use different equipment and technologies used in the field of medical physics.
4. Practice the professional and ethical behavior toward patients, physicians, and co-
workers in the profession of medical physics.

1 Radiology clinical rotation 6
2 Nuclear Medicine clinical rotation 6
3 Radiotherapy clinical rotation 6
4 Quality control, quality assurance 7

Class Schedule:
Oral Presentation after submitting a written training report; both evaluated by at least
2 faculty members.

Others 100%
430


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
3 2 - 2 - 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 -

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Computational
Methods in
NE 402 3 1 - 3
431

Nuclear
Engineering
Prerequisites EE 332, NE 321
Introduction to numerical methods commonly encountered in nuclear engineering
calculations, finite differencing, explicit and implicit techniques, convergence and stability
criteria. Application of the above techniques to one group diffusion equation, multigroup
diffusion equation, coupled diffusion equation with delayed neutrons, heat conduction and
convection, criticality search method. Generation of heterogeneous cross-sections.


Textbook: S. Nakamura, Computational Methods in Engineering and Science. J. Wiley
& Sons;
(1996).

Reference: W.F. Miller, Computational Method of Books: Neutron Transport.
John Wiley & Sons; (1984).

.
30. Compare between deterministic and probabilistic numerical methods
31. Describe the computer methods for eigen values problem solving
32. Discuss different types of numerical solution techniques
33. Compare between numerical methods that used to solve neutron transport
problems
34. Describe variance reduction techniques
35. Describe MCNP method and its sampling methods
36. Analyze of different methods that used in solving 1D neutron transport
37. Analyze and compare between error reduction techniques

1 Fundamentals of numerical analysis
Deterministic and Probabilistic Methods
Numerical solution of neutron
transport/diffusion equation
Discretization in time, energy, angle and space
2
2 Computer solutions for 1D eigen value problems
Iterative computational methods for solving
partial differential equations
Finite element methods,
Finite difference method,
Coarse-mesh rebalancing method
2
3 Neutron Transport Equation in 1D:
Numerical Solution of integro-Differential
Equation
Spatial discretization in slab geometry
2
4 Collision probability and Monte Carlo methods
Continuous and discrete probability distribution
Probability density function
2
432

Cumulative probability distribution function
Random numbers
Categories of random sampling
Importance sampling
Variance reduction methods
5 Monte Carlo simulation of neutron transport
Sampling of the position, direction, distance to
collision
type of collision
3
6 Sampling of energy and angle in Compton scattering
Definitions of true and sample mean, variance,
standard deviation
Central limit theorem. Collision and track length
estimators for flux calculation.
2

Course Schedule:
Tutorials: Two 1.0 hour sessions per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 3 1 - 3 - - - - - - 2 3

Hours
Course Title
English
Code /No
Arabic
Thermal Reactor
Dynamics and
Kinetics
NE 411 - -
433

Reactor kinetics, effect of delayed neutrons, reactor control by control rods and chemical
shim methods, temperature effects on reactivity and fission products poisoning.


Textbook: W. M. Stacey, Nuclear Reactor Physics. Wiley-Interscience; 1
st
edition
(2001).

Reference: D. L. Hetrick, Dynamics of Nuclear Reactors. American Nuclear Society;
(1993)

1. Analyze simple nuclear reactor core performance
2. Derive and determine solution to neutron diffusion equation using one group
diffusion equation
3. Develop multi-group diffusion equations
4. Solve problems the one-group diffusion theory for multi-region reactors
5. Derive and solve the point reactor dynamic equation for a point reactor
6. Compute dynamics and safety characteristics using point kinetics models with
reactivity feedback
7. Compute reactivity effects due to depletion and fission product buildup
8. Design heterogeneous reactors with specified characteristics

1 Classification of time problems 1
2 Prompt neutron lifetime 1
3 Reactor with no delayed neutrons 1
4 Reactor with delayed neutrons 1
5 The prompt critical state 1
6 The prompt jump or drop 1
7 Small Reactivity 1
8 Control rods and chemical shim and their reactivity
worth
1
9 Reactivity coefficients, Temperature coefficient 1
10 Moderator coefficient 1
11 Void coefficient 1
12 Fission product poisoning 1
13 Equilibrium Xenon 1
14 Xenon after shutdown and reactor dead time 1

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Tow lectures of 1.5 hours sessions per week.
Tutorials: Two 1.0 hours sessions per week.

434



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Advanced
Nuclear
Radiation
Measurements
NE 441 2 - 4
435

Advanced radiation measuring equipment that includes: scintillation detectors, solid state
detectors, neutron detectors and other types of detectors used for x-ray, gamma ray, neutron
detection and spectrometry. Design of experiments; measurements of XRF, gamma rays
and neutrons.

Textbook: G. F. Knoll, Radiation Detection and Measurements. John Wiley; 3
rd

edition (2000).

Reference: N. Tsoulfanidis, Measurements and Detection of Radiation. Taylor &
Francis; 3
rd

edition (2010).

1. Describe properties of advanced x-ray and gamma detectors.
2. Describe methods of advanced x-ray and gamma detectors.
3. Describe properties of fast and slow neutron detectors.
4. Describe methods for fast and neutron measurements.
5. Describe properties of XRF detectors.
6. Measure different types of gamma rays.
7. Measure slow neutrons.
8. Measure fast neutrons.
9. Calibrate equipment for energy and efficiency.
10. Design new experiments for gamma, x-ray and neutron measurements.

1 Properties of advanced scintillation detectors 2
2 Gamma and x-ray detection and spectrometry by
scintillation detectors
2
3 Properties of advanced solid state detectors 2
4 X-ray and gamma ray measurements and spectrometry
by solid state detectors
2
5 Slow neutron interactions 1
6 Detectors and methods of slow neutron measurements 2
7 Fast neutron interactions 1
8 Detection and spectrometry of fast neutrons 1
9 New experiment 1

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Three 1.0 hour sessions per week.
Labs.: Two 2.0 hours sessions per week or one 4.0 hours session per week

436


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 - 2 3 1 2 1 - 1 3 - 3 2 2

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radiation
Shielding Design
NE 450 - -
Prerequisites NE 451, EE 332
Principles of radiation shielding design, attenuation of nuclear radiation, shield layout
analysis and design, gamma ray, x-ray and neutron shielding, principles of reactor
shielding and use of computers to solve shielding problems.

437

Textbook: J. K. Shultis and R. E. Faw, Radiation Shielding. American Nuclear
Society; (2000).

Reference: G. F. Knoll, Radiation Detection and measurements. John Wiley; 3
rd
edition
(2000).

1. Calculate shield thickness around a point gamma source that reduces exposure
to desired level.
2. Calculate shield thickness over contaminated land that reduces exposure to
desired level.
3. Design a shield for a gamma source used in a level gauge.
4. Calculate exposure at the surface of a person injected by radioactive materials.
5. Design a shield around a wire irradiated inside a nuclear reactor.
6. Calculate exposure rate outside two layer shield of a gamma beam.
7. Defline: exposure, effective dose, entrance surface dose. Neutron removal cross
section.
8. Design a shield for a neutron generator inside a room.
9. Describe equipment for measuring exposure.
10. Describe equipment for measuring neutron dose.
11. Calculate shield thickness for primary x-ray machine.
12. Calculate fast neutron dose due to a fission source at certain depth in water.

1 Review of gamma and neutron radiation interaction 1
2 Introduction to gamma ray shielding, meanings of
exposure & dose, direct & scattered radiation
1
3 Good geometry attenuation, broad beam attenuation,
build-up factor.
1
Gamma point source shielding 1
Gamma ray line source shielding 1
Gamma ray planar source shielding 1
Internal source shielding 1
Gamma ray multi-layer shielding 1
Removal cross-section, Neutron removal in water and
by flat attenuator
1
Neutron shielding 1
Nuclear reactor shielding 1
Neutron generator shielding, X-ray shielding 1
Shielding X-rays -Primary shielding 1
X-ray secondary radiation shielding 1

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: Two 1.0 hour sessions per week.

438



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 - 2 3 3 2 1 - 1 - - - 2 2

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radiation
Protection II
NE 451 -
Radiation protection guides such as ICRP, NCRP etc. Radiation safety criteria, Allowable
Limit on Intake (ALI), Derived Air Concentration (DAC), Maximum Permissible
Concentration (MPC). Health Physics instruments, diagnostic and therapeutic x-ray
shielding, basic principles for external and internal radiation protection and radioactive
waste management.


Medical; 4
th

edition (2008).

Reference: G. F. Knoll, Radiation Detection and Measurements. John Wiley; 3
rd
edition
(2000).
439

1. Understand the role of organization that set Radiation Safety Guides
2. Application of basic recommendations of radiation protection such as Justification,
Optimization, and dose limitation.
3. Estimate the population risk based on collective dose.
4. Differentiate between stochastic and non- stochastic effects.
5. Calculate the derived limits ( ie. ALI, DAC,MPC) from basic limits.
6. Determine which survey meters, or dose marinating instruments should be used in
the field.
7. Understand the three basic principles of external radiation protection Time,
Distance , Shielding
8. Test the existing shielding in any X ray facility and give recommendation.
9. Explain different exposure and dose measuring instruments
10. Apply specific Gamma ray emission constant ( ) to estimate exposure.
11. Explain acute, delayed and genetic effects of radiation.
12. Explain RBE and QF and hence calculate dose equivalent

1 Radiation protection guides such as ICRP, NCRP etc. 1
2 Radiation safety criteria, Annual Limit of Intake (ALI),
Derived Air
1
3 Concentration (DAC) and Maximum Permissible
concentration (MPC)
2
4 Health Physics instruments 2
5 Diagnostic and therapeutic x-ray shielding 2
6 Basic principles for external radiation protection 2
7 Basic principles for internal radiation protection 2
8 Radioactive waste management 2

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Two 1.5 hour sessions per week.
Labs.: One 2.0 hour sessions per week.



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3

440

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Rules and
Regulation of
Nuclear
Radiation
NE 453 - -
In this course the student will know rules and regulations of Nuclear radiation (local &
international), recommendations of International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA),
International Commission of Radiation Protection (ICRP), and other international
recommendations. He will also learn how to compare between those recommendations and
their application in medical, industrial and environmental fields.


Textbook: International Atomic Energy Agency Publications, www.iaea.org.

Reference: International Atomic Energy Agency Publications, www.iaea.org.

1. Explain and discuss the general concept of the nuclear law
2. Define and describe the general concept of the regulatory body
441

3. Identify and describe the regional and international treaties, conventions, and
agreements
4. Recognize and identify local rules and regulations of nuclear radiation
5. Recognize and identify recommendations of IAEA, ICRP, and other international
bodies
6. Apply nuclear regulations in medical, industrial and environmental fields

1 Concepts of nuclear law (Risks and benefits and
National legal hierarchy)
1
2 Definition of nuclear law 1
3 Objective of nuclear law 1
4 Principles of nuclear law 1
5 Legislative process for nuclear law 3
6 Security culture and safety culture in nuclear law 1
7 The Regulatory Body 2
8 Advisory bodies and external support 1
9 International Agreements Joined or Ratified by KSA 1
10 The State System of Accounting for and Control of
Nuclear Materials (SSAC)
2
11 Local rules and regulations of nuclear radiation 1
12 Recommendations of IAEA, ICRP, and
other international recommendations
1
13 Examples and Exemptions 1
14 Administrative requirements for radiation protection
and safety of radiation sources
1

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: One 2.0 hours session per week.

Other 100%


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
3 2 1 - - - 2 3 3 1 2 3 - 1

442

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Environmental
Radioactivity
NE 454 - -
Natural radioactivity: radionuclides in the earth, cosmogeonic radioactivity, cosmic
radiation, external and internal doses from natural radioactivity, sources of man-made
radioactivity contamination covering fallout, radiation accidents, and radioactive waste.
Pathways of radionuclides from environment to man.


Textbook: R. Tykva and J. Sabol, Low Level Environmental Radioactivity.
Technomic
Publication (1995).

Reference: M. Eisenbud and T. Gesell, Environmental Radioactivity from Natural,
Industrial &
Military Sources. Academic Press; 4
th
edition (1997).

1. Describe Terrestrial Radioactivity and list the three radioactive series that exist
2. Describe cosmogenic radionuclides and identify some of them
3. Explain cosmic radiation and its two components
4. Explain external and internal doses from natural radioactivity and means of
determining the same
5. Describe radiation fall-out
443

6. Identify some of the nuclear accidents and assess the damages caused and their
long- term effects
7. Explain radioactive waste and describe how to classify them. Explain different
pathways of radionuclides reaching man
8. Identify different radionuclides that are transported through air, water and soil

1 Environmental Radioactivity Introduction 1
2 Terrestrial and Cosmic Radiation 1
3 Contamination from Natural radioactivity (External) 1
4 Contamination from Natural radioactivity (Internal) 1
5 Sources of Man-made radioactivity 1
6 Radiation fall-out 1
7 Nuclear Accidents 1
8 Radioactive waste: Identification, classification 1
9 Radioactive waste disposal 2
10 Transport of radioactivity through air 1
11 Transport of radioactivity through water 1
12 Transport of radioactivity through Soil 1
13 Transport of radioactivity through Soil 1

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: Two 2.0 hours session per week.



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 - 2 - - 1 2 - 2 - - - - 2

444

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Operational
Radiation
Protection
NE 456 - - 3
Laboratory operation and good work practice, use of radiation survey meters, calibration,
frequency of calibration. Radiation dose limits, limits of radionuclides in water in
unrestricted areas, limits in sewerage, leakage and surface contamination limits,
accessibility control, labeling, use of protection equipments, emergency procedures, low
and intermediate waste management.


Medical;
4
th
edition (2008).

Reference: Merril Eisenbud and Thomas Gesell, Environmental Radioactivity.
Academic Press; 4
th
edition (1997).

1. Describe how measuring device operates (principally in terms of its energy and
count rate response).
2. Recognize the diverse aspects of good work practice in labs (source storage, source
containment, identification of radiation hazard, spillage, waste disposal).
3. Calibrate a measuring instrument.
4. Specify the radiation dose limits set by ICRP.
5. Apply the regulations related to release of radioactivity and waste disposal.
6. Describe different procedures to handle radiation incidents.
445

1 Laboratory operation and good work practice 2
2 Use of radiation survey meters 2
3 Calibration and frequency of calibration 1
4 Radiation dose limits 1
5 limits of radionuclides in water in unrestricted areas,
limits in sewage
2
6 leakage and surface contamination limits 2
7 Accessibility control, labeling, use of protection
equipments
2
8 Emergency procedures 1
9 Low and intermediate and high waste managements 1

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: Two 2.0 hours session per week.



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 - - 2 - 1 - - 1 - - 2 - -

446

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radiotherapy I NE 470 2 - 4
Prerequisites NE 370, NE 371, NE 372
Dose and exposure calculations, patient dose calculation, treatment plans and use of
computer in radiotherapy, treatment by linear accelerator and sealed and open sources.


Textbook: F. M. Khan, The Physics of Radiation Therapy, Williams & Wilkins
(2009).

Reference: G. Bentel, Radiation Therapy Planning. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2
nd

edition
(1995).

1. Define precise technical information about radiotherapy machine.
2. Define the physical characteristics of photon & electron therapy beams.
3. Calculate the absorbed dose to cancer lesions.
4. Use calibration protocol for megavoltage beams
5. Lear the dose distribution in phantoms and human body.
6. Identify the dose calculation parameters
7. Differentiate between the dose delivered to regular & irregular fields.
8. Use the TPS for measurement and planning isodose curves.
9. Describe physical approach of the different types of radiation modulators.
10. Define precisely the radiotherapy terminology.
11. Explain combination of therapy fields with the patients.
12. Describe the ideal setup of the patient during radiation treatment.

1 Specification and technology of linac 1
2 Specification and technology of radionuclide therapy 1
3 Treatment planning technology 2
447

4 Calculation of absorbed dose in phantoms and patients 2
5 Absorbed dose calibration protocols for megavoltage
beams
2
6 Dose distribution and scatter analysis
1- PDD
2- TAR
3- SAR
3
7 System of dosimetric calculations 2
8 Corrections for the absorbed dose to the patients 1
9 Radiation field combination 1

Class Schedule:
Labs: Two 2.0 hours session per week.



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 2 3 2 1 2 - - - 1 2 - 1 3

448

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Medical Imaging
I
NE 471 - -
Prerequisites NE 341, NE 370, NE 371

Introduction to medical image processing and medical image quality. Medical imaging
modalities based on ionizing radiation. Physical principles and components of X-ray
Radiography. X-ray spectrum and factors that affect its shape. Physical principles and
components of X-ray Computed Tomography. Mathematical algorithms used to reconstruct
CT and Nuclear Medicine images: Center Slice Theorem, Radon Transform, Filter Back-
projection and iterative reconstruction techniques. Introduction to medical imaging
modalities based on non ionizing radiation; such as MRI and US Imaging.


Textbook: J.E. Bushberg, J.A. Seibert, E.M. Leidholdt JR, and J.M. Boone, The
Essential
Physics of Medical Imaging. Lippncott Williams & Wilkens Editions; 2
nd

Edition
(2002).

Reference: P. Suetens, Fundamentals of Medical Imaging. Cambridge University
Press; (2002).

1. Define the key factors that affect image quality
2. List, define, and explain an ionizing imaging system and break it down into its
components and physical principles, for each of the imaging modalities covered
(X-ray Radiography and
3. X-ray computed tomography)
4. Describe published scientific articles that relate to medical imaging and be able to
communicate their understanding in a professional manner
5. Learn to communicate the physical principles behind medical technology and
6. Describe basic components of the nuclear medicine imaging equipments such
Gamma Camera, SPECT, and PET in addition to the image reconstruction
techniques.
449

7. Describe basic components of the non-ionizing medical imaging equipments such
MRI and US
8. Remember the terms associated with Medical Imaging
9. Remember the image quality parameters
skills.
11. Able to critically evaluate bodies of literature in the medical imaging application
12. Integrate ideas from physics into medicine
13. See themselves as people who are more educated about medical imaging
14. Able to inform and educate other intelligent citizen about the role of medical
imaging in personal and public life
15. Be excited about medical imaging as a broad, complex, multifaceted field of study
16. Value the importance of precise language in the field of medical imaging work as
part of professionalism

1 Introduction to Digital Image Processing
Anatomy of the eye, Property of Light, Color
Models, & Visual Illusions
Definition of digital images; dynamic range,
quantization, histogram
Evaluation of image quality; resolution,
contrast, noise, & artifacts
1
2 Basic Image operations; gray level
transformations, multi-image operations, geometric
operations and linear and non-linear filters
1
3 Introduction to Linear System Theory
Introduction to Medical Imaging and
Computers in Medical Imaging
1
4 Diagnostic Radiographic Imaging
X-ray Machine, X-ray Tubes, Filters,
Collimators, Grid, & Generators
1.5
5 Image Receptors, Screen Film
Radiography, Image Intensifiers, Computed
Radiography, Direct Radiography Detectors
1.5
6 X-ray Production, Radiographic Charts,
Factors Affecting X-ray Emission Spectra, Scatter
Radiation, Image Quality, & Biological Effect &
Safety.
1.5
7 X-ray Computed Tomography Imaging CT
Generations of X-ray CT: Machine
Components, CT Image, CT Number
1.5
8 Tomography, projection, Radon Transform,
Sampling, Center Slice Theorem & Filter Back
projection Reconstruction
1.5
9 Types of CT, Spiral, Multi-slice CT, Pitch,
Image Quality & Radiation Dose
1.5
10 Nuclear Medicine Imaging NM
NM imaging; Components, Choices of
1
450

Radionuclide, Types of Image Reconstructions for
Single Photon Emission Tomography (SPECT) &
Positron Emission Tomography (PET).
Planner & Tomographic NM imaging & Clinical
Applications in NM
11 Non Ionizing Radiation Imaging Modalities
Introduction Magnetic Resonance Imaging
MRI
Introduction to Ultrasonic Imaging US
1

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: None.



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 2 2 - - 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 - 2

451

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Nuclear Medicine NE 472 - -
Production of radionuclide, radiopharmaceuticals, nuclear medicine instrumentations
(NaI(Tl)) detector, well counter, Thyroid probe, dose calibrator, gamma camera, SPECT,
and PET), quality control, clinical applications, internal radiation dosimetry, safe handling
of radionuclides, and statistics of radiation counting.


Textbook: M. A. Wilson, Textbook of Nuclear Medicine. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins
Editions (1998).

Reference: F. Mettler and M. Guiberteau, Essentials of Nuclear Medicine Imaging.
Saunders;
5
th
edition (2005).

1. Define and explain difference between radionuclides and radiopharmaceuticals
2. Explain different methods for production of radiopharmaceuticals
3. Apply mathematical formulas to calculate radionuclides in the pharmaceuticals
4. Solve problems associated with the production methods of radiopharmaceuticals
5. Explain the physics of NaI (Tl) detector and gamma camera
6. Define and explain SPECT and its application in nuclear medicine imaging
7. Define and explain PET and its application in nuclear medicine imaging
8. Explain the purpose of well counter in the field of nuclear medicine
9. Explain the use of dose calibration in nuclear medicine
10. Discuss the use of thyroid probe in nuclear medicine
452

11. Define quality control in nuclear medicine, explain instrumentation quality control,
and radiopharmaceutical quality control
12. Calculate thyroid uptake of radioisotopes
13. Discuss diagnosis and treatment of thyroid disease
14. Discuss radionuclide renal evaluation
15. Employ isotope dilution technique for the measurement of plasma volume
16. Compute dose and dose rate for internally deposited radioisotopes
17. Explain the principles of radiation protection and discuss the effect of time,
distance, and shielding
18. Discuss different steps to avoid internal contamination
19. Discuss DOs and DONTs in radiation protection practice
20. Employ the idea of radiation counting statistics and propagation of errors to
compute percentage uncertainty in nuclear medicine clinical applications

1 Radiopharmaceuticals and their production 1
2 NaI(Tl) detectors and gamma cameras 1
3 Well counter, thyroid probe, and dose calibrator 1
4 SPECT 1
5 PET 1
6 Quality control in nuclear medicine 1
7 Clinical applications 1.5
8 Internal radiation dosimetry 1.5
9 Safe handling of radionuclides 1.5
10 Statistics of radiation counting 1.5

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 2 3 2 - 2 - 1 - - 2 1 2 3

453

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Dosimetry NE 473 - -
Radiation exposure, radiation absorbed dose, dose units, kinetic energy absorbed in unit
mass, dose equivalent, Bragg-Gray theory, measurement methods and detection by
ionization chambers, proportional detectors and solid state detectors, Geiger tubes, TLD,
calorimetric method, and scintillation detectors.


Textbook: M. G. Stabin, Radiation Protection and Dosimetry: An Introduction to
Health
Physics. Springer; 1
st
edition (2010).

Reference: K. Arshak and O. Korostynska, Advanced Materials and Techniques for
Radiation
Dosimetry. Artech House Publishers; 1
st
edition (2006)

1. Define and explain radiation exposure and its units
2. Define and explain radiation absorbed dose and its units
3. Derive the relationship between exposure rate and absorbed dose
4. Solve problems to compute exposure rate and absorbed dose rate for different types
of radiation field
5. Explain the difference between Kerma and absorbed dose
6. Discuss different methods used for the measurement of exposure such as free
ionization chamber and the air wall chamber (Thimle chamber)
454

7. Solve problems to compute exposure rate using the theory outlined in the
measurement methods
8. Discuss different methods used for the measurement of absorbed dose such as
calorimetric dosimeter and film badges
9. Define and explain Bragg-Gray principle for absorbed dose measurement
10. Solve problems using Bragg-Gray principle
11. Solve problems to compute dose and dose rate for external radiation sources
12. Solve problems to compute dose and dose rate for internally deposited
radioisotopes
13. Explain and discuss gas filled detectors such as ionization chamber, proportional
counter, and Geiger detectors
14. Explain and discuss scintillation detectors
15. Explain and discuss solid state detectors
16. Explain and discuss thermo-luminescent dosimeter (TLD) for dose measurement
17. Solve problems using the theory outlined in the above detectors/dosimeters

1 Exposure for x-rays and gamma rays 1
2 Absorbed radiation dose 1
3 Different dose units 1
4 Kerma and absorbed dose 1
5 Exposure-Dose relationship 1
6 Simple dosimeter model in terms of cavity theory 1
7 Exposure measurement-Free air 1
8 Exposure measurement-Thimble Chamber 1
9 Absorbed dose measurement- Calorimetric dosimeter 1
10 Absorbed dose measurement-Calorimetric dosimeter,
Film Badges
1.5
11 Bragg-Gray theory for absorbed dose calculations 1
12 Computation of dose from external radiation sources 1.5
13 Computation of dose from internal radiation sources 1.5
14 Gas filled detectors-Ionization chamber, proportional
counter, and Geiger counter
1.5
15 Scintillation detectors 1
16 Solid state detectors 1
17 TLD and film badges 1.5

Class Schedule:


455


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
1 2 a b c e h j f d i g k a
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
3 - 3 2 - 2 - 1 - - 2 1 2 3

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Medical Imaging
II
NE 474 2 - 4
Prerequisites EE 332, NE 471
Evaluation techniques of medical images using ROC analysis, Contrast Detail curve, Rose
Model, MTF, NPS, and DQE. Medical imaging modalities based on non ionizing radiation.
Physical principles and components of Magnetic Resonance Imaging. Intrinsic and
Extrinsic parameters that affect the NMR and the MRI signal. Fundamental MRI pulse
sequences. MRI gradient and image formation. Factors that affect MR image quality.
Mathematical formulation, physical principles and components of Ultrasound Imaging.
Advance applications of X-ray Radiography; such as Mammography, Fluoroscopy, and
DSA.


Essential Physics
of Medical Imaging. Lippncott Williams & Wilkens editions; 2
nd
edition
(2002).

Reference: P. Suetens, Fundamentals of Medical Imaging. Cambridge University Press;
(2002).

456

1. Define the terms associated with Medical Imaging
2. Define the image quality parameters
3. Define and explain the key factors that affect image quality and address these
factors for the different imaging modalities taught in class
4. List, define, explain and apply medical image evaluation techniques to assess the
quality of medical images
5. Describe how the physical principles of the magnetic resonance imaging,
Mammography, and Fluoroscopy imaging modalities
6. Describe the non ionizing imaging system and break it down into its components,
for each of the imaging modalities covered (MRI, US);
7. Describe the physical principals occurring in MR pulse sequences such as spin
echo, inversion recovery, gradient recall echo pulse sequences
8. Describe the difference between NMR and MRI
9. List and describe how the image quality parameters are affected in the non-ionizing
imaging modalities
10. Describe some of the ionizing imaging system and break it down into its
components, for each of the imaging modalities covered (Mammography &
Fluoroscopy)
11. List and describe how the image quality parameters are affected in the ionizing
imaging modalities
12. Communicate information published in scientific articles related to medical
imaging
13. Communicate the physical principles behind medical technology and relevant
applications
skills.
15. Able to critically evaluate bodies of literature in the medical imaging application
16. Integrate ideas from physics into medicine
17. Educate others the role of medical imaging in personal and public life
18. Recognize and appreciate medical imaging as a broad, complex, multifaceted field
of study
19. Practice precise language in the field of medical imaging as part of professionalism
20. Read assigned materials responsibly.

1
Description & Evaluation of Medical Images (Resolution, Noise,
Contrast)
1
2
SNR, Weiner Spectra, & Modulation Transfer Function, Contrast
Detail, Rose Model, & ROC Analysis
1
3
Non-ionization Radiation Imaging Modality Magnetic Resonance
Imaging (Magnetism and the Magnetic Property of Matter,
Principles of Nuclear MR)
1.5
4
NMR: Tissue MR parameters - Spin, T1 and T2 , T2* relaxations,
FID
1.5
5
MRI: Pulse Sequences-Spin echo, Inversion Recovery, GRE,
Perfusion, & Diffusion.
1
6
MRI: MRI & Gradients: Slice, Frequency & Phase encoding, K-
space & Image Quality
1
7
Clinical Applications of Diagnostic Radiographic Imaging
(Mammography, Dedicated Equipments, Specialized X-ray Tubes,
Optimized Image Receptor Systems, X-ray Tube, Target, Tube
Port & Filtration, & Beam Quality, HVL, Collimation & Field
Alignment, X-ray Generator, AEC, Compression, Scatter
2
457

Radiation, MTF, Stereotactic Breast Biopsy, Radiation Dosimetry,
Full Field Digital Mammography, SFM vs FFDM, Computer
Aided Diagnoses, Quality Assurance and Quality Control)
8
Fluoroscopy (Image Intensifier Components & Characteristics
Brightness Gain, Conversion Factor, DQE, Contrast Ratio, FOV,
Artifacts of II, Video Camera & Resolution, Peripherals, Modes of
Operations, ABC, Image Quality, Radiation Dose, & Fluoroscopy
Suites)
2
9
Ultrasound Imaging: Physical Principles of Diagnostic Ultrasound,
Instrumentation, and Operation
1.5
10
Ultrasound Imaging: acoustic waves, wave propagation in tissue,
wave propagation, imaging and Doppler imaging, and scanning
mode
1.5

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: None.



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 2 2 1 - 2 - 1 1 1 2 2 - 2

458

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Practical
Training
NE 489 - - 4 2
Prerequisites NE 340, NE 451, NE 470, NE 371
Students of the Engineering Medical Physics Track are assigned practical clinical rotational
training in different radiological departments at hospitals to familiarize the students with
actual procedures and practices in the field of medical physics.


Textbook: AAPM Presidential Ad Hoc Committee on the Clinical Training of
Radiological
Physicists, Essentials and guidelines for hospital based medical physics
residency
training programs. (AAPM report); (1992)
459

Reference: Douglas P. Beall, Radiology Sourcebook: A Practical Guide for Reference
and
Training. Humana Press; 1
st
edition (2010).

5. Identify the role of medical physicist in realistic profession environment.
6. Apply theoretical medical physics concepts
7. Use different equipment and technologies used in the field of medical physics.
8. Practice the professional and ethical behavior toward patients, physicians, and co-
workers in the profession of medical physics.

1 Radiology clinical rotation 4
2 Nuclear Medicine clinical rotation 4
3 Radiotherapy clinical rotation 4

Class Schedule:
Oral Presentation after submitting a written training report; both evaluated by at least
2 faculty members.

Others 100%


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
3 2 - 2 - 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 -

460

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Senior Project NE 499 3 - 4
Departments Consent
Application of engineering principles to a significant nuclear or radiation design project
including team-work, written and oral communications. The project should also consider
realistic technical, economic and safety requirements. The design project progresses step-
by-step from the stages of problem definition, analysis and synthesis to design and tests.
Students will deliver a final report and an oral presentation. This design project will
involve a multi-disciplinary approach to the problem. Consultation from a
business/industrial counterpart is highly recommended.

461


Textbook: Bahattin Karagzolu, A Guide to Engineering Design Methodologies and
Technical Presentation, Department of Electrical and Computer
Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, KAU (2007).

Reference: Assessment Rubrics for BS Projects, available from the BS Project
Committee.
Nuclear Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, KAU (2007).


13. Analyze a project statement, brief, or proposal to identify the real problem and the
most relevant needs and operational constraints.
14. Identify potential costumers, their needs, and their operational constraints.
15. Collect and review related data such as technical information, regulations,
standards, and operational experiences from credible literature resources.
16. Integrate previous knowledge from mathematics, basic sciences, engineering
fundamentals and discipline related courses to address the problem.
17. Discuss all applicable realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social,
political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability.
18. Define design objectives, measures of design viability, and the evaluation criteria of
the final project, and reformulate the problem based on collected data.
19. Generate possible solutions; compare alternatives, and select one alternative based
on evaluation criteria and feasibility analysis.
20. Plan an effective design strategy and a project work plan, using standard project
planning techniques, to ensure project completion on time and within budget.
21. Implement a planned design strategy for an Experimental Design Project, if
applicable:
21.1 Identify experimental variables and parameter with ranges and desired
accuracies.
21.2 Select appropriate experimental tools such as sensors, instruments, and
software.
21.3 Explain a reliable experimental setup and experimental procedure that
solves the problem.
21.4 Explain efficient measures to deal responsibly with safety issues and
environmental hazards.
21.5 Use appropriate measurement techniques to ethically collect and record
data.
21.6 Analyze experimental data using appropriate tools such as data reduction
and statistical analysis.
21.7 Perform uncertainty analysis.
21.8 Judge, verify, and validate the experimental result by comparing them with
theory and/or previous experimental works.
22. Implement a planned design strategy for a Product-Based Design Project, if
applicable:
22.1 Identify design parameters as well as assumptions.
462

22.2 Carry out initial design calculations using modern engineering tools.
22.3 Use modern engineering tools to estimate the performance parameters of the
initial design.
22.4 Use constraint analysis and trade-off studies of the design parameters to
refine the initial design and obtain a final optimized design.
22.5 Evaluate the project related environmental, social, health and safety issues,
as well as hazards anticipated by the project.
22.6 Evaluate project success in satisfying customers needs, design criteria, and
operational constraints.
23. Communicate design details and express thoughts clearly and concisely, both orally
and in writing, using necessary supporting material, to achieve desired
understanding and impact.
24. Demonstrate ability to achieve project objectives using independent, well
organized, and regularly reported multidisciplinary team management techniques
that integrate, evaluate, and improve different skills of team members

1 Project selection and team formation 1
2 Problem Definition 2
3 Literature review and data collection 3
4
Problem formulation:
Knowledge integration
Operational and realistic constraints
Design objectives
Evaluation criteria
3
5 Design options and initial layout 2
6 Work plan and budgeting 1
7 Progress report and oral presentation 1
8 Implementation phase 7
9 Design refinement 3
10 Final report and oral presentation 3

Course Schedule:
2 general audience oral presentations of 30 minutes each



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
463

Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
3 3 3 - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

DescriptionofDepartmentalElectiveCourses

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
464

Fundamentals of
Nuclear Engineering
Calculations
NE 300 3 - - 3
Prerequisites MATH 204, MATH 205
Ordinary differential equations of the first and second order applicable to nuclear
engineering calculations. Power series solutions of differential equations. Laplace
transformations. Use of Laplace transformations to solve ordinary differential equations.
Fourier series and integrals. Partial differential equations and divergence theorem of Gauss.
Legendre polynomials and Bessel functions.

Faculties and departments requiring this course ( if any) : None

Textbook: E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics. John Wiley & Sons;
(2006).

References: S. L. Ross, Differential Equations. John Wiley & Sons; (2003).

C. R. Wylie and L. C. Barratt, Advanced Engineering Mathematics.
McGraw Hill;
6
th
edition (1995).

Course Learning Objectives : By completion of this course, the students should be
able to :

1. Solve ordinary differential equations of first and second order
2. Generate first and second order differential equations from nuclear engineering
problems
3. Apply his knowledge to solve these differential equations
4. Solve differential equations by power series method and Laplace transform
5. Apply his knowledge with power series method to solve Legendre differential
equation
and hence to deduce Legendre polynomials
6. Apply method of Forbenius to solve Bessel differential equation and hence to
derive
Bessels function
7. Understand periodic function, Fourier series and Fourier coefficients
8. Apply his information and skills to obtain Fourier series of a function f(x) for
different
Intervals
9. Convert surface integral to volume integral and vice-versa
10. Use the method of separation of variables to find solution of a partial differential
equation
relating to nuclear engineering problem

465

1 Special Functions 1
1 Solutions of first order differential equations 1
1 Applications of first order differential equations 1
2 Solutions of second order & higher order differential
equations
1
1 Applications of second order differential equations 1
1 Power series solution of differential equations 1
2 Solution of Bessel differential equation and Bessel
function
1
1 Solution of Legendre equation and Legendre
polynomials
1
1 Solution of differential eqs. Using Laplace transform 1
1 Fourier Series 1
1 Applications of Partial differential equations 1
1 Gausss Divergence Theorem 1

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Three 50 min. sessions per week.

Other 0%


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
f i a b c k h j f e i g k a
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 3 - - 2 - - 2 - 2 - 3

466

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Non-ionizing
Radiations
NE 350 3 - -
Physics of wave motion, Health effects of sound and ultrasound, Response spectra for
physical agents, Electric current and electrocution, Static and low frequency electric and
magnetic fields, Radiofrequency and microwave fields, Radiometric and photometric
units for optical measurements, Ocular Effects of Visible Light, Lasers and laser safety,
Health effects of ultraviolet radiation.

Textbook: R. T. Hitchcock, R. M. Patterson, Radiofrequency and ELF
Electromagnetic
Energies: A Handbook for Health Professionals. Van Nostrand Reinhold;
(1995).

References: H. Cember and T. Johnson, Introduction to Health Physics. Mc
Graw Hill; 4
th
edition (2009)

P. Polk and E. Postow, eds. Handbook of Biological Effects of
Electromagnetic
Fields. CRC; 2
nd
edition (1996).

1. Show knowledge of the different physical agents: noise, ultrasound, electric current,
low frequency electric and magnetic fields, radiofrequency/microwave fields,
visible light, lasers and ultraviolet radiation.
2. Analyze the factors determining absorption rates of electromagnetic radiation by the
human body
3. Describe the biological effects of the non ionizing radiation on human beings
4. Evaluate physical and biological hazards of non ionizing radiation on humans
5. Determine the applicable standards for UV light, lasers, radio frequency radiation
and static magnetic and electric fields
6. Apply wherever possible, common physical and biological concepts to the
treatment of the various physical agents.
7. Recommend basic hazard controls including safe work practices, training

1 Show knowledge of the different physical agents: noise,
ultrasound, electric current, low frequency electric and
magnetic fields, radiofrequency/microwave fields,
3
467

visible light, lasers and ultraviolet radiation.
2 Analyze the factors determining absorption rates of
electromagnetic radiation by the human body

2
3 Describe the biological effects of the non ionizing
radiation on human beings
2
4 Evaluate physical and biological hazards of non
ionizing radiation on humans
2
5 Determine the applicable standards for UV light, lasers,
radio frequency radiation and static magnetic fields
2
6 Apply wherever possible, common physical and
biological concepts to the treatment of the various
physical agents.
2
7 Recommend basic hazard controls including safe work
practices, training
2

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: One 1.0 hour session per week.

Other 70 %


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 - 1 - -
-
- 2 - 1 - 1 - 1

468

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Introduction to
Non Destructive
Testing and Visual
Inspection

NE 361
3 1 - 3
Prerequisites ChE 210
NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING: Importance of NDT, Non-destructive testing:
applications and tendencies, Defects detection principles, Various techniques of NDT: Liquid
penetrant, Magnetic leakage, Eddy Currents, Radiography, Ultrasounds, Case studies for
various industrial applications
VISUAL INSPECTION: Visual inspection principles, Visual inspection of welded
components, Testing techniques, Inspection characteristics, Case studies (welding, casting,
..), Standards.


Textbook: X. E. Gros, Applications of NDT Data Fusion. Springer; 1
st
edition (2001).

Reference: P. E. Mix von John, Introduction to Non destructive Testing: A Training
Guide.
Wiley & Sons; (2005).


1. understand the application of nondestructive techniques in general
2. know the advantages and the limits non destructive techniques
3. Importance of standards, technical specifications, and test procedures
4. test some important industrial components such as welded and cast
samples by visual inspection
5. record the test results
6. take a decision: acceptance or rejection by evaluating the test results
according to the related standards (ASME, EN, etc.)

1 Importance of NDT, Non-destructive testing:
applications and tendencies,
1
2 Defects detection principles, Various
techniques of NDT, Optical processes,
processes use,
1
3 Liquid penetrant, Magnetic leak flow processes, 1
4 Eddy Currents, Ultrasounds 1
5 Radiography, 1
469

6 VISUAL INSPECTION: Visual inspection
principles, Welding processes, Welded assemblies'
quality
1
7 The testing techniques, Inspection characteristics, The
welding main processes, Standards application.
1

Course Schedule:
lab: one 3.0 hours session per week


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 - 1 2 1 1

470

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Technology of
Radiation
Equipments
NE 452 - -
Production and characteristics of x-rays, diagnostic radiology, quality of an image, special
radiographic techniques in diagnostic radiography. High energy machines in medical
applications: linear accelerators, cyclotrons, neutron generators and betatrons.


Textbook: W. Huda, Review of Radiologic Physics. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 1
st

edition
(1995).

Reference: J. T. Bushberg, J. Seibert, E. Leidholdt and J. Boone, The Essential Physics
of
Medical Imaging. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2
nd
edition (2001).

1. Describe the production of X-rays
2. Identify the function of each component in X-ray machine.
3. Explain the characteristics of X-rays.
4. Explain the interactions of X-rays with matter
5. Demonstrate the formation of image on the photographic plate.
6. Define the quality of image.
7. Acquire the knowledge of CT imaging system.
8. Explain the image reconstruction in CT system.
9. Acquire the knowledge of MRI system.
10. Define the principle of Cyclotron Betatron.
11. Describe the principle of Linacs and Co-60 teletherapy machine
12. Acquire the knowledge of applications of these machines for radiation therapy

471

1 Production of X-rays 1
2 X-rays machine 1
3 Characteristics of X-ray 1
4 Production of Laser and ultrasound 1
5 Interaction of X-rays with matter/tissue 1
6 Image formation on photographic plate 1
7 Image quality 1
8 CT imaging system 1
9 Image reconstruction in CT system 1
10 Image formation in MRI system 1
11 Principle of cyclotron and Betatron for particle
acceleration
1
12 Principle of Medical Linacs 1
13 Co-60 teletherapy machines 1
14 Radiation therapy using these machines 1

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 2 1 1 - 2 - 1 2 1 2 3 1 1

472

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Low Level
Radioactive
Waste
Management
NE 457 - - 3
Radioactive waste classification, Radiation toxicity of Radiation sources, Medical
radioactive waste, industrial Radioactive waste. Sorting. Storage and transportation of
radioactive waste. Radiation protection in treatment of radioactive waste.

Textbook: J. H. Saling and A. W. Fentiman, Radioactive Waste Management. Taylor
and
Francis Editions; 2
nd
edition (2001).

Reference: A. Rahman, Decommissioning and Radioactive Waste Management.
Whittles Publishing; 1
st
edition (2008).


1. Define roles and responsibilities of individuals as they pertain to the low level
waste certification program
2. Show an understanding of the radioprotection associated with radioactive waste and
decommissioning
3. Describe the proper disposal of protective clothing used in hospitals
4. Show ways to reduce the amount of low radioactive waste level
5. Recognize approved radioactive waste containers
6. Show an understanding of the various rules governing waste management.
7. Present methods to use to ensure radiation exposure is maintained As Low As
Reasonably Achievable or ALARA.
8. Identify the requirements that must be met before a waste container can be picked
up.
9. Identify situations/circumstances requiring emergency response.

473

NO Topic Covered During Class: Duration
in Weeks
1 Define roles and responsibilities of individuals as they
pertain to the low level waste certification program
2
2 Show an understanding of the radioprotection associated
with radioactive waste and decommissioning
2
3 Describe the proper disposal of protective clothing used
in hospitals
2
4 Show ways to reduce the amount of low radioactive
waste level
2
5 Recognize approved radioactive waste containers 1
6 Show an understanding of the various rules governing
waste management
2
7 Present methods to use to ensure radiation exposure is
maintained As Low As Reasonably Achievable or
ALARA
2
8 Identify the requirements that must be met before a
waste container can be picked up
1
9 Identify situations/circumstances requiring emergency
response
2

Class Schedule:

Other 70 %

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 - - - -
-
2 - 2 1 - 1 - -

474

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Code/No Th. Pr. Tr. Credit
Radioisotopes
Applications II
NE 460 - -
Advanced applications of radioisotopes in medicine, agriculture and industry. Irradiation
technology, radiography with neutrons, x-ray fluorescence. Sterilization of medical
equipment, food irradiation, irradiation of polymers to improve their characteristics.


Textbook: J. R. Woods and A. K. Pikaev, Applied Radiation Chemistry: Radiation
Processing. John Wiley & Sons; (1994).

References: R. L. Murry, Nuclear Energy. Butterworth-Heinemann; (2001).

G. Foldiak, Industrial Applications of Radioisotopes. Elsevier; (1996).


1. Understand different characteristics of radiation sources used in this course
2. Define polymerization, curing and grafting
3. Understand polymer modification by radiation
4. Discuss the use of different radiation sources for the production of beneficial changes
in materials and the use of modified products in different fields
5. Discuss the treatment of foodstuffs by ionizing radiation
6. Discuss the radiation sterilization of medical products
7. Discuss the radiation treatment of different types of industrial and municipal wastes
8. Discuss the beneficial changes in agriculture products through mutation caused by
radiation
9. Discuss SIT for control of insect and mosquito
10. Discuss X-ray fluorescence spectrometry and its use for measuring trace amounts of
some materials
11. Differentiate between x-ray and neutron radiography
475

12. Discuss the use of different types of radionuclides for medical diagnosis and therapy

1&2 Irradiation technology, Radiography with neutrons, X-
ray fluorescence
50 min. x3
3&4 Irradiation of polymers to improve their characteristics 50 min. x3
5&6 Food irradiation 50 min. x 3
7&8 Sterilization of medical products 50 min. x 3
9 Applications in agriculture 50 min. x3
10 Medical applications 50 min. x3
11 Applications of radioisotopes in hydrology 50 min. x3
12&13 Other applications 50 min. x 3

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Three 50 minutes sessions per week

Other 0%


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1

476

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Eddy Current
Testing and
Magnetic Particle
Testing
NE 461 3 1 - 3
Importance of NDT, Manufacturing processes and typical defects, Electro-magnetic theory
EDDY CURRENT TESTING: Fundamental principles of Eddy current testing,
Equipments and accessories, Applications and limitations, Minimum requirements for
testing, Standards, Case studies
MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING: Fundamental principles of magnetic particle testing,
Techniques, Equipments and accessories, Applications and limitations, Minimum
requirements for testing, Standards, Case studies.


st
edition (2001).

Guide.


1. understand the electricity theory
2. test some industrial components by Eddy current method (pipe
industry, aeronautic industry, etc)
3. know the advantages and the limits of eddy current technique
5. take a decision: acceptance or rejection of the tested components by
evaluating the results according to the related standards (ASME, EN,
etc.)
6. understand the theory of magnetism
7. test some industrial components by magnetic particle method (welded,
cast, heat treated, and forged samples)
8. know the advantages and the limits of this technique
477

etc.)

1 EDDY CURRENTS: Importance of NDT, Sciences of
material,

2
2 manufacturing processes and defects 1
3 Fundamental principles, Eddy currents theory, 2
4 Equipments and testing procedures by Eddy currents,

1
5 The E.C testing applications, Limits of testing by Eddy
currents, Minimum equipment recommended for
practical.

1
6 Magnetic Particules: Materials, manufacturing and
defects,
1
7 Physical principle, Method and technique of testing, 1
8 Equipments and accessories, Applications, Limit of the
method,
1
9 Materials and equipment recommended for the
practice.
1

Course Schedule:


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 2

478

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Ultrasonic Testing
And Liquid
Penetrant Testing

NE 462 3 1 - 3
ULTRASONIC TESTING: Importance of NDT, Fundamental principles, Theory of
ultrasounds (physical principles), Ultrasonic field characteristics, Sound velocity, Attenuation
of ultrasounds, Testing techniques, Equipments, Composition and functioning of an
ultrasonic instrument, Equipments characteristics, Signal visualization, Calibration and
operating methods, Controlling the properties of the transducers, Distance Amplitude
Correction (DAC) method, Determining the location of defects, Defects sizing methods,
Typical defects in the industrial components, Limits of using UT, Minimum equipment
recommended, Standards and test instructions, Case studies (welding, casting, rolling).
LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING: Physical principles, Testing procedure, Accessories
and testing equipments, Application fields and limits of the method, Practical and typical
class of accessories, Calibration blocks, Case studies (welding, casting, forging).


st
edition (2001).

Guide.


Ultrasonic part of the course:
1. understand the interaction between the acoustical waves and the matter
2. calibrate the ultrasonic equipment, and then, to test some important
industrial components such as welded, cast, forged, or rolled samples
479

3. know the advantages and the limits of ultrasonic technique
5. take a decision: acceptance or rejection by evaluating the test results
according to the related standards (ASME, EN, etc.)

Liquid penetrant part of the course:
6. test industrial components such as welded, cast, forged, or rolled
samples by liquid penetrant method
7. know the advantages and the limits of liquid penetrant technique
etc.)

Weeks
1 Importance of NDT, Fundamental principles 1
2 Theory of ultrasounds (physical principles), Ultrasonic
field characteristics,
2
3 Attenuation of ultrasounds, Testing Techniques methods, 1
4 Equipments, calibration and operating methods, Composition
and functioning of an ultrasonic instrument, Equipments
characteristics,
1
5 Signal visualization, Equipments calibration, Transducers
check,
2
6 Distance Amplitude Correction (DAC), 1
7 Defects location, Defects sizing methods, 1
8 Testing applications by UT, Limits of using UT, 1
9 Defects types, 2
10 Minimum equipment recommended, 1
11 Instructions and procedures 1
12 LIQUID PENETRANTS : Physical principles, Testing
procedure, Testing procedure, Accessories and testing
equipments
1
13 The application fields, Limits of the method, Practical and
typical class of accessories, Calibration blocks.
1

Course Schedule:

480


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 2

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Industrial
Radiography
NE 463 3 1 3
Prerequisites: NE 361
Importance of NDT, Physical principles of radiation and radiography (X-rays, Gamma rays),
Equipments, Films, Film development: manual, automatic , Film parameters , Filters and
screens: principle and their influences, Image quality , Other accessories (markers,
densitometer, illuminator), Exposure techniques: geometrical configurations, Exposure time,
Interpretation and test report , Applications and limitations, Safety and radiation protection,
Case studies from different industrial applications.


st
edition (2001).

Guide.


1. understand the interaction between the electromagnetic waves and the
matter
2. to test some important industrial components (welded and cast
samples) by X and Gamma rays
3. know the advantages and the limits of this technique
481

5. take a decision: acceptance or rejection by evaluating the radiographic
films according to the related standards (ASME, ASTM, EN, etc.)

1 Importance of NDT, Physical principles of radiation
and radiography (X-rays, Gamma rays),
2
2 Equipments (X-ray, Isotopes such as Ir192,
Se75, Co60)
1
3 Films, Film development: manual, automatic , 1
4 Film parameters, Filters and screens: principle and
their influences, Images quality, Other accessories
(Markers, Densitometer, Illuminator),

1
5 Exposure techniques: geometrical configurations, 1
6 Exposure time, 1
7 Interpretation and testing report, 1
8 Applications, Limitations, 1
9 Safety and radiation protection (protection against
radiation),
1

Course Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 2

482

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radioanalytical
Techniques
NE 464 - -
Theory of Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (AAS) and its instrumentation. Principles of
atomization and background correction, calibration procedures and their applications.
Theory of X-ray Fluorescence (XRF) as an analytical tool. Qualitative and quantitative
analyses, computer applications in quantitative spectral analysis and their applications.
General principles of Neutron Activation Analysis (NAA). Treatment of experimental data,
use of some available computer software.


Textbook: E. Berman, Toxic Metals and their Analysis. Heyden & Sons; (2006).

References: S. J. Haswell, Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. Elsevier; (2001).

B. L. Carson and J. L. McCann, Toxicology and Biological Monitoring
Of Metals in Humans. Lewis Publishers Inc.; (1999).

1. Explain the theory of Atomic Absorption Spectrometry ( AAS)
2. Define and describe atomization, background correction and calibration of AAS
483

3. Discuss the applications of AAS for the measurement of trace elements in
foodstuffs, biological samples
4. Discuss the theory of X-ray fluorescence ( XRF)
5. Apply the idea of XRF for the determination of trace elements
6. Explain the principle of Neutron Activation Analysis (NAA)
7. Apply the idea of NAA for the estimation of elemental concentrations
in foodstuffs, biological samples etc.
8. Apply your idea of error calculation for the treatment of experimental data
9. Apply your computer skills for use of some available computer software.

1 Theory of Atomic Absorption Spectrometry( AAS) 1
2 Applications of AAS 1
3 Theory of X-ray Fluorescence ( XRF ) 1
4 Applications of XRF 1
5 Theory of Neutron Activation Analysis ( NAA) 1
6 Applications of NAA 1
7 Error calculations & analysis of experimental data 1
8 Applications of some available computer software 1

Class Schedule:
Lectures: Three 45 min. sessions per week.

Other 0%


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
f i a b c e h j f d i g k A
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 2 1 2 - - 1 - 1 2 1 - 1

484

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radiochemistry NE 467 - - 3
Theory and kinetics of radioactive decay, Chemical phenomenon in reactions and reactors,
Chemical properties of radioactive elements, Chemical separation methods, Chemical
aspect of nuclear energy, Isotope exchanges and radioactive tracer techniques in chemical
applications, Preparation and use of some radiopharmaceuticals.


Textbook: G. Choppin, J. Rydberg and J-O Liljenzin. Radiochemistry and Nuclear
Chemistry. Butterworth-Heinemann; 3
rd
edition (2001).

Reference: W. D. Ehmann and D. E. Vance, Radiochemistry and Nuclear Methods of
Analysis (Chemical Analysis: A Series of Monographs on Analytical
Chemistry and its Applications). Wiley-Interscience; (1993).


1. Show an understanding of the theory and kinetics of radioactive decay
2. Show an understanding of the theory and phenomena of nuclear reactions
3. Show an understanding of the nature and energetics of radioactivity,
4. Show an understanding of the chemical properties of radioactive elements
485

5. Show an understanding of the use of radioactive elements in the study of some
biological and physical phenomena
6. Show an understanding of the radioactive tracer techniques in chemical applications
7. Know how Radiopharmaceuticals are used in routine use
B001HPMWTE

1 Theory and kinetics of radioactive decay 2
2 Chemical phenomenon in reactions and reactors 2
3 Chemical properties of radioactive elements 2
4 Chemical separation methods 2
5 Isotope exchanges 2
6 radioactive tracer techniques in chemical applications 2
7 Preparation and use of some radiopharmaceuticals 2

Class Schedule:

Other 80 %

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 - 2 1 -
-
- 1 - 1 - 1 - 2

486

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Radiotherapy II NE 475 3 0 3 3
Tumor treatment with high energy X-ray and with high energy electron beam from linear
accelerators, and with neutron therapy through neutron capture, ionizing radiation
treatment of tumor by means of directed beam, treatment by radioactive sealed and
unsealed sources, measurement of dose, treatment planning.


Textbook: F. M. Khan, The Physics of Radiotherapy. Lippncott Williams &
Wilkens. 3
rd

edition; (2003)

References: W. R. Hendee, G. S. Ibbott, and I. G. Hendee, Radiation Therapy
Physics. Wiley-
Liss; 3
rd
edition (2004).

E.B. Podgorzak, Radiation Oncology Physics A Handbook for
Teachers and
Students. IAEA; (2005).
487


1. Describe a external beam radiation therapy system and break down into its main
components, for each of the radiation therapy machines covered (Co-60, Linac,
and Linac)
2. Describe a interall beam radiation therapy system and break down into its main
components, for each of the radiation therapy machines covered (Breakytherapy)
3. Understand and Describe Radiation Treatment Plannning
4. Remember the terms associated with Radiotherapy
5. Remember the dose calculation parameters
6. Define and explain the key factors that affect radiotherapy treatment
7. Understand published scientific articles that relate to radiotherapy and be able to
communicate their understanding in a professional manner.
8. Learn to communicate the physical principles behind radiotherapy technology and
skills.
10. Able to critically evaluate bodies of literature in radiotherapy applications
11. Integrate ideas from physics and engineering into medicine
12. See themselves as students who are much more educated about the physics of
radiotherapy
13. Able to inform and educate others about the role of radiotherapy in personal and
public life
14. Be excited about the physics of radiotherapy as a broad, complex, multifaceted
field of study
15. Value the importance of precise language used in the field of radiotherapy as part
of professionalism

Weeks
1 Classical radiation therapy
Dose Distribution and scatter analysis
1
2 A system of dosimetric calculations
Treatment Planning I: Isodose distributions
1
3 Treatment Planning II: Patient Data corrections and setup
Treatment Planning III: Field shaping , skin dose, and
field separation
2
4 Electron Beam Therapy 1
5 Brachytherapy 1
6 Radiation Projection
Quality Assurance
Total Body Irradiation
1
7 Modern Radiation Therapy
Three-dimentional conformal radiation therapy
1
8 Intensity-modulated radiation therapy 1
488

9 Stereotactic Radiosurgery 1
10 High dose Rate Brachytherapy 1
11 Protstate Implants 1
12 Intravascular Brachytherapy 1
13 Intravascular Brachytherapy 1

Class Schedule:
Lecture: three one hour session per week
Tutorials: three hours session per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Knowledg
e
Cognitive Skills
Interpersona
l Skills And
Responsibilit
y
Communicatio
n, IT, and
Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
2 2 3 1 - 1 - 2 2 3 2 2 - 3

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Quality
Assurance Of
Medical
Equipments
NE 478 - - 3
Prerequisites NE 340, NE370, NE 451
Quality assurance of radiation protection in medical centers. Quality control and testing
techniques for all types of diagnostic x-ray machine and nuclear medicine imaging
equipment.


Textbook: C. J. Martin and D. G. Sutton, Practical Radiation Protection in
Healthcare.
Oxford University Press; (2002).

489

Reference: S. C. Bushong, Radiation Science for Technologists. Elsevier-Mosby;
(2008).


1. Describe general and mobile x-ray machines and parameters.
2. Describe Mammography and Fluoroscopy machines and parameters.
3. Describe CT Machines and parameters.
4. Define resolution, contrast, surface dose, HVL. Focal spot size.
5. Define accuracy, consistency, reproducibility in QC measurements
6. Describe equipment used for QC of diagnosis x ray equipments
7. Measure accuracy, consistency, reproducibility in QC of x-ray machines
8. Measure Entrance Surface Dose and Dose-Area Products
9. Calculate errors in QC measurements.
10. Measure leakage radiation, scattered radiation and primary radiation
11. Describe radiation safety aspects in medical centers

1 General properties of x-ray machines 2
2 Mammography and Fluoroscopy machines and
parameters
1
3 CT Machines and parameters 1
4 Quality control parameters in diagnostic x-ray
machines
3
5 x-ray machine radiation measurements 1
6 Workers and patient safety aspects in diagnostic x-ray
machines rooms
2
7 Patient dose measurements 1
8 Equipment check 1
9 Nuclear medicine QC 2

Class Schedule:
Tutorials: Three 2.0 hours sessions per week



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
1 3 2 3 1 1 1 - 3 2 1 1 3 2
490

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Nuclear Power
Planning & Project
Implementation
NE 422 - - 3
Methods of long-range forecasting of power demand, calculations of cost of generation of
electricity from nuclear and conventional power plants, selection of an optimum system
expansion program, preparation of feasibility studies, bid documents and evaluation of
bids, type of contracts, project management and use of available nuclear power planning
computer codes.


). 2007 ( ; IAEA . Consideration to Lunch a Nuclear Power Program : Textbook
491

Reference: Harry Henderson, Nuclear Power: A Reference Handbook. ABC-CLIO
edition;
(2000).


1. Discuss management organization
2. Review feasibility studies
3. Discuss sitting of power plants
4. Discuss human resources development,
5. Discuss societal problems associated with the choice of nuclear power energy over
other sources of energy
6. Describe emergency plans

1 Methods of long-range forecasting of power demand 2
2 Calculations of cost of generation of electricity
from nuclear and conventional power plants
2
3 Selection of an optimum system expansion program 2
4 type of contracts 2
5 Preparation of feasibility studies, bid documents and
evaluation of bids
3
6
Project management and use of available nuclear
power planning computer codes.
2

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
492

Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 3 1 3 2 3 3
2
3 3 - 3 1 1

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Advanced Medical
Imaging
NE 477 - - 3
Image processing, image enhancement, linear and nonlinear filters, segmentation
techniques, rigid and affine registration techniques, 3D visualization techniques: surface
and volume rendering, morphometric quantitative measurements from medical image data;
surface area, volume, and shape index. image processing algorithms, programs in Matlab
that implement signal processing methods and estimators used in medical imaging.

493

Essential Physics
of Medical Imaging. Lippncott Williams & Wilkens Editions; 2
nd
edition
(2002).

Reference: P. Suetens, Fundamentals of Medical Imaging. Cambridge University Press;
(2002).

1. Explain the signal processing involved in making a B-mode ultrasound image.
2. Explain signal processing methods for estimating blood velocity using ultrasound.
3. Explain back-projection algorithms used in CT, MR, and PET scanners.
4. Write programs in Matlab that implement signal processing methods and estimators
used in medical imaging.
5. Give a quantitative evaluation of signal and image processing algorithms in terms
of performance and accuracy.
6. Write a scientific report explaining a signal processing algorithm implementation
made in Matlab and quantifying its performance.

1 Image processing, image enhancement 2
2 linear and nonlinear filters 1
3 segmentation techniques 1
4 rigid and affine registration techniques 1
5 x-ray machine radiation measurements 1
6 3D visualization techniques 3
7 Write programs in Matlab that implement signal
processing methods and estimators used in medical
imaging.
3

Class Schedule:


494

NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 3 3 - 3 - 1 - 1 - 3 2 3

Hours
Course Title
English Code
/No
Arabic
Thermo Nuclear
Fusion Technology
NE 424 - - 3
Prerequisites NE 302, MEP 261
Fusion requirements, fundamentals of plasmas at thermonuclear burning. Plasma
confinement and heating, materials, reactor control, plant construction and maintenance.
Dynamics, stability, and control. Fusion fuel production. Applications in tokamaks.
Fusion-fission hybrid reactor, radiation sources in fusion plants and safety of nuclear
fusion.
495


Stefan . Research Review : Thermonuclear Fusion Laser , Stefan . A . V : Textbook
University Press; (2008).

Diagnosis of Electron , Dantona . Davoudi and G . Mo , Davoudi . Ma : Reference
Cyclotron
Heating Power Deposition on Plasma: For Controlling Thermonuclear
Fusion
Power in Tokamaks, VDM Verlag; (2010).

1. Describe and distinguish different mechanisms of wall erosion and fuel retention.
2. Explain and assess the impact of physical and chemical processes on erosion of
wall material.
3. Critically assess and motivate material choice for respective plasma-facing
components.
4. Compare and assess fuel inventory in different wall materials and assess its impact
on the fuel cycle.
5. Evaluate power loads to the wall during normal operation, disruptions and edge
localised modes.
6. Relate thermo-mechanical properties of materials (CFC, W, Be) to their response to
power loads
7. Relate wall erosion to its impact on plasma operation.
8. Explain causes for dust formation and assess the risk of such process for the reactor
operation.
9. Select methods for studies (analysis) and qualification of wall materials.
10. Apply knowledge to experiment planning and conceptual design of: diagnostic for
erosion-deposition measurement and propose the use of diagnostic for specific
experiments in a controlled fusion device; plasma-facing components for testing
under reactor conditions.

1 Fusion requirements, fundamentals of plasmas at
thermonuclear burning
2
2 Plasma confinement and heating, materials,
reactor control, plant construction and
maintenance
2
3 Dynamics, stability, and control 2
4 Fusion fuel production 2
496

5 Applications in tokamaks 2
6 Fusion-fission hybrid reactor, 2
7
Radiation sources in fusion plants and safety of
nuclear fusion.
3

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 2 1 1 - 2 2 1 2 - 3 2 2

Course Title English Code Arabic Hours
497

/No Code/No. Th. Pr. Tr. Credit
Nuclear
Electronics
NE 440 1 - 3
Conduction in solids. Semi-conductor devices, pulse amplifiers, pulse height
discriminators, digital storage and counting circuits, timing circuits, multi-channel pulse
height analysis. Data acquisition systems.


Superconducting Detectors and : Nuclear Electronics , V Polushkin : Textbook
Processing
Techniques. Wiley; 1
st
edition; (2004).

. Experimental Techniques in Nuclear and Particle Physics , Tavernier . S : Reference
Springer; 1
st
edition, (2010).


1. Demonstrate an understanding conduction in solids
2. Describe qualitatively and quantitatively the pulse amplifying process
3. Explain qualitatively and quantitatively the pulse height discriminators
4. Explain the characteristics and uses of nuclear detectors and calculate their
properties (efficiency, energy resolution, time resolution, pulse-pair resolution,
dead-time).
5. Be familiar with the multi-channel analyzer

1 Conduction in solids 2
2 Semi-conductor devices 1
3 Pulse amplifiers, pulse height discriminators 2
4 Digital storage and counting circuits 2
5 Timing circuits 2
6 Multi-channel pulse height analysis 2
7
Data acquisition systems.
3

Class Schedule:


498


NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- - 2 3 1 - - - - 1 - 3 2 2

499

Hours
Course Title
English
Code /No
Arabic
Radiation
Emergency
Planning
NE 458 2 - 3
Plans and simulations of a real emergency case, spilling of open sources, losing
radioactive sources, safety of sources during fire, spreading of radioactive sources, use
and calibration of radiation protection related equipment. Visits to radiation facilities and
reviewing their radiation protection rules and regulations and emergency plans. Calculation
and assessment of doses following an accident, dealing with workers and public in
emergency, reasonability of the workers in emergency, treating highly exposed people,
emergency records.


A Guide to Preparation : Radiation Threats and Your Safety , Ansari . A : Textbook
and
Response for Professionals and Community. Chapman and Hall/CRC; 1
st

edition, (2009).

Handbook of Management of Radiation Protection Miller . Kenneth L : Reference
Programs. CRC Science; 2
nd
edition, (1992).


1. Recognize the types of emergencies and disasters that can impact nuclear facilities
2. Understand the phases of emergency management
3. Classify emergency levels (unusual event, alert, site area emergency, general
emergency)
4. Review the purpose of the Incident Command System
5. Describe key tasks to any evacuation
6. Apply the protective actions to minimize the public, livestock and farm exposures
7. Use and calibrate radiation protection related equipment
8. Calculate and assess of doses following an accident.

1 Types of emergencies and disasters that can impact
nuclear facilities
2
2 Phases of emergency management 1
3 Emergency levels 2
4 key tasks to any evacuation 1
500

5 Protective actions to minimize the public, livestock
and farm exposures
2
6 Calculation and assessment of doses following an
accident
3
7 Use and calibration radiation protection related
equipment
2

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 3 2 - 3 - 1 1 - 1 - 3 - -

501

Hours
Course Title
English
Code /No
Arabic
Nuclear Reactor
Safety
NE 423 - - 3
Safety philosophies and safety criteria, design criteria and regulations, deterministic and
probabilistic models, risk assessment, reactor accidents, engineering safety features, release
and dispersal of radioactive materials and radiological consequences, reactor licensing.


; Woodhead Publishing Ltd . Nuclear Reactor Safety Systems , Cacuci . G . D : Textbook
(2011).

Technology and : Sustainable and Safe Nuclear Fission Energy , Keler . G : Reference
Safety of Fast and Thermal Nuclear Reactors (Power Systems). Springer;
1
st

Edition, (2011).


1. Perform safety calculations in support of the preparation of an abbreviated Safety
Analysis Report for an advanced reactor.
2. Develop and quantify simplified fault and event trees for an advanced reactor.
3. Prepare a seismic analysis for a nuclear power reactor.
4. Prepare an abbreviated Safety Analysis Report for an advanced reactor.
5. Interpret the Nuclear Regulatory Commissions requirements and policy statements
for an advanced reactor system.
6. Make a formal presentation on the results of their analyses to a mock safety
review board.
7. Demonstrate the strengths and weaknesses in an advanced reactor design.

Weeks
1 Safety philosophies and safety criteria 2
2 Deterministic and probabilistic models, risk
assessment
2
3 Reactor accidents 2
4 Engineering safety features 2
5 Release and dispersal of radioactive materials and 2
502

radiological consequences
6 Calculation and assessment of doses following an accident 3
7
Reactor licensing
2

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 3 1 - - 1 2 1 2 1 - 3 - 1

503

Hours
Course Title
English
Code /No
Arabic
Nuclear Reactor
Design
NE 427 - - 3
Specifications of the principal parameters in reactor design (economic analysis to
determine capital and operating costs, fuel management and fuel cycle optimization).
Selection of fuel and cladding. Thermal Hydraulics design (convective and/or boiling heat
transfer at fuel element surface, pressure drops, heat exchanger calculations,
thermodynamic cycle efficiency, steam turbine reheat and regeneration, preheating and
inlet sub-cooling). Use of computer codes to solve realistic design problems involving,
criticality, fuel management, thermal hydraulics and shielding. Design and subsequent
optimization of an entire system.


Reactor : 2 . Vol : Engineering Handbook of Nuclear , Cacuci . G . D : Textbook
Design.
Springer; 1
st
edition, (2010).

: Conceptual Design of a Fluidized Bed Nuclear Reactor , Agung . A : Reference
Statics,
Dynamics and Safety-related Aspects. IOS Press; (2007).


1. Demonstrate competence in neutronic aspects of nuclear reactor design
2. Understand both qualitatively and quantitatively neutron transport in practical
nuclear reactor systems
3. Solve the one-speed neutron diffusion equation for a variety of situations;
4. Analyze nuclear reactor fuel and core steady-state thermal performance;
5. Couple the reactor neutronics to the core thermal-hydraulics in a design
environment.
6. Understand the nuclear power plant systems, licensing, design, operation &
maintenance, safety, and security
7. Perform a general design and nuclear safety analysis for a simple reactor system

504

1 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 2
2 Reactor Heat Removal 3
3 Radiation Protection and Shielding 2
4 Nuclear Fuel Cycle 2
5 Neutron Diffusion and Moderation 2
6 Materials: selection of fuel and cladding, corrosion 2
7 Pressure Vessel: stress calculations, materials
selection/thicknesses
2
8 Safety: temperature and void coefficients, emergency
cooling, hazards considerations
2
9 Nuclear Power Plant Licensing 2

Class Schedule:



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 - - - 3 1 2

505

Hours
Course Title
English
Code /No
Arabic
Brachytherapy NE 479 2 - 3
Physics and dose calculation, introduction to radiobiology, use of radiation sources in
radiotherapy, preparation of sources and their applications, brachytherapy planning
technique: reconstruction, points and axes, positioning, normalization, prescription,
optimization techniques including geometric, volumetric and inverse, plan evaluation and
outputs, principles of treatment: LDR, HDR, PDR cervix, UTM; prostate HDR, permanent
seeds; breast; X- ray, CT, MRI imaging and target definition.


Textbook: F. M. Khan, The Physics of Radiation Therapy, Williams & Wilkins
(2009).

Reference: G. Bentel, Radiation Therapy Planning. McGraw-Hill Professional; 2
nd

edition
(1995).

1 Physics and dose calculation 2
2 Introduction to radiobiology 3
3 Use of radiation sources in radiotherapy 2
4 Preparation of sources and their applications in
brachytherapy techniques
3
5 Principles of treatment 3
6 Optimization techniques 2

Class Schedule:
Practicals: Two 1.0 hours sessions per week

506



NCAAA Domains of
Learning
Interpersonal
Skills and
Responsibility
Communication,
IT, and Numerical
Skills
ABET Program
Outcomes
Highest Attainable
Level of Learning
- 3 - 1 1 - - 1 1 2 - 3 - -

507

DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DESIGN
508

INTRODUCTION
The Mechanical Engineering Department was established in the year (1395 H / 1975) to
satisfy the needs of the development plans in the Kingdom .Production Engineering was a
branch of specialization in the Department.
The university council in (1402 H / 1982), rearranged Department of Mechanical
Engineering into three Departments; Production Engineering and Mechanical Systems
Design, Thermal Engineering and Desalination and Aeronautical Engineering.

The specialization of the Department of Production Engineering and Mechanical Systems
Design encompasses wide fields of Mechanical Engineering activities. These include
design, manufacturing and control of mechanical systems, as well as their subsystems and
components. In addition to teaching, the Department is naturally engaged in research and
development works in these areas. The Department has three main scientific fields:
Machine Design,
Manufacturing Engineering, and
Applied Mechanics.

The Mechanical Engineer who graduates from the Department is a potential candidate to
become one of the pillars of any design, development or manufacturing activity in the
industry and society.

The Department is involved in teaching engineering courses to both undergraduate and
graduate students. It offers a variety of opportunities for the acquisition of mental and
technical skills. These prepare the student for the exciting challenges of a mechanical
engineering career. In addition to striving to keep high standards in analytic capabilities,
the Department attaches ample importance to the hands-on training of students by
undertaking experimental work in the various areas of study.

The Department also participates in research activities that are relevant to the requirements
of the country and the region. Continuous efforts are being made to boost the cooperation
with the local industry. This is accomplished by offering consultations and organizing
seminars, courses, meetings and visits with the objective of knowledge transfer between
university and industry.
Innovation and leadership in education of mechanical and production engineering, applied
research, and community services.
To educate, train and produce highly qualified mechanical engineering personnel inspired
with ethical and Islamic values and to conduct scientific research and studies which
collectively allow for a sustainable development of the society.

Production Engineering and Mechanical Systems Design Department is
preparing its graduates to
509

Practice mechanical and production engineering in the general
areas of mechanical systems design, materials and
manufacturing.
Engage in successful careers and leadership positions in
industry, government, and academia.
Practice engineering in a responsible, professional and ethical
manner in global and societal context.
Programs Offered

The Department confers Bachelors as well as Masters Degrees in Mechanical Engineering
(Production Engineering and Mechanical Systems Design). The specialization encompasses wide
fields of mechanical engineering activities. These include design, manufacturing, control and
applied mechanics of mechanical systems, as well as their subsystems.

The Department courses offer a variety of opportunities for the acquisition of mental and technical
skills, high standards in analytical capabilities and practical experimental work. Also, the courses
address economical, ethical and social aspects of the engineering profession.

The Department actively participates in research activities, consultations, seminars, short courses
and meetings with the local industry with the objective of knowledge transfer between the
department and the industry.

The department of the Mechanical Engineering (Production Engineering and Mechanical
SystemsDesign)hasmostofthenecessaryresourcesneededtoimplementthenewplan,
however, some improvements and extra resources are needed to increase the ability of
the department to accommodate more students considering the increase in demand for
MechanicalEngineers(ProductionEngineeringandMechanicalSystemsDesigngraduates)
fortheexpandingindustriesintheKingdom.Futureplansshouldconsiderthefollowings:
24. ModernizationandupgradingofexistingmanufacturingLabs
25. ModernizationandupgradingofexistingCNCLab
26. ModernizationandupgradingofexistingMechanicsofmaterialsLab
27. ModernizationandupgradingofexistingdynamicsandcontrolLab
28. Establishmentofanewnondestructivetestinglab
29. Establishmentofanewnonconventionalmachininglab
30. Establishmentofanewcomputeraidedmanufacturinglab
31. Establishmentofanewmechatronicslab
32. Recruitinghighprofessionalstooperateandmaintainlaboratoryequipment.
33. Recruitingadditionalfacultymembersindepartmentspecializations
Students Admissions into the Department Program
The actual policy of the department is to accept, each semester, a fixed number of students;
normally between 25 and 30 with GPA not less than 3.5; from those expressing their
interest to join the department.
510

In order to qualify for a B.Sc. degree in Mechanical Engineering (Production Engineering
and Mechanical Systems Design), students must successfully complete 155 credit units
with an overall GPA of 2.75 out of 5 or better. The student has to complete 49 required
courses and two elective courses with a grade of D or better including 10 weeks of
Industrial Summer Training and a Capstone B.Sc. design project.
The Mechanical Engineering graduate (from ProductionEngineeringandMechanicalSystems
Design) represents a potential candidate to become one of the pillars of any design, development or
manufacturing activity in the industry and the society.

Graduates of the Department find good opportunities in the industrial sector to work in the
following:
Analysis and design of machinery, equipments and material handling systems.
Automatic control systems including hydraulic and pneumatic.
Production, manufacturing techniques and automations.
Testing, measurement, inspection and quality control of products.
Maintenance, failure analysis and fault diagnosis of mechanical systems.

17. Production Engineering and Mechanical Systems Design Department is referred to
by the code MENG
Key of tenth digit in the codes of MENG courses
0 Fundamentals
1 Design
2 Design
3 ProductionandManufacturing
6 AppliedMechanics
7 AppliedMechanics
8 AppliedMechanics
9 TrainingandProjects
UnitsrequiredfortheB.Sc.degreeintheProductionEngineeringandMechanicalSystemsDesign
Department
511

Summer Training 2
Total 155

Cooperative Program
Coop Program 8
Total 155

512

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
MENG 130
Basic Workshop 2 MENG 102
CE 201
Engg. Mechanics (Statics) 3 PHYS 281
MENG 204
Mechanical Engineering Drawings 3 MENG 130
ChE 210
Material Science 4 CHEM 281
MEP 261
Thermodynamics I 3 MATH 202,PHYS 281
MENG 262
Engg. Mechanics (Dynamics) 3 CE 201
MENG 270
Mechanics of Materials 3 CE 201
MEP 290
Fluid Mechanics 3 MATH 202, PHYS 281
MENG 310
Machine Elements Design 3 MENG 270
MENG 332
Manufacturing Technology 3 MENG 130, ChE 210
MEP 360
Heat Transfer 3
MEP 290, MEP 261, IE 202
MEP 361
Thermodynamics II 3 MEP 261, MEP 290
MENG 364
Machine Dynamics 3 MENG 262,MATH 205
MENG 366
System Dynamics and Control 3 MENG 262
MENG 390
Summer Training* 2 MENG 332
MENG 410
Mechanical Design 3 MENG 204,MENG 310
MENG 412
Computer Aided Design 3 MENG 410
MENG 434
Material Removal Processes 3 MENG 332
MENG 436
Metrology & Quality Control 3 MENG 434
MEP 451
Refrigeration & A/C I 3 MEP 360, MEP 361
MENG 452
Manufacture Planning & Shop Loading 3 MENG 434
MENG 470
Mechanical Vibrations 3 MATH 204,MENG 364
MENG 472
Fault Diagnosis of Mechanical Systems 2 MENG 470
MENG 499
Senior Project 4 MENG 410,MENG434
Total 71

MENG 390 the summer training, 400 hours of on-job training distributed over 10 weeks
that is included in the counting of training units.

Coop students are required to take all of the above mentioned 25 courses except MENG 390
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
MENG 400 Coop Work Program 8 MENG 332

513

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
MENG 408
Reverse Engineering
3
MENG 310
MENG 416 Material Selection in Design & Manufacturing
3
MENG 270, MENG 332
MENG 418 Machine Tool Design
3
MENG 410, MENG 434
MENG 420 Introduction to Finite Element Methods
3
MENG 204, MENG 270
MENG 422 Tribology
3
MENG 410
MENG 424 Design of Production Facilities
3
MENG 410, MENG 434
MENG 428 Special Topics in Mechanical Systems Design
3
MENG 310
MENG 446 Advanced Manufacturing Technology
3
MENG 434
MENG 448 Composite Materials
3
MENG 270, MENG 332
MENG 450 Computer Aided Manufacturing
3
MENG 204, MENG 434
MENG 454 Welding Technology
3
MENG 332
MENG 458 Special Topics in Production Engineering
3
MENG 332
MENG 468 Plasticity and Metal Forming
3
MENG 270, MENG 332
MENG 476 Mechanical System Modeling & Simulation
3
MENG 366
MENG 478 Mechanisms
3
MENG 364
MENG 480 Introduction to Robotics
3
MENG 364
MENG 482 Mechatronics
3
MENG 366
MENG 488 Special Topics in Applied Mechanics
3
MENG 364
MENG 490 Strategic Management and Leadership Skills
3
IE 201
XXX 4xx Elective Course from Faculty Depts.
3
Dept. Approval

514

A TYPICAL B.Sc. PROGRAM FOR MENG DEPARTMENT
3
rd
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MENG 130 Basic Workshop 2 ISLS 201 Islamic Culture (2) 2
CE 201 Engg. Mechanics (Statics ) 3 MENG 204
Mechanical Engineering
Drawing
3
IE 202
Design II
2 EE 251 Basic Electrical Engineering 4
MATH 205 Series &Vector Calculus 3 MENG 262 Engg. Mechanics, (Dynamics) 3
ChE 210 Material Science 4 MENG 270 Mechanics of Materials 3
MEP 261 Thermodynamics I 3 MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics 3
Total

Total 18

4
th
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MATH 204 Differential Equations 3 MEP 360 Heat Transfer 3
MENG 332 Manufacturing Technology 3 MENG 366 System Dynamics and Control 3
MENG 310 Machine Elements Design 3 MENG 410 Mechanical Design 3
MEP 361 Thermodynamics II 3 MENG 434 Material Removal Procedures 3
MENG 364 Machine Dynamics 3 MENG 470 Mechanical Vibrations 3
Total

Total 17

semester.
4
th
MENG 390 Summer Training 2 Cr. Hr.

4
th
MENG 400 Coop Work Program 8 Cr. Hr.

515

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MENG 412 Computer Aided Design 3 ISLS 401 Islamic Culture (4) 2
MEP 451
Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration I
3 MENG 436 Metrology & Quality Control 3
MENG xxx Elective Course (1) 3 MENG 452
Manufacturing Planning &
Shop Loading
3
MENG 499 Senior Project 4 MENG 472
Fault Diagnosis of Mechanical
Systems
2
MENG xxx Elective Course (2) 3
Total Total 13

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MENG 412 Computer Aided Design 3
MENG 436 Metrology & Quality Control 3
MEP 451
Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration I
3
MENG 452
Manufacturing Planning &
Shop Loading
3
MENG 499 Senior Project 4
MENG 472
Fault Diagnosis of Mechanical
Systems
2
Total
4
Total 16

516

COURSE DESCRIPTION

MENG 102 Engineering Drawings (3:1,4)
Introduction:Skillsoffreehandsketching.Methodsofprojection:orthographic,isometric.
Dimensioningofviews.Thirdviewprediction.Primaryandsuccessiveauxiliaryviews.Intersections
ofsurfacesandbodies.Developmentofsurfaces.Sectioning.Introductiontoassemblydrawings.
Steelsections.Standardsandconventions.ComputerAidedGraphicsusingSOLIDWORKcrafting
package.Applications.
Prerequisite: None

MENG 130 Basic Workshop (2:1,3)
Introduction:Skillsoffreehandsketching.Methodsofprojection:orthographic,isometric.
Dimensioningofviews.Thirdviewprediction.Primaryandsuccessiveauxiliaryviews.Intersections
ofsurfacesandbodies.Developmentofsurfaces.Sectioning.Introductiontoassemblydrawings.
Steelsections.Standardsandconventions.ComputerAidedGraphicsusingSOLIDWORKcrafting
package.Applications.
Prerequisite: MENG 102

MENG 204 Mechanical Engineering Drawings (3:1,4)
Introduction to CAD. Skills of using a drafting package. (AutoCAD).Types of assembly
and detail drawings. Representation of mechanical elements (bolted, welded and riveted
joints, shafts and keys, springs, gears). Geometrical and dimensional tolerances
Applications on assembly and working drawings (valves, presses, bearings, vices etc.).

MENG 262 Engineering Mechanics (Dynamics) (3:2,3)
Review of particle motion. Rotation and translation of a rigid body in the plane. General
plane motion. Displacement, velocity, and acceleration of rigid bodies, including Coriolis
motion. Equations of motion for a rigid body. Constrained plane motion. Work and energy.
Impulse and momentum.
Prerequisite: CE 201

MENG 270 Mechanics of Materials (3:2,3)
Types of loads and stresses. Mechanical behavior of materials. Shearing forces and bending
moment diagrams. Shearing stresses in beams. Stresses in compound bars. Bending stresses
and deflection. Torsion of bars. Principal stresses, and Mohr's circle. 3-Dimensional
stresses. Principal strains and Mohr's circles of strain. Stress-strain relations. Strain energy.
Yield criteria. Thin and thick cylinders, fatigue analysis. Lab work.(tension, bending,
hardness, fatigue, creep.)
Prerequisite: CE 201
MENG 310 Machine Elements Design (3:2,3)
517

Review of stress analysis (combined stress, bending). Buckling, failure theories, fatigue
failure. Materials in mechanical design and safety factors. Design of fasteners: riveted,
welded, bolted and fitted joints. Power screws, springs, ball bearing, sliding bearings,
power transmission gears, shafts, couplings, clutches, brakes, belts, chains and ropes.
Application on design projects.

MENG 332 Manufacturing Technology (3:2,3)
Introduction, Casting processes (solidification and melting, furnaces, expendable and
permanent mold casting). Bulk deformation processes (hot and cold forming processes,
workability and limits of forming).Sheet metal processes (formability of sheets and sheet
forming processes, processing of polymers). Metal powders and ceramics, welding
processes. Heat treatment of metals, Principles of metal cutting (machining processes,
types of chips, process sheet). Design of cutting tools such as single point tools, milling
cutters and broaches.
Prerequisite: MENG 130, ChE 210

MENG 364 Machine Dynamics (3:2,3)
Design of ordinary gear trains and analysis of epicyclic gear trains. Computer aided design
of disk cams. Grashof rules. Design of mechanisms in terms of transmission angle and time
ratio. Kinematics and force analysis of linkages and machinery with the aid of computers.
Flywheel design.
Prerequisite: MATH 205, MENG 262

MENG 366 System Dynamics and Control (3:2,3)
Introduction. Laplace transforms. Transfer function. Block diagrams. State space equations
of control systems. Mathematical modeling of dynamic systems: Mechanical, electrical,
electro-mechanical, liquid-level, thermal and pressure systems. Industrial automatic
controllers: basic control actions. Pneumatic and hydraulic controllers. Transient response
analysis: First and second order systems. Root locus analysis and design. Frequency
response analysis and design. Computer program applications.
Prerequisite: MENG 262, EE 251

MENG 390 Summer Training (3:2,3)
Prerequisite: MENG 332 and completing at least 125 credit units

518

MENG 400 Cooperative Work (8:0,0)
Prerequisite: MENG 332 and completing at least 125 credit units

MENG 408 Reverse Engineering (3:2,3)
Basic concepts, history, prescreening and preparation for the four stages process, stage 1:
evaluation and verification, stage 2: technical data generation, stage 3: design verification
and stage 4: project implementation.

MENG 410 Mechanical Design (3:2,3)
Introduction, design methodology (concept, alternatives, considerations, skills of
teamwork, reports, construction and detail drawings of machines). Comprehensive design
projects include: fixed and moveable joints, shafts, sliding and rolling bearings, gears,
couplings, clutches and brakes, belt drivers. Use of standards and technical manuals.
Application of computer programs. Applications on design of production facilities.
Prerequisite: MENG 204, MENG 310

MENG 412 Computer Aided Design (3:2,3)
Introduction to computer aided engineering environment. Solid modeling. Introduction to
Finite Element Method. CAD packages. Static linear analysis in one, two, and three
dimensions. Thermal systems analysis and design, introduction to non linear analysis.
Optimum design. Computer applications in mechanical design.

MENG 416 Materials Selection in Design & Manufacturing (3:2,3)
Product life cycle. Performance of materials in service (failure of materials under
mechanical loading, environmental degradation, selection of materials), effect of shape and
manufacturing processes. Cost-per-unit-property method. Weighed properties method.
Limits-on-properties method. Selection charts, computer-aided material and process
selection (material databases). Case studies.
519

MENG 418 Machine Tool Design (3:2,3)
Design and working principles of machine tool elements (Speed and feed of gear boxes.
spindle and spindle bearings, rigidity and strengthening of structures- frames, beds and
design of sideways against wear). Power sources and types of drives. Mechanisms design,
motion control and transmission systems in machine tools. Safety devices. Static and
dynamic acceptance tests for machine tools.

MENG 420 Introduction to Finite Element Methods (3:2,3)
Virtual formulation. Finite element analysis: shape formation, equilibrium conditions,
element classification, assembly of elements, modeling methodology. Structures and
elements: trusses, beams, 2-D solids, 3-D solids, axisymmetric solids, thin-walled
structures. Dynamic analysis. Heat transfer and thermal analysis.

MENG 422 Tribology (3:2,3)
Nature of solid surfaces. Interaction of solid surfaces. Friction of metals and non-metals
(mechanisms, theories, applications). Wear of metals and non-metals (types, mechanisms,
theories, applications). Lubrication (methods, types, theories, applications). Lubricants
(types, utilization) Selection of materials for tribological applications. Surface Engineering.

MENG 424 Design of Production Facilities (3:2,3)
Hoisting machinery: crane chains, sprockets, pulleys, drums, ropes, sheaves and hooks.
Gain in force and gain in speed systems. Wheels, rails, and drives. Jigs and fixtures:
specifications of jigs and fixtures, conventions in fixture design. Degrees of freedom,
location points, fixation point. Clamping devices, fool-proofing, Rigidity and wear
considerations.

MENG 428 Special Topics in Mechanical Systems Design (3:2,3)
Topics relevant to specialization of Mechanical Systems Design to strengthen students
knowledge in this field..

MENG 434 Material Removing Processes (3:2,3)
Fundamentals of cutting. Mechanics of chip formation. Cutting forces and power. Effect of
temperature on cutting. Tool life. Machinability: Metal removal rate, Cutting tool materials
and fluids. Machining processes: turning, thread cutting, boring, drilling, reaming, milling,
shaping and planning, broaching, gear cutting. Abrasives, grinding wheels, grinding
520

processes. Super finishing process: Lapping, honing. blasting and penning. Non-
conventional machining. Numerical control of machine tools. Design and working
principles of machine tool elements, (speed and feed of gear boxes, spindles and bearings).

MENG 436 Metrology and Quality Control (3:2,3)
Quality. Standardization and standards. Accuracy and precision. Sensitivity and
magnification systems. Errors, geometric tolerances. Surface texture. Interferometry and
laser applications. Inspection and limit gauging. Quality control and sampling techniques,
lot-acceptance, sampling plans, statistical control charts, quality assurance systems, total
quality management.

MENG 446 Advanced Manufacturing Technology (3:2,3)
Non-conventional machining: Principles, Ultrasonic machining, Electromechanical
Machining, Electro-discharge Machining, Plasma Arc Machining, Laser Beam Machining,
Electron Beam Machining. Numerical Control of Machine Tools: Automation of
Manufacturing Processes, Numerical Control, Coordinate systems, Types and components
of CNC systems, Programming for CNC, Adaptive control, Computer Integrated
Manufacturing.

MENG 448 Composite Materials (3:2,3)
Classification. Applications. Processing and fabrication of composites (metal-matrix,
ceramic-matrix, reinforced plastics, honeycomb materials, forming structural shapes).
Design Considerations. Laminate structures. Stress-strain characteristics of fiber-reinforced
materials. Lamination theory. Failure theories of fiber-reinforced materials.
Environmentally induced stresses in laminates.

MENG 450 Computer Aided Manufacturing (3:2,3)
This course covers fundamentals of computer aided manufacturing with special emphasis
on solid modeling, assembly and manufacturing using numerical control machining
systems. Heavy emphasis will be on proper use of commercial CAM systems to generate
optimized CNC tool path. Program generations will be reinforced with practical training in
CNC Lab. This course is very much a course for the engineer of the future!.

MENG 452 Manufacturing Planning and Shop Loading (3:2,3)
Productivity. Flow and handling of materials. Production methods and machine capacities.
Planning of manufacturing processes. Factory location decisions and plant layout, plant
521

layout problems. Scheduling, loading and project planning. Group technology (GT).
Classification and coding. Computer Aided Production Planning (CAPP). Computer-
integrated manufacturing systems.

MENG 454 Welding Technology (3:2,3)
Fusion welding. Weld ability. Selection of welding electrodes. Hot cracking. Cold
cracking. Welding metallurgy, heat affected zone. Welding of heat-treatable alloys.
Welding of dissimilar alloys. Destructive and nondestructive testing of welds. Weld
thermal cycles and residual stresses. Welding in manufacturing: pressure vessels, boilers
and ship building industries; welding in automotive maintenance. Welding codes.

MENG 458 Special Topic in Production Engineering (3:2,3)
Topics relevant to specialization of production engineering to strengthen student
knowledge

MENG 468 Plasticity & Metal Forming (3:2,3)
3- D State of Stress& Strain for Elastic Behavior, Yield criteria, Plastic stress- strain
relation. Plane stress and plane strain problems. Determination the flow equation from
experiments results. Theory of Plasticity. Applications: instability in thin vessels, thick
vessels subjected to internal pressure, and beam under pure bending. Analysis of metal
forming process and its techniques of analysis; energy method; slab method, upper bound
method. Classification of metal forming processes. Bulk deformation processes. Forging,
rolling, extrusion, and Rod and wire drawing

MENG 470 Mechanical Vibrations (3:2,3)
Free and damped vibration of single degree of freedom systems. Viscous damping. Forced
vibration. Resonance. Harmonic excitation. Rotating unbalance. Base motion. Vibration
isolation. Fourier analysis. Vibration measuring. General excitation. Step and impulse
response. Two degree of freedom systems. Frequencies and mode shapes. Modal analysis.
Undamped vibration absorber. Multidegree of freedom systems. Introduction to
Continuous systems, Applications with computer programs.
Prerequisite: MATH 204, MENG 364

MENG 472 Fault Diagnosis of Mech. Systems (2:2,1)
Review of vibration; Free vibration, Harmonically excited vibration, Fourier analysis.
Instruments; Transducers, FFT analyzer, Sampling and aliasing. Machine vibration
problems; Imbalance, Misalignment, Bearings, Gears, Fans, Belts. Vibration measuring
techniques and maintenance management. Sound; Basic properties of waves, Intensity,
Power level. Balancing; Static unbalance, Dynamic unbalance, Field balancing.
522


MENG 478 Mechanisms (3:2,3)
Analytical and computer techniques for kinematics and dynamic analysis of planar
linkages. Ordinary and planetary gear trains. Cam mechanisms. Inversion. Geared linkages.
Mechanisms with actuators. System response to dynamic inputs.

MENG 480 Introduction to Robotics (3:2,3)
Classifications. Forward kinematics: Orientation coordinate transformations, Configuration
coordinate transformations, Denavit-Hartenberg coordinate transformations. Inverse
kinematics for a planar robot, revolute robot and spherical robot. The 3-D case. Force and
torque relations. Trajectory planning. Coordinated motion. Lagrange equations. Inverse
dynamics.

MENG 482 Mechatronics (3:2,3)
Introduction, modeling and simulations: simulation and block diagrams. Ana1ogies.
Electrical and mechanical systems. Electro-mechanical coupling. Fluid systems. Sensors
and transducers. Actuating devices. DC, stepper and servomotors. Fluid power actuation.
Piezo electric actuators. Hardware components. Number systems. Binary logic systems
and control. Real time interfacing. Data acquisition and control systems. The I/O process.

MENG 488 Special Topics in Applied Mechanics (3:2,3)
Topics relevant to specialization of applied Mechanics to strengthen the students
knowledge in this field.

MENG 490 Strategic Management and Leadership Skills (3:2,3)
Understanding good leadership behaviors ,differences between leadership and manager
ship , preparation for strategic planning, setting strategic end point: developing /updating
Vision, Mission Statement, Values, gaining insight into your patterns, beliefs and rules,
strategic analysis, environmental scan(taking a wide look around), Looking at
Organizations SWOT , strategies to achieve the goals and Gantt charts, Balanced Score
Card (BSC), creative leadership skills using TRIZ, polishing Intrapersonal and
Interpersonal communication skills , applications on i-plan 2.0 software.

MENG 499 Senior Project (4:2,6)
523


524

DEPARTMENT OF THERMAL ENGINEERING

AND DESALINATION TECHNOLOGY
525

INTRODUCTION
The Department of Thermal Engineering and Desalination Technology is a discipline of the
Mechanical Engineering Department at King Abdulaziz University. The program started
on 23/3/1982 G (28/5/1402 H) to meet the Kingdom's growing needs for mechanical
engineers with broad background in the fields of power generation, sea water desalination,
air-conditioning, heat exchangers and other thermo-mechanical systems. These areas have
been emphasized in appreciation to their importance for the fast growing development of
the Kingdom and the neighboring Gulf States.

The department offers 5 years study program leading to Bachelor of Science degree (B.Sc.)
in Mechanical Engineering with Thermal Sciences Major. The program provides graduates
with strong basic engineering knowledge, professional skills, effective communication
proficiency, ability to work in teams and appreciation of the ethical, societal and global
issues required for engineers of the future.
To acquire and maintain a position of excellence in Mechanical Engineering Education.
To prepare distinctive quality students in mechanical engineering, able to apply the
acquired knowledge successfully with engineering professional ethics based on Islamic
values to serve the society, and pursue advanced studies.

Our Educational Objectives list as published in the Faculty of Engineering, Undergraduate
Bulletin 2007-2008 and posted on the Department web site (http://engg.kaau.edu.sa/mep/)
is as follows: Students after graduation are able to
PEO_1: Engage in productive careers in Mechanical Engineering with emphasis on thermal
and water desalination systems, or pursue postgraduate studies .

PEO_2: Advance in their careers through effective modeling, analysis, and design of
mechanical-thermal systems, responding to continuous developments in the field and the
needs of the society.

PEO_3: Practice professional engineering and contribute to the profession and to the
society through team work, effective communication and appreciation of ethical, societal,
environmental and economical issues.
The departmentoftheThermalEngineeringandDesalinationTechnologyhasmostofthe
necessary resources needed to implement the new plan, however, some improvements
and extra resources are needed to increase the ability of the department to
accommodate more students considering the increase in demand for thermal engineers
fortheexpandingindustriesintheKingdom.Futureplansshouldconsiderthefollowings:
34. ModernizationandupgradingoftheexistingthermofluidLabs.
526

35. ModernizationandupgradingoftheexistingairconditioningLab.
36. ModernizationandupgradingoftheexistingwaterdesalinationLabs.
37. ModernizationandupgradingoftheexistingheatengineandpowerplantLabs.
38. ModernizationandupgradingoftheexistingappliedthermalengineeringLabs.
39. Recruiting high professionals to operate and maintain the laboratory
equipments.
40. Recruiting a qualified faculty member specialized in desalination to
accommodatetheincreaseinthenumberofstudentsenrollingintheprogram.
41. Recruiting two qualified faculty members specialized in applied thermal
hydraulics to accommodate the increase in the number of students enrolling in
theprogram.
42. Recruiting two qualified faculty members specialized in thermal engineering to
accommodatetheincreaseinthenumberofstudentsenrollingintheprogram.
ItshouldbementionedherethatthenewplanoftheThermalEngineering&Desalination
Technologydepartmenthasmanystrengthswhichcanbesummarizedasfollows:
1) Awelldesignedsetofcorecoursestoprovidethenecessaryscientificbackground
andengineeringdesignexperience.
2) The specialized courses are fairly distributed among the three main areas of
interest in the Department (Power, Air Conditioning and Desalination). The
curriculum has the following compulsory courses to fulfill the local needs: one
courseinICEngines,onecourseinRefrigerationandAirConditioning,twocourses
inDesalination,onecourseinTurboMachines,onecourseinHeatExchangersand
onecourseinpumpsandhydraulics.
3) Emphasis is given in a balanced manner to the scientific side as well as to the
practicalsideofthefieldofinterest
4) The curriculum includes a slot (5 credit hours) for selected topics that can cover
anyrelatedsubjectofinteresttothestudents.
5) The Program includes courses, projects and field trips in addition to a summer
trainingperiod.
6) Thestudentsbeforetheirgraduationmustcompletea4creditseniorproject.The
studentunderthesupervisionofafacultymemberpreparesareportanddefends
itinthepresenceoftwofacultymembersandathirdmember,whoquiteoftenis
selectedfromtheindustry.
7) The curriculum also contains courses on economics and management to help the
studentsinunderstandingtheeconomicalimpactoftheirprofession.

Students Admissions into the Department Program
The actual policy of the Thermal Engineering & Desalination Technology department is to
accept, each semester, a fixed number of students (normally between 10 and 20) of the
highest GPA from those expressing their interest to join the department.
In order to qualify for a BS degree in Thermal Engineering & Desalination Technology,
students must successfully complete 155 semester credit hours with an overall GPA of 2.0
out of 5 or better. The student has to complete 49 required courses and two elective
527

courses with a grade of D or better including 10 weeks of Industrial Summer Training and
a Capstone B.Sc. design project as detailed in the MEP curriculum requirements.
Career opportunities for the Thermal Engineering and Desalination Technology graduates
vary. Graduates work for both the government and private sectors. The graduates are
generally employed by the following corporations and companies:
ARAMCO (Arabian-American Company)
SABIC
Saudi Arabian Airlines
Governmental Agencies, such as the Ministry of Petroleum and Minerals,
Ministry of Agriculture, Ministry of Industry and Ministry of Electricity and
Water, etc.
Chemical and Petroleum Industry
Automotive Industry
Power and Electricity Company
SWCC (Saline Water Conversion Corporation)
Land and Sea Transport and Shipping Companies
Foreign Companies in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (ABB, GE,
Unilever)
Other Industrial and Private Sectors

528

21. Thermal Engineering and Desalination Technology Department is referred to by
the code MEP
Key of tenth digit in the codes of MEP courses
0 N/A
1 General Mechanical Engineering
2 N/A
3 N/A
4 N/A
5 Measurements and electronic systems.
6 Basic Thermal and heat Systems.
7 Power Systems.
8 Desalination Systems.
9
Fluid Systems, training and research
courses.
UnitsrequiredfortheB.Sc.degreeintheProductionEngineeringandMechanicalSystemsDesign
Department
Summer Training 2
Total 155

Cooperative Program
529

Coop Program 8
Total 155

530

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
CE 201 Engineering Mechanics (statics) 3 IE 200, PHYS 281
EE 332 Computational Methods in Eng. 3 EE 201, MATH 204
MATH 241 Linear Algebra 3 MATH 202, MATH 203
MENG 262 Engineering Mechanics (Dynamics) 3 CE 201
MENG 310 Mach. Elements Design 3 IE 202, MENG 270
MENG 364 Machine Dynamics 3 MENG 262, MATH 205
MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics 3 MATH 202, PHYS 281
MEP 360 Heat Transfer 3 MEP261, MEP290, IE 202
MEP 361 Thermodynamics II 3 MEP 261, MEP 290
MEP 365 Thermal Eng Measurements 3
MEP261, MEP290,
EE251, IE 255
MEP 370 Internal Combustion Engines 3 MEP 361, ChE 210
MEP 390 Summer Training 2 MEP370
MEP 451 Refrigeration & A/C I 3 MEP 360, MEP 361
MEP 460 Design of Heat Exchangers 3
MEP 360, MEP 361, EE
332
MEP 473 Power Plants 3 MEP 360, MEP 361, IE 255
MEP 474 Turbo M/C & Gas Turbines 3 MEP 360, MEP 370
MEP 481 Thermal Desal. Processes 3 MEP 360, MEP 361
MEP 482 Membrane Desal. Processes 3 MEP 360, MEP 361
MEP 492 Pumps and Hydraulics 2 MEP 361, MEP 365
MEP 499 Senior Project 4
MEP360, MEP361,
MEP365, EE 332
Total 71

MEP 390 the summer training, 400 hours of on-job training distributed over 10 weeks
that is included in the counting of training units.

Coop students are required to take all of the above mentioned 25 courses except MEP 390
Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
MEP 400 Coop Work Program 8 MEP 370

531

Cr.
Hr.
Prerequisites
EE 202 Object-Oriented Computer Programming 3 EE201
IE 256 Engineering Management 2 IE 202
IE 331 Probability and Statistics 3 MATH203
MENG 332 Manufacturing Technology 3 MENG 130, ChE 210
MENG 410 Mechanical Design 3 MENG 204, MENG 310
MENG 470 Mechanical Vibrations 3 MATH 204, MENG 364
MENG 482 Mechatronics 3 MENG 366
MEP 392 Biofluid Mechanics 3 Instructor Approval
MEP 452 Refrigeration and A/C II 3 MEP 451
MEP 463 Modeling and Simulation of Thermal Systems. 3
EE 201, MEP 360, EE
332
MEP 464 Heat Transfer in Electrical Systems 3 MEP 360, EE 332
MEP 466 Control System Engineering 3
MEP 360, MEP 460 (Co-
req.)
MEP 471 Combustion and Pollution 3 MEP 361, MEP 370
MEP 472 Energy Conversion 3 MEP 361
MEP 476 Automotive Engineering 3 MEP 370
MEP 478 Renewable Energy 3 MEP 360, MEP 361
MEP 483 Desalination Plants 3 MEP 482
MEP 490 Applied Fluid Mechanics 3 MEP 290
MEP 493 Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) 3 MEP 360, EE 332
MEP 496 Applications in Thermal Eng. 2 Instructor approval
MEP 497 Selected Topics in Mech. Eng. 3 Instructor approval
XXX
Any course offered by the MEP department or
other departments in the Faculty of Engineering or
the University.
MEP 290, MEP 261

532

A TYPICAL B.Sc. PROGRAM FOR MEP DEPARTMENT
3
rd
5
th
Semester 6
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MEP 261 Thermodynamics I 3 ARAB 201 Arabic Language (2) 3
MATH 204 Differential Equations I 3 MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics 3
Eng. Mech.
(Dynamics)
3
ChE 210 Materials Science 4 MATH 205
Series and Vector
Calculus
3
ISLS 201 Islamic studies (2) 2 MATH 241 Linear Algebra 3
IE 202 Intro. Eng. Design II 2 IE 255
Engineering
Economics
3
Total

Total 18

4
th
7
th
Semester 8
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MEP 360 Heat Transfer 3 MEP 365
Thermal Eng
Measurements
3
MEP 361 Thermodynamics II 3 MEP 370 I. C. Engines 3
MENG 364 Machine Dynamics 3 MEP 451 Refrigeration & A/C I 3
MENG 270 Mechanics of Materials 3 MEP 481
Thermal Desal.
Processes
3
EE 251 Basic Electric Eng 4 EE 332 Comput. Meth. in Eng 3
ISLS 301 Islamic studies (3) 2 MENG 310 Mach. Elements Design 3
Total

Total 18

semester.
4
th
MEP 390 Summer Training 2 Cr. Hr.

4
th
MEP 400 Coop Work Program 8 Cr. Hr.

533

5
th
Year (Regular)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MEP 499 Senior Project 4 MEP 474 Turbo M/C & Gas Turbines 3
MEP 460
Design of Heat
Exchangers
3 MEP 473 Power Plants 3
MEP 492 Pumps and Hydraulics 2 MEP 482
Membrane Desal.
Processes
3
Elective 1 3 ISLS 401 Islamic studies (4) 2
Elective 2 3
Total Total 14

5
th
Year (Cooperative)
9
th
Semester 10
th
Semester
Cr.
Hr.
Cr.
Hr.
MEP 474 Turbo M/C & Gas Turbines 3
MEP 473 Power Plants 3
MEP 482
Membrane Desal.
Processes
3
MEP 460
Design of Heat
Exchangers
3
MEP 492 Pumps and Hydraulics 2
MEP 499 Senior Project 4
ISLS 401 Islamic studies (4) 2
Total
4
Total 16

534

COURSE DESCRIPTION

MEP 261 Thermodynamics I (3:3,1)
Conceptsanddefinitions,Propertiesofpuresubstances,Differentformsofenergy,Concepts
of Heat and work. First law of thermodynamics. Applications of first law on closed system
and control volume. Second law of thermodynamics. Entropy, isentropic efficiency. Some
powerandrefrigerationcycles(includingRankineCycle,vaporcompressioncycle,Ottocycle,
Dieselcycle,Braytoncycle).

MEP 290 Fluid Mechanics (3:3,1)
Concepts and definitions, Fluid statics. Forces on submerged surfaces and bodies. Non
viscousflow,conservationofmass,momentumandenergy.Bernoulliequation.Dimensional
analysis.ThePITheorem,similarity.Viscousflow,pipeflow,lossesinconduitflow.Laminar
andturbulentflow.

MEP 360 Heat Transfer (3:3,1)
Principles of Heat Transfer, steady state and transient conduction in different coordinates,
extendedsurfaces.Convectiveheattransfer.Analysisandempiricalrelationsforforcedand
natural convection. Radiation heat transfer, radiation exchange between black and gray
surfaces. Heat transfer applications (Heat Exchangers). Numerical methods in heat transfer
withcomputerapplications.
Prerequisite: MEP 261, MEP 290, IE 202

MEP 361 Thermodynamics II (3:3,1)
Irreversibility and availability. Thermodynamic relations. Mixtures and solutions. Chemical
reactions and combustion. Phase and Chemical equilibrium. Thermodynamics of
compressibleflow.
Prerequisite: MEP 261, MEP 290

MEP 365 Thermal Engineering Measurements (3:3,1)
IntroductionontheuseofcomputersintheLabErroranalysis.Temperaturemeasurement.
Pressure measurement. Flow measurement (mass flow rate, velocity, flow visualization).
Torque. Speed, power measurements. Introduction to Data Acquisition Systems.
Experiments for basic and comparative calibration of different instruments and their
applications.
Prerequisite: MEP 261, MEP 290, EE 251, IE 255

MEP 369 Power Plants for Electrical Engineers (3:3,1)
535

Steampowerplants:plantcomponentsandsubsystems.Plantefficiencycalculations,Diesel
and gas turbine power plant auxiliary systems. Load curves. Economy of power generation.
Experimentsonpowerplants.
Prerequisite: MEP 261

MEP 370 Internal Combustion Engines (3:3,1)
Spark ignition and compression ignition engine types, design and operating parameters;
thermo chemistry of fuelair mixture and thermodynamic models of working fluids and
enginecycles.Gasexchangeprocessesandvolumetricefficiency.Carburetorsandelectronic
fuel injection. Performance parameters. Combustion chamber design, and octane number.
Dieselfuelinjection,superchargingof4strokeand2strokeS.I.andC.I.engines.
Prerequisite: MEP 361, ChE 210

MEP 390 Summer Training (2:0,4)
400 hours (10weeks) of training in industry under the supervision of a faculty member.
Students havetosubmitareportabouthisachievements duringtraininginaddition toany
otherrequirementsasassignedbythedepartment.

MEP 392 Bio-Fluid Mechanics (3:3,1)
Introduction to thermodynamics: work and energy, specific heat and static pressure and
enthalpy,Laminarflowandturbulent,fluidsmotioninbody,propertiesofbloodandviscous
liquids, Heat transfer biological tissues, mathematical modeling of heat transfer in the
humanbody.
Prerequisite: Instructor Approval

MEP 400 Coop Work Program (8:0,16)
1000 hours (25weeks) of training in industry under the supervision of a faculty member.
Students havetosubmitareportabouthisachievements duringtraininginaddition toany
otherrequirementsasassignedbythedepartment..

MEP 451 Refrigeration & Air Conditioning (3:3,1)
Review of basic thermodynamics, vapor compression cycles, multistage and cascade vapor
compression refrigeration. Refrigerants and their characteristics. Basic vapor compression
equipment, Introduction to absorption refrigeration. Psychrometry and psychrometric
processes. Human comfort. Heat gainthrough walls and fenestrations. Cooling load
calculations.Calculationusingsoftwarepackages.

MEP 452 Refrigeration & Air Conditioning II (3:3,1)
536

Cascade V.C. cycle, Gaseous air refrigeration cycles. Absorption refrigeration systems.
Thermoelectric cooling. Cold storage and applications. Refrigeration control systems, Air
distribution systems (duct design).Air conditioning systems and their representation on
psychometricchart.Airconditioningcontrol.Airconditioningequipment.

MEP 460 Design of Heat Exchangers (3:3,1)
Classification of Heat Exchangers, Design Correlations and Fouling, Basic Thermal Design
Methods and Iterative Techniques, DoublePipe Heat Exchangers, Shellandtube Heat
Exchangers, Compact Heat Exchangers, Other Heat Exchangers, Correlations for TwoPhase
Flow,CondensersandEvaporators.
Prerequisite: MEP 360, MEP 361, EE 332

MEP 463 Modeling and Simulation of Thermal Systems (3:3,1)
Basic considerations and types of modeling, Numerical modeling and simulation of thermal
systems,Optimizationandsearchtechniques,Examplesandapplicationsusingcomputer.
Prerequisite: MEP 360, EE 332

MEP 464 Heat Transfer in Electrical Systems (3:3,1)
Introduction.PackagingandThermalManagementTrends.InterfaceResistance.Conduction
in Fins and Heat Sinks. Forced Convection. Fan Selection. Natural Convection, Passive
ImmersionCooling,HeatPipes.VaporCompressionRefrigeration.ThermoelectricCoolers.

MEP 466 Control System Engineering (3:3,1)
Control and dynamic system. Laplace transforms and transfer function. Basic control
systems. Dynamic thermal systems. Control system components, System simulation,
Simulation error analysis, Stability analysis, Transient and frequency domain methods,
Control system design by the root locus method, Application for thermal system control,
computerapplications.
Prerequisite: MEP 360, MEP 460 (Co-req.)

MEP 471 Combustion and Pollution (3:3,1)
Liquid fuels: chemical composition and reaction, properties and tests. Combustion theory.
Laminar and turbulent flames. Combustion in C.I. and S.I. engines. Combustion in furnace.
Furnaces design. Pollutant formation and control for NOx. CO and VHC; and particulate
emissions.

MEP 472 Energy Conversion (3:3,1)
Review of indirect energy conversion systems, (ICE, gas turbine engines, steam pp): energy
storage; thermoelectric; photovoltaic; magneto hydrodynamic gen.; fuel cells; other energy
537

conversionsystems.

MEP 473 Power Plants (3:3,1)
Energy demand and power generation systems. Steam and gas power cycles. Fuels and
combustion. Basic and auxiliary systems of a steam p.p. Steam generator analysis. Steam
turbines and their controls. Diesel engine and gas turbine power plants. Overall plant
performance.Economicsofpowerplants.
Prerequisite: MEP 360, MEP 361, IE 255

MEP 474 Turbo-machinery and Gas turbines (3:3,1)
Fluidmechanicsandenergytransferinturbomachines,Centrifugalandaxialcompressors.
Centrifugalandaxialflowturbines.Applications,includingindustrialgasturbineenginesand
aircraftengines.

MEP 476 Automotive Engineering (3:3,1)
Alternativeprimemoversandelectricvehicles;SparkignitionengineandDieselenginefuel
economy.Transmissionsystem;Vehicleaerodynamics;Vehicledesign;casestudies.

MEP 478 Renewable Energy (3:3,1)
Review of heat transfer, solar angles, and solar radiation on earths surface. Solar radiation
on tilted surfaces. Radiation measurements. Solar collectors and concentrators, storage,
photovoltaic,windenergy,geothermalenergy.Otherrenewableenergysources.

MEP 481 Thermal Desalination Processes (3:3,1)
Electrolytic solutions, collegative properties, chemical treatment, venting. Multiple effect
systems (MED), Multistageflashing systems (MSF), Vapor compression systems VC, Dual
purposeplants(DPP),introductiontocorrosion,Computerapplications..

MEP 482 Membrane Desalination Processes (3:3,1)
Intake, pumping, Filtration, ion exchange, pretreatment, Membranes, Membrane
technology, Reverse Osmosis systems (RO), principles, system design, RO membranes
characteristics. Electrodialysis (ED), Other membrane processes, introduction to fouling,
Computerapplications.

MEP 483 Desalination Plants (3:3,1)
538

Comparison of different desalination systems. Development of desalination processes,
characteristics of varies systems. System design and selection, intake and disposal, water
pretreatment, post treatment processes, corrosion and material selection. Desalination
systemeconomy.

MEP 490 Applied Fluid Mechanics (3:3,1)
Differentialformsofthegoverningequationsforfluidflow.Inviscidflow,compressibleflow,
boundary layer flow. Flow machines, Flow in pipe networks with applications using
computercodes.

MEP 492 Pumps and Hydraulics (3:3,1)
Pumps, Pumps types, Pump components, Pumps characteristics Curves. Systems Curves.
PumpsSelections,Pumpsconnections:seriesandparallel.Hydraulicscycles.Designproject.

MEP 493 Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) (3:3,1)
Introduction to CFD, Navier Stokes and Energy Equations, Partial Differential Equations
(PDE's), Basics Of numerical methods for solving PDE's, Finite difference Methods for
Hyperbolic,Parabolic,andEllipticPDE's,FiniteVolumeMethods,NumericalGridGeneration,
AppliedCFDusingaCommercialPackage.

MEP 496 Applications in Thermal Eng. (2:2,1)
Thecontentsaredirectedtoaparticularapplicationinthefieldofthermalengineeringand
preparedbythedepartment.

MEP 497 Selected Topics in Mech. Eng. (3:3,1)
ThecontentofthiscoursewillbepreparedeachyearbytheThermalEng.andDesalination.
Tech.Dept.

MEP 499 Senior Project (4:2,4)
Selection of topic; literature review; project design planning arranging for data collection
andexperimentalwork,Interimreport,Experimentalworkanddatacollectionorfieldstudy
(if any) Data processing Analysis and results. Preparation of the first draft of final report.
Presentationoftheproject,Finalreport..
Prerequisite: MEP360, MEP361, MEP365, EE 332

539

Mechanical Engineering - Course Curriculum

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical Engineering - Course Curriculum

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical Engineering - Course Curriculum

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main departments and programs offered by the Faculty of Engineering?

What are the vision and mission of the Faculty of Engineering?

1

INTRODUCTION TO THE FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

s second law of diffusion

Sub major Requirements

Specialization of Biomedical Engineering Requirements

A TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

ADMISSION AND GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS

DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND

DEPARTMENT OF THERMAL ENGINEERING

You might also like